■r 


t v - *7 ' • 

In i * -4 ' i 

1 ♦ t yJt 

*. jf 4 / * > 




« If* , 


, u \\sw 

. . 4 +x<i \\ 4i 
: 

, * i ' i '* V 

* ,r.' 

« : / V v ! v • 
v‘ - <*./'** • 
r \4 ? £fsr 4 

* • i * j • ^ • 

• / 1 * k t a 

f i -4- 

* 4 \ «* • > 

; « ;• <i /.I < 

vrttsSj 

4 i « I 

•I • * • -V « 

r -ti n \ i 

• . t h • r i 
r t - Sf v. . 

SjTiT*- » 

i ; j i 

I • < .* ‘ 

• * jr y> i 'V -♦ 

V irW’-f- 

i* j“yf 

• uii ' i' 

I 4 I O I ^ 

t' 

' 1 1 i * f \ i 
’ H 4^ i % 

■v f 

* p ' g 

i • > r 

♦ • I . « 

./ < V f ,il .?* 

> * 4 .? 4 . > 

I I V 

.« 1 . » i » .It * 

. 

V J .1 • * 1? 

• ‘ • > « 

ill t 

yT ;, 1 ./ • 

. ■>».'.! 

I 1 .1 ' i 

* * v ’ V * 

V 4 . :' n 

* ■ 


vf r k / 

. v * r 4 . 
r 1 = 4"-# .f 

« . 4 

i ;V { % : 1 
f 4 i - 

’ . ' . V • 

‘ 2 i‘ ' . * 

i *• “? U L g 

%;* r* v' ^ 
rarl f *r 

.% * *. 4 •, 

• » . 4 




f ■ 

,1 < I . » '* * 


l«<d« » ji i 




a 4 ji'J 


rT.^-’fTT ^ ^ *• 4 

» 1 If 

'« /• .t 

4 t . f * i t / , 

I 4 V 4 ^ f * i l 





tf i r 

( 


<i < 


1 

# V * 


4 *• 


% 

•* 4 

* 


v v r * - * 


l 1 * • »• ' - 
*Ti| ^ 4* i « 


M > • i> • ^ / 


» . * -T • 


« * • 4 

aMi’ifl 

i 'i I.i 

5t.'l ; : I. 5, 


* ♦ IM > » 


| ;‘4 

*i » J 

l-' £ 


i a \ tj \ .■» \ t Hi'**! 

>* • « •: I - • " •' ’• 

I ^ 

4 « I % » i» » * « 

’ > • ’ • * 


t | * i m * r ft « i.*‘ r *• 

■ > • i ♦ ' til A • V « in 1 * • . ^ .-1 I 

/ ' 1 -* ♦ t - • '*% V « If i« % . « 

* •» I * t \ •: i t \ t i h ; i- « % • k 

4 * l* * . 4 t - ! 

• « ^ 2*V) tM i‘1 *»» 

' i i * i i 

& 4 4 • 1. I # » Miv » -1* 4 -4 .* >i • r\ i 


r f i % ^ ' • » I v i > a - 

& ^ • m ' «• > <NV -v » 4 * 1 n f 

• I V % \ « f ,» ' 

JV* * n ) -X. r •¥ * -ti v ^ f ^51 1 -*t * *f< .■ 


- I 4 • v « • 

•* » r | >« .» » t \ - \ jsj y ’ 

*• r - • -?4 *. 1 * 4 .* r.v 

1 - ' --• » % ■* I » - » -! 

4 t • * » ^ S, 

f V4% - .* 4 « •J.-l. 

R4#5 1 a j .ii f - ’ 

! • v • * • • % ^ * • i 

[ g .i 1 ' » i.' i -A ‘ ' J 

^ • # * «> • >* -i 1 .’.? , '*t: i 

i 1 f a r 4 u * » » .» » .s ♦ 

; < / ' * • ■» '-* 1 -4 « *4 

1 * '.I ' 4 t ~ 4 - • V ♦ — | 

n 4 J •** % * - 4 *. g- 

> .» * X J& 4 4»' r ^ i. i -cj T 









































d*. 



■ v * j * sfefc '» ■*. a * aWa. "= **- d * v 










'°" l '‘ d .»««,%'•*'' A 

c,° » ^. % O o & A 


A' 

■a O t* 


o° v * c 


o ' 




:**>' c ° 
\i * J F 







/> * T. 


O 

V 3 ^ 

O' 0 ° ^ ^ 

• i 

yj*&£' ' v v '*.’*«/ -c 

° ' v - - ■ “ ‘W-’- '"' 




* 3 M 0 ■ 


A 












V * 







I S\SmS> G°* .‘’JL* ♦- °oi 





o r 


aO* 

8 I A v 

% <V t s 
a r * 

<<v j\ 










ff , V' * * * 0 * "c 


^ A x 

y^<sr 


^Cr -o 

*^J •.X ' 


.$ <pp, 

^ yy*,S 

; ^ o ' 1 i- 

° °<* -, 

«} c- aO 

.<fc V w * 

^ «,* 








0 1 


0 * .X 


*■%* ^*- 

* 4 ,* v *+. 



9 V 4 s S * * ; 



*0 ^ 

v" rxO 

^ * 9 1 1 S • * , n« 

* x V x jafcCWW <* 



0? c 0 ' « * *b. S 








: S \ /•' 

N a '*« ^ " “ • ‘ * 0 *° c • ** « / \1 

*P ' 9^ * 4 , «J£Ts\ Vk^Jfc ^ 

•e-o» 






V v 





•* S \A^ .v** % , 0 " X \o^c° N c * ^ * 

* "%. 0 < «bv* x “ 

*.:**., >•'/' %>^>v ’ . . ,%.> !?* V 

0 *<*•*. 7 C U A 0 - „ ' 1 /J -» 









^ A v 
V V 


/* 8 I 

■. ft s . V V a- . 4 k « A 


•X, 0 


■4 . ^» V 






^ V 


V • ^ 


<D ** , 1 s .<\ 




0 « v. 


























































































































































































































































































ROUND 7 
THE WORLD 


W. H. G. KINGSTON, 


Author or “ THE MIDSHIPMAN,’* “ MARK: 
SEAWORTH,” Etc. 


NEW YORK 


sascaa^sw 


+ To I\N • W * I, ovg )U L • ConPANY^ 

■ - * *-"' ■■ 14. £. 1 £ S/FSFY 3TRE1 




flWITWWWJPPSFteS^SnErSSEII'SwMwrTSSS 







LOVELL’S LIBRARY -CATALOGUE. 

1. Hyperion, LongfellbV JJO 
; 2. Outre-Mer, do .20 

3. 'Tire Happy Boy, Bj5rn- 

• ■ son .10 

,4. Arne, byBjornson ... .10 

5. Frankenstein, Shelley. .10 

6 . Last of the Mohicans. .20 
. 7 . Clytie, Joseph Hatton. ;20 

B TheMooastofie, 'Part I ,30 
0. The -Moonstone, Part IX . TO 
1,0. Oliver Twist, Dickens;, .20; 
. ,30. Coming Rac&, Lytton. •..id 
12. Leila, by LordLytton. ;T(T 
1.3, The Three Spaniards.. .20 
14. The Tricks of the 
Greeks Unveiled .... .20 
; " 15, L’Abbe Constantin. . ." .20 
16. Freckles, byRedcliff. .20 
3,7. The Dark Colleen, Jay .20 
j. 38. They were Married!.. .10 
f 19. Seekers after God .20 

20. The Spanish Nun 10 

21 . Green Mountain Boys .20 

22. Fleurette, Scribe .20 

23. Second Thoughts .20 

24. The New Magdalen. .. .20 

25. Divorce, Margaret Lee .20 

26. Life of Washington.. . .20 

27. Spciai Etiquette. .... . f .15 

28. Single Heart and Dou- 
ble Face, Chas. Reade .10 

29. Irene, by Carl Detlef. . .20 

30. Vice Versa, F. Anstey .20 

31. Ernest Mai tra vers .20 

32. The Haunted House. .10 

33. John Halifax, Mulock .20 

34. 800 Leagues on .the 

Amazon, by Verne., .10 

35. The Cryptogram 10 

36.. . Life of Marion 20 

37. Paul and Virginia 10 

38. Tale of Two Cities 20 

39. The Hermits, Kingsley .20 

40. An Adventure in 

. • Thule, and Marriage 

of M. Fergus, Black... 10 
4.1, Marriage in High Life. .20 

42. ' Robin, by Mrs? Pat?"' 120 

43. Two on a Tower 20 

44. Rasselas. Dr. Johnson .10 

45. Alice; or. Mysteries.. .20 

46. Duke of Kandos 20 

47 -. Baron Munchausen... .10 • 

48. A Princess of Thule. . . .20 

49. The Secret Despatch.. .20 

50. Early Days of Chris- 

tianity ^ 20 

Do., Part II. ... » 20 

51. Vicar of Wakefield... .10 

52. Progress and Poverty. .20 

53. The Spy, by Cooper. . .20 

64, East Lynne, Mrs Wood .20 

65. A Strange Story 20 

56. Adam Bede, Eliot.Plt I .15 

Do, Part II 35 

57. The Golden Shaft. .... .20 

58. Portia, by The Duchess .20 

59 . Last Daytrof Pompeii, .20 

60. The Two Duchesfces... .20 

61. Tom Brown’s School 

Days . — .20 

62. The V ooing O’t, P,t I .1.5 
The Wooing O’t, P’t II .15 

63. The Vendeta, Balzac. .20 

64. Hypatia, by Kingsley, .15 

Do., Part II 15 

65; Selena, by Mrs. Smith. .15 
66 . Margaret and her 
Bridesmaids. ....... .20 

C-7, Horse Shoe Iiobinsop .15 

Do., Part II .15 

• 68 .' Gulliver’s Travels. .1. .20 

69. Amos Batton, by Eliot .10 

70. The Berber,' by Mayo .20 
•71. Silas Marner, by Eliot .10 

72. Queen of the County . . 20 

73. Life of Cromwell, Hood. 15 

74. Jane Eyre, by Bronte. .20 

75. Child’s Hist. England. <20 

76. Molly Bawn, Duchess .20 

77. Pillone, by BergsOe.. .' .15 

78. Phyllis, The Duchess.- .2)0 

79. Romola, Eliot, Par; I. ,15 
Romola, Eliot, Part II .15 

80. Science in Short Chap- 

ters .20 

81. Zanoni, by Lytton . ... £20 

82. A Daughter of Heth... ,20 
'83'. The Right and Wrong 

Uses of. the Bible. . ; . .20 

84. Night and Morning... .15 

Do.,PartII .15 

85. Shandon Bells, Black. .20 

86 . Monica, The Duchess. .10 

87. Heart and Science 20 

88 . Tne Golden Calf 20 

89. The Dean’s Daughter. .20 

90. Mrs. Geoffrey, Duchess .20 

91. Pickwick Papers, P’t I .20 

Do., Part II 20 

92. Airy, Fairy Lilian 20 

93. Macleod of Dare. . . 1 . . .20 

94. Tempest Tossed. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

95. Letters from High Lat- 

itudes. Earl DufEerin .20 
96: Gideon Ffevce. r: 20 

97. India and Ceylou 20 

98. The Gypsy Queen, .20 

99. The Admiral’s Ward. . .20 

100. Nimport, Bynner, P’t 1 .15 

Nimport, Part II 15 

101. Harry Holbrooke 20 

102. Tritons, Bynner, P'tl. .15 

Tritons, Part II 15 

103. LetNoth’g You Dismay . 10 

104. Lady Audley’s Secret. 20 

105. Woman’s Plac.e.T 6 -day .20 

106. Dunallaiu by Kennedy .15 

Do., Part 11. 15 

107. Housekeeping and 

.Homemaking .15 

108. No New Thing, Norris .20 

109. Spoopendyke Papers. .20 

110. False Hopes 15 

111. Labor and Capital 20 

112 . Wanda, Duida, Parti. .15 

Wanda, Part II 15 

113. More Words 

the Bible 

114. Monsien-'Lecoq, 
Monsieur Lecoq, 

115. Outline of Irish 

116. The Lerouge Cas 

117. Paul Clifford, Lj 

118. A New Lease of 
U9. Bourbon Lilies,. 

120. Othe^ People’s i: 

121 . The Lady of I 

122. Ameline du . Bor 

123. A Sea Queen,' Re 
324. The Ladies Lind 

125. Haunted Hearts, 

126. Loys, Lord Beres 

127. Under Two Fiagi 
Do. (Ouida), Par 

128. Money, Lord Lyt 

129. In Peril of his Li 1 

130. India; What Cf 

Teach Us? M. N 

131. Jets and Flashes. 

132. Moonshiue and. 

- guerites 

133. Mr. Sc arbor 01 

Family 

Do., Part II 

134. Arden, Mary Robi 

135. Tower of Percent 

136. Yolande, Wm. Bi 

137. Cruel London, H, 

138. The Gilded Cliqn 

139. Pike County Foil 

140. Criqket on the H< 
341. Henry Esmond. 1 . 

142. Strange Ad ventui 

a Phaeton 

143. Denis Duval, Tb 

eray 

144. Old Curiosity J 

Do., Part II 

145. Ivauhoe, Scott, F 
Do., Part 11 ... ... 

346. White Wings, B1 

147. The Sketch Book 

148. Catherine, Thacl 

149. Janet’s Repentan 

150. Barnaby Rudge, ; 
Barnaby Rudge, ] 

151. Felix Holt, by El. 

152. Richelieu, by Lyt 

153. Sunrise, Black, P 

Do , Part II 

154. Tour of the Worl 

Eighty Days, V 1 

155. Mystery of Orciv: 

156. Lovel, the Widow 

157. Romantic Advent 

of a Milkmaid. H; 

158. David Copperfield 
Do., Part II...... 

159. Charlotte Temple 

160. Rienzi, Lytton, Pi 

Do., Part II 

161. Promise of Marri 

162. Faith and Unfait 

163. The Happy Man . . 

164. Bgrry Lyndon.... 


ROUND THE WORLD. 


A TALE. 


U 


BY 

WILLIAM H. G. KINGSTON, Esq., 

M 

CiF “ PETER THE WHALER,” u THE MIDSHIPMAN MARMADUKE MERET* 
“SALT WATER,” “MARK SEAWORTU,” ETC. 




l: 



NEW YORK: 


JOHN W. LOVELL COMPANY, 

14 and 16 Vesey Street. 



CONTENTS 


CilRp. 

1 . 

n. 

r~ 

m. 

IV. 

v. 

VI. 

VII. 

mi. 

IX. 

X 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII. 

XIV. 
XV. 

XVI 

XVII 

0m; 

XIX. 

xx. 


Page 


My Home, and How I Left it, ...... g 

Voyage Commenced, 22 

The Wonders of the Ocean, ....... 42 

Adventures in the Falklands, 68 

Our Boat Adventure among the Falhlanbb, ... 92 

Rounding Cape Horn, 114 

Adventures in Chili, < . ( ^ . , 135 

Robinson Crusoe’s Island, ... , 161 

Visit to tee Empire of the Inoas, . /82 

Adventures in Mexico, ........ 90? 

Californian Experiences, ........ 223 

Excursion in Hawaii, ... . . . . . . 251 

Captured by Pirates, 

Voyage in the Pirate Vessel, . . . . • 291 

Our Perilous Voyage, ........ 312 

Our Residence on th?: Island, ...... 335 

A Voyage in a South Sea Canoe, . . . e ' . .857 

Voyage in a Whaler — Further Adventures, . . . 878 

Our Escape from t£« Island, ....... 898 

Our Voyage to Japan, ........ 420 






v 


/ 





ROUND THE WORLD. 

* 


CHAPTER I. 

MT HOME, AND HOW I LEFT IT. 

The day arrived. A post-chaise stood in front of 
the old gray manor-house. I have it all before me. 
The pointed gables — the high-pitched, dark, weather- 
stained roof — the numberless latticed windows — the 
moat, now dry, which had once served to keep out a 
body of Cromwell’s horse — the tall elms, which had 
nestled many a generation of rooks — the clump of 
beech-trees, and the venerable wide-spreading oak — 
the broad gravelled court on one side, and the velvety 
lawn on the other, sloping away down to the fine, large, 
deep fish-pond, whose waters, on which I had obtained 
my first nautical experiences, as seen through the green 
foliage, were sparkling brighter than ever under the 
deep blue of the summer sky. 

At the hall door were assembled all those I loved on 
earth, — and dearly, too, I loved them. My mother, 
as good and kind a mother as ever nursed a somewhat 
numerous and noisy progeny; my sisters, dear, sweet, 
good girls ; and half a dozen brothers, honest, generous, 
capital fellows ; our father, too — such a father ! — we 
l * (6) 


6 ' THE DEAR OLD HOME. 

always agreed that no one could come up to him, 
Other fellows might have very good fathers, but they 
were not equal to him ! He could be just like one ol 
us at cricket, or out fishing, or shooting, and yet he w T as 
always right, and there w T as not a finer looking gentle- 
man in the county, and that every one said. We were 
all at home for the Midsummer holidays — that is to 
say, we boys ; our mother was not a person to let her 
girls go to school. Who could say that we were not 
met for the last time in our lives ? 

I was the third of the boys. Two of our sisters 
were older than any of us. I loved them, and they all 
loved me. Not that we ever talked about that ; I knew 
it and felt it, and yet I was going to leave them by my 
own express wish. 

I was not what is called a studious boy. I was fond 
of reading, and I read all the books of voyages and 
travels I could lay hands on, and before long began to 
wish to go and see with my own eyes what I had read 
about. My brothers were fond of shooting, and fishing, 
and rowing, and so was I ; but I thought shooting 
tigers, and lions, and elephants, and fishing for whales, 
and sailing over the salt ocean, would be much grander 
work than killing partridges, catching perch, or rowing 
about our pond in a punt. I do not know that my 
imaginings and wishes, ardent as they grew, would ever 
have produced any definite form of action, had not an 
old schoolfellow of our father’s, called Captain F rank- 
land, about a year before the day I speak of, come to 
our house. As soon as I knew he was coming, I was 
very eager to see him, for I heard our father tell our 
mother that there was scarcely a part of the world he 
had not visited, and that he was looked upon as a first* 


THE SEA-CAPTAIN. 


rate navigator, and a most scientific wseamun. He had 
been in the navy during the war-time, but peace came 
before he was made a lieutenant ; and believing that he 
should not there find sufficient employment for hia 
energies, he had quitted it and entered the merchant 
Service. While in command of a whaler, he had been 
far towards the north pole. He had traversed the 
Antarctic seas, and had often visited India and China, 
and the islands of the Pacific. Still, as money-making 
or idleness had never been his aim, and his strength 
was unabated, he kept at sea when many men would 
have sought for rest on shore. Such was the account 
my father gave of him. 

How eagerly I waited for his coming! He had 
chosen the holidays on purpose that he might see our 
father’s young tribe, he wrote him word. He was the 
very sort of person I longed to talk to ; still it was with 
no little awe that I thought of actually breakfasting, 
and dining, and speaking day after day with one who 
had seen so much of the world, and met with so many 
adventures. At last he arrived. I was not disap- 
pointed in his appearance. He was a tall, thin, spare 
man, all bone and muscle. His hair was almost white, 
and his features, which were not a little weather-beaten, 
had, I thought, a most pleasant expression. While, 
however, my brothers ran eagerly forward to meet him, 
I hung back, watching him at a distance, like a bashful 
child. Had he been one of England’s greatest heroes, 
I could not have looked at him with greater respect. 
“And that is the man,” I thought, “who has sailed 
over thousands and thousands of miFes of water, and 
has seen Indians dressed in feathers and shells, and 
negroes running wild in their native woods, and Hot- 


8 WILL YOU GO TO SEA? 

tentots, and Esquimaux, and Chinese, and I do not 
know what other strange people f” I saw my father 
look round for me, so at last I went forward in time to 
be presented in my turn with the rest of my brothers. 
Yery soon the feeling of awe wore off, and I became the 
most constant of his attendants wherever he wished to 
go. With the greatest eagerness I used to listen to the 
accounts he gave our father of his various adventures 
in the distant countries he had visited. My brothers 
listened also; but while they would at length betake 
themselves to other occupations, I remained his ever- 
attentive auditor. The interest I exhibited in what he 
was saying attracted his attention, and much pleased 
him, so that when I ventured to ask him questions, he 
both answered them willingly and encouraged me to 
ask more. Thus we before long became very great N 
friends. v 

“ Should you like to go to sea, Harry ? ” said he to 
me one day, when he had begun to talk of taking his 
departure. 

“ With you, sir, indeed I should ; there’s nothing in 
the world I should like so much,” I answered. The 
tone of my voice and the expression of my countenance 
showed him how much I was in earnest. 

“ Very well, my boy. You are rather young just yet 
to rough it at sea, and you will be the better for another 
year’s schooling ; but when I come back from my next 
voyage, if you are in the same mind, and your father is 
willing to let you go, I will take you to sea with me. 
I’ll talk to him about it if I have an opportunity.” 

“ Thank you, sir — thank you ! ” I exclaimed, almost 
choking with the vehemence of my feelings ; “ it is what 
I have been longing for above all things. Do, pray, 


. / 

l 


THE OFFER ACCEPTED. 


9 


tell my father, or he may suppose it is only a passing 
fancy of mine, and may wish me to go into some other 
profession. Still, he’ll let me go with you — I know he 
will.” 

Captain Frankland smiled at my eagerness, but he 
said not a word to dissuade me from my wish. Perhaps 
he remembered his own feelings at my age. Grown 
up people are apt to forget how they thought jand felt 
when they were boys, which is the reason so few men 
win the confidence of the young and manage them prop- 
erly. The captain, on the contrary, seemed to under- 
stand me thoroughly, and thus gained a complete influ- 
ence over me. . 

“ I’ll be ready to go when you come back,” I added. 

“ Don’t be too sure of yourself, Harry,” he answered. 
u I’ve seen many people completely change their opin- 
ions in a year’s time, and I shall not be absent less than 
that. If you remain constant to your wish, remember 
my promise ; but if your fancy changes, you are free 
to follow it as far as I am concerned.” 

I thanked Captain Frankland over and over again 
for his kindness, and certainly did not' think that there 
was a possibility of my changing my inclinations. So 
he went away, much to my regret, and I fancied that 
he had not mentioned our conversation to my father. 
We all returned to school, except our eldest brother, 
who went to college. I no longer enjoyed school as I 
once did — I was looked upoii as having become very 
idle. My mind, however, was not idle, I know, for I 
was continually thinking over the idea which had got 
possession of it. By allowing my thoughts to rest on 
that idea, and that alone, the desire increased till I per- 
suaded myself that the only life I could possibly lead 


10 


THOUGHTS OF A LIFE AT SEA. 


with satisfaction was that of a life at sea. All this time 
the curious thing was, that of the sea itself I practically 
knew nothing. Born and bred in an inland county, my 
eyes had actually never rested on the wide ocean. Still, 
I had formed- a notion of what it was like, and I fan- 
cied that a sailor was always wandering about from one 
wild country to another, and going through a rapid suc- 
cession of wonderful adventures. I forgot all about 
those long voyages when ships are weeks and weeks 
together out of sight of land, and the many weary and 
often anxious hours which a seaman has to pass away ; 
nor did I consider that he has frequently the same 
voyage to make over and over again, the same lands to 
visit, and the same people to see. However, though I 
looked with no little pleasure on the idea of becoming a 
sailor, I had still greater satisfaction in the anticipation 
of visiting strange and far distant lands, in meeting with 
adventures, and in becoming acquainted with the various 
tribes of the human race. 

With the absorbing passion which now possessed me 
ruling every thought, I could no longer properly fix my 
attention on my Latin and Greek books and usual school 
lessons ; and as for nonsense, and even sense verses, I 
abandoned all attempts at making them. I am ashamed 
to say that I allowed others to do the work which passed 
as mine ; and even though I managed to present the 
required written exercises, I was constantly in richly- 
deserved disgrace for the neglect of those tasks which 
no one else could perform for me. I was decidedly 
wrong ; I ought to have had the right feeling and man- 
liness to perform to the best of my powder those lessons 
which it was the master’s duty to set me, and then X 
might with a clear conscience have indulged freely in 


MY LAST HOLIDAYS. 


- 11 

my own peculiar tastes. As it was, when the Christmas 
holidays arrived, I was sent home with a letter from the 
master containing severe complaints of my inattention - 
and negligence of my duties, while my brothers were 
complimented on the progress they had made in their 
studies. The master told me he should write, but our 
father received us all in the same affectionate way ; and 
as he said nothing on the matter, I hoped that he was 
not going to take notice of it. 

r> o 

The first few joyous days of getting home had passed 
over, and 'New-Year’s Day come and gone, before he 
broached the subject. From his love and kind heart, 
he would not before mar my boyish happiness. He 
then, summoning me into his study, spoke seriously to 
me about my past conduct. I frankly owned my fault, 
and confessed to him the true cause of my idleness 
From his answer I found, to my very great satisfaction, 
that Captain Frankland had already talked to him about 
my wish to go to sea, and had expressed his readiness 
to take me. 

“ I cannot, however, allow you, my dear Harry, to 
leave school under the present circumstances,” said my 
father. “ You must learn to obey your superiors, and 
to command yourself, before you will be fit to go into 
the world. Whatever course of life you pursue, you 
will have many things to do which you will dislike, or 
in which you may from inclination take no interest ; 
but this will afford you but a poor excuse for not doing 
your duty. What do you think the captain of a ship 
would say to an officer who had not obeyed orders, 
should the latter remark to him, i Really, sir, I felt so 
little interest in the matter, or I disliked it so very 
much, that I could not bring “myself to perform the 


12 MY BROTHERS. AND SISTERS. 

work ? ’ Yet this is what you have been doing, my boy 
I will say no more on the subject. You will go back 
to school at the end of the holidays ; and if I find that, 
from a sense of duty, you are attending, to the best of 
your power, to the studies your master may select for 
you, I will take your wishes into my very earnest con- 
sideration, and see how I can best carry them out for 
your advantage.” 

I felt how just, and kind, and considerate my father 
was, and I resolved to the utmost to follow his advice. 
I shall never forget those Christmas holidays. They 
were very, very happy ones. Our eldest -brother Jack, 
who was at college, was a very clever fellow, and put 
us up to all sorts of fun. In doors and out of doors 
there was nothing he did not think of. He never 
bullied, and wasn’t a bit spoiled. He was going to 
study at the bar, that he might better look after the 
family property. James, the next, was the quiet one ; 
he was preparing for the Church. Then came our 
third sister, Mary. Julia and Isabella were older than 
any of us. Mary was my favorite. There was noth- 
ing she wouldn’t do for me, — or, for that matter, for 
any of us. She did not like baiting our hooks when we 
were fishing, but still she did it when we asked her ; 
and I do really believe that the worms didn’t feel half 
the pain they otherwise would when handled by her 
fingers. She’d go out with us rat-catching and badger- 
hunting, and yet to see her in the drawing-room there 
wasn’t a sweeter, softer, more feminine a girl in the 
county. When we were at school, she wrote us twice 
as many letters as anybody else, and told us how the 
pony and the dogs Avere getting on — and how old 
Martin had found a wasp’s nest, which he was keeping 


RETURN TO SCHOOL. 


18 


for us to blow up — and all that sort of thing. Willie 
and Georgie were at school with me, and Herbert was 
going the next half, and after him were two more girls, 
so that Mary had no companions of her own age, and 
that made her, I suppose, stick so much more to us than 
the older ones did, who were now young Radies — old 
enough to go to balls, and to talk when any gentleman 
called. 

I cannot stop to describe our amusements. I went to 
school with a more hopeful, manly spirit than I ever 
did before, and, to the astonishment of Dr. Summers, 
set to with a will at every thing he gave me to do, and 
before long was nearly up at the head of my class. I 
wished to please my father, and to follow hi^ advice, 
that I am sure of ; but I confess that I was powerfully 
influenced by another motive. From what he had said, 
I saw that this was the surest way of obtaining the 
accomplishment of my wishes. 

Hoops and driving had gone out, and cricket and 
marbles were in, and the days were getting long and 
warm, when I received a letter from Mary, saying that 
Captain Frankland had come home, and had written to 
our father, but she did not know what had passed 
between them. I always told Mary all I thought and 
wished ; and though she cried very much at the thoughts 
of my going away, yet she promised to help me as best 
she could. How she was to help, I did not exactly 
know. I tried to console her by promising to bring 
her back parrots without end from Africa, and shawls 
from India, and fans and carved ivory bones from 
China, and poisoned arrows, and darts, and tomahawks, 
and all sorts of dreadful weapons, from America and 
the islands of the Pacific. Indeed, had I fulfilled my 


14 


PROMISED GIFTS. 


promises to the letter, I could pretty well have loaded 
a ship with my intended gifts. My father said nothings 
and we all went home together at the usual time. At 
the end of this half, a very complimentary letter had 
preceded me. 

“I am glad to hear that Dr. Summers is pleased 
with you, my dear boy,” said my father, and I thought 
his countenance wore a graver expression than usual. 
“Tell me, are your wishes the same as when you last 
left home ? ” 

I replied that I was as anxious as ever to go to sea. 

“I will not, then, thwart your inclination, Harry,” 
he answered. “ Your mother and I would rather ycu 
had selected a profession which would have kept you 
nearer to us. But you have chosen a fine line of life, 
and may Heaven protect you in your career ! I should 
have been glad, for some reasons, to have had the power 
of sending you into the Royal Navy; but I have no 
interest to ge^ you in, and still less any to advance you 
in it. The merchant service should not be looked on 
as less noble and less creditable a profession. It is one 
of the chief means by which England’s greatness and 
prosperity are maintained. In it your progress and suc- 
cess will depend almost entirely on your own exertions. 
You must also so conduct yourself that you may sustain 
to the utmost the credit of the service, and, I doubt 
not, you will have no cause to regret entering it. I 
might have wished to keep you longer at home, but I 
am unwilling to miss the opportunity of sending you to 
«sea under charge of a commander of the high character 
and attainments possessed by Captain Frankland. He, 
in the kindest way, tells me that he is ready to take 
you; and he also informs me that a relative of mine 


ROUND THE WORLD . 


15 


is one of the officers appointed to his ship, Silas "Brand 
by name. You have heard us speak of my good 
Cousin Martha, Mrs. Brand : Silas is her only son. He 
was a steady, good lad when I last heard of him before 
he went to sea, and I daresay that you will find him 
a firm friend. At all events, I am sure, from Captain 
Frankland’s remarks, that he will prove a profitable 
one. He tells me also that his proposed voyage will 
be one of very great interest; that the owners of the 
ship have a variety of objects in view-; so that he 
expects to visit a number of interesting places during 
the voyage, which is, in fact, to be completely round 
the world.” 

“ Round thu world ! ” I exclaimed. “ How de- 
lightful! And am I actually going to sail all round 
the world in my first voyage? Well, I did not expect 
any thing so good as that. Isn’t it a first-rate chance, 
papa ? ” 

“ It may be very long before you return, my boy,” 
replied my father. “I trust, however, that you will 
proportionately profit by the voyage. Captain Frank- 
land says, that he hopes to make you something of a 
seaman before you return. You will, I hope, make 
the best use of his instructions.” 

I promised that I would, and sincerely intended to 
keep my promise. So it was finally settled that I was 
to go to sea, and few lads were ever sent afloat under 
better auspices than I enjoyed. I cannot fully describe 
the agitating sensations- which passed through my bosom 
when I began to refle^ on the approaching consum-^ 
mation-of my wishes. While my heart beat with antici- 
pated pleasure at the strange sights I was to behold, I 
could not but contemplate with sorrow the thoughts o* 


16 


PREPARATIONS FOR THE VOYAGE. 


leaving so many dear ones . behind. Not that I for a 
moment hesitated what I would do, but the sharp 
edge of the enjoyment I might have felt was entirely 
blunted. Still, I went about talking with a keen relish 
of all I was to see, and what I was to do, while the 
preparations for my outfit were in progress ; and I not 

little excited the envy of my younger brothers, and 
of some of the boys near us, when they heard that I 
was starting on a voyage round the world. 

At last the chest was packed, and lashed on behind 
the post-chaise. A few minutes more, and the old 
home which knew 4ne would know me no more for 
many a long day. Can I describe that parting ? Still, 
all bore up heroically. I did my best not to give way, 
but there was a hot, choking sensation in my throat, 
as if a Thug from India had got his fatal noose tight 
round my jugular vein ; and a pulling away at the 
heart, as if the fangs of a stout double tooth*were firmly 
clenched in it, and a strong-fisted dentist was hauling 
it out. My father and Jack were going with me to 
see me on board. I believe - Jack envied me, and 
wished that he was going too, instead of having to 
pore over dusty parchments. My mother folded me in 
her arms, and kept me there. That was the worst ! 
Still, I Could not bear to break away. 

“ Come, Harry,” said my father, “ we shall miss the 
train.” He took me gently by the shoulder, and guided 
me into the carriage. I took a last kiss from Mary’s 
dear lips as I passed her. “ I shall be back to-morrow 
evening, I hope,” said he, following me. 

“ I say, Harry, don’t forget the bows and arrows you 
are to bring me from the Tonga Islands ! ” sung out 
Willie. 


JOURNEY FROM HOME. 


17 


“ Or the hunting panther from South America ! ” 
cried Georgie. 

“ Or the parrots from Africa ! ” exclaimed Mar} 
through her tears. 

“ Or the love-birds from India!” said Julia. 

“ Or my ivory fan from China, young sailor boy ! * 
said Isabella. 

“Don’t forget the journal you are to keep, or the 
subjects I asked you to note for me ! ” exclaimed the 
studious James. 

Thus, amid various shouts and exclamations of a 
similar character, the moment Jack mounted on the 
box we drove off towards the nearest station on the 
railway which was to convey us to Liverpool. My 
father said nothing for some time, and I felt that I 
could not utter a word without allowing my feelings to 
get the better of me. However, by the time we reached 
the station, I had much recovered my spirits ; and 
when once we were in the railway, Jack had so much 
to talk about, and cut so many jokes, that I became 
very happy, as he did not leave me a moment to think 
about the dear home I had left. I have often since 
thought, when I have seen people grumbling at home, 
or finding fault or quarrelling with their brothers and 
sisters or parents, let them go away and get knocked 
and kicked about the world, and they, will have good 
reason to value their own quiet home as they ought. 

I thought Liverpool a very fine city, with its large 
public buildings, and its broad streets, and its churches, 
and its Sailors’ Home, which I visited, where sailors 
have a large smoking-hall, and dining-rooms, and a 
lecture-room, and a chapel, and where some hundreds 
may each have a little separate cabin to himself. I 
2 * 


18 


MT GALLANT SHIP. 


wish every port in the world, much frequented by 
shipping, had a place of a similar character. Most of 
all, I was struck by the docks, crowded with ships o£ 
great size, and, indeed, craft of every description and 
nation ; as also with its wide quays and wharves, and 
floating . landing-stages, and steamers dashing in and 
out, and running up and down the river in such a 
hurry, that they looked as if they were conscious that 
they had to struggle for their existence among the 
struggling human multitude of the place. We inquired 
for the Triton. 

“ There she is, with the blue Peter flying at the fore ! 
She sails to-night, don’t she, Tom ? ” said a waterman 
whom we' addressed. “ Do you want a boat gintle- 
men?” 

My father said, “ Yes ; ” and agreed with the man as 
to his fare. 

We stepped into his boat, and away we pulled to- 
wards my future home — the good ship Triton. I had 
never seen a ship before, it must be remembered. I 
had looked at pictures of them, so I was acquainted 
with their shape ;• but I had formed no adequate idea 
of the size of a large ship ; and as the boat lay along- 
side of the Triton , and I looked up and saw one of the 
officers standing at the gangway to receive us, it ap- 
peared something like scaling the walls of a castle to 
climb up to the deck. What should I have thought, 
had the Triton been a hundred and twenty gun-ship, 
instead of a merchantman of 500 tons, for such ’was 
her size ! However, I then thought her a magnificent 
ship ; she was indeed a very fine one for her size. 
Side ropes being rigged, we soon gained her deck. The 
captain was still on shore, but my father at once made 


COUSIN SILAS. 


19 


out Silas Brand. He was a shortish, rather thick-set, 
fair man, with a roundish face and a somewhat florid 
complexion. He had light hair, with largish whiskers, 
and he shaved his chin in harbor. I had to look at 
him frequently, and to talk to him more than once, 
before I discovered that his countenance showed much 
firmness and decision, and that his smile betokened, 
more than a good-natured, easy disposition. My father 
had a good deal of talk with him, while Jack and I 
went round to see the ship. In the course of our pere- 
grinations, we entered what I found was the captain’s 
cabin. A lad of about my own age was sitting at a 
table, with a book and slate before him. He turned 
round when the door opened, and eyed me narrowly 
before he got up from his chair. Then, apparently 
recollecting himself, he advanced towards us. 

“ Are you the new youngster who is to sail with us ? ” 
said he, putting out his hand. u My name is Gerald 
Frankland, though it is seldom people take the trouble 
of calling me more than Jerry. My father told me to 
expect you. I’m to look after you, .and see you don’t 
get into mischief, I suppose. I’ll be very strict with 
you, mind that ! ” 

Amused with his free and easy way, I told him that 
he was not mistaken as to my identity. 

“ That’s all right then,” he answered. “ This gentle- 
man is your brother. Take a seat, sir, and make your- 
self at home. You’ll have something? When my 
father is on shore, I reign here supreme, though on 
deck, to be sure, I can’t boast much of my authority. 
i Steward, bring glasses, and biscuits, and any thing 
else ! ’ You’re not going with us, sir ? I wish you 
were. We’ll have rare fun before we come back, I’ll 
warrant.” 


MY NEW COMPANIONS. 


20 

“ No,” answered Jack, laughing, and highly diverted 
with Master Jerry’s volubility and perfect self-posses- 
sion. “I should much like to take the trip though. 
However, my brother Harry will, I hope, on your 
return, give us a full account of all you see and do.” 

“ He’ll have plenty to tell then of what we do, and 
not a little of what we see,” answered Jerry, with a sort 
of a half wink at me, which was as much as to say, 
“ We’ll be up to all sorts of things.” He added aloud, 
“ My father is not the man to let the grass -grow under 
the ship’s bottom ; but here come the glasses ! What 
will you have — not 01 cold ? ” 

“ Thank you,” said Jack; “our father is here, and 
we must not stop. We came to- see Harry on board, 
and have soon to return on shore.” While he was 
speaking, our father appeared at the door, accompanied 
by Silas Brand. 

Gerard’s whole manner changed the moment he saw 
them. He got up to receive my father with perfect 
politeness ; and, instead of exhibiting the forward, flip- 
pant manner with which he had treated us, he turned 
at once into a steady-looking, somewhat demure boy. 
My father, after addressing a few kind words to him, 
and telling him that he was his father’s oldest friend, 
signed to me that he wished to speak to me alone. He 
took me into Silas Brand’s cabin, and kneeling down, 
offered up a few prayers, full of deep, deep love, for 
my preservation from all earthly dangers, and fcr 
my acceptance as a forgiven sinner at the day of judg- 
ment. 

“ Look straight on beyond this transient world in 
all you think, or try, or do. Remember, delightful as 
this existence may appear, and undoubtedly is to those 


UP ANCHOR. 


21 


who know how to employ it properly, it is hut a 
passage which leads to eternity. May Heaven guide 
you, my boy ! ” He took me in his arms, and then I 
knew how his fond, tender heart felt the parting. He 
burst into tears : he was not long in recovering himself. 

Captain Frankland came on board. Last farewells 
were said. My dear father and Jack went down the 
ship’s side. The pilot remarked that the tide would 
suit. The anchor was,hove up. A steamer took us in 
tow ; then, after pulling ahead of us for a couple of 
hours or more, she cast off. All sail was set, and, free 
of the Mersey’s mouth, away we glided on our voyage 
Round the World ! 




22 


VOYAGE COMMENCED. 


CHAPTER II. 

> ) • ' - 

VOYAGE COMMENCED. 

The Triton was a well-found, well-officered, and 
well-manned ship. Still on first getting to sea, there 
appeared to be a considerable amount of disorder, and 
the crew were incessantly employed in stowing away 
the last stores which had come on board, and in getting 
every thing into its right place. This gave me a feeling 
that I was not in my right place, for no one had a 
moment to attend to me, and to tell me what to do; 
and had it not been for Gerard, I should have felt not 
a little miserable. He was as active as any one, and 
seemed to be thoroughly up to his duty. He did, how- 
ever, find time to speak to me. 

“ I’ll tell you what to do, Harry,” said he ; “just 
keep out of the way, and look on. You’ll learn more 
ip that manner just now than in any other. You’ll 
have plenty of time to get up your seamanship by and 
by.” 

I followed his advice to great advantage. The last 
I saw of our native land were the lofty cliffs of Wales. 
I came on deck early in the morning ; and, as I looked 
out aft, they appeared receding fast on the larboard- 
quarter, across the bright blue sea. Turning round, my 
somewhat bewildered glance next wandered upwards, 
and there I beheld, with unrestrained admiration, the 
wide spread of whi f e canvas which hung extended on 


COMMENCEMENT OF VOYAGE. 28 

the yards, high, high- up in the blue sky, like a vast 
mass of snowy cloud. It looked to me as if there was 
enough sail to fly away with the whole ship and her 
cargo ; for, the breeze being light and fair, we had all 
our courses, and topsails, and topgallant sails, and 
royals # set with studding-sails also on either side, almost 
sweeping the sparkling water which danced off from 
the Triton’s sharp bows as she clove her stately yet 
rapid way through the ocean. Captain Frankland was 
anxious to take every advantage of the favorable wind, 
that we might get a good distance from the land, and 
thus not run the chance of being driven back again, 
and be compelled, as is often the case with outward- 
bound ships, to take shelter in that magnificent harbor 
— Milford Haven, or in the still more lovely one of 
Queenstown, on the Irish coast. Away we flew, every 
day going faster and faster as the breeze freshened. 

“Not a brace, nor a tack, nor a sheet did we slack ” 

on board of the gallant Triton for a whole week ; and 
then it fell calm, and we lay washing our sides up to 
the scuppers in the pure waters of the Atlantic. During 
this time every thing was got to rights, and I began 
to find my way about every part of the ship, and to 
learn the names of the spars, and ropes, and sails. 
Gerard very soon dared me to go aloft ; of course I 
was nothing loath. 

“ Follow me, then, youngster i ” said he ; and, with a 
wicked look, up he w r ent the main-rigging. I ascended 
readily enough, intending to go through the lubber’s 
hole, as the opening in the top is called through which 
the lower shrouds lead. This way is quite allowable 
for a landsman ; but Jerry, having no fear of my 


24 


FIRST TIME ALOFT. 


breaking my neck before bis eyes, led the way by the 
futtock -shrouds ; and, as he quickly stood up in the 
top, I saw his face grinning over me while I hung 
with my back over the ocean, very doubtful whether 
I could climb round so as to get hold of the topmast- 
shrouds. 

“ Don’t let your feet go till you have got a firm grip 
of this rope here,” said he, touching the shroud. I 
clutched hold of it ; then up I slipped my other hand, 
and, drawing up my knees, soon had them on the comb- 
ing of the top, and found myself standing alongside my 
companion. I should have liked to have stopped to 
take breath and look about me ; but, before I could 
utter, a word, he was. off again, up the topmast-rigging, 
with the agility of a monkey, and laughingly sung out 
to me to join him on the cross-trees. I thought he 
would surely rest there, but away he was again, nor 
did he stop till he had got hold of the main-truck ; and, 
as he clung on with his chin over it, he took off his cap 
and waved it round his head. My blood was warmed 
with the exercise and the excitement, and I was close 
after him. The moment he was down I took his place, 
and did the same thing ; but I had to be quick in follow- 
ing him, not to miss the wa}’" he was leading. Down he 
slid by the maintopmast-stay, and in an instant more he 
was cljmbing the foretopmast-rigging. He waited for 
me, however, and waved me on. I did not remark that 
two seamen, the oldest hands on board, were at the 
same time deliberately mounting the fore-shrouds. Just 
as I reached the foretopmast cross-trees they were up 
to me. 

“ You han’t paid your .footing up here, young master,” 
said one, old Ben Yool by name. He spoke in a gruff 


JERRY S COMMISERATION. 


25 


voice, as if he had not a soft particle in his whole com 
position. 

“ You know what that means, master ? ” added the 
other, Charlie Cockle, as he was called, imitating him. 

“ I don’t know what you want, but I know -that you 
aie two to one, which isn’t fair, at all events; and, do 
you see, I am not accustomed to give in to threats,” 
said I, and endeavored to climb away from them, not 
knowing exactly where I was going. 

The midge caught in a web might as well attempt to 
escape from a hungry spider. They caught me in a 
moment ; and, without further ceremony, stretching out 
my arms and legs, lashed them to the topmast-rigging, 
making what is called a spread eagle of me. It was 
very humiliating, though my position was thus exalted, 
and very unromantic ; and the rogue Jerry aggravated 
my feelings by pretending to pity me, though I guessed 
even then that he had arranged the plan beforehand 
with Yool and Cockle thus to entrap me. The seamen 
had descended towards the deck, leaving me bound in 
this ignominious manner. Jerry came and placed him- 
self in the rigging opposite to me. 

“ It must be very unpleasant ! ” quoth he. “ I wonder 
what they would say if I was to let you loose ? ” 

“ I wish you would,” I answered. “ It’s a great 
shame, and I don’t like it.” 

“ But I dare not,” he replied, putting on a pretended 
serious face, though he could not hide the twinkle of 
his laughing eyes ; “ they are such precious fierce 
fellows. But don’t you think that you* might buj your- 
self off? I’ll see if I can arrange the matter with 
them.” 

I saw that thSre would be no .yse Contending against 

3 


26 


OUR OFFICERS. 


my tormentor, and I was more hurt than I chose to 
acknowledge ; so I wisely agreed to pay any moderate 
sum to be released. The arrangement was soon made ; 
and Yool and Cockle having unlashed my limbs, begged 
my pardon, and complimented me on the daring and 
agility I had displayed on this my first climb aloft. 

This adventure, as I took the treatment I received 
good humoredly, made me capital friends with all the 
seamen, and I found that there were not kinder-hearted 
or better men on board than Yool and Cockle. I 
observed that Jerry took the opportunity when his 
father was below to play off the tricks imagined by his 
fertile brain, though he was sometimes discovered and 
reprimanded ; but he put on so penitent an expression, 
and had such comical excuses to offer, that Captain 
Frankland saw that it would be worse than useless to 
punish him.. Indeed, punishment would scarcely have 
corrected such' faults as he had. Gerard, from b v eing 
small, and having delicate features, though they were 
full of rich humor, looked younger than I did ; but he 
was in reality older, and had much more experience of 
the world. His constitution was considered delicate, 
which was the reason that his father took him to sea 
at first; and now he liked the life so much, he told 
me, that he had resolved to follow it as a profession* 
We both of us slept in a cabin which we had to our- 
selves, near the captain’s. Gerard was learning navi- 
gation ; and Captain Frankland told me that I must 
study hard to catch him up, so that we might work 
together. He superintended our studies ; but Silas 
Brand was our chief master, and somehow or other, in 
his quiet way, he managed to impart a considerable 
amount of inforifctotion in a pleasant and rapid manner 


OUR DOCTOR. 


27 


It appeared to me that he always said the right thing 
at the right time, so as to impress it on the memory. 
Our first officer, John Renshaw, was a very worthy 
man, but totally unlike my cousin Silas. He was tall 
and thin, and had a long weather-beaten, rather melan- 
choly-looking face. Not that he was melancholy; the 
form of his features made him look so. It is better, 
however, to look melancholy than to have facetious feat- 
ures, which always appear to be on a broad grin. 
A strong contrast to both of them was found in our 
third officer, Samuel Melgrove. He was a man with 
strongly-marked, rather coarse features, with red hair 
and complexion. One might have expected to hear 
only the roughest tones come out of such a mouth as 
he possessed ; but, instead, he spoke in a soft, somewhat 
mincing manner, and prided himself on his gentlemanly 
style and volubility. He could," however, speak loud 
and rough enough in case of necessity. If called on 
suddenly to shorten sail, no one could make himself 
better heard. The mates on board a merchantman 
have the same sort of duty as the lieutenants of a man- 
of-war, with the addition of having to attend to the 
stowing of the cargo and stores. We had also a sur- 
geon, who was a good naturalist and a very scientific 
man — Mr. David M’Ritchie. He evidently at first 
Jooked with very grave suspicion on Gerard and me, as 
if we were only waiting our opportunity to play him 
some trick ; and when he left his cabin he always 
locked the door, lest we should get in and do some 
mischief ; but Such an idea was, I must say, very far 
from my thoughts, and even Gerard respected him too 
much to wish to annoy him. How to convince him of 
this seemed a difficulty. Gerard undertook to assure 
him. 


(- 


28 thfT triton’s crew. 

“ Mr. M’ Ritchie,” said he one day abruptly to him, 
“ I daresay that you think me a young jackanapes, 
whose only thought is how he can do most harm in the 
world. Now, sir, you are mistaken; all I want is that 
you will impart some of your knowledge to Harry and 
me ; but, understand, whether you do that or not, 
Harry and I will make it a point. of honor not to do 
you any injury by word, look, or deed.” 

“Oh, I never — Well, well, you are good boys, and 
I perfectly trust you,” stuttered out the doctor, com- 
pletely taken by surprise. “I -shall be glad, too, to 
give you all the information in my power ; and I hope, 
in the course of the voyage, we may have many inter- 
esting subjects to see and talk about.” I was sure that 
Mr. M’Ritcliie would-faithfully keep his word. 

We had three other somewhat important personages 
on board who were characters in their way, — Richard 
Fleming the boatswain, James Pincott the carpenter, 
and Thomas Veal the captain’s steward. They each 
had their peculiarities ; but I will not stop now to de- 
scribe them. We had twenty men forward, all picked 
hands ; for, with the long voyage we contemplated, 
and the service we were on, it was necessary to be 
strongly manned. I must not omit a description of 
the Triton herself. She had a raised poop, beneath 
which were situated the chief cabins, and a forecastle,, 
under which the crew lived in two compartments, one 
on either side of it. There was also a caboose, or 
galley, with a great cooking range, and, indeed, every 
convenience the men could , desire. We carried eight 
guns — 9 pounders — for we were going into seas 
where it would be necessary to be well armed, and 
constantly on our guard against treachery ; and we were 


OTHER CHARACTERS ON BOARD. 


29 


afso amply supplied with boats, which, I may remark, 
were always kept in good order, and ready for instant 
use. I was surprised one day during a calm, before we 
had been long at sea, to hear the order given to lower 
boats when there was no ship in sight, and apparently 
no reason for it. So were those of the crew who had 
not before sailed with Captain Frankland. They, 
however, flew to obey the order, and, in a short time, 
three boats were manned and in the water. They 
were then hoisted in again, and stowed. 

“ Very well,” said the captain, holding his watch in 
his hand. “ Smartly done, my lads, but another time, 
I think, we may do it still quicker.” 

Some of the men, of course, grumbled, as I have 
found out that some people will grumble when any 
new system is introduced, the object of which they do 
not understand. The loudest grumbler at any thing 
new introduced on board was old Fleming the boat- 
swain. He called himself a Conservative, or, rather, 
a Tory, and strongly opposed all change. 

“ None of your new-fangled notions for me,” he used 
to observe ; “ I like things as they were. Do you 
think our fathers would have all along "been satisfied 
with them if they hadn’t been good? I look upon it 
as disrespectful to their memory to wish to have them 
changed, as if we thought ourselves so much wiser and 
better than they were.” 

Gerard and I were fond of going forward to the fore- 
castle, where, in fine weather, in an evening, he always 
took his seat with his pipe in his mouth. 

“ By the same rule it was wrong to introduce the 
compass or the steam-engine ; former generations had 
done very well without them ; yet how should we on 
3 * 


30 OUR shipmates’ peculiarities. 

a dark night have managed to steer across the ocean 
as we do, or how could people manage to get about the 
world as rapidly as they find necessary for their busi- 
ness or pleasure ? ” 

, Gerard thought that this remark would be a poser 
for the boatswain ; but old Fleming was not so easily 
defeated. 

“As to the matter of the compass, do ye see, that’s 
what I call an exception to the general rule,” he 
answered, with a serious look. “ But as for the rail- 
ways and steam-engines, and all those sort of things 
afloat or ashore, to my mind the world would be alto- 
gether much better without them. It’s necessary for 
sailors to go about, that’s granted ; but the rest of the 
world would be very much better staying at home and 
minding their own business. What I preach I prac- 
tise ; and when I leaves home I says to my missus, 
says I, ‘ Now mind, Molly, don’t you be going . gadding 
about till I comes back to look after you,’ and she’d no 
more think of going outside the street-door, except 
when she .goes to church or a marketing, than she’d 
tiy to fly, and that would be no easy matter for her, 
seeing that she weighs thirteen stone at least.” 

Such is a specimen of old. Fleming’s stjde of conver- 
sation. Gerard and I used to be much amused while 
listening to him, though we did not fail to make the 
most of his remarks while repeating them to the mates. 
James Pincott the carpenter, on the contrary, was a 
great reformer. No invention was too new to suit his 
taste. Whenever he heard of any discovery, he could 
not be contented till he saw it introduced. We often 
tried to get the two together, and very soon managed 
to throw an apple of discord between them. Pincott 


FLYING MACHINES. 


31 


occupied much of his thoughts about a flying machine, 
which no failure had taught him to believe could not be 
made to work/ 

“111 tell you what, mate, there’s just this difference 
between you and me in this matter,” I heard Fleming 
remark ; “ you says a flying machine can be made ; 
so do I. You. may make fifty flying machines, or a 
hundred, or five hundred for that matter, all dif- , 
ferent, and with all sorts of wheels, and cogs, and what 
not, which nobody can understand ; but when they are 
made, what I have to ask you, mate, is, will they fly ? 
It’s there you and I differ.” 

Having thus delivered himself, Fleming drew him- 
self up with a triumphant look at his adversary. Now, 
Pincott was a very quiet man with all his eccentricities, 
so he merely answered : — 

“ It will be enough for me if one can be made to fly. 
That’s all I argue for.” 

“ It never has been done yet, and, to my mind, never 
will,” answered Fleming, sturdily; “though I have 
heard of a man who made his son put on a pair of 
wings which he had fabricated, and shoved him off the 
top of a high wall, and when the lad, as was to be 
expected, reached the ground, he broke his leg.” 

This was a story told of Pincott, who, however, on 
all occasions stoutly denied that he was the culprit. 
Another story against Pincott was, that when first iron 
vessels were introduced, he declared that it was impos- 
sible they could swim. “ No, no,” it was said he said, 
u birds can fly, so I don’t see why men shouldn’t ; but 
iron always has sunk, and, to my mind, it always will 
sink.’ 1- Fleming, who told the story, used to wind up 
with the remark, “ But you see, mate, there’s no rule 


32 


FIRST LAND SEEN. 


without an exception.” As these disputes never led to 
any disagreeable ^consequences, they served to beguile 
away many a weary hour at sea. But I have said 
enough to describe the character of our inferior officers^ 
They were both thoroughly good seamen and steady 
men. 

We had hitherto had little else than sunshine and 
light winds, so that my introduction to a sea life was 
most favorable.. Gloriously rose the sun over the blue 
sparkling waters, when, on coming on deck, I found 
the ship steering south-west, and standing in for the 
Bay of Funchal in the lofty island of Madeira. On 
one side of us were the Desertas — rocks which Gerard 
told me gravely were so called because they had once 
belonged to the mainland, and were now making the 
best of their way off to Africa ; but the doctor differed 
with him, and observed that they obtained their name 
from being desert or barren rocks, especially compared 
with the fertile island near which they are placed. 
Lovely as is the interior of our dear old country, few 
parts of its shores are attractive ; and as this was the 
first land we had made after leaving home, it seemed 
doubly beautiful. It appeared, as it rose before us, 
like one vast mountain extending from east to west, 
wuth a bay in the centre, and covered in the richest 
profusion with beautiful trees of many different sorts, 
among which, I afterwards found, are the cedar, chest- 
nut, orange, lemon, fig, citron, the vine, the olive, the 
mulberry, banana, and pomegranate, while generous 
nature sprinkles with no lavish hand the myrtle, the 
geranium, the rose, and the violet in every open space. 
The geranium especially grows in vast quantities ; its 
scent is most powerful, and the honey which w T e got in 


MADEIRA. 


33 


the island was strongly flavored with it. But I for- 
got ; we are not on shore yet. How bright, and beau- 
tiful, and rich, and fertile, and romantic every thing 
looked ! What charming whitewashed cottages ! What 
lovely villas, surrounded by gardens filled with flowers 
of every hue ! What a pretty town stretching away 
round the shores of the bay! How clean, and neat, 
and comfortable all the dwellings ! and how grand the 
churches and public buildings ! Gerard and I agreed 
that we should like to come back there some day after 
we had done our wanderings, and take up our abode 
for the rest of our days. 

u Stay till you have been on shore and seen the 
inside as well as the outside of things,” observed Cousin 
Silas, who had overheard us. We thought he was in 
what we used to call one of his grumpy humors, and 
did not heed him. We sailed on, and dropped our 
anchor opposite to the city of Funchal. A health boat 
came off, but as no one was sick on board, the people 
in her did not trouble us much. When she went 
away, we were surrounded with other boats pulled by 
swarthy, muscular, little men with gay caps and sashes, 
and white shirt sleeves, who bawled, and hallooed, and 
jabbered, in the vain hope of making us comprehend 
what they said. We shouted and hallooed in return, 
as if each party were deaf; and it was not till after a 
considerable expenditure of breath, that we discovered 
that we did not understand a word of each other’s lan- 
guage; so at last we took to making signs, by which 
means we got on much better. There was no great 
difficulty in this, as they had an abundance of fruit to 
sell, which we were equally anxious to buy. 

The captain had, I found, touched here chiefly to gel 


34 


A TRIP ON SHORE. 


a supply of fruit, vegetables, fresh meat, and water, as 
he knew that the health of a crew is maintained without 
difficulty when there is an abundance of these neces- 
saries. He had also another reason for coming here. 
It was to obtain information, which the Portuguese 
authorities were able to supply, regarding certain places 
he proposed visiting. As, however, the whole plan oi 
our proceedings was to be kept secret, I will not touch 
on that subject. Gerard and I were all anxiety to go 
on shore, as the captain gave us leave to accompany 
Mr. Brand, with strict charges to him to keep us out of 
mischief. “ Not an easy job ! ” muttered Silas, pre- 
paring to accompany us into a boat. For the first time 
in my life I stood on foreign soil, and very soon I was 
undeceived as to the cleanliness, and comfort, and 
beauty of the habitations ; and many a house which 
looked so very picturesque at a distance was found, on 
a nearer inspection, to be a very dirty domicile. Still 
the views from them were beautiful. Nature has done 
every thing ; it is graceless man who is in fault that all 
is not in accordance with it. At the corner of one of 
the streets we saw a number of horses, and mules, and 
donkeys, standing together with their attendant drivers 
— arrieros. 

“ Wouldn’t you like a ride, Mr. Brand?” exclaimed 
Gerard, looking towards them. He had not to look 
twice, before the whole posse comitatus of men and 
boys rushed forward, and seizing us vi et armis , carried 
us off in triumph towards their sorry-looking beasts. 
Which party would have us seemed a question. Who- 
ever heard of sailors who didn’t want to ride? Ride 
we must ; but as there were thirty or more beasts, and 
only three of us, it was difficult to say which of them 


COMMENCEMENT OF A RIDE. 


35 


should have the honor of carrying us. The arrieroi 
got one of Cousin Silas’ legs put on the back of a horse, 
and another on that of a mule, while a little wicked 
donkey began kicking and plunging directly under him. 
At last he- sprang on to the back of the horse, and 
Gerard and I found ourselves somehow or other on the 
saddles of two mules, when their respective owners 
catching hold of their long tails, and giving them a 
prong with their iron-pointed sticks, away we started 
from out of the crowd, who all hallooed and shouted 
after us, till we had shot some way up one of the 
steep rocky heights over which the bridle-paths of 
the island lead. “ Arra burra — arra, arra, arra ! ” 
sung out the crowd. “ Arra, arra, arra ! ” repeated our 
arrieros , goading the unfortunate animals with their 
sticks — “ Arra, sish, sish ! ” It is hopeless* to imitate 
the sounds emitted by our drivers. Up we shot like 
pellets from pop-guns, through the narrow rock-strewn 
gorges which are called roads. Up, up, up the animals 
scrambled. They seemed to enjoy the fun, or perhaps, 
wiser than men, they felt a pleasure in performing their 
daily duty. We, too, enjoyed the magnificent views we 
got over vineyards, and fields, and orange groves, and 
olive plantations, with often deep precipices below us, 
and the blue sparkling sea in the distance. We passed 
several buildings, once convents and nunneries; but 
when the constitutional government was established 
in Portugal, the monks were turned out of their habi- 
tations to gain an honest livelihood as best they could, 
though the nuns were in some instances allowed to 
remain in their abodes, on condition of Tteir admitting 
no fresh novices. Thus, by this time the greater 
number of professed nuns are old women. They em- 


86 


SCENES ON SHORE. 


ploy themselves in fabricating artificial flowers of shells 
and feathers, baskets and ornaments of various sorts, as 
well as in making dried fruits and sweetmeats. As 
Cousin Silas observed, it might have appeared hard to 
turn the poor monks adrift in the world ; but as ill 
weeds grow apace, it was necessary to eradicate them, 
lest a fresh crop should spring up where they had for 
so long taken root. 

We dined with an English merchant, an old friend 
of Captain Frankland’s, who treated us most sumptu- 
ously. He told us of a curious disease which had 
lately attacked the vines, and which he feared would 
ultimately destroy them. The grapes growing on the 
diseased vines, instead of ripening, wither up and rot. 
He said that he had urged the inhabitants of the 
island not* to depend solely on their vines, but to 
endeavor to produce other articles for which their 
soil and climate were especially suited. Among other 
things he introduced the mulberry-tree, by the cultiva- 
tion of which large numbers of the silk-worm might be 
bred, and silk in great quantities exported. Under 
the present system, when the vines fail, as the people 
do not grow sufficient corn in the island for their sup- 
port, they &re at once reduced to a state of famine. But 
I must not prolong my description of Madeira. It is a 
very lovely island, and has a very delicious climate, and 
produces all sorts of nice fruits ; and though the inhabi- 
tants have rather a fancy for being dirty, the English 
residents set them a better example, and have intro- 
duced comforts and conveniences which make the coun- 
try a very pleasant abode. The island is about thirty- 
seven miles in length, by eleven in breadth, and contains 
perhaps 60,000 inhabitants. 


OCEAN WONDERS. 


37 


Again sail was made on the ship, and away we glided 
over the smooth ocean with a north-easterly breeze, 
passing within two miles of the island of Palma, one of 
the Canaries, or Fortunate islands, which belong to 
Spain. The appearance, as we eyed it from the ship, 
was most attractive ; but Silas, who had been on shore 
there, told us that through the misgovernment of the 
upper classes, and the slothfulness of the lower, the land 
does not produce nearly what it might be made to do, 
while the people remain in a poor and backward condi- 
tion. Before sunset the same day we saw the island of 
Ferro, the most western of the gr&up. Before the 
discovery of America, this was looked on as the extreme 
western limits of the habitable world, and till very 
lately some navigators calculated their first meridian 
from thence. There are thirteen islands in the group, 
which produce corn, silk, tobacco, sugar, and the wine 
which was so long known* under their name. We 
caught about here the regular north-east trade-wind ; 
away we went before it as steadily and majestically as 
a swan glides over his native lake. I hope every 
reader of my adventures will look at the map, and see 
whereabouts the places I mention are situated, or they 
will find some difficulty in clearly comprehending my 
descriptions. 

We had, I thought, been a long time at sea without 
meeting with any thing very amusing. 

“ I say, Jerry, when are we to fall in with all the 
wonderful adventures you told me of ? ” I asked one 
day, as we were walking the deck together. 

“ You would meet with plenty of wonders if you . 
would but keep your eyes open to see them,” observed 
Cousin Silas, who overheard my observation. The 
4 


S8 


A RED FOG. 


reply, however, did not quite satisfy me ; nothing like 
a gale or bad weather had occurred, and I began to 
suspect that we had already had a sample of the sort 
of life we were always, to undergo at sea. 

“ Hillo ! ” exclaimed Jerry soon after this, “ what has 
come over the air, I wonder ? Why, we have got into 

regular red fog. What has caused it, Mr. Brand ; can 
you tell me ? ” 

“ No, indeed, I cannot,” answered Silas. “ I’ve met 
with it more than once. It is a very curious phenom- 
enon.” 

“ They do say it comes off from the coast of Africa,” 
remarked Ben Yool, who was at the wheel, and from 
his age privileged to speak on such a matter. “ It’s 
full of red sand, and I’ve seen it covering the decks in 
some parts as if a man had been scraping a red holy- 
stone over them.” 

We were still discussing the subject, when Captain 
Frankland came on deck. He listened for some time 
to what we were saying. 

“ I am glad to hear you discuss the subject, my lads,” 
he remarked in a kind voice. “ Though you are wrong 
in your conjectures, if you will attend, I will try and 
explain what I know about the matter. It is a very 
important one, for by means of this dust — for dust it is 
— which tills the air, philosophers have been able to 
letermine in part the difficult problem of the track of 
the winds in their circuits. How is this? you will say. 
Dust coming from one place surely cannot be distin- 
guishable from dust coming from another. To the 
ignorant man it is not, but to the man of science it is. 
There are certain minute animal productions called in- 
fusoria, and organisms peculiar to each portion of the 


THE TRADE-WINDS. 


globe. The expression is, the habitat of such infusoria 
is such or such a place. These infusoria can only be 
distinguished by a most powerful microscope. Pro- 
fessor Ehrenberg, who has devoted his attention to the 
subject, has examined specimens of the dust which is 
now falling on our decks. He found it composed of 
dry infusoria, the forms of which are found not on an 
African desert, but in the south-east trade-wind regions 
of South America.” 

“ South America, father ! ” exclaimed Jerry, pointing 
with his hand to the south-west. “ How can those 
clouds of red dust come all the way out here in the 
teeth of the north-east trade-wind ? ” 

“ What becomes of the north-east trade-wind when 
it reaches the end of its journey, and where is that end 
think you, my boy?” asked Captain Frankland. Jerry 
looked puzzled, and I had not a notion to give forth on 
the subject. “ I will try and explain the matter ; but 
when you can obtain a work, written by Lieutenant 
Maury, of the American navy, you will comprehend 
the subject much better,” said Captain Frankland. 
u There are three calm regions or belts surrounding the 
globe — one under the equator, and one in each hemi- 
sphere, under the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn, 
which you have heard spoken of as the horse latitudes. 
Between these two belts blow the north-east and south- 
east trade-winds, meeting at the equatorial belt. Now, 
when they get there, instead of causing a whirlwind, 
the excessive heat causes the particles of which they 
are composed to expand and rise, gradually producing 
a calm. After rising a certain height they again com- 
mence moving round the globe. Which course they 
took it was difficult to say, till we find these clouds of 


40 


PROBLEM OF TRADE-WINDS SOLVED. 


red dust carried along in an upper region of the atmos- 
phere from south-west to north-east ; for not only are 
they found here, but up the Mediterranean and across 
Switzerland. They are raised into the atmosphere 
probably by whirlwinds which occur during the vernal 
equinox, which is the dry season, from the valley of the 
lower Orinoco. Thus, had a label been attached to 
each particle, of which the wind is composed, to show 
whence it came, the problem could not have been more 
perfectly solved.” 

While the captain was speaking, Mr. M’Ritchie came 
on deck, and collected in sheets of paper a quantity of 
the red dust. “ It will be prized by some of my sci- 
entific friends at home,” he observed; “and even the 
unscientific may value a substance which has travelled 
half round the globe high up in the atmosphere.” 

“ There is another substance, doctor, which travels 
further, and is of much greater use to man ; and yet 
how little he troubles his head to consider where it 
comes from,” remarked the captain. 

What do you mean, sir ? ” asked the doctor, a little 
puzzled I thought. 

* Water ! ” answered Captain Frankland. “ Remem- 
ber those dense fogs, like wet blankets, which so con- 
tinually rise in those calm regions to the south of us, 
they are caused by vapors rising from the sea, and 
leaving its salt behind. This vapor must go some- 
where, and it certainly does not fall in any place near 
the region where it is drawn up. See the beautiful 
provision of Nature to supply with fertilizing moisture 
the many districts of the earth ! This damp vapor, 
of which we shall by-and-by have a specimen, rises 
into the upper regions of the air, and is there wafted 


THE SOURCES OF RAIN. 


41 


steadily on till it reaches the northern portion of the 
globe. It is raised by the powerful rays of the sun 
during the southern summer, and with it a considerable 
amount of heat is carried off which remains latent. 
When it reaches the far colder atmosphere of the north, 
it is formed into clouds, and condensed, and then pre- 
cipitated in rain. In the southern hemisphere there is, 
as you know, a larger proportion of sea than in that of 
the north ; and thus it serves as a reservoir to supply 
those spots, which would otherwise be arid deserts, 
with an abundant supply of the chief necessary of life. 
The whole of nature is full of similar beautiful arrange- 
ments for making the globe a convenient habitation for 
man, clearly to be perceived, if men would but open 
their eyes to behold them.” 


4 * 


42 


THE WONDERS OF THE OCEAN. 



CHAPTER III. 

THE WONDERS OF THE OCEAN. 

We were about a day’s sail or so from the Cape de 
Verd Islands, when one day, as I was looking out, 1 
saw on the starboard-bow what I was certain was a 
shoal of great extent covered with sea-weed. “ Land 
on the starboard-bow ! ” I sung out, thinking there 
could be no mistake about the matter. I heard a loud 
laugh at my shoulder. Old Ben Yool stood there. 

“ Well, if that is not land, I do not know what is ! ” I 
replied; but still Ben only laughed at me. I was 
arguing the point, when the captain, who was on deck, 
called me aft. I found him with a chart, which he was 
showing to Gerard. 

“ You are not the first person, Harry, who has taken 
that collection of sea-weed for land,” he observed. 
“ That is the Sargasso Sea. When the companions of 
Columbus sighted it, they thought that it marked the 
extreme limits of the navigable ocean. We are at 
the southern edge of it. Look at this chart ; it ex 
tends in a triangular form between the groups of the 
Azores, Canaries, and Cape de Verds. It is caused by 
the Gulf Stream, which, circling round the Atlantic, 
sends off towards the centre all the sea-weed and 
drift-wood collected in its course. Throw some chips 
into that tub ; now, set the water in motion with your 
hand. The current you have created sends off all the 


THE SARGASSO SEA. 


43 


uAip* liitso the centre of the tub. You need never forget 
how tins Sargasso Sea becomes covered with weed. 
But you will wish to know something about this won- 
derful Gulf Stream, which not only produces the effecl 
I have, described, but exerts a very powerful influence 
on the climate of many countries, and on the navigation 
of the Atlantic, besides causing many other important 
results. It is, indeed, one of the most wonderful ol all 
the phenomena of the ocean. Consider it aira mighty 
river of warm water, flowing for three thousand miles 
with scarcely diminished volume, never dying, never 
overflowing, over a bottom and between banks of cold 
water. So little affinity have its waters with the 
common w f ater of the ocean, and so different is their 
color, that a distinct line can often be traced where 
they pass along. See where it takes its rise in the 
Gulf of Mexico, whence it is called the Gulf Stream. 
Now, mark its course, and note its effects. Remember, 
that not only is it warm itself, but it warms the air 
which passes over it. It likewise contains much more 
salt than the common sea-water. The salt gives it its 
peculiar deep indigo-like color. It runs at the rate 
of between three and five miles an hour. It is roof- 
shaped — that is, higher in the centre than on either 
side. This is proved by placing a boat on either side 
of the centre, when it drifts off* towards the edge nearest 
to which it is cast loose. Another peculiarity exists in 
connection with it. Water radiates heat far more 
slowdy than does the earth. If, therefore, the Gulf 
Stream swept along the ground, it would speedily lose 
its heat. To prevent this, it is made to pass over a 
cushion of cold water, into which its heat does not 
readily pasn. When, however, its waters wash any 


44 BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 

shores, they impart some of their heat to them, increasing 
*he warmth of the climate, adding fertility to the soilj 
md making it a more agreeable abode for man. Now, 
look at the chart, and observe where the mighty current 
leaves its reputed source in the Gulf of Mexico. 
Mark it sweeping round the coast of Florida, and 
glancing off to the eastward near Cape Hatteras, in 
the United States, allowing a belt of cold water to 
wash the shores of that country during the winter 
months of the year. Watch it passing near the coast 
of Nova Scotia, and, in the summer, not far from that 
of Newfoundland, where it has undoubtedly caused the 
formation of the well-known fishing-banks. This is the 
way they have been produced. When the summer 
sun releases the innumerable mighty icebergs which 
have been formed on the shores of the polar regions, 
they float away to the south, carried by a current which 
sets towards Newfoundland. They bear away with 
them vast quantities of rock, and stones, and sand. 
Meeting the hot water of the Gulf Stream, they quickly 
melt and deposit their burdens at the bottom, always 
about the same spot which you see marked as the 
Grand Bank. Now the stream, taking an easterly 
course, reaches the 40th degree of north latitude, when 
it begins to spread itself over the colder water of the 
ocean, washing the shores of Ireland; some going up 
towards Spitzbergen, surrounding the Shetland Isles, 
and other isles in the north ; more rushing up the 
British Channel ; and another quantity flowing into the 
Bay of Biscay, and away again towards the south — 
adding warmth to the whole of the indented shores of 
Europe, and at the same time supplying the deficiency 
of salt to the waters flowing out of the Baltic and the 
Polar basin.” 


THE GULF STREAM 


45 


‘‘Thank you, father,” exclaimed Gerard; “I now 
understand why, when last year we made the voyage 
to New York, we kept away so far to the northward. 
It was to avoid the Gulf Stream, which would have 
been setting against us. But I say, father, I want to 
know why the water takes it into its head to flow in 
that way. I suppose there is some cause for it?” 

“ Our beneficent Maker undoubtedly formed it for 
the benefit of his creatures,” returned the captain; 
“ but, as I have often told you, he brings about his pur- 
poses by the laws or causes which he himself has estab- 
lished. There may be several causes in operation to 
form this ocean stream, though up to ibis moment 
learned men have been unable to decide what they 
are. Now one theory is advanced, now another. The 
shape of the Gulf Stream may have something to do 
with it. It appears that it is higher than the rest of 
the surface, for it is more bulky. Water will always 
seek its level. It has thus a tendency to flow towards 
the colder and lower water of the poles, feeling at the 
same time the effect of the diurnal motion of the globe ; 
while the water of the poles, to supply its place, flows 
towards the equator, subject to the same disturbing 
cause. Thus the water of the globe is set in motion. 
These being hot, tropical waters, remain on the surface, 
and a portion of them is forced into the Gulf of Mexico. 
Here, though they lose somewhat of their saltness from 
the fresh waters of the Mississippi and Orinoco, they 
gain more heat from these hot streams, and are still 
much salter than the rest of the ocean. Perhaps the 
impetus may be given them by the pressure of the 
currents from the poles. The diurnal motion of the 
globe will account for the drift-wood and sea-weed 


46 


WHENCE DOES IT COME? 


being cast off on the east or left bank of the stream 
There is another cause for this. From the stream 
being roof-shaped, any drift which its left portion took 
up, would have to go up hill to get to the northward. 
Therefore, though trees and other produce of the 
West Indies are found on the shores of Europe, none 
are ever picked up on those of America. And this 
brings me to the point from which I set out — the cause 
of the Sargasso Sea, the centre, it may be called, of 
this wondrous and almost inexplicable Gulf Stream.” 

“But, father, still you have not told us why the 
Gulf Stream flows in the direction it does,” said Gerard, 
who generally stuck to the point in an argument on 
which he wanted information. ^ 

“Men possessed of far more scientific knowledge 
than I can boast of, have been puzzled to reply to that 
question,” returned the captain. “ The trade-winds, 
the diurnal motion of the earth, the expansion of water 
by heat, may all combine to force it along and direct its 
course ; and yet there may be some still more potent 
cause at work unperceived by us, perhaps undiscover- 
able. One thing we know, that it was the will of the 
Almighty that so it should flow, for a great and benefi- 
cent object ; and that, to effect it, he has employed 
some potent and sufficient agent, which, when he thinks 
tit, he will allow to be revealed to us by the light of 
that science which he has given as one of his best gifts 
to man. There are, as you perceive on the charts, 
other currents in the vast ocean, all set in movement 
for the sake of benefiting the inhabitants of the globe. 
While the warm Gulf Stream runs up to Spitzbergen, 
the Hudson’s Bay and Arctic currents bring cold water 
and icebergs towards the south ; and a current from the 


OCEAN CURRENTS. 


47 


North Atlantic carries its cooling waters round the arid 
shores of western Africa. There is the great equatorial 
current from east to west round the world, and nu- 
merous other currents in the Pacific aud Indian Oceans, 
the influence of which we shall feel during our voyage 
and by knowing where to search for them, and where 
to avoid them, we can generally make them serviceable 
to our object. What I would especially point out to 
you, my lads, is the beautiful adaptation of all the works 
of the Creator to the great object of the whole: The air 
and water are kept in motion for the benefit of man and 
all living beings. Order everywhere reigns supreme. 
Science shows us that storms are regulated by exact 
laws, and it is only through our ignorance and blindness 
that we cannot tell whence they come and whither they 
go. What an admirable system of compensation exists 
throughout the universe ! Heat, lost by radiation, is 
quickly restored ; water, lifted up by evaporation, has 
its place supplied by colder currents ; mighty rivers 
discharge their waters in vast quantities into the ocean, 
and from the far off regions of the tropics the winds 
come loaded with dense vapors, which, precipitated at 
their sources with ample and regular measure, supply 
all their demands. I might produce numberless ex- 
amples. As an instance, the whole volume of the waters 
of the Mississippi, rushing out at its mouth, find their 
way back again in an ever-constant circle to its sources 
among the far off lakes of North America. The Gulf 
Stream fertilizes the earth for the benefit of man, and 
it likewise carries food to regions frequented by the 
mighty whales. Frequently large shoals of sea-nettles, 
on which the black whale feeds, have been met with, 
borne onward towards its haunts in the north. The 


18 


WHY ENGLAND IS DAMP. 


whale itself, it is believed, could not exist in the warm 
waters of the stream. Fish, also, are not generally 
found in it ; and those which inhabit it are of a very 
inferior flavor. Instead, therefore, of wandering about 
the ocean, where they could not be procured by man, 
they are driven to the shallow waters near the coast, 
when they can easily be caught. It is a curious fact, 
that the warmer the water, the brighter are the colors 
of the fish which inhabit it ; though, as food, they are 
generally of much less value. While the Gulf Stream 
largely benefits the globe, it is at the same time the 
proximate cause of shipwreck and disaster, from the 
storms which it creates, in consequence of the irregu- 
larity of its temperature, and that of the neighboring 
regions, both in air and water. Perhaps nowhere is a 
more terrific sea found than when a heavy gale meets 
the Gulf Stream, when running at its maximum rate. 
Many a ship has gone down beneath its waters. How- 
ever, I might go on fill day telling you curious things 
about this same Gulf Stream. One thing more I will 
mention : people often complain of the dampness of 
England. The same cause which so favorably tempers 
the cold of our country, creates the dampness com- 
plained of. It is not that our soil is more humid, that 
marshes exist, or that the country is not well drained ; 
but it is that the westerly and north-westerly breezes 
which prevail, come loaded with the Avarm vapors 
ascending from the tropic-heated waters of the Gulf 
Stream.” 

“ Thank you, father, for all you have told us,” said 
Gerard ; “ I think I have learned a great deal I did not 
know before.” 

I was certain that I had, and directly afterwards put 


THE WAY THE WIND BLOWS. 


49 


down, as well as I could remember, all Captain Frank- 
land had said. The next day we sighted St. Vincent, 
one of the ten islands which form the Cape de Verd 
group, so called from being off' the Cape de Verd, on 
the coast of Africa. The islands belong to the Portu- 
guese. They produce all sorts of tropical fruits and 
vegetables, so that ships often touch here to be supplied 
with them. A large number of the inhabitants are 
black, or of a very dark hue. Instead of standing 
directly for the Brazils, Captain Frankland shaped a 
course almost across the Atlantic for the coast of South 
America. He did this, he explained to Gerard and 
me, to get the wind, which generally blows off* that coast 
when the north-east trade failed us ; and to avoid the 
equatorial calms, in which, away from the land, vessels 
are often baffled for days together. I found, after I had 
been some time at sea, “ That the longest way round is 
often the shortest way there,” as the saying is. Id 
tropical latitudes, winds from different quarters blow 
with great regularity in different places at certain 
seasons of the year. The great object of a master is, to 
find where the wind is blowing which will be fair for 
him. The two most regular winds are the north-east 
and south-east trade-winds which blow from either side 
of the equator, and meet in a wide belt of calms found 
under it. There are currents in the air as well as 
in the ocean ; and Silas told me that he has more 
than once passed ships at sea right before the wind — 
steering north, for instance, while his ship, with an 
equally fair breeze, has been standing to the south. 
Formerly, ships used to be steered as far south as they 
could get before the trade-winds ; and then often found 
themselves baffled for days, if not weeks together/ in 


50 


MORE ABOUT THE TRADES 


the calm latitudes off the coast of Africa, when, if they 
had stood boldly across the ocean, as we were now 
doing, they would never have wanted a wind more or 
less fair. Thus it will be seen that in navigation there 
are currents in the sea and currents in the air to be 
considered, and that it requires a great deal of fore- 
thought, and knowledge, and experience, to take a ship 
in safety and with speed round the world. We were 
bowling along in grand style before the north-east trade- 
wind, when Gerard stopped his father in his morning 
walk on deck. 

“ I say, father, can you tell Harry and me all about 
this trade-wind, which we have got hold of, it seems ?” 
said he with a grave look, as if he wished to become 
very learned. 

“ Which has got hold of us, rather, I should say, by 
the way it is carrying us along,” answered the captain, 
smiling. No one knew Jerry so well as he did, though 
he often pretended not to understand at what he was 
driving. “ You ask a question to which it is rather 
difficult to reply in a brief way. Take a piece of paper ; 
draw a circle on it; now, draw three parallel belts 
across it — one in the centre, and one on each side of 
the centre. Write on the centre belt, 1 Equatorial 
Calms ; ’ on the upper, ‘ Calms of Cancer ; ’ on the 
lower, 4 Calms of Capricorn.’ The circle represents the 
globe ; the ends of a line drawn at right angles to the 
belts where it reaches the circle, mark the poles. The 
globe moves from west to east. Now, suppose a mass 
of air sent off from the north pole towards the equator 
in a straight line, it not partaking of the diurnal motion 
of the earth would appear as if it came from the north- 
east. Another mass starting from the equator towards 


PASSAGES OP THE WIND. 5j 

the pole, in consequence of the impetus given it, would 
be going faster towards the east than the earth, and 
would, consequently, appear as if it came from the 
south-west. This actually takes place, but in the upper 
regions of the air. The same exchange takes place 
between the south pole and the equator. Now, let us 
see what becomes of these masses. That which started 
from the north pole meets in the air at about the 
parallel of 30 degrees ; the mass which started from the 
equator meeting with equal force, they balance each 
other, and produce a calm and an accumulation ot 
atmosphere pressing downward, and ejecting from below 
two surface currents — one towards the equator, which 
are the north-east trade-winds ; the other towards the 
pole, called the south-west passage-winds. This moving 
mass of air, which constitutes the north-east trade-wind, 
meets near the equator with another mass which has 
been moving on as the south-east trade ; meeting with 
equal force, they form a calm ; and then, warmed by 
the heat of the sun, they ascend, one half streaming off 
high up towards the south-east — that is, counter to the 
surface current — till it reaches the southern calm belt ; 
another mass coming from the south-west, where it 
descends, and rushes as a north-west surface wind to- 
wards the south pole. We have traced the mass which 
started from the north pole. Reaching the southern 
regions, it is whirled round till, at the pole itself, a 
perfect calm is produced, when it ascends and starts off 
as an upper current towards the equator ; but, meeting 
another current near the tropic of Capricorn, then 
descends, one half flowing out at the surface, as I nave 
before described, as the south-east trade, the other 
towards the south pole. This is the most beautiful *ud 


52 ATMOSPHERIC CIRCULATION. 

regular system of atmospheric circulation kept up around 
our globe. It has not been ascertained exactly why the 
masses I have spoken of take certain directions, but we 
know the directions they do take. The red dust we 
found off the Cape de Verds assists us in certain de- 
grees. We know some of the agents — the diurnal 
motion of the earth, and the sun’s heating rays. There 
are certain counteracting or disturbing causes from 
which the surface winds deviate from the courses I 
have described. Some laiids are covered with forests, 
others w T ith marshes, others with sand. All these may 
be disturbing causes — so are lofty mountains. From 
these causes, and the more powerful effect of the sun’s 
rays in one place than in another, hurricanes and 
typhoons occur, and the monsoons are made to blow — 
the harmattan on the west coast of Africa ; the simoon, 
with its deadly breath, in Arabia ; the oppressive si- 
rocco in the Mediterranean. What I have said will 
explain that beautiful passage in Ecclesiastes, 1st 
chapter, 6th verse, which shows the exactness of the 
sacred writers whenever they do introduce scientific 
subjects : i The wind goeth toward the south, and 
turneth about unto the north ; it whirleth about con- 
tinually, and the wind returneth again according to 
his circuits.” Who gave Solomon this information ? I 
doubt if any of his sages possessed that scientific knowl- 
edge which has only been attained by philosophers of 
late years. Perhaps I may still more clearly explain 
to you the cause of the circulation of the atmosphere. 
I told you that there were two agents at work — diurnal 
motion, and the heat of the sun ; but to these may be 
added the cold of the poles, which contracts the air. 
Suppose the globe at rest, and covered with one uniform 


THE ISLAND OF ST. PAUL’S. 


53 


stagnant mass of atmosphere ; suddenly heat, cold, and 
the diurnal motion commence their operations. The 
air about the equator would expand, that about the 
poles contract. Thus two systems of winds would 
commence to blow — one above, from the equator to- 
wards the poles ; and as thus a vacuum would be left 
below, a current would come from the poles to supply 
its place. The diurnal motion prevents these currents 
running in straight lines. That coming from the’poles 
will appear to have easting in them, and those going 
towards the poles westing. Not only, however, is the 
level of the atmosphere changed by the heating rays of 
the sun, but its specific gravity. Thus the heated cur- 
rent moves more easily and rapidly than the colder; 
and the latter, consequently, turns back a portion of 
what was going towards the poles, and adjusts the 
equilibrium of the atmosphere. I have already shown 
you the great importance of the circulation of the air in 
the economy of nature ; and how, among the many 
offices of the atmosphere, it distributes moisture over 
the surface of the earth, making the barren places 
fruitful, and tempering the climates of different lati- 
tudes, fitting them as the abode 'of civilized man. But 
I will not pursue the subject further just now. You 
must do that for yourselves. Try and remember what 
I have said, and think about it whenever you have an 
opportunity.” Jerry and I thanked the captain for 
what he had told us, and I, as before, at once dotted it 
down as well as I could in my note-book. 

Crossing the Atlantic, we sighted a glittering white 
rock rising fifty feet out of the water. It was, I found, 
the island of St. Paul’s. It had a curious appearance, 
standing thus alone in the ocean 500 miles from tho 
5 * 


54 


BOOBY AND NODDY. 


coast of America, and 350 from the Island of Fernando 
Noronha — the snowy pinnacle of a submarine moun- 
tain. We hove to close to it, and a boat being lowered, 
Mr. M’Ritchie, Mr. Brand, Jerry, and I, went on shore. 
The whole rock is not three-quarters of a mile in cir- 
cumference. Its white color, we found, was produced 
by a thin coating of a substance formed by the washing 
off of the birds’ dung, collected there in a succession of 
ages.* The rock was covered with birds — my old 
friends, the booby and the noddy, I had so often read 
about. They stared at us with a stupid look as we 
pulled up, not at all able to make us out, and in no way 
disposed to make way for us. Gerard and I were for 
knocking as many as we could on the head ; but Cousin 
Silas would not allow us, observing that we did not 
want them for food, and that they had a far better right 
to the rock than we had. The booby, Mr. M’ Ritchie 
told us, is a species of gannet, and the noddy a species 
of tern. The first lays her eggs on the bare rock, but 
the latter constructs a nest with sea-weed. While the 
doctor was eagerly hunting about for specimens of 
natural history, we were amused by watching the pro- 
ceedings of some of the few inhabitants of the rock. 
By the side of several of the noddy s’ nests we saw a 
dead flying-fish, evidently deposited there by the male 
bird. Whenever we succeeded in driving away any 
one of the females, instantly a big crab, which seemed 
to have been watching his opportunity from the crev- 
ices of the rocks, would rush out, and with greedy 
claws carry off the prey. One fellow, still more hungry, 
ran away with one of the young birds. Another was 
going to make a similar attempt. 

“ I ought to stop that fellow, at all events ! ” said 


THE CIRCLE OF BLESSING. 


55 


Jerry, giving Master Crab a stunning blow. We tied 
his claws, and presented him as a trophy to the doctor. 

“A fine specimen of Graspus” cried our scientific 
friend, stowing him away in his wallet. 

“ A capital name ! ” said Jerry. “ He seemed ready 
enough to grasp any thing he could lay his claws on.” 

The doctor said he could find neither a plant nor a 
lichen on the island, and only a few insects and spiders, 
besides the boobies and noddies. I ought to have 
mentioned that we did not fail to meet with the moist 
and oppressive weather found under the belt of calms 
under the equator. Frequently I felt as if I could 
scarcely breathe, and nearly everybody was in low 
spirits, and ready to grumble. Jerry and I vowed that 
the air was abominable. Cousin Silas stopped us. 

“ Remember, lads,” said he, “ what the captain was 
telling you. If it were not for them mists, how 
could the rivers, of the north be supplied with their 
waters, and the fields of our own land be made fertile ? 
Thank God rather that you are thus enabled to see more 
of the wonders of creation.” I never forgot this remark 
of Cousin Silas. A delightful writer, now well known, 
describing the subject, calls it “ The Circle of Bless- 
ing.” * 

Making sail, we soon lost sight of that white-topped 
rock. Soon afterward, Gerard rushed down one morn- 
ing at day-break into our berth, and, rousing me up, 
told me I was wanted on deck. Half asleep, I jumped 
up, and slipping my legs into my trousers, for no other 
garment was required in that latitude, ran with him 
where he led me forward. I had scarcely got my eyes 
open, when I found myself seized by two shaggy 

* Mrs. Alfred Gatty, in her “ Parables from Nature.” 


56 


A VISIT FROM NEPTUNE. 


monsters ; and hearing the sound of a conch-shell, I 
looked up, and saw before me, as if he had just come 
over the bows of the ship, a strange-looking personage, 
with a glittering crown on his head, a huge red nose, 
long streaming hair, and white whiskers as big as two 
mops. In his hand he held a trident, and over his 
shoulders was worn a mantle covered with strange 
devices. 

“Trite! where’s Trite? Come along, Trite!” he 
exclaimed in a gruff voice (which sounded not altogether 
unlike that of old Ben Yool’s), as he looked over the 
bows, and presently he handed up a lady of very 
ample dimensions, who certainly, except for a petticoat 
and a necklace of shells, I should not have suspected 
to have belonged to the fair sex. 

Oh, there you are, my lovie ! We must be sharp 
about our work, for we have so many ships to board 
that we haven’t a moment to lose. Now, if there are 
any young shavers who hasn’t crossed the middle of 
my kingdom before, let them be brought up here in 
quarter less than no time, or I’ll do — I’ll do — I’ll do 
what you shall see.” 

This was said in a terrifically gruff voice. Before I 
had time to look about me, the two monsters had 
dragged me forward before his marine majesty and his 
spouse ; and one producing a huge cold tar brush, and 
the other a piece of rusty hoop, I found my face paid 
over with some most odorous lather. I cried out to 
Jerry, who, I thought, as a friend, ought to help me ; 
but he pretended to be in a dreadful fright, and when 
the monsters ran after him, he managed to shove so 
violently against me that he sent me head first into a 
large tub of water which stood at the feet of Neptune 


LATHERED AND SHAVED. 


57 


I was, however, immediately hauled out by the shaggy 
Tritons, and after a fresh application of lather, my face 
was scraped over with the piece of hoop. 

“ Douse him — douse the baby again ! ” shouted Nep- 
tune ; and from the mode I was treated, I thought thatx 
I should have been nearly drowned, had not Mrs. Nep- 
tune, or rather Amphitrite, interfered in a voice which 
was intended to be very affectionate, but which sounded 
as if the poor lady had a very sore throat, and begged 
that I might be allowed to return to my cradle to sleep 
out the remainder of my watch. 

“ Oh, good mother, your sex are always gentle and 
kind ! ” I answered, determining to jump with the 
humor of the thing, and to show that I had not lost 
my temper, although the ceremony I had gone through 
was far from pleasant. “ Now, if you’ll just leave one 
of your squires here aboard, and he’ll come aft by-and- 
by, I’ll try if I can fish out a five-shilling piece from 
the bottom of my chest, to buy you and your good man 
some baccay and rum, to cheer you when you get back 
to your own fireside.” 

“ Well spoken, like a true son of the Ocean!” ex- 
claimed Neptune, patting me on the back. “For that 
same notion you are free from henceforth and forever 
of my watery realms, seeing also as how you have been 
lathered and shaved and crossed the line ; so here are 
three cheers for Mr. Harry Hopeton, and may he live 
to sail round the world, and to command as fine a ship 
as this here craft, and finer, too ! ” The crew, at 
Neptune’s beck, on this gave three hearty cheers ; and 
while the Tritons were chasing down some lads and 
two or three men, who had never before crossed the 
line, I made my escape towards a tub of clean water, 


58 


CROSSING THE LINE. 


and thence to my cabin, where I very soon removed all 
traces of the discipline I had gone through. By thu 
time the captain appeared, the whole ceremony was at 
an end, and the men were employed in washing down 
decks, as if nothing had occurred. It was the third 
mate’s watch, and I found afterwards that Jerry, who 
was the chief instigator, had obtained his leave to have 
the ceremony take place. The captain, I dare say, also 
knew all about it, but said nothing on the subject. 
Once upon a time, the crew of every ship crossing the 
line considered it their right to be allowed full license 
to indulge in all sorts of wild pranks ; but the custom 
got so much abused, that many captains have put a 
stop to it altogether, while others only allow it among 
well-tried and trusty crews. I was not sorry to have 
had the tricks played on me, because it contributed to 
gain me the good-will of the people ; and I now felt 
that, having crossed the line, I had a right to consider 
myself something of a sailor. 

Two days after crossing the line, we sighted the 
Island of Fernando Noronha, which, with several out- 
lying islets, is a very picturesque spot. It belongs to 
the empire of the Brazils, and is used as a penal settle- 
ment. As Captain Frankland wished to touch at 
every place not out of his way, we dropped anchor in 
Citadel Bay, opposite a fort on which the Brazilian 
colors were flying. A boat was lowered, and though 
some heavy rollers were setting into the bay, we man- 
aged to get on shore on the top of one of them without 
getting wet — that is to say, the captain, Gerard, and I. 
It was really a pretty sight. We pulled on steadily 
with the head of the boat directed on shore — then a 
high, heaving, glassy wave came gliding in, and the 


FERNANDO NARONHA. 


59 


boat was on its summit — now the men pulled away 
with all their might, and on we flew till the boat’s keel 
touched the beach. Quickly the waters receded. The 
instant they did so we all jumped out, and, hauling the 
boat up before another roller came in, she was high an 
dry out of harm’s way. A guard of blacks received us 
and hearing that the town was only about a mile and a 
half distant, we set off to walk there. We passed 
through a pretty valley, and some woods of tropical 
shrubs, with the blue sea visible beneath their broad, 
fan-like leaves, and by many huts and cottages’, inhab- 
ited mostly by blacks, who seemed very much aston- 
ished at our appearance* At last we reached the 
town, .which has an open space in the centre, and a 
church and the governor’s house at one end, and a 
strong fort above it. Here nearly all the soldiers and 
free men are blacks, while the whites are mostly slaves, 
made so by their crimes. It must be rather a satis- 
factory state of things to the feelings of the blacks. 
The governor of this place, of a hundred houses or so, 
received us very civilly, and gave the captain all the 
information he required ; and besides that, a good supply 
of vegetables, which the island produces in abundance. 
In the afternoon we again sailed for Rio de Janeiro. 
I shall not forget the magnificent sight which met my 
eyes, as one bright afternoon we glided through a 
narrow entrance into its superb harbor. We appeared 
to be sailing up a large lake, extending as far inland 
as the eye could reach, and surrounded with lofty 
mountains of many different and picturesque shapes. 
On either side were walls of granite, rising sheer out 
of the water to a height of nearly 2,000 feet, while 
behind them rose the vast Sugar Loaf Mountain, and a 


60 


HARBOR OF RIO. 


number of other lofty and barren peaks, towering up 
clear and defined against the blue sky. Like mighty 
giants they surround the harbor, the ground at their 
bases sloping towards the water, and sprinkled with 
pretty villages, and quintas, and orange-groves, and 
covered with the most luxuriant vegetation. A pic- 
turesque fort guards the entrance to the bay. Passing 
it, after sailing about four miles, we dropped our anchor 
among a crowd of vessels carrying the ensigns of nearly 
all the civilized nations of the world, before the city of 
Rio, which, built on a fiat extending two miles from the 
hills, appeared on our left hand. As our stay was to 
be short, the captain allowed Gerard and me to accom- 
pany the doctor on shore at once. He himself, went 
with us, and introduced us to a merchant, who kindly 
undertook to show us about the place. 

“There, go and see all you can, and give me an 
account of what you have seen when you return on 
board,” were his parting words. 

Rio is built upon piles, and as the drainage is bad, 
it is at times very unhealthy. On landing, we found 
ourselves on a large open space with a palace before us, 
and a fountain in front of it. Before the palace stood 
two negro soldiers as a guard. The army, our friend 
told us, is composed chiefly of negroes, who make very 
good soldiers ; and the navy is manned by them. Act- 
ing with Englishmen, they are as brave and trustworthy 
as any men to be found. Off the square branched a 
number of narrow streets. As the climate is so hot, all 
the streets are made narrow, that they may be kept as 
much as possible in shade. The houses are mostly ol 
good size, and the walls are very thick ; they thus keep 
out the heat of the sun. The churches are also sub- 


CHARACTER OF THE BRAZILIANS. 


61 


etantially built, and decorated in a very florid style — 
the interiors being tawdry in the extreme, calculated 
only to please the uncultivated taste of the negroes and 
of the lower order of whites. Railways have been 
formed in the Brazils, and one runs to Petropolis, a 
summer resort of the principal inhabitants. Omnibuses, 
too, have made their appearance. The streets are 
paved with fine blocks of stone, and the city is . lighted 
with gas ; indeed, as our friend observed, “ under the 
liberal government of the present constitutional emperor, 
the country has made great material progress. When 
her literally unbounded resources are developed, she 
cannot fail, unless her constitution is overthrown, of 
becoming a wealthy and happy nation. At present, her 
wretched parody of the pure religion of Christians, and 
her lazy, profligate, and ignorant priests, tend more 
than any thing else to retard her progress. Vile as 
they are, they have been unable to prevent the free 
circulation of the Scriptures and the toleration of 
Protestant opinions.” 

We were struck by the immense number of negroes 
who crowd the streets. Those born in Africa are 
known by the distinguishing marks of their tribes on 
their foreheads. Many of them are free. A negro in 
Rio may demand his valuation from a magistrate, and 
when he can make up the fixed sum, he can purchase 
his freedom. Slaves are generally treated kindly by 
their masters, and as their price is high, on account of 
the impediments thrown in the way of the slave-trade, 
their health is carefully looked after. The porters are 
all slaves. They pay their owners so much a day, and 
keep the rest of what they gain for themselves. They 
carry every thing on their heads. We sometimes met a 
6 


62 


FUNERAL PROCESSIONS. 


dozen men grunting or singing in time, as they stopped 
under some huge machine borne aloft above them. They 
lie about the streets with their baskets ready for any- 
body’s call. We thought the Brazilians a very quiet 
and most polite people. They were continually bowing 
to each other, and there was none of that bustling rough- 
ness so often seen in England. We met the emperor 
on horseback in plain clothes, though his attendants 
were in handsome uniforms. He was a fine, intelligent- 
looking young man, and is much liked. The Brazilian 
government is liberal. Both Houses of Parliament 
are elected by the people ; and if there is a majority of 
three fourths in favor of a measure in the Lower House, 
the measure is virtually carried, whatever the vote of 
the Upper. If the Senate, or Upper House, do not 
agree, the two meet in convention ; and as the number 
of the Senate is small compared to that of the Lower 
House, it can thus always be outvoted. The vote of 
the emperor can suspend a law for a year ; but if, at 
the end of that time, it be again passed by the Legisla- 
ture, it takes effect. In reality, the government is a 
republic, the emperor being the executive, though 
deprived of legislative power. 

We passed in our walk a house out of which a funeral 
procession was coming. It was that of a young lad 
of our own age, we were told. That and the neighbor- 
ing houses were hung with blue cloth. The hearse and 
liveries of the servants, and the trappings of the horses, 
were of the same color. His hands were crossed before 
him, with a cup in them. The decorations at the 
funerals of young children are red, those only of grown- 
up people are black. If boys are named after any of 
the saints, they are dressed in appropriate costumes. 


AQUEDUCT. 


63 


If after St. John, a pen is placed in one hand and a book 
in the other. If after St. Francis or St. Anthony, he 
has a monk’s gown and cowl. Sometimes a boy is 
called after the archangel Michael, and then he wears a 
gilt pasteboard helmet, a tunic with a belt round the 
waist, tight red boots, and his hand resting on a sword. 
Poor little girls, with rouge and false locks, are made to 
represent Madonnas and female saints. Jerry and I 
agreed that we should not like to be rigged out in that 
guise after we were dead. 

Rio is supplied with water by an aqueduct which 
comes from far up among the mountains, its chief source 
being a romantic and forest-surrounded spot, called the 
“ Mother of Waters.” The actual channel which con- 
veys sufficient water to supply so large a city as Rio, is 
only nine inches wide and nine and a half deep. The 
precious fluid, however, comes rushing down with great 
rapidity, and thus quickly fills all the reservoirs below. 
It is conveyed from its mountain source sometimes 
across valleys on high, massive arches, sometimes in the 
interior of a thick, wall-like structure, and sometimes 
under ground. The channel has for its whole length an 
arch above it of sufficient height and width to enable a 
man to walk upright along it. Altogether, we agreed 
that Rio, if it were not for the slaves and the monks, 
and the want of drains, would be a very civilized city. 
Never did sight-seers get over the ground faster than 
we did, or make better use of their eyes. I ought to 
have mentioned that steamers ply in various directions 
in the harbor of Rio. Our friend proposed a trip up 
the country, which would last during the few days we 
had to spare. We started in one of the smallest of the 
steamers, and went up the River Macacu. One tiling 


64 


AN ARMY OF RATS. 


struck us — a boat laden with slaves, which had been 
landed on the opposite shore, and were being smuggled 
into the city. We went on shore at the small town of 
Porto Sampaio, and thence on mule-back about fifteen 
miles, to the country-house of a Brazilian gentleman, 
our friend’s friend. We four had a room to ourselves — 
a large, roughly built apartment. Scarcely were we 
all in bed, and the light out, when, just as I had dropped 
asleep, down came something on my nose. I started up, 
and there appeared to be a tremendous clattering and 
pattering about the room. 

“ I say, Harry, what are you heaving at me ? ” sung 
out Jerry, springing up also. 

“ Rather what are you throwing at me ? ” I retorted. 

“ Hillo ! what’s* the matter?” cried the doctor; “I 
felt something soft slip through my fingers — animals of 
some sort — what can they be ?” 

“ Only rats ! ” said our friend, awoke by our excla- 
mations. “ I know they are somewhat numerous in 
this house.” 

We all sat up, and began shouting and striking right 
and left ; but the rats did not mind us a bit. At last 
the doctor lighted a lucifer match, and away scampered 
at least a hundred rats into the holes from whence they 
had come out. We thought that we were to have rest, 
but as soon as darkness and silence were restored, out 
they all came again, and made as much hubbub as 
before. Jerry and I kept knocking about us to little 
purpose, till we both fell back asleep ; and all night long 
I dreamed that I was fighting with a host of black men 
on the coast of Africa. When the morning broke, 
they scampered away like so many evil spirits, leaving 
.heir marks, however, behind them. They had com- 


MANDIOCA. 


65 


mitted no little mischief also. They had gnawed through 
our friend’s shoes and the doctor’s leather cigar-case — 
they had carried off Jerry’s leather braces, the remains 
of which were found near one of the holes, and lhp , 
front strap of my cap. We all had suffered, but, as 
Jerry remarked, as they had left us our noses and toes, 
it did not much signify. They infest the country in all 
directions, we were told. 

The estate we were on produced chiefly sugar. The 
mills by which the canes are crushed consisted of three 
vertical wooden rollers worked by mules. The most 
interesting subject connected with our trip was the 
cultivation and preparation of the mandioca. The chief 
produce is called farinha : the slaves are fed almost ’ 
entirely on it. A field of mandioca, when ripe, looks 
something like, a nursery of young plants. Each plant 
grows by itself, with a few palmated leaves only at the 
top. The stem is about an inch in diameter at the 
base, and six or seven feet long. A bud appears at 
nearly every inch of the otherwise smooth stem. These 
plants give forth tubers of irregular shape, in substance 
like a parsnip, about six inches long and four thick. 
The tubers, after being scraped and rinsed, are ground, 
or rather grated against a wheel with a brass grater as 
a tire. One slave turns the wheel, and another presses 
he root against it. The pulp is then put into bags and 
pressed. The matter, which resembles cheese-cake in 
consistence, is then rubbed through a wire sieve, and 
thrown into shallow copper pans moderately heated. 

/ After being stirred up, it quickly dries, and the produce 
is not unlike oatmeal. The juice pressed out is very 
poisonous by itself. It is, however, collected in pans, 
when a beautifully white substance is precipitated U» 

6 * 


66 


MODE OP PREPARING FARINHA. 


the bottom. This substance is tapioca, so largely used 
in puddings at home. To plant a field of mandioca, the 
stems of the old plants are cut into bits about four 
inches long, and stuck in the ground. They quickly 
take root, and sending forth shoots from the buds, are 
in two years fit again to dig up. The mandioca is 
called cassava in some countries. The press used by 
the Indians is a simple and most ingenious contrivance. 
It is made by the Indians wherever the plant is grown. 
It is a basket made of fine split cane loosely plaited ; in 
shape, a tube, five feet long and five inches in diameter 
at the mouth, and narrowing somewhat at the bottom. 
A strong loop is left at each end. To use it, first it is 
wetted, and then a man holding the mouth presses the 
other end against the ground till it is half its former 
height. A long smooth stick is now inserted down the 
middle, and the pulp is packed tightly round it till the 
basket is full. It is then hung to a beam or branch of 
a tree by a loop at the mouth, while a heavy weight is 
attached to one at the bottom, till the basket has as- 
sumed its original tube-like form and length, and the 
whole of the liquid has been pressed out of the mass of 
mandioca. 

One of the most curious features in a Brazilian forest 
is the vegetable cordage, or sipos, which hang down 
from every branch, like slack ropes from the rigging of 
a ship. Jerry and I several times could not resist 
having a good swing on them, while the doctor was 
hunting about for his specimens. Their roots are in 
the ground. They climb up a tree, then hang over a 
branch and descend, and often twist upward again by 
their own stem, to descend more than once again to the 
ground. We were shown the nests of some diminutive 


WONDERS OF THE BRAZILS. 


67 


bees. The nests are not so large as a turkey’s egg, 
while the bodies of the bees are but little thicker than 
the bodies of mosquitoes. The comb is of a dark brown 
color, and the construction of the nest is somewhat like 
that of ants. The only entrance is a small hole, at the 
mouth of which they construct a tube turning upwards. 
This is regularly closed up at night, so that no damp can 
enter, and it is never opened till the sun has been some 
time up. The bees have no stings, but they are very 
brave, and will drive away the ordinary bee from their 
hives. 

I might go on for hours describing all the wonders 
we saw during our short trip. Our last excursion was 
to the Corcovado Mountains, whence we looked down 
on the blue waters of the superb harbor of Rio, sur- 
rounded by sandy beaches and numerous snow-white 
buildings, peeping from amid the delicate green foliage 
which covers the bases of the neighboring mountains, 
and creeps up almost to their summits; while the 
mountains are on every side broken into craggy and 
castellated peaks of every varied shape; the whole 
forming a not easily forgotten panorama. Once more 
we were on board and under weigh. The bay, as we 
sailed out, w r as full of vessels; but the flag of Old 
England was not, as I should have supposed, among 
the most numerous. A vast number of boats and 
canoes were moving about, manned by blacks. Some 
of them were felucca rigged, measuring about ten tons ; 
others were propelled by their dark crews with large 
oars, they standing up and pressing the oars before 
them. The canoes are cut out of single trunks of trees, 
and are used chiefly for fishing. With a fair wind we 
passed out of the harbor, and stood along the coast to 
the southward. 


ADVENTURES IN THE FALKLANDH. 


$8 


CHAPTER IV. 

ADVENTURES IN THE FALKLAND S. 

The reason, I believe, why sailors in a well-regu- 
lated ship are generally so happy, is, that they are 
never allowed to have an idle moment. Mr. Renshaw 
was always finding something for the people to do ; and 
when that work was finished, there was something else 
of equal importance to be done. The picture our deck 
presented on one day will serve for that seen on most 
days in fine weather : on one side the spun-yarn winches 
were going, manufacturing spun-yarn out of old junk — 
a never-ending source of employment ; Mr. Pincott and 
his mates were busily at work building a boat on the 
other ; the sail-maker and his gang were repairing some 
of the sails, and making light ones for the gentle breezes 
of the Pacific ; while Fleming and his crew were laying 
up rope, and the rest of the watch were knotting yarns, 
making sinnet, wad-bags, wads, chafing gear of all 
descriptions, such as worming, parcelling, roundings, 
spun-yarn, rope-yarn, marline, seizing, stuffs, and service 
of all kinds; the names of which things alone are, I 
suspect, sufficient to puzzle a landsman, so I will say no 
more about them. Aft were Captain Frankland, with 
one of the mates and Gerard and I, taking observations 
of the sun, — an employment in which, as I began to 
understand it, I felt great interest. It struck me that, 
as far as I saw, Captain Frankland took very little 
concern about the ship. He seldom spoke a word 


OUR FIRST GALi2. 


69 


to any of the crew, and only occasionally, on points of 
duty while on deck, to the mates. I soon found, 
however, that no man could more effectually exert 
himself, when his exertions were required. Hitherto 
there had been nothing to call forth his energies. With 
light winds and calm seas, he had better employment 
in his cabin. That very day a change came over the 
even tenor of our lives ; scarcely were our sextants 
stowed away, when, as the captain was walking the 
deck, I saw him frequently turn his glance to the 
westward. There, over the land, in a moment it seemed, 
arose a bank of clouds, which every instant grew denser 
and denser, and came rushing toward us across the 
sky. 

“Air hands shorten sail!” shouted Captain Frank- 
land, stopping suddenly in his walk. Quick as the 
word, the work in which everybody was engaged was 
stowed away, and up jumped the crew, all life and 
activity. Away they flew aloft — royals were sent 
down, top-gallant-sails were furled, and the yards were 
braced so as to take the wind on the starboard tack. 
We had had the wind from the north-east, but it now 
fell almost a dead calm, and the lower sails began to 
flap idly against the masts ; and under our topsails we 
waited the coming of the squall. It did not long delay 
on it came in its majestic fury. On one side of us the 
whole sky was covered with a dense mass of threatening 
clouds, while the sea below appeared torn up into sheets 
of hissing foam ; on the other, the sky was blue, and the 
water smooth as a polished mirror. There was not a 
breath of air where the ship lay. Then down on us 
came the fierce squall with its utmost fury — rain, hail, 
and wind united — overheeled the stout ship as if she 


70 


SCUDDING BEFORE THE GALE. 


had been a mere cockle-shell, till her gunwale was 
buried in the water. I thought she would never rise 
again, but I kept my eye on Captain Frankland, who 
seemed as cool and collected as if nothing unusual was 
happening. With speaking-trumpet in hand, and hold- 
ing on by the weather-rail, he ordered the mizzentopsail 
to be furled. The lee maintopsail braces were then 
slackened, to shiver the maintopsail ; and the wind 
being taken out of it, the whole pressure was thrown on 
the headsail ; the helm was then put a-starboard, and 
her bow paying off, righting herself, away flew the ship 
rapidly before the gale on an even keel. The foaming 
seas rising every moment higher and higher, coursed 
each other up under our stern, as if angry at our 
escaping their power. Dark clouds were above us; 
dark hissing seas on every side ; the thunder roared, 
the lightning flashed brightly : so terrific did the scene 
appear to me, that I thought at times that we must be 
hurrying to destruction. I concealed my feelings, for 
Gerard took the matter very coolly, and he was not 
likely to spare me if I expressed any unwarrantable 
alarm. After we had run on before the gale for some 
time, it began to moderate. We had all the time been 
going out of our course : so, to avoid losing more ground, 
the captain gave the order to heave the ship to. I had 
never before seen this operation performed. The fore- 
topsail was first furled, and the maintopsail, which was 
closely reefed, and the foretopmast-staysail were the 
only sails set. “ Brace up the main yard ! ” was the 
next order given. “ Now, down with the helm ! ” cried 
the captain, watching a favorable opportunity when a 
heavy sea had passed ns. The ship felt the influence 
of the wind, and came up with her head to the westward; 


LAND IN SIGHT. 


71 


and then she rode, rising easily to the tops of the seas, 
and gliding slowly down into the valleys — their wild, 
foaming, hissing crests rushing furiously by her, but not 
a drop of water coming on board. I had never pictured 
to myself a scene so awfully grand as that which I now 
beheld in perfect security. On one side the waters rose 
in a wall high above the deck, and looked as if about to 
overwhelm us ; while the next instant we were looking 
down into a vale of waters of depth so great, that it 
seemed, if we slipped into it, we should never again 
struggle upwards. When summoned to dinner, I went 
below with the expectation that I should be unable to 
have a mouthful ; instead of which, there appeared to 
be very little more motion than usual, so easily rode the 
ship ; and I could scarcely persuade myself that I had 
but just left a scene of such wild confusion on deck. 
The gale did not last more than twelve hours, and the 
ship was then once more put on her proper course for 
the Falkland Islands. 

u Land ho ! land ho ! ” was shouted one forenoon 
from aloft, with the usual prolonged cry. The Falkland 
Islands were in sight, and the land seen as we drew 
nearer, I found, was that about Cape Bougainville. We 
stood on, and next we made out the rugged hills 
above Berkley Sound, and then got close to the dark 
brown cliffs of Macbride’s Head, with hundreds of seals 
lying on the sands and rocks below them. We could 
hear the roar of the beasts as they looked up at us, 
indignant, I thought, at being disturbed by our approach ; 
but Mr. Brand told me that, fierce as they looked, they 
are a very harmless race, and easily captured. On the 
downs above were numerous cattle feeding, which gave 
us the idea that we were approaching some civilized 


72 


FIRST VIEW OF THE FALKLANDS. 


part of the world. Passing Berkley Sound with a stiff 
breeze, which rushed out of it, we stood on for Mount 
Low, and then beat up Port William, which has a line 
of sand hills on one side of it, and Stanley Harbor at 
the end. Although the day was fine, the appearance of 
the country was not very attractive ; for there are no 
trees — rocks, and sand hills, and tussac grass, and 
barren heights, being the chief features. We dropped 
anchor opposite Stanley, the capital of the settlement. 
Above a line of piers and quays appeared a double row 
of neat white cottages, inhabited by the pensioners who 
were sent out to assist in founding the colony. Round 
and about- them are other houses and cottages, extending 
along the shores of the bay, and sprinkled on the sides 
of a gentle slope. They are generally of light tints, 
which contrast well with the dark back-ground of 
the hill beyond, and give the place a pretty appearance. 
Further up is the church, not a very ecclesiastical- 
looking building; and beyond again, the cemetery, 
which has a neat chapel attached to it. The Govern- 
ment House is a long, low, cottage edifice, which looks 
well from the harbor; and on the east of the town 
are some extensive stores, belonging to the Falkland 
Island Company, with their small fleet of vessels in 
front of it. On the west of the town is the Government 
Dock-yard, with block-house, work-shops, guard-house, 
and stores, all neatly railed in. The surrounding coun- 
try consisting of slight elevations, either rocky or cov- 
ered with tussac grass, is not attractive. I could not 
help looking at the place with great interest, as the first 
infant British settlement I had seen; and I thought 
less of what it then was than of what il> might become, 
under good management. The last idea was suggested 
to me, I must own, by Mr. Brand. 


TOWN OF STANLEY. 


73 


The chief promenade in Stanley is called Ross Road, 
running right and left of the principal street for about 
two miles. On one side of it are built a number of 
houses facing the water, and among them are two or 
more hotels, of some pretensions. Behind this road 
are some smaller streets, inhabited by laboring people 
Spanish Gauchos, and others. There are, perhaps, 
rather more than a hundred houses in the town, and 
between 400 and 500 inhabitants, including boatmen, 
stray sailors, Gauchos, and other wanderers. Several 
of the houses have gardens which produce a fair supply 
of vegetables, and beef is to be had in abundance ; but 
as the colony produces very little else in the way of 
food, the inhabitants are somewhat hard up in that 
respect. The islands alternately belonged to England 
and Spain till, in 1774, they were finally evacuated by 
the latter power, though it is only of late years that they 
have been systematically colonized by England. The 
first governor, Lieutenant Moody, arrived there in 1842, 
when the site of the intended town was changed from 
Port Louis to Port Stanley. As a proof of the value 
of the islands, Mr. Lafosse, a British merchant at Monte 
Video, paid £60,000 to have the right over all cattle of 
every description, to be found on the East Falk- 
lands, for six years and a half. From what I heard, 
the climate is very healthy. It is at times windy, but 
in summer it is as mild and dry as the south of England. 
In winter the cold is never severe, and only at intervals 
of several years does snow fall to any depth, so as to 
risk the destruction of cattle. The most remarkable 
production is the tussac, a gigantic species of grass, 
which grows to the height of ten feet, and is capable of 
sheltering and concealing herds of cattle and horses. 


74 


START ON A SHOOTING EXPEDITION. 


The core of this grass is of so nutritious a nature, that 
people have been known to live for months on it, and to 
retain their health. From this cause the animals on 
the islands grow to a great size, and their flesh is of a 
particularly fine flavor. The great object for which the 
settlement was founded was to afford a place where 
ships might repair, and to supply those going round 
Cape Horn, or returning home that way, with fresh 
provisions. It is also under contemplation to make it a 
penal settlement, for which it is in many respects par- 
ticularly adapted, if sufficient employment for the con- 
victs can be found. 

Gerard and I were very anxious to get on shore to 
enjoy some of the sport we had heard so much about. — 
“ Wouldn’t it be fine to kill a fat bull, who would make 
nothing of tossing one twelve feet up in the air if he 
could but catch a fellow on the tip of his horns ? ” said 
he, rubbing his hands. 

I agreed with him ; but we had little hopes of having 
our wishes gratified, when a gentleman from the shore 
offered to give us a trip round in one of the Company’s 
schooners to the West Falklands, where she was going 
to procure cattle. As the ship was to remain here 
some days to have one or two slight defects made 
good, and to take in a supply of beef, fresh and salt, 
Captain Frankland allowed us to accept the offer, Mr. 
Brand going to look after us. Away dashed the little 
schooner, the Sword Fish , having a fine fresh breeze, 
with as merry a party on board as ever put to sea. 
There was our friend Mr. Nathaniel Burkett, and his 
friend Mr. Jonathan Kilby, both keen sportsmen, and 
up to all sorts of fun ; and Gerard and I, and the 
master of the vessel, Tom Cribb by name, whr , though 


OLD SURLEY. 


75 


not a good shot, seeing that he had but one eye, and 
that had a terrific squint, knew every inch of the coast, 
and exactly where we were likely to find sport ; and 
then there was Cousin Silas, who was a first-rate shot, 
though he did not throw his words away by talking 
about the matter. Pleasant as our trip promised to be, 
many a gale has to be encountered off those wild 
islands, and dangers not a few. We, however, instead 
of standing out to sea and going round all, took a course, 
well known to our skipper, among the numerous isles 
and islets grouped round the larger Falkland. Their 
names I cannot pretend to remember. At last we 
dropped anchor in a snug cove where we were to 
remain for the night. We, the sportsmen, were to have 
a boat left us ; and we were to land, while the schooner 
ran on to a station some way further. We had one dog 
with us, Old Surley by name, belonging to Mr. Kilby, — 
as brave an animal as ever flew at a bull’s neck, for he 
feared neither bull nor beast of any sort. With our 
guns; plenty of ammunition, and a stock of provisions, 
we pulled up a creek where we could leave the boat in 
safety, and landed. We first climbed a rock on the 
shore, whence we could look about us and take a survey 
of the island. It was of considerable size. We saw 
that we should have no little difficulty in penetrating 
across it, through the high tussac grass which almost 
entirely covered the ground. We first advanced to- 
gether. We soon came to some curious green mounds, 
covered with a velvety moss, about two feet high and 
nine in circumference. I happened to sit down on one 
to tie my shoe, and it made a most comfortable seat. 

Do you know what that is ? ” said Mr. Burkett, 
giving it a blow with the butt end of his gun, whir 1 . 


76 


A HUGE UON. 


broke the moss to pieces as if it had been a huge 
toadstool. The mossy coat was an inch and a half in 
thickness, and the whole interior appeared filled with 
wide-spreading miniature fir-trees. Every stalk, of 
which there were a great number, was edged with 
diminutive leaves like those of the fir ; and the tops 
were sprinkled with little pieces of resin, brown outside 
and white within, some not larger than a pin’s head, and 
others half the size of a filbert. We afterwards came 
to some mounds where the plants had pushed through 
the green moss; and their leaves having slightly ex- 
panded, they looked like miniature myrtles. Instead of 
going directly inland, we made our way along the shore 
among the penguin grass. This grows to the height of 
ten feet, on the top of clumps of decayed vegetable 
matter, forming large hillocks, which made the shore 
look as if it had been covered with a coppice of under- 
wood. We took our way through it, often being hid 
from each other by the high grass, and had not gone 
far when a loud roar saluted our ears. Jerry and I 
were together, but we had lost sight of the rest of the 
party. I instinctively drew back, and he looked very 
much as if he would have run away, had he known 
where to run to. He says he felt very brave though. 

“ What’s that ? ” I exclaimed. 

“ A lion L” replied Jerry, looking uncomfortable. 

“ A wild boar,” said I ; “ there are no lions here.” 

“ A big bull, perhaps,” cried my companion. “ I hope 
his horns are not sharp ! ” 

Our guns were loaded only with small shot, so that we 
could hope to make but little impression on the body 
of a wild animal. The roar was repeated, and there 
was a loud rustling among the penguin - grass on a 


A. TERRIBLE ENCOUNTER. 


77 


mound near us. The grass moved rapidly. We looked 
towards it. Presently the huge head of a ferocious- , 
looking animal appeared glaring at us from among the 
grass. We shouted lustily for help to our friends. 

“ Let’s run, it is a lion — I told you so,” cried Jerry / 

“ no time to lose, if we don’t wish to be eaten up ! y 
Suiting the action to the word, Jerry turned round, and, 
in attempting to escape, tumbled over some of the 
tangled stalks, and lay sprawling on the ground, while 
I endeavored to lift him.. up. The huge monster all 
the time came roaring towards us, Jerry and I shouting 
out — “ Help, help, help ! a lion, a lion ! ” In anothei 
moment I expected to feel his claws on my shoulder. 

“ A sea lion, my lads ! ” cried Mr. Jonathan Kilby, 
who at that momfpt appeared close to us from among 
the high grass. “ Jump up and attack him.” 

The beast having no legs, and being able only to 
make progress with his fins, had not advanced so far as 
we expected. Our friend having in the mean time 
drawn the small shot from his gun, and put a ball 
instead, fired at the head of the beast. The ball 
entered and stopped his further progress, and there he 
lay, helplessly floundering about, and roaring more 
lustily than ever. This gave Jerry and me time to 
recover ourselves, and to put bullets into our guns, with 
which we soon put an end to the sufferings of the poor 
beast. He wa^y;wg found, a species of seal, about eight 
feet long, of a yellowish brown color, and with a large 
mane, covering his neck and shoulders. 'He looked as 
if he would prove an ugly customer in the water ; but 
as he kad only flappers for front legs, with very small 
nails on them, and only a tail instead of hind legs, a 
person on shore could very easily keep out of his way, 
7 * 


78 


WILD-FOWL. 


and Jerry and I felt rather foolish at the fright he had 
put us into. We had achieved our victory before Mr. 
Brand and Burkett found their way up to us. As he 
lay not far from the boat, we settled to take his skin 
on our return. Going on, we reached a lake of some 
size, from which vast numbers of teal got up. Jerry 
and I shot several, which made us very proud ; and 
the rest of the party bagged thirty or more between 
them, so that they were pretty well loaded. Before 
long, we again managed to get separated from the rest, 
but we had grown so satisfied with our prowess that 
we were indifferent to consequences. We felt that we 
were not likely to starve, even if we lost our way. I 
was just going to fire at a teal, when Jerry pulled my 
arm, and pointing to an opening in tb'e distance among 
the clumps of grass, I saw the head of a huge bull not 
fifty yards from us, and, as it seemed to us, fast asleep. 
Now Avas the time to show what we could do, so we 
withdrew our small shot and loaded with ball. Like 
North American Indians on a war trail, we crawled 
stealthily towards him. We halted, and resting our 
guns on a bank, fired together. 

“ I am certain I hit him,” cried Jerry. 

“ So am I,” I added — though I was surprised that 
the beast did not move. 

“We’ve killed him,” cried Jerry, as on we rushed, 
expecting to find a rich prize. He lying down 
when we hit him, we saw that. We kept him in sight 
for some way, then we found our further progress some- 
what impeded by the bogginess of the ground. At last 
tve were brought to a stand-still about ten paces from 
our victim. Jerry gave a blank look at me, and I 
looked at him, and burst out laughing. The poor beast 


SHOOT A DEAD BULL. 


79 


was not alive, certainly, but we were innocent of his 
death. He had evidently got into the bog in wet 
weather, and, in vain struggling to free himself, had 
died of starvation. His head was stretched out, as if 
hopelessly longing for the rich food he saw growing not 
thirty yards from him, which yet he could not reach. 
All around the morass were the hoof-marks of his com- 
rades, as if they had been watching him in his dying 
struggles, scampering round and round, perhaps with 
terror, or perhaps thinking how they might help him. 

“ At all events,” exclaimed Jerry, “ we may say we 
hit a huge bull and left him as dead as mutton ; and 
there’s no great harm if the rest go back to look for 
him. We can easily point them out the place by the 
side of the lake.” 

A little further on, we reached a smaller lake, which 
was swarming with birds, — geese, ducks, divers, and 
other wild fowl. Among them were several swans, 
beautifully white, with black necks, which kept swim- 
ming gracefully about like the great lords of the feath- 
ered population among whom they moved. Jerry and 
I were very hungry, so we sat ourselves down to take 
a nibble at our biscuit and cheese, not wishing to dis- 
turb them till our friends should come up to help us 
to slaughter them. We had sat a little while, and 
opened our wallets, when, what was our surprise to 
see the birds swimming together, and landing in num- 
bers below our feet ! Slowly some advanced, as if to 
reconnoitre us, and then others came on, till some hun- 
dreds were within thirty yards of us, evidently wonder- 
ing what strange animals we could be. Then they 
began to talk to each other in a most strange, discordant 
cackle, their voices growing louder and louder, as if they 


60 


TALKATIVE DUCKS. 


were disputing on the subject, and could not settle it 
to their satisfaction. We lay back and watched them, 
highly diverted. Nearer and nearer they approached, 
talking away furiously all the time in tones of wonder 
and surprise, more than in those of anger. 

“I know what they are saying,” whispered Jerry. 
“ 4 Well, these are two strange beings ! How could they 
have come here ? They are not seals, that’s certain, 
for they have legs ; but they don’t look as if they could 
swim with those long, thin projections instead of flap- 
pers ; and assuredly they can’t fly, for they have no 
wings. How can they feed themselves, for they have 
no bills ? and see what great ugly round things they’ve 
got for heads. Evidently they cannot dive or live 
under water. They are not fish, then, nor birds ; for if 
those are feathers growing on their backs, they are 
very rugged and dirty. Well, we pity them ; for they 
are strange beasts, that’s a fact.’ ” 

This quaint notion of Jerry’s tickled my fancy so 
much that I burst into a loud fit of laughter, which 
somewhat startled our flock of visitors ; while Jerry, 
sitting up, hove a stick he had carried all day made 
fast to his side in among them. The missile did not, 
however, make them turn tail ; but, instead, they clus- 
tered thickly round it, and, as if it had been some im- 
pertinent intruder, began pecking at it furiously. As we 
could not carry the birds away, with a praiseworthy 
self-denial, we abstained from firing. When, however, 
we jumped suddenly up and clapped our hands, away 
they scuttled at a great rate, chattering and quacking 
louder than ever. We hoped, however, to reward our- 
selves for our present self-denial, by returning with all 
the party to have a shot at them in the evening. After 


FLY FOR OUR LIVES. 


81 


this we walked on for a mile, and had begun to wonder 
what had become of our companions, and to be a little 
anxious at having missed them, when we were startled 
at hearing a loud roar not three hundred yards from us. 
It was very different from that of the sea lion, and wq 
too soon recognized it as the voice of an angry bulk 
Again the bull bellowed, and this time several other 
bulls lent their voices to the terror-inspiring chorus. 
We ran to the top of the highest mound near us, and 
thence we made out five or six bulls, with their tails up 
in the air, rushing towards us, following one whose 
voice we first heard. The spot on which we stood 
afforded us no protection, for the beasts would have 
rushed up it in a moment, but a couple of hundred yards 
on was a rock with steep sides, just rising above the 
grass ; and our only chance of safety was to climb it 
before the horns of the first bull had reached our backs. 
Had he come directly on, as fast as his legs could carry 
him, this we should have had no chance of doing; but 
instead of that, he every now and then stuck his sharp 
ugly-looking horns into the grass, and tossed it aoove his 
head, as if to show how he intended to treat us when 
he caught us. We rushed on with our eyes fixed on 
the rock, not venturing to look behind, and expecting 
every moment to feel his horns at our backs. We kept 
a tight hold of our guns, but unfortunately dropped o iv 
wallets and the game we had shot. On we ran, and on 
came the bgll ; the rock was a dozen yards oefore us, 
and he was not much further off in our rear. We 
sprang on ; Jerry tripped over a lump of decayed grass, 
but he picked himself up, and, crying to me not to stop, 
followed me. The face of the rock was too perpen- 
dicular directly in front to allow me to get up it. but a 
little to the rigid it was more broken. I sprang towards 


82 


A NARROW ESCAPE. 


the place, and scrambled up. Jerry reached the foot 
of the rock ; the bull was making for the right side, 
where lie had seen me climb up. In another moment 
he would have pinned Jerry to the rock, or tossed him 
•up to me. 

“ Help me ! help me, Harry ! ” he sung out, with 
good reason dreadfully alarmed. I had just time to 
throw myself down at full length, and, by leaning over 
the rock, to seize his hand, before the bull, seeing him, 
with a terrific bellow, made a full butt at him. With a 
strength I did not think myself capable of exerting, I 
hauled him up to me, the bull’s horns actually passing 
between his feet ! In his hurry, however, he dropped 
his gun at the foot of the rock, and the bull vented his 
rage and disappointment by giving it several butts as it 
lay on the ground ; and I was in great hopes that he 
would strike the lock and make it go off — it would 
have astonished him not a little. Jerry almost fainted 
with the fright the brute had given him, but he very 
speedily recovered, and then we looked round to see 
what sort of a place we were on. We found that it was, 
fortunately, inaccessible on all sides ; so we returned 
with much greater composure to watch the proceedings 
of our bovine enemies. The other bulls had now come 
up, with their tails in the air, bellowing at the top of 
their voices, and tearing the ground up on all sides, 
and throwing the grass over their heads. They appeared 
for some reason to be fearfully enraged against us. 
There were seven bulls altogether. Placed in the con- 
venient position we were, we agreed that we could 
easily shoot them, and thus raise the siege; but on 
examining the contents of our pockets, we found that we 
had only got five bullets between us. Now, .supposing 
every bullet to have had in this case its billet, and to 


A FIGHT WITH BULLS. 


83 


have mortally wound 3d an animal, that would have left 
two unprovided for; and even with two we had no 
desire to contend on the level ground. Still we deter- 
mined to do what we could; so I loaded and took a 
steady aim at the beast which had led on the attack. 
The bullet struck him on the head ; but his skull was 
thick, and though it wounded him severely, it did not 
enter his brain. The pain made him tear up the ground 
more furiously, and bellow louder than before. Jerry 
said he would try the next time ; so I loaded, and he 
took the gun. I thought he was going to make a 
good shot, but he was nervous, and the bullet only 
struck the beast’s shoulder, nor did it increase the 
sweetness of his temper. We had thus only three 
bullets, and all our enemies as vicious as ever. The 
most important thing we agreed to be done was to get 
rid of the leader ; so I took the gun again, and carefully 
loading, waited till he made a tilt right up to the face 
of the rock, really looking as if he had been going to 
try and leap up at us. I tried to be perfectly cool, and 
fired. The bullet struck him, I was certain of that, but 
it did not kill him, so I supposed that it had glanced off 
over his head. 

“ I won’t miss again,” I cried, loading as rapidly as 
I could. “ One of our last two bullets must do the deed.” 

Our enemy, on receiving his last wound, turned o_f 
and made a rapid circuit round the rock, to discover, we 
concluded, if there was any place by which he could get 
up at us. Finding none, he returned. As soon as he 
appeared, I took a steady aim, resting the barrel on a 
lump of rock — I fired. Roaring with fury, he bounded 
along towards the rock. I thought he would almost 
have reached us. Suddenly he stopped — down went 


84 


KILL A BULL. 


his head, and over he rolled close under the rock, and 
there he lay stone dead ! We both of us simultaneously 
raised a loud shout of victory; but, as Jerry remarked, 
we began to crow rather too soon, for the other six 
bulls, no way daunted at the fall of their leader, con- 
tinued raging round about us as furiously as ever. We 
had only one bullet left, and with that we could scarcely 
hope even to settle one of them. We sat ourselves 
down watching our enemies, hoping that they would 
grow tired of waiting for us and go away ; but they 
seemed by no means disposed to move. Never did a 
beleaguering army watch more pertinaciously round a 
hard-pressed garrison than did our formidable enemies 
watch to toss us in the air. In vain we stood up and 
looked around on every side for our friends, as far as 
our somewhat limited range of vision extended. There 
was not a sign of them. They, too, would have become 
not a little anxious about us, except Cousin Silas thought 
we were still with Mr. Kilby, and the latter gentleman 
supposed we had joined our other friends. If so, unless 
they met, they would probably not come to look for us. 
As we had taken but a light luncheon, we began to feel 
very hungry, and to cast longing glances at our satchels 
and the teal, which lay at some distance from the rock, 
but which we dared not attempt to get. Not ten feet 
below where we sat was the bull. Jerry looked over 
the rock, — 

“I should so like to have a juicy beefsteak out of 
you, old fellow!” said he, addressing the dead animal. 
“ I say, Harry, don’t you think we could manage to get 
it ? The other brutes will certainly grow hungry before 
long ; and, as they don’t want to eat us, while they are 
picking up their dinners I shall have plenty of time to 


BESIEGED BY THE BULLS. 


85 


get down and cut out a few slices. I have my knife, 
and I sharpened it only yesterday.” 

I had mine also ; and, as I highly approved of his 
suggestion, we resolved to wait a favorable opportunity 
for our exploit. Raw meat was not, however, to our 
taste ; so we agreed to try and light a fire and cook our 
steaks. There was plenty of dry moss and grass on 
the rock, so we set to work and collected all that we 
could find, so that we soon had a famous heap of it, 
sufficient almost to roast the -whole animal. As we 
expected, the bulls, after looking at us for some time, 
feeling the calls of hunger, began to lower their tails, 
and, putting their heads to the ground, commenced to 
munch the tender grass. 

“ Now, if these beasts had been lions and tigers, the 
more hungry they grew the more anxious they would 
have been to get at us. It’s lucky all animals are not 
carnivorous.” 

Having delivered himself of this sagacious remark, 
Jerry said he was ready to turn butcher. We waited, 
however, till the bulls had got a little further off, and 
then he descended on the carcass of our victim, while 1 
bent over the rock, as before, to help him up should 
they appear inclined to tilt at him. Enough steaks 
were cut to dine half a dozen men ; and then, as the 
bulls did not observe him, grown brave from impunity, 
he went on further and picked up his gun. This he 
handed up to me, and it was not much the worse for 
the butting it had got. The bulls were still feeding 
quietly, apparently having forgot all about us. 

“ I say, Harry, I think some biscuits, and rum and 
water would not be bad things with our steaks, not to 
speak of the teal,” said he, looking up at me. “ What 
8 


86 


A FRESH BEEFSTEAK. 


do you advise ? May I venture to run for the satchels 
and some of the game ? ” 

I agreed with him that it would be very desirable to 
have them, and offered to accompany him. 

“ No, no,” he answered, with a knowledge of general- 
ship for which I had not given him credit ; “ do you 
load the gun, and stand by to cover me if I am pursued ; 
you will be ready also to help me up the rock as before. 
If I were to take your place with the gun up there, the 
chances are that 1 should shoot you instead of the bull, 
and that would not do. I’ll go, never fear.” 

Jerry, as will be seen, was a creature of impulse. 
He was as brave as any one when he had time for 
reflection, and saw the necessity for coolness. As soon 
as I had loaded the gun and got ready, keeping his eyes 
on the bulls, he cautiously advanced towards our satchels. 
If a bull lifted his head, he stopped, and crouched down 
to the ground. Then he advanced again on all fours ; 
and so by slow degrees he worked himself up to the 
spot at which he aimed. He seized the things, and 
began to return as slowly as before. It would have 
been well if he had continued his caution, but when he 
had got about half way on his return, he took it into 
his head to run, laughing loudly at the success of his 
exploit. His figure moving alone, and his voice, roused 
the bulls. Up went their tails, and a terrific bellow 
made his laughter cease in a moment. I shouted to 
him to run faster. On he scampered, shouting loudly, 
“Fire, Harry, if you see one of them going to butt!” 
I was all ready, and he bravely held fast our property. 
The bull nearest to him, wildly whisking his tail and 
bellowing louder than ever, was close to him. I was 
in doubt whether or not to fire, lest I should still more 
infuriate the animal should I wound without killing 


A DINNER ON THE ROCK. 


87 


Him. In another moment I saw that there was no 
alternative. His horns were close to Jerry’s back, and 
in an instant he would have had him high up in the 
air. I shouted to Jerry to jump on one side. He fol- 
lowed my advice with wonderful coolness. I fired. 
My bullet hit the bull in the right eye. Down went 
his head, tearing into the ground. He rushed on almost 
close up to the rock, bellowing furiously, ploughing up 
the earth with his horns ; and then, as if he had been 
making a voluntary summerset, he rolled right over, and 
was dead. It was indeed a triumph. I had no time, to 
think about it then. On rushed Jerry, for the other 
bulls were coming up fast. Throwing aside my gun, I 
helped Jerry up the rock with the things he had so 
courageously recovered at the moment the other beasts 
were up to him. 

“ Bravo, Harry ! ” he sung out ; “ you’ve saved my 
life and shot the bull : you are a capital fellow ! ” 

I proposed that we would not compliment each other 
till we had lighted our fire and cooked our steaks. As 
we had now some teal, we added a couple to our repast. 
We had some lucifers, so we soon made a glorious fire. 
Having plucked our teal, we poked them under the 
ashes, while, in true sportsman fashion, we toasted the 
steaks at the end of our ramrod. Having also pepper 
and salt, we had every reason to be satisfied with our 
repast. 

“I say, I wish those other fellows were here,” said 
Jerry. “It would be great fun if they would come, 
thinking we were stuck in a bog, or spiked on the horns 
of bulls, and find us so jollily eating away up here. 
Here’s to your heakh, Harry. May you always make 
as good shots as you did just now, when you saved 
me from the butt of that beast’s head ! Hillo ! have a 


88 


HOW TO ESCAPE. 


bit of your brother ? ” cried he, holding a piece of the 
steak at the end of his ramrod down towards one of the 
bulls, which came snuffing up towards us. 

Thus we went on laughing and joking, perfectly con- 
tented, and thinking only of the present moment. "We 
forgot that our fuel would soon be expended ; that the 
position we occupied would be a very unpleasant one, 
on which to pass a cold and perhaps rainy night ; and 
that our friends would become really alarmed should 
we not make our appearance at the boat. These con- 
siderations did not begin to weigh with us till we had 
finished our dinner. When, however, we had time for 
reflection, we were not quite so well contented with 
olirselves. 

“ This is very good fun,” I remarked, “ but I should 
like to know how we are to get away unless these 
beasts of bulls choose to raise the siege.” 

“ They’ll not do that in a hurry,” answered Jerry. 
“We must wait till night-time, when they can’t see us, 
and then make a run for it.” 

“ But how are we to find our way to the boat in the 
dark ? ” I asked. “ I scarcely know whereabouts she 
lies.” 

“ To the westward, then, I think,” said he. “ If the 
sky is clear we may steer by the stars, and we shall 
manage to find our way.” 

I cannot say that I felt as hopeful as my friend pro- 
fessed to do, still there appeared to be no other means 
of escaping the bulls, and getting back to the boat. 
Should we wait till the morning, the brutes would prob- 
ably espy us, and run a tilt at us as before. We had 
provisions to last us for many days, but we had no 
liquid, with the exception of a little rum and 'water, 
which, although we had carefully husbanded it, was 


A BONFIRE. 


89 


very low in the flask. A breeze bad sprung up from 
the east, and it was already rather cold on the top of 
the rock ; so, making up our fire, we sat down by it. 
We were amused at the way in which the bulls occa- 
sionally came and had a look at us ; as much as, Jerry 
said, to ask, “ Well, when are you coming down to let 
us give you a toss? We don’t intend to go away till 
we’ve tried it on. We are at home here, you know, 
so we are in no hurry.” Provoked, as he declared, at 
their impudence, he at last seized a bundle of burning 
grass which he had twisted into a torch, and when a 
bull came near he hove it at his head. The flaming 
mass caught on his horns, and certainly had the effect 
of making him turn tail, and rush bellowing off from 
the rock ; but it had another effect, and a most disas- 
trous one, on which we had not calculated. Galloping 
on, the animal very soon freed himself from his burning 
head-dress by sending it into the middle of a large 
clump of tussac grass. . 

“ Hurrah ! the brute Was made a famous bonfire ! ” 
exclaimed Jerry, clapping his hands as he saw the 
bright flames burst out from the easily ignited grass. 

“ Larger than we may bargain for,” I remarked, as 
in another instant' fanned by the wind, the. fire began 
to run along the ground, and a neighboring clump broke 
forth into a furious blaze. 

“ Well, that is a bonfire ! ” cried Jerry, still not 
comprehending the extent of the mischief he had com- 
menced ; but it was not long before he also saw with 
me what was going to occur. On went the fire, run- 
ning along th§ ground as if it had been strewed with 
gunpowder — then for an instant playing round some 
tall clump, out of which directly afterwards 1 forked 
8 * 


90 


THE SIEGE RAISED. 


flames darted forth, and quickly reduced it to ashes, 
while thick volumes of smoke curled upwards to the 
sky. No sooner did the bulls scent the smoke than 
up went their tails, and with loud bellows they dashed 
off through the grass, trampling it down in their fright. 

“ Now is our time ! ” I exclaimed ; the siege is 
raised ; let us make the best of our way to the boat.” 

Following the impulse of the moment, we seized our 
guns and the birds we had shot, and leaping off the 
rock, began to run in an opposite direction to that 
which the bulls had taken. 

“ Hurrah ! the bulls are off. There they go like mad 
things, with their tails up in the air ! ” exclaimed Jerry, 
as we ran on. “ I did it finely — didn’t I ? That bon- 
fire was a capital idea. We’ve killed two, and the rest 
won’t be in such a hurry to butt at people in future.” 

On we scampered, but we had not gone twenty paces 
before I seized Jerry’s arm and came to a stand-still, 
looking with dismay at the scene before us. The 
flames, blown by the wind, had caught the neighboring 
clumps of tall grass. Dry as tinder, they were blazing 
up furiously. Our further progress was completely 
barred by the fierce flames which were rapidly ex- 
tending on every side, and even tffen running along 
the ground towards us. We had already passed over 
a quantity of dry grass which, in another moment, 
might be on fire, and then all hope of escape would be 
lost. 

“ Back, back ! ” I exclaimed — “ to the rock, to the 
rock ! It is our only place of safety.” 

With frantic speed we rushed back, the fierce flames, 
like hissing serpents, close on our heels. Hotter and 
hotter became the air - — more dense and suffoeating the 
emoke. Blinded and confused by it, we could scarcely 


A FEARFUL ENEMY. 


91 


find our way. A trip over the tangled grass-stalks 
we knew would be fatal. The flames were already 
scorching our backs. On either side we saw them 
leaping upwards round the tall tufts off dry herbage. 
We shrieked with pain and terror. The rock was 
reached, but to scale its steep sides seemed beyond our 
power. With a strength I did not believe myself to 
possess, I seized Jerry and hoisted him up. Grasping 
the clumps of grass and rugged lumps of rock, he 
scrambled to the top, and then leaning over, lent me 
his hand, and dragged me after him. Horror of what 
might be my fate enabled me to do what I otherwise 
could not have accomplished. At the same moment 
that I reached the top of the rock, the whole sur- 
rounding surface of the ground below became a sea of 
raging fire — leaping, tossing, hissing, roaring, the flames 
blown here and there by the wind; it was like the 
ocean in a storm. The devouring element came cir- 
cling round us, the bright flames darting up like the 
tongues of huge serpents eager to make us their prey. 
Bewildered by the scorching heat and black circles of 
smoke, we were nearly falling back into the fiery sea. 
I felt that I could not much longer retain my senses. 
I seized Jerry’s arm, and dragging him back, we re- 
treated towards the centre of the rock. Even there the 
heat was so intense, and the smoke so suffocating, that 
it was with difficulty we could breathe. 

“ This is dreadful ! ” he exclaimed faintly. “ Harry, 
I cannot stand it — I am going to die.” Saying this, 
he sunk gasping to the ground. At the same time I 
felt an agonizing sensation in my chest, and fully be- 
lieving that the same fate as his was about to overtake 
me also, I dropped down senseless by his side* 


92 


ADVENTURE AMONG TH1J FALKLANDS- 



CHAPTER V. 

OUR BOAT ADVENTURE AMONG THE FALKLANDS. 

A current of cool air was passing over the face of 
the rock, I conclude, for, to my no small satisfaction, I 
discovered that I was alive, and could very speedily sit 
up. The sight which met my sight, however, was 
terrific in the extreme. Far as the eye could reach, 
the whole country was in a blaze, the flames crackling 
and hissing as they fiercely attacked clump after clump 
of the tall tussac grass, while the ground over which 
they had passed was charred and blackened, the glob- 
ular masses of the bog balsam glowing with fervent 
heat. The flames also still burned brightly close round 
us, and I saw no means by which we could escape from 
our position. As soon as I had collected my thoughts, I 
remembered my companion. I found a few drops of 
spirits and water in our flask. I poured them down his 
throat. He looked up. 

“ What ! am I still alive ? ” he muttered faintly. 
“ Oh, the bulls and the fire; what’s going to happen 
next?” 

“ That is more than I can tell you exactly,” I an- 
swered; “but I suppose, in time, the fire will burn 
itself out, and then we may get away from this. Let 
us watch it meantime. It is worth looking at.” 

In a short time, after a few sighs, Jerry lifted up his 


ANXIETY FOR OUR FRIENDS. 


93 


head from the ground, and sat up. The sight at which 
we gazed was especially grand when a fresh puff of 
wind sent the flames rolling along, and throwing up 
forked flashes, as they found new fuel to feed on. All 
the beasts it had encountered, had, of course, fled, 
terror-inspired, before it ; but numberless young birds 
must have been destroyed, and we saw hundreds of 
their parents hovering over the spot where their nests 
had been, in the vain effort to save their offspring. 
Some we saw fall into the flames, either from having 
their wings singed from approaching too near, or by 
being suffocated with the smoke. When we saw the 
effects of the fire, we were doubly thankful that we 
had not attempted to make our way across the island. 
Once surrounded by that fiery furnace, we must have 
been, to a certainty, burned to death. Suddenly a 
dreadful thought occurred to me. 

“ Jerry,” I exclaimed, “ where can our friends be all 
this time ? Is it possible that they can have been 
among the grass, and that the fire may have caught 
them up ? Good Cousin Silas, and Mr. Burkett, and 
jolly Mr. Kilby. Poor fellows ! we may be much 
better off than they are.” 

“Oh, don’t talk about it,” said Jerry, shuddering; 
“ It is too dreadful. I hope — I hope they will have 
got into a place of safety. Poor fellows ! and it was 
all my doing. Do you know, Harry, I think we ought 
tc pray for them. They may be requiring aid which 
no mortal mail can give them.” 

“Yes, indeed,” said I; “we ought — let us.” And 
together we knelt down on the hard rock, surrounded 
by the roaring flames, the thick black smoke curling 
around us, and sometimes almost suffocating us ; and 


94 


A PRAYER FOR HELP. 


most earnestly did we offer up our prayers for the 
safety of our friends, and for our own ; and most 
thankful did we feel that we had been preserved from 
the dangers into which we had been thrown. I pity 
the person who is ashamed to acknowledge that he 
prays for protection both for himself and those he cares 
for. How should we go through the world without the 
protection of an all-merciful God ? Often and often I 
have had proof of how utterly unable we are to take 
care of ourselves. Among the many blessings and 
advantages I have enjoyed, is that of having had 
parents who taught me to pray, and not to be ashamed 
of praying. At school, when some poor, weak, foolish 
boys were afraid to kneel down by their bedsides to 
say their prayers, my brothers and I always persevered 
in the practice ; and very soon we put to shame those 
who tried to interrupt us, — and not only we ourselves, 
but other boys who did the same, were, from that time, 
never interfered with. Sure I am that our prayers 
were heard, and that the blessings we prayed for in 
earnestness and simplicity were given us. When we 
rose from our knees, we found our courage much in- 
creased. The occasion had made us serious, and re- 
minded us of our duties. I wish that it had been 
always so, that it were still always so ; but even now, 
as I write, I feel how much day after day I have left 
undone of what I ought to have done. Is it not so 
with all of us? Then what necessity is there for 
prayer for strength from above, to enable us to do 
our duty. I say again, don’t be ashamed. Pray 
always ; and if it is for your good, what you ask with 
faith God will most assuredly give you. He has said 
it, and his promises never fail. 


MAGNIFICENCE OF THE CONFLAGRATION. 95 


Night was now approaching, but we could yet see 
no prospect of our escaping from our present position. 
The darkness, as it came on, served to brighten the 
effect of the fire ; and as we gazed round on every side, 
as far as the eye could reach, we could see only the 
bright glare of the conflagration as it went on widening 
its circle round us. Now and then, as it reached spots 
more thickly covered with clumps of tussac grass, we 
could see the flames rushing upwards in pyramids of 
fire ; but in other places a dense, fierce glow could 
alone be perceived as the fiery wave receded from us. 
The sight we beheld was certainly a very grand one, 
and not easily to be forgotten ; but our position was 
far from pleasant, and we would thankfully have found 
ourselves on board the schooner, or even in the boat 
under shelter of a sail. Our clothes were scorched, 
and so were our hands and feet ; we were getting very 
hungry, and no fuel remained to enable us to cook our 
provisions, while now that the fire was removed from 
us, the sharp wind made us feel very cold. When we 
considered the small area of the rock which had been 
at one time like an island amid the fiery ocean, we had 
more reason than ever to be thankful that we had 
escaped destruction. On further examination of the 
locality, we discovered that the proximate cause of our 
escape was owing to the position of the rock near a 
piece of water, the extent of which we perceived when 
the fire in our neighborhood had burned itself out. A 
narrow belt of grass only intervened between the rock 
and the water, the rest of the ground being a marsh 
covered with moist rushes, which did not burn. As the 
wind had for the greater part of the time blown over 
the pond, we were thus saved from suffocation. Had 


90 


OUR NIGHT ON THE ROCK- 


the rock been thickly surrounded by high grass, I think 
that we must have been burned to death ; for, blown by 
the wind, the flames would have reached the very 
centre of the rock, where we lay ; and had we not been 
roasted, we should have been suffocated by the smoke. 
We crouched down on the rock, and sat for some time 
without speaking, watching the progress of the flames. 
The ground around us was still glowing with the re- 
mains of the fire. How long we had sat silent I do not 
know, when Jerry exclaimed with animation, — 

“ I say, Harry, why shouldn’t we have a steak off our 
old friend the bull? He must be pretty well done 
through by this time.” 

“ We will try him, at all events,” said I ; and descend- 
ing the rock, we very soon had some fine slices of beef 
out of him. Finding that the ground was sufficiently 
cooled to allow our walking on it without burning our 
shoes, we advanced with our steaks stuck at the end of 
our ramrods to a glowing heap of bog balsam. Kicking 
it up with our feet, it soon sent forth a heat amply 
sufficient to cook our already half-roasted steaks. When 
they were done, collecting our guns, and bags, and game, 
we sat down on the lee-side of the rock, and speedily 
silenced the cravings of hunger. We should have been 
glad of something to drink, but we were not yet suffi- 
ciently thirsty to induce us to get water from the pond. 
We felt very tired after all the exercise we had taken, 
and the excitement we had gone through during the 
day ; but we were afraid to go to sleep lest the bulls 
should wander back, or something else happen, we knew 
not what ; besides, the anxiety about our friends kept 
us awake. At last, however, as we sat shoulder to 
shoulder under the rock, sleep stole imperceptibly on 


SET OFF FOR THE COAST. 


97 


us, and I do not think that I ever enjoyed a sounder 
slumber than I did that night. When we awoke we 
rubbed our eyes, not knowing where we were. It was 
broad day-light. We rose to our feet, and after stretch- 
ing our cramped limbs, we climbed to the top of- the 
rock to look about us. The fire still raged over part 
of the island, which was enveloped in thick wreaths 
of black smoke ; but to the west we caught sight of the 
blue sea, sparkling brightly in the sunshine, the inter- 
vening space being free from flames, though presenting 
a surface of black ashes, not a blade of grass, apparently, 
having escaped the conflagration. We thought, too, 
that we recognized a point round which the schooner 
had come just before dropping us in the boat* This 
encouraged us to hope that we might not be very far 
distant from the place where, we had landed. Without 
waiting, therefore, for breakfast, we determined at once 
to set off. 

“ Let us take some beef, though,” exclaimed Jerry ; 
u It will prove that by our own prowess we have killed 
a bull, at all events.” 

The slices of beef were speedily cut, therefore, and 
strung on over our shoulders, and, like two young 
Robinson Crusoes, we set off in the hopes of soon re- 
lieving our anxiety about our friends. Nothing could 
be more melancholy than the appearance of the country 
through which we passed, — cinders and blackness on 
every side. Every now and then we nearly tumbled 
into a glowing heap of bog balsam. It was sad, too, to 
see the number of nests, some with eggs in thetn, and 
others with young birds completely roasted ; indeed, 
we passed many old birds burned to cinders. At last 
we struck the shore, but the face of nature had been so 
9 


98 


A DREADFUL SURMISE. 


completely altered by the fire, that we were uncertain 
whether it was to the north or south of the creek at 
which we had landed. At last we agreed that we 
were to the south of the spot we wished to reach, so 
we stood along the beach to the north. We had not 
got far before we saw a little way inland, where the 
grass had been, two black masses. We grasped each 
other’s arms. Were they the figures of men? Trem- 
bling with fear, we hurried towards them. Though 
burned to cinders, still we had no difficulty in recogniz- 
ing them as two seals. The poor things, stupefied and 
astonished by the fire, had probably had no time to 
waddle into the water before it had overtaken them. 
Perhaps seals, like fish, are attracted by fire, and the 
foolish animals had thought it a fine sight to behold. 
We had taken no breakfast, and were beginning to feel 
the want of food, but at the same time we were so 
thirsty, that we did not feel as if we could eat. There 
was plenty of salt water ; but that was not tempting, 
and would only have increased our suffering. Jerry 
sat himself down on the beach and said he could go no 
further ; burl urged him to continue on, in .the hopes 
that we might come, soon upon a stream of .water, 
I remember even then being struck by the immense 
quantities of kelp which fringed the shore. The long 
/eaves and roots, where left by the tide, looked like pieces 
of thick brown leather ; and we agreed that cups, and 
bowls, and all sorts of things might be made out of it. 
Kelp is a species of sea-weed of gigantic size, and its 
sturdy stems have been known to reach the surface 
from a depth of nearly 300 feet; some of the wide- 
spreading weeds looking like tanned hides extended on 
the surface. Its roots cling with a powerful gripe to 


DISCOVERED BY A FRIEND. 99 

Y 

the rocks, on which alone it grows. Some of the stems 
are sufficiently strong to moor a boat with. I had a 
knife, the handle of which was made by simply sticking 
the hilt of the blade into a piece of the root while it 
was wet: when the kelp dried the blade was firmly 
fixed in it. We had not gone far when a rippling 
sound saluted our ears ; and running on, we found a 
bright, sparkling stream gurgling out of the bank. We 
put our mouths down to the spot where it gushed out, 
and oh, how we enjoyed the cool, pure draught ! Noth- 
ing could then have been more gratifying to pur taste. 
We found this gave a remarkably keen edge to our 
appetites ; so we sat down by the stream and produced 
a piece of the steak we had cooked the previous evening, 
and the remains of our biscuit. While discussing them, 
Jerry exclaimed that he saw something galloping along 
the shore. 

“ Is it a bull ? ” I asked, thinking that we might 
have to decamp, and looking out for a place of safety. 

“It comes on very fast,” he answered. I jumped 
up, for I was sitting a little below him, and looked i? 
the direction he pointed. 

“ It’s old Surlejr ! it’s old Surley ! ” I shouted. “ Our 
friends cannot be far off.” 

On came the old dog, and was very soon jumping 
up and licking our hands and faces, and wagging his 
tail, till it looked as if he would wag it off. He seemed 
in no way displeased at receiving a piece of beef ; and as 
soon as he had got it he began to trot off with it in his 
mouth in the direction from which he had come. After 
going a few yards, however, he stopped and turned half 
round, and wagged his tail, as much as to say, “ Come 
along with me; I trotted all the way on purpose tc 
fetch you.” 


100 


A COLONY OF BIRDS 


We took up our guns to show that we were about to 
follow, and on this he began to jump, and frisk about, 
and bark, to exhibit his satisfaction, and then he stopped 
and went on a little, and then stopped again to see that 
we were following. In great hopes that he w^as leading 
us to our friends, we went on as fast as we could walk. 
Our path led us under some cliffs which were literally 
crowded with penguins, and young albatrosses or molli- 
mauks. There was a regular encampment or rookery 
of them, extending for 500 or 600 yards in length, 
and from one to two dozen in breadth. The nests of 
the albatrosses were nearly a foot high, and of a cup- 
like form. Feathers were just beginning to spread on 
the backs and wings of the young birds, and to take 
the place of the down with which they had originally 
been covered. Old Surley passed by without taking 
any notice of them. When we approached the spots 
they set up a loud gabbling, and spouted out an oily 
substance at us. The pehguins were much more digni- 
fied, and looked at us with silent contempt. The 
surface of the sea near at hand was covered with the 
parent birds, and the air was alive with them, as they 
flew backward and forward to carry food to their 
young ; but as, following old Surley’s example, we did 
not attempt to molest their broods, they took no notice 
of us. The penguins were the most numerous, and 
appeared to be the original inhabitants of the spot. 
They were arranged with great regularity, those having 
just broken the shell being together, as were those with 
their feathers appearing, and also those expecting soon 
to fly. Never had I seen so many birds together. How- 
ever, we were too anxious about our friends to stop, 
so we hurried on after old Surley. From the steady 


DISCOVER OUR BOAT. 


101 


way in which he proceeded, we felt surd that he was 
leading us in the right direction. Nor were we de- 
ceived. Before long we recognized the creek where 
we landed, and soon we reached the boat drawn up on 
the shore. We rushed towards her to discover if ou^ 
friends had lately been there. We examined hei 
thoroughly ; but after all we could not decide the point 
Thus we remained as anxious as ever. While, however 
we were engaged in this manner, we had not watched 
old Surley, and when we looked up he was gone. Just 
before we got into the boat, , Jerry’s cap had tumbled 
off, and when he wanted to put it on again, though 
we hunted about in every direction, it was nowhere to 
be found. At first we thought of continuing our search 
for our friends, but we soon agreed that it would be 
wiser to stay where we were ; that if they had escaped 
they would certainly return to the boat, and that if we 
went in search of them, the so doing would only delay 
our meeting. Being somewhat tired, therefore, we 
got into the boat, and drawing the sail over the after 
part, we lay down in the stern-sheets and were soon 
fast asleep. We were both awoke by old Surley’s 
bark, and jumping up, we saw Mr. Brand with his 
other two companions running along the beach. We 
jumped out of the boat and hurried to meet them. 
Mr. Brand had Jerry’s cap in his hand, which old 
Surley had carried with him to show that he had 
found us. We speedily narrated our adventures to 
each other. They had been dreadfully alarmed on our 
account. It turned out as we had supposed, — Mr. 
Kilby had reached the sea-shore by himself, thinking 
that we were with the other party, while they sup- 
posed we were with him. However, they had not been 


102 


old sublet’s sagacity. 


very anxious about us till they saw the ^conflagration 
burst out, and guessed that we were by some means 
the cause of it. They were on their way to look for 
•us, but the flames, like some mighty torrent, rushed 
towards them. They had with frantic haste to dart 
through the clumps of tussac and penguin grass to 
reach the beach. They hurried to the boat, and had 
barely time to leap into her and shove off, before the 
flames, fanned by the wind, came crackling and hissing 
up after them, and would very probably have set her 
on fire. Cousin Silas was almost in despair about us, 
and Mr. Kilby told me that he said he should never 
forgive himself if we came to harm. They were much 
interested with the account we gave them of our adven- 
tures, and as it was time for dinner, we agreed to cook 
and eat the trophies we had brought with us — the 
beef-steaks — before putting to sea. We were amused 
at finding that we had committed an illegal act in 
killing the bulls ; but, as it was in self-defence, it was 
agreed that the act was justifiable. 

It had been arranged that we were to rejoin the 
schooner on the evening of this day, at a point of land 
running out from an island a little to the west of where 
we now were, unless the weather should prove bad ; in 
which case she was to come in for us. The weather, 
however, was very fine, so, making sail, we stood across 
the channel. The station to which she had gone was 
three or four miles further to the south. The water 
was very clear, and as we passed through the kelp we 
ooked down in some places where it grew less thickly, 
and could see its vast stems and branches with their 
huge leaves springing up from the depth of many 
fathoms, like a forest of submarine oaks or Spanish 


SEA-WEED FORESTS. 


103 


chestnuts. We were amused with the flight of some of 
the ducks we put up. Mr: Burkett called them logger- 
heads, racers, or steamers. Their wings will not lift 
them from the water, but whirling them round and round 
they went scuttling and waddling away over the sur- 
face at a rapid rate, generally two and two, the loving 
husband and his wife, leaving a deep furrow in the 
water behind them. We burst into fits of laughter at 
the ridiculous manner in which they moved. They are 
fat and fishy, and not at all fit for food. I never ex- 
pected to have seen more birds together than we had 
passed at the rookery, under the cliffs, in the morning; 
but we sailed by an island, of which birds of all de- 
scriptions had taken entire possession. There were 
various species of ducks, and geese, and snipe, and teal, 
and shags, and greves, and penguins, and albatrosses, 
and sea-rooks, and oyster-catchers, and gulls with pink 
breasts, and many others, of whose names I have no 
note. As we believed that we had plenty of time, we 
landed near some cliffs, to have a nearer look at them. 
So tame were they that we could knock down as many 
as we liked with our sticks ; but it was murderous work, 
and as we did not want them to eat — indeed many 
were not fit for eating — we soon desisted from it. 

Near where we landed the cliffs ran out into the sea, 
forming natural docks, and in one of these cliffs we dis- 
covered a large cavern, which seemed to run a great 
way under the ground. By climbing along the ledges 
of the rocks, somewhat slippery with sea-weed, at no 
little risk of a ducking, we got to the mouth of the 
cavern. The sides were composed of ledges rising one 
above another, and every available spot, as far as the 
eye could penetrate, was occupied by shags and divers, 


104 jerky’s ride on a sea-el EKHANT. 

Riid other sea-fowls. There were thousands — there 
might have been millions of them, if the cavern ran, 
back as far as we supposed it did. They in no way 
seemed alarmed at our intrusion, but allowed us to kick 
them over, without attempting to escape. However, 
at last, old Surley found his way after us, and his 
appearance created the wildest hurly-burly and confu 
sion. Such clapping of wings, and hurrying to and fro 
and quacking, and shrieking, and whirling here and 
there, was never seen among a feathered community. 
They must have been very glad when we took our 
departure. 

We had got into high spirits with our walk, and 
had begun to forget all about the bulls and the fire, 
when, as Jerry and I were in advance scrambling along 
the shore, we saw, basking a little way inland among 
some tussac grass, a huge animal. 

“ Why, there is an elephant ! ” I exclaimed, starting 
back, “ or a live mammoth, or something of that sort. 
I don’t like his look, I own.” 

However, screwing up our courage, we advanced 
cautiously toward the monster, as he seemed no way 
disposed to move at our approach. Then we halted and 
examined him more narrowly. He was alive, for we 
saw his eye complacently looking at us, as Diogenes 
might have looked out of his tub at the passing crowd. 
He was fully twenty feet long, with a huge unwieldy 
body and a big head. The most curious thing about 
his head was a huge nose, or trunk rather, which hung 
down nearly half a foot below the upper jaw. His skin 
was covered with short hair of a light dun color, and he 
had a tail and fins like a seal. While we were still 
in doubt what he could be, Mr. Kilby overtook us, 


HIS STEED ESCAPES. 


105 


and laughingly seizing our hands ran up behind the 
monster. 

“Are you for a ride?” he exclaimed; and before 
Jerry suspected what was going to happen he found 
himself seated on the monster’s tail ! “ There you go, 

on the back of a sea-elephant,” exclaimed Mr. Kilby, 
giving the beast a poke with his stick. “ Hold on 
tight, and he can’t hurt you.” 

Jerry did hold on, not knowing whether to laugh or 
shriek out with fear. Away crawled, or whalloped 
rather, the elephant towards the water, Mr. Kilby and 
I keeping alongside, ready to catch Jerry should he 
fall off. I soon saw T there was no real danger, except 
the monster should roll round, when his weight would 
kill any one under him. Jerry also instantly entered 
into the joke of the thing, and was delighted with the 
idea of being able to boast that he had ridden on a sea- 
elephant. 

“ I shall be carried off into the depths of the ocean, 
and you, Mr. Kilby, will have to be answerable to my 
disconsolate father,” he sang out, half laughing and 
half crying. “ Good-by, Harry ; a pleasant voyage to 
you round the world. May you not be spirited away 
by a sea-monster like this. Oh ! oh ! help me off, 
though ! — he’ll have me into the sea to a certainty, and 
then he’ll turn round and gobble me up — he will. 1 
know he will.” 

As the beast approached the beach, lest the joke 
might be carried too far, we lent him a hand to dis- 
mount, while his steed crawled on as sedately as before 
into the water, and, as he swam off, turned round his 
head, as much as to say, “ Hillo, master, are you not 
coming too ? Just try it, and see how you like a swim 


106 


OUR VOYAGE IN THE BOAT. 


with me.” Mr. Kilby told us that this animal had 
probably been sick, and had remained behind while his 
companions had taken to the sea, which they always do 
on the approach of summer. In autumn they come on 
shore, and live in large herds in marshy places by the 
sides of rivers, eating grass like cattle. The females, 
which are without the snout, suckle their young, of 
which they have generally two at a time. As they are 
very slow in their movements, to afford themselves time 
to escape they have sentinels posted while they are 
feeding, whose duty is to give notice of approaching 
danger. They are very good-tempered and inoffensive, 
though the mothers will attack those who molest their 
young. Mr. Kilby told us of a man who had his leg 
bitten off by a female, while he was attempting to carry, 
away her cub. We now once more took to the boat. 
We had not been long under weigh before I saw Mr 
Burkett looking up anxiously at the sky. 

“ I don’t quite like the look of the weather,” he 
remarked. He had been a sailor, and had long been 
cruising about the islands. He was therefore our pilot 
on the present occasion. “ Brand, can you make out 
the schooner anywhere?” Cousin Silas replied that 
he could nowhere see her. “ Then something has de- 
layed her at the station,” observed Burkett. “ As the 
tide is making in that direction, and the wind is fair, 
we’ll run down there instead of crossing the channel 
to the point proposed.” 

This plan was agreed to, though it might have been 
wiser had we kept to our original purpose. For some 
time we made fine weather of it, but getting into another 
channel, we found the wind first scant, and then directly 
against us. We had consequently no choice but to 


BOAT CAPSIZED. 


107 


attempt to beat up to the station. This delayed us 
much beyond the time we expected to get there. We 
of course kept a bright look-out for the schooner, lest 
she should pass us ; but evening was closing in apace, 
and still we had a long way to go. However, Mr. 
Burkett said he knew exactly where we were, and that 
we should be able before long to make out a light in 
one of the cottages, which would guide us to the station. 
So we kept a press of sail on the boat, and looked out 
for the light. The boat stood well up to her canvas, 
but after passing high cliffs, and opening a channel 
from the sea, a sudden squall took her, and before we 
had time to cast of the sheet, she was over on her beam 
ends. Cousin Silas whipped out his knife and tried to 
cut the main-sheet, while I let go the head sheets, and 
Burkett jammed down the helm ; but it was too late, — 
over went the boat. Our ballast, happily, consisting, 
of water casks, she did not sink, though she turned 
bottom upwards. It was a moment of intense horror 
and dismay. I felt myself under the boat, entangled in 
the rigging ! I had no time for thought. I felt that 
death had come, far away from home and friends. The 
next moment I was dragged out and placed on the 
keel — Cousin Silas was my preserver. Where was 
poor Jerry, though? Again Silas dived and brought 
him to the surface, handing him up near me. Mr. 
Kilby and Mr. Burkett were clinging on to the gun- 
wale, and now they all climbed up ; and there we sat, 
our lives for the moment preserved, but with very 
grave apprehensions as to what should become of us. 
Old Surley, when the boat capsized, kept swimming 
round her; and when we climbed up on her bottom, 
he followed our example, sitting as grave j** a 


108 


ENDEAVORS TO RIGHT THE BOAT. 


thinking it was all right. Had we been near inhabited 
shores, or in a channel frequented by vessels, we might 
have had some hope of being rescued ; but the schooner 
was the only vessel we could expect to pass that way, 
and the chances of her seeing us appeared very remote. 
Happily the wind fell, and there was not much sea, or 
we should have been washed off our insecure hold. 
The* current was running very strong, and Burkett was 
of opinion that it would drift us down towards the 
station ; but it was a question whether we could reach 
the place before the tide turned, and whether we should 
get near enough to it to make our cries heard. These 
discussions occupied us for some time, and perhaps 
assisted to divert our minds from the very awful posi- 
tion in which we were placed. Jerry and I were sit- 
ting near each other astride on the keel at the after 
part of the boat. Cousin Silas had climbed up over 
the bows, while Burkett and Kilby hung on, lying their 
full length amidships. 

“ I say, Brand, don’t you think we could manage to 
right the boat?” said Burkett. “If we could do it 
we might paddle on shore somewhere, and we should, 
at all events, have no fear of starving.” 

“We’ll try what can be done,” answered Cousin 
Silas, slipping off into the water, and we following his 
example. “All ready now — heave away.” We hove 
in vain. The sail, and something else heavy, which 
had got foul of the rigging, prevented us righting her. 

“We must give it up, I fear,” cried Burkett at last. 
“The oars went adrift, I fear; and as we have no hats 
among us, we should have nothing to bail her out 
with.” 

As it happened, we all wore light sea-caps, which 


DRIFTING OUT TO SEA. 


109 


would have helped us very little in getting rid of the 
water. With sad hearts we had to abandon the attempt, 
and again to climb up into our places, considerably 
exhausted with the efforts we had made. Nigbt was 
now coming on rapidly, and the darkness which grew 
round us much increased the horrors of our position. 

“One thing I have to tell you,” said Burkett, — 
“ there is always a light kept burning at the station. If 
we sight it, we shall know whereabouts we are, and be 
able to calculate our chances of reaching the shore.” 

This, however, I thought very poor consolation. The 
light could be of no use to us unless the tide took us 
near enough to it to allow of our voices being heard 
on shore. Fortunately we could still distinguish the 
dim outline of the coast as we drifted by, or we should 
not have known in what direction to look out for the 
expected light. Cousin Silas saj$I very little — he was 
anxiously looking out for the beacon, to us of such 
vital importance. How dreadful, indeed, was our situa- 
tion ! I dared not think — I dared not hqj^e to escape 
— still I dared not turn my eye to the future\ I waited 
with a sort of apathetic indifference to the result. Ho 
light appeared ; the current was evidently setting us 
through the centre of the passage out to sea, in the 
direction of that storm-surrounded promontory, Cape 
Horn. We must abandon even the remote prospect 
of being drifted on shore on one of the southern por- 
tions of the Falklands. For some time there was a 
complete silence among us. It was broken by Cousin 
Silas. 

“ My friends,” said he, in a calm, grave tone, but 
without a sign of agitation, “ has it occurred to you 
that we may soon be called upon to die ? Are you 
10 


no 


ARE YOU PREPARED? 


prepared for death ? Are you ready to stand in the 
presence of the Judge of all the earth ? ” 

No one answered him. What were their thoughts 
I do not know. Mine were very terrible. I thought 
how hard it was for those young as Jerry and I were, 
to be summoned to leave the beautiful world which we 
expected to enjoy so much. I forgot that numbers 
young as ourselves had been called away. 

“ It is a fact we should all of us attempt to realize,” 
continued Silas. “ We must be judged. Have we gone 
to the Fountain which washes away all sins, to be 
cleansed from our iniquities ? Do you trust on Christ, 
and Christ alone, as our Saviour, who will acknowledge 
us as his disciples — who will present us purified from 
our sins for acceptance by the Father ? My dear 
friends, I put before you these great truths, because 
our happiness or our misery for that eternity which 
we are now approaching depends on them. On what 
do you trust? Oh, be able to give a satisfactory answer 
before it is too late.” 

I will not give the conversation which followed. It 
was very brief. The result was, that each of us turned 
ourselves to prayer, and prayed as we had never prayed 
before. Had we even been more disposed to levity 
than we were, we could not but have felt the earnest* 
ness of the appeal made to us — the importance of the 
subject — the awful truths uttered by our companion. 
Darker grew the night — the sea-birds screamed above 
as — the distant cliffs grew dimmer, their outline less 
distinct — the rushing tide carried us rapidly onwards 
• — the cold wind pierced through our wet clothes, and 
Bent the spray dashing over us. Shivering, benumbed, 
hungry and faint, I felt as if I could no longer retain 


ANTICIPATIONS OF DEATH. 


Ill 


my hold. Death — death, I thought, was truly approach- 
ing. Still, notwithstanding all Cousin Silas had said, 
I did not so much picture the future ; I did not even 
dread it as I mourned for what I was leaving — the dis- 
tant home I loved so well, and all those who so dearly 
loved me. I thought of the anxiety the uncertainty of 
my fate would occasion, the grief when they learned 
the truth ; and bitter tears burst from my eyes, not for 
myself, but for them I loved. I mention the state of 
my mind and feelings on this awful occasion for a very 
important object. It agrees with my own experience, 
and all I have heard from others placed in similar 
situations ; — a person who has been living unprepared 
for death, for eternity, cannot on a sudden change the 
whole current of his thoughts, and fix them on the 
awful state into which he is hurrying. If he has not 
before found peace with God, there is little hope that 
he will seek it then. Oh no ! the time to do that is 
while we have health and strength, and hope to have a 
long life before us to be consecrated / to him. He has 
an eternity prepared for us — are we to give him alone 
the dregs of our short span of life ? He gave us every- 
thing — are we to return him only a few hurried prayers 
and ejaculations of sorrow? We cry out for mercy — 
on what do we ground our expectations of receiving 
it? Remember that God is. a just God — what, in 
justice, do we deserve ? Oh ! remember also that “ in 
such an hour as ye think not, the Son of man cometh ; 
and as you value your happiness for eternity, say not 
in your heart, “ My Lord delayetli his coming.” I was 
thinking of home, and all I loved there. Suddenly a 
shout brought my thoughts back to the sad reality ot 
our own position. 


112 


A LIGHT ON SHORE. 


“ The light ! the light ! — there it is — I see it clearly,” 
exclaimed Jerry, whose bright eyes had been constantly 
on the watch for the Jooked-for beacon. 

“ Where ? where ? ” we all simultaneously cried out. 

“ At a right angle with the boat’s keel, as she now 
lies, on the port-side. There — there, it is quite bright.” 

All of us looked intently in the direction he indi- 
cated. There was the light — there could be no doubt 
about it, beaming forth cheerfully through the dark- 
ness. It was still a mile or more to the south along 
the shore past which we were drifting, and we cer- 
tainly were nearly a mile, if not a full mile, from the 
coast. 

“ How near do you judge that we shall drift to the 
station ? ” asked Cousin Silas of Burkett. 

He considered a little — “ Not much nearer than we 
now are,” he answered. ' 

“ What chance, then, have we of making ourselves 
heard, and getting help from them ? ” again asked 
Cousin Silas. 

“ None,” said Burkett, in a sad tone. 

“ Then it must be done ! ” exclaimed Cousin Silas, 
in a firm tone. “Friends, one of us must endeavor 
to reach the shore by swimming. The risk is great. 
It is a long way, but it is the only means by which we 
may be saved. The strongest and best swimmer must 
make the attempt.” 

“ I wish that I were a better swimmer than I am,” 
said Burkett, “ but I do not think I could do it.” 

“I am but a poor one — I know that I could not,” 
added Kilby with a sigh. 

“I’ll try, Mr. Brand,” cried Jerry ; “ I can float for 
ever so long, if I can’t swim all the way.” 


COUSIN SILAS SWIMS TOWARD SHORE. 113 

“ I’ll go with you,” said I, preparing to throw off my 
clothing as Jerry was doing. 

“No, no; neither of you lads must go,” exclaimed 
Cousin Silas eagerly. “I was prepared for the risk 
when I made the offer. Harry, tell my mother, if you 
escape, how I thought of her to the last. Never forget 
what I have just been talking to you about. Gerard, 
your father will understand that I died in the discharge 
of my duty. friends, good-by; I trust that God, in 
his good pleasure, will enable me to bring you help.” 

Saying these words, he handed us his clothes, which 
we hung across the keel of the boat, and then he slid 
off into the dark water, and struck out directly for the 
shore. As soon as he was gone, old Surley seemed re- 
solved to follow his example ; and though we tried to 
hold him, he dashed off into the water, and away he 
went, swimming quietly by the side of Mr. Brand. 

“ One good thing is, the old dog will perhaps help him 
if he gets tired,” remarked Jerry. “ I’ve heard of them 
doing such things.” 

Cousin Silas calculated that, being carried to the south 
by the set of the current, he should thus land directly 
under the light. With calm, steady strokes, "he clove 
his way through the yielding fluid. Not a sound escaped 
from his manly breast, nor could we detect the noise 
made by his slowly-moving hands, as they separated the 
water before him. How earnestly did we*pray for 
him ! — how eagerly did we watch him, till his head was 
Bhrouded in darkness ! 


10 * 


114 


BOUNDING CAPE HORN. 


CHAPTER VI. 

ROUNDING CAPE HORN. 

9 

On drifted the boat ! Darkness was above us — dark- 
ness was around us ! — that small beacon-light the only 
source of hope. Without it we must have given way 
to despair. How eagerly, how intently we listened for 
the sound of Cousin Silas’s shout, should he have suc- 
ceeded in reaching the shore ! We came almost abreast 
of the light ; — not a sound reached our ears. 

“ It is a long distance for the voice of a man exhausted 
with swimming to be heard,” said Burkett. “ He scarce- 
ly, too, could have reached there yet.” We thought not 
either. We relapsed into silence and listened. 

“O Burkett! what of the kelp?” suddenly exclaimed 
Kilby. “ Can he ever swim through it ? ” 

My heart sunk within me as I heard the question; 
what man, even the strongest swimmer, freshly taken 
to the water, could force his way through those tangled 
masses of sea-weed ? My noble-hearted cousin, was he 
then to fee the first victim among us ? 

“ The shore is sandy thereabouts, and unusually free 
from kelp. There is a natural dock where the schooner 
lies, and clear water all round.” 

These words spoken by Burkett again revived my 
hopes. Still not a sound reached us. We could dis- 
tinguish no signal from the shore to give us hope. 


DREADFUL POSITION. 


115 


Blacker and blacker grew the night. More keenly- 
whistled the wind The sea-birds’ shriek, echoing it 
seemed from the caverned rocks, sounded like a funeral 
wail. We fancied that many a fierce albatross was 
hovering over our heads, to pounce down on us when 
nature gave way before our sufferings. 

“ Harry, Harry ! ” said Gerard in a low voice, “ 1 
don’t think I can stand this much longer. Oh, my poor 
father ! my poor father ! how sorry he will be to think 
that I should often have done things which I knew 
would vex him.” 

“ Silence,” said Burkett ; “ we must try at all events 
and make ourselves heard, lest Brand should have failed 
to reach the shore. Now get ready for a shout ; never 
fear cracking our voices.” 

We were just then, as far as we could judge, directly 
abreast of the light. Every instant after this would be 
making our case more hopeless. How we shouted, again 
and again ! but all we heard in return was the discord- 
ant shriek of the sea fowl as they flew away, startled at 
the noise. So we drifted on. In vain we shouted ; our 
voices grew weary, and we gave it up in despair. Our 
eyes were still fixed on the light. We sunk lower and 
lower. We held on to the boat, but every moment in- 
creased our difficulty in so doing, the wind getting up, 
or rather we had drifted into a more exposed part of the 
channel, and the boat began to toss about, while the * 
spray beat wildly over us. How long the time seemed ! 
Every moment was counted as a minute ; every minute 
as an hour. We had to gripe on to the keel with all 
our might, or we should have been washed off*. With 
the greatest difficulty we could retain our hold. Yet we 
could still see the light dimly glimmering in the distance ; 


HOPE REVIVES. 


U6 

but as that grew fainter and fainter, so did our hopes 
of being rescued. Scarcely could we see the light ; dim- 
mer and dimmer it grew ; then we looked — it had dis- 
appeared ! The rapid current hurried us on. The wide, 
storm-tossed Southern Ocean lay spread out before us. 
Darkness was around us. No land could be distin- 
guished. Hope of life fled. We all prayed. We 
encouraged each other. We resolved not to give way 
to despair while life remained. We had to speak in a 
loud tone to be heard. 

“ Silence ! ” exclaimed Burkett abruptly. “ I heard 
a sound. Yes, yes ! See ! see ! Heaven be praised ! 
That noble fellow Brand is safe, and we may yet be 
saved ! ” As he spoke, a thin stream of light shot up- 
wards from the dark ocean, and broke into a thousand 
beautiful coruscations above our heads. “ A rocket ! 
the schooner had some on board for signals,” cried Bur- 
kett. “ She is under weigh to look for us ! ” 

About the light we had no doubt ; but it was scarcely 
possible that he could have heard any sound. None, 
at all events, had reached our ears. A few moments 
before, we had been prepared to die ; now life, with its 
many fancied advantages, occupied all our thoughts. 
With intense eagerness we looked towards the spot 
whence the rocket had ascended. All was darkness. 
Suddenly a light burst forth; of intense brightness it 
seemed, as it shed its rays over the foam-sprinkled, 
dancing water, and showed us clearly the spars, and 
rigging, and white canvas of the schooner. We shouted 
long and lustily, but we were too far off to be heard. 
Our hearts sunk, for she was standing away from us. 
Once more we shouted. Our shout was answered from 
a different direction from that where we had seen the 


RESCUED. 


117 


schooner. Earnestly we listened. We could distinguish, 
too, the loud barking of a dog. 

“ Old Surley is safe, at all events. I am glad of that, 
poor fellow,” exclaimed Gerard. “ I like that old dog.” 

We watched eagerly. A light was observed dancing 
over the seas. Again we cried out. How cheery struck 
those sounds on our ears, which we had thought- would 
never hear the human voice again. In less than five 
minutes a whale-boat dashed up to us, with old Surley 
in her bow, and at her stern sat Cousin Silas. We 
were saved ! and before we could speak, we sank down 
on our knees, to return thanks to Him whose right arm 
had preserved us. A few words served to tell us how 
Cousin Silas had reached the shore a little way above 
the station, with old Surley as his companion ; how 
kindly he had been received, and how promptly every 
one rushed to man the boats to hasten to our rescue. 

In less than an hour we were at the station, when the 
schooner and the other boats soon returned. We were 
put to bed and rubbed with blankets, and had hot rum 
and water poured down our throats, so that very soon 
we recovered ; nor did we suffer any material injury 
from the cold and wet to which we had been so long 
exposed. The schooner had been delayed, being unable 
to complete her cargo of seal-skins by the time expected. 
The next day we sailed, and in three days arrived safely 
in Stanley. We found the Triton ready for sea, and 
only waiting our return to sail. I was in the cabin 
when Captain Frankland first saw Gerard after hearing 
of our escape. Tears stood in the old man’s eyes as he 
took his son in his arms ; and I saw by the expression 
of his countenance how he loved him. Mr. Brand ah 
ways stood high in his estimation ; when he heard of 


118 


CAPTAIN ALLEN GARDINER. 


what Silas had done, he stood higher still. I must own it, 
Jerry and I very soon forgot the awe-inspiring thoughts 
which had passed through our minds while we expected 
so soon to be called into eternity. Our chief concern 
was, having lost our guns and game-bags. We were, 
therefore, highly delighted when Burkett and Kilby 
made their appearance on board, each with a very good 
fowling-piece in his hand, with powder-flasks and shot- 
belts, and all other requisites, and begged our accept- 
ance of them, in remembrance, as th^y said, of the ad- 
ventures we had gone through together. 

“ Thank you, thank you,” we exclaimed ; “ we’ll not 
forget you, at all events, wherever we go.” 

We called our guns after the good-natured donors, 
and had their names engraved on them. Many a wild 
fowl did Burkett and Kilby knock over in various parts 
of the world. Old Surley accompanied our visitors. 
Mr. Brand and he had become great friends after their 
long swim together ; and Kilby, to whom be belonged, 
in the warmth of his heart, presented him to Cousin 
Silas, who, Very much to our satisfaction, did not refuse 
the gifi. Thus old Surley became our companion in 
many a subsequent adventure. Just before we sailed, 
some very sad news reached the colony. It was the 
death of Captain Allen Gardiner and his six companions 
on the bleak coast of Terra del Fuego, where they had 
gone for the purpose of forming a missionary establish- 
ment, with the Ifope of spreading a knowledge of the 
Christian faith among the benighted inhabitants of the se 
wild regions. 

Captain Gardiner had left England in the autumn of 
1850, with Dr. Williams, a surgeon, who went forth as 
a catechist ; Mr. Maidment, who held the same office ; 


MISSION TO THE PATAGONIANS. 


119 


Erwin, a carpenter ; and three Cornish fishermen, named 
Badcock, Bryant, and Pearce. The Ocean Queen, the 
ship in which they took their passage, proceeded on her 
voyage to the Pacific, after landing them at Banner 
Cove in Picton Island, which will be found near the en- 
trance of Beagle Channel, about half way between the 
Straits of Le Maire and Cape Horn. They had with 
them two large boats, called the Pioneer and Speedwell , 
and two small punts, with tents and stores ; but their 
supply of provisions appears to have been very scanty. 
Scarcely had they pitched their tents when the natives 
collected in considerable numbers, and threatened to 
attack them. To avoid collision, they ultimately took 
to their boats, intending to seek another spot where they 
might form their station. They put to sea ; but in going 
out of the harbor the Speedwell, under charge of Dr. 
Williams, got entangled among the rocks, and was nearly 
lost. All hands on board suffered much. Captain Gar- 
diner had in the meantime found Bloomfield Harbor, 
which he thought would suit them, but during his cruise 
had lost the punts he had in tow. He at last returned 
to Banner Cove ; but on sailing again his boa^got on 
shore. Then it was discovered that ^ all their powder 
had been left’ on board the ship, ancT so they had no 
means of killing the wild fowl on which they depended 
chiefly for their support. Some of their provisions they 
buried here as a reserve. Again they put to sea ; but 
their boats, which they clearly had not strength to man- 
age, were beached on their way to Bloomfield Harbor. 
After a fortnight’s delay, they got afloat and sailed on 
to a spot about forty miles along that iron-bound coast, 
called Spaniard’s Harbor, which, after much consulta- 
tion, they agreed would be the fittest place for their loca* 


120 


MISFORTUNES OF MISSIONARIES. 


lion. Here they arrived at the end of January, 1851 ; 
but the Pioneer was driven on* shore, and irretrievably 
wrecked So they collected what stores they could save, 
and dragged them into a cave near the spot — her 
remains being hauled up on the beach. Dr. Williams, 
meantime, carried the Speedwell further up the harbor, 
and anchored her there. Disasters followed them. A 
tide higher than usual washed into the cave, and swept 
away a large portion of their stores ; then a hut they 
had built under the rock caught fire, and Captain Gar- 
diner barely escaped with his life ; lastly, scurvy broke 
out. Their provisions were running very short, so they 
sailed back to Banner Cove, to procure those they had 
left there. The provisions were found ; but the scanty 
store could only last them a few months. They seemed 
to have a foreboding of the fate which awaited them. 
On conspicuous places on the rocks they wrote, in large 
letters, “ Go to Spaniard’s Harbor. Hasten ! hasten ! 
We are suffering from sickness — -we are nearly starv- 
ing!” Words of the same signification were written 
on paper, and buried in bottles where they might most 
likely be found. 

They reached Spaniard’s Harbor by the end of March. 
Captain Gardiner took up his habitation at the cave, in 
the place he called Earnest Cove, to watch for those 
who, it was hoped, would come to their relief; while 
Dr. Williams went to a more sheltered spot, up the har- 
bor, at the mouth of Cook’s River, with the Speedwell, 
The months passed slowly by. Their food was all gone. 
They caught and ate mice, a fox, a fish half devoured, 
a penguin and shag — most unwholesome food — and 
then mussels and other shell-fish ; and then the Antarctic 
winter set in ; and lastly, through disease and starva- 


DEATH OF CAPTAIN GARDINER. 


121 


tion, one by one they died. They had kept a daily record 
of their proceedings, — of their sufferings. While they 
had strength, they occasionally assisted each other. 
The last effort of the two survivors was to go on 
crutches to Cook’s River, to learn the state of I)r. Wil- 
liams, who had for long not come to them; but their 
weak state compelled them to abandon the attempt, and 
they returned to die in Earnest Cove. Maidment had 
been sleeping in the cave — he died there; Captain 
Gardiner near the remains of the Pioneer , which had 
been hauled up on the beach, and with which he had 
formed a slight shelter for himself from the weather. 
They had kept their journals to the last ; and, wonderful 
as it may seem, though storms had raged and rains had 
fallen, those journals had been preserved. Captain 
Gardiner’s last written words were addressed to Dr. 
Williams, of whose death he was not aware : — 

“Dear Dr. Williams, — The Lord has seen fit to call home 
another of our little company. Our dear departed brother left 
the boat on Tuesday afternoon, and has not since returned. 
Doubtless he is in the presence of his Redeemer, whom he served 
faithfully. Yet a little while, and though . . . the Almighty, 
to sing praises . . . throne. I neither hunger nor thirst, though 
. . . days . . . without food. . . . Maidment’s kindness to me 
. . . heaven.” ' 

In October, a schooner w r as despatched from Monte 
Video with provisions, under the charge of a Captain 
Smyley. Too late he reached Spaniard’s Harbor, and, 
having just time to visit the Speedwell in Cook’s River, 
a gale springing up, he was compelled to. put to sea 
without ever landing at Earnest Cove. In the mean- 
time, Captain Morshead, in the Dido frigate, having 
sailed from England, was ordered to call at Picton 
11 


DISCOVERY - OF JOURNALS. 


122 


Island with relief for the party. After continuing the 
search for some time, they were about to abandon it, 
when the inscriptions on the rocks were discovered, call- 
ing on them to go to Spaniard’s Harbor. There the 
Dido proceeded. Maidment’s body was found in the 
cave, Captain Gardiner’s by the side of the boat, with 
their journals and books scattered around. Their re- 
mains, with those found at Cook’s River, were carefully 
interred in a grave on the beach — the funeral service 
being read by one of the lieutenants. The colors of the 
ship and boats were struck half-mast, and three volleys 
of musketry fired over the graves. The journals — not 
a word of which was, as I have said, rendered illegi- 
ble — were carefully forwarded to England, and, like 
voices from the grave, have undoubtedly instigated 
many to aid those who seek to spread the truth of the 
gospel among the savage inhabitants of those wild 


“Those noble Christian men have not suffered in vain; 
and yet they met the just doom of those who neglect to 
take those precautions'which are necessary for the pres- 
ervation of life. God has, in his infinite wisdom, given 
us reason and forethought; and that reason and fore- 
thought we ought to employ as much when engaged in 
his service, as when occupied about the ordinary affairs 
of life.” This remark was made by Captain Frank- 
land, and I have often since reflected on it ; and I trust 
that by repeating it, it may tend to guide the plans 
of those laboring in objects for the spread of God’s great 
name and glory, and all the blessings of the gospel 
throughout the world. The particulars of the narrative 
I have thus briefly given had just reached Stanley, and 
were the subject of conversation among all those who 


TERRA DEL FUEGO. 


123 


had any idea above that of the price of seal-skins and 
the profits of the last wreck on their shores. 

With a fair wind and fine weather we sailed to double 
Cape Horn, intending to pass through the Straits of Le 
Maire. Often on the passage did Gerard and I and 
Cousin Silas talk of the fate of Captain Gardiner, and 
long to visit the spot where he and his brave com- 
panions died, and to see the strange wild natives it had 
been his ardent desire to bring to a knowledge of the 
truth. The favorable breeze carried us through the 
straits, and as the well-defined outline of the rocky 
shores of Terra del Fuego rose before us, we gazed 
with deep interest on a land which had been the scene 
of the sad catastrophe now occupying our thoughts. 

To the west and north of us were numerous islands 
clustering together, of various sizes, with deep channels 
between them, most of them consisting of rocky moun- 
tains, often rising in perpendicular precipices from the 
ocean, and shooting upwards to a vast height in tower- 
ing peaks and rugged crags, untrod by the feet of man 
or beast. Along the shores of these numerous isles and 
islets are gulfs and bays, and coves and creeks without 
number, often with level ground in their neighborhood 
producing a somewhat rich vegetation, and forming a 
great contrast to the terrifically wild and barren tracts 
which are the chief characteristics of the region. Bold, 
precipitous headlands, with dark barren elevations be- 
hind them, appeared on our right as we skirted the 
northern shores of the straits. We made Cape Good 
Success, and a little way beyond it, crossed abreast of 
the mouth of Spaniard’s Harbor, into which rolls the 
whole set of the South Atlantic. Then standing on till 
near the entrance of the Beagle Channel, up which a 


124 GRAND SPECTACLE OFF CAPE HORN 

little way lies Picton Island, we stood away towards 
Cape Horn, so as to steer close round it into the Pacific. 
Captain Frankland had often been here, and had once 
brought up in a harbor for many days from bad weather, 
when he had surveyed many of the passages in his 
boats. I was below ; Gerard rushed into the cabin. 

“ We are off the Cape ! we are off the Cape ! ” he 
exclaimed ; “ it is a sight worth seeing.” I hurried on 
deck, and thence I beheld rising not a mile from us in 
all its solitary grandeur that far-famed promontory Cape 
Horn, — a lofty pyramid frowning bold defiance towards 
the storm-tossed confines of those two mighty oceans 
which circle the earth. Dark clouds rested on its sum- 
mit, foam-crested waves with ceaseless roar dashed furi- 
ously at its base, the sea-fowl flew shrieking round it ; 
and as I gazed at it, I could not help thinking how an 
old heathen would have believed it the very throne of 
the god of storms. Well has it earned its fame. Scarcely 
were we round the Cape, when the wind, which had 
hitherto been favorable, shifted suddenly to the west- 
ward and southward, and dark clouds came rushing up 
from that quarter in hot haste, like a stampede of wild 
animals on the prairies of America. The long swell 
which had been rolling up from the east was met by a 
succession of heavy waves torn up by the fierce gale 
blowing along the whole course of the Southern Pacific, 
creating the wildest confusion on the world of waters. 
A few minutes before^ it seemed we were gliding 
smoothly on before a favorable breeze, under top-sails 
and top-gallant-sails ; now the ship was madly plunging 
into the foam-covered tossing seas. 

“ All hands shorten sail ! ” cried Mr. Penshaw, the 
first officer. 


A GALE OFF THE CAPE. 


125 


‘‘All hands shorten sail!” was repeated along the 
decks. 

“ I thought ho\\[ it would be when I saw the night- 
cap on the top of the Horn,” muttered old Ben Yool. 
“We shall have a sneezer before we have done with it, 
and it may be this day month won’t see us round the 
Cape.” 

Old Ben’s prognostications were not very pleasant, 
for we were anxious to be round the Cape among the 
wonders we expected to behold in the Pacific. Scarcely 
was the order given, than the crew were in the rigging 
Top-gallant-sails were quickly stowed, three reefs were 
taken in the top-sails, and the courses were brailed up 
and furled. This was done not a moment too soon ; the 
mighty seas came rolling up mountains beyond moun- 
tains, with wide valleys between them, into whose depths 
the ship plunged down from each watery height as it 
came under her, seeming as if she could never rise 
again. Still once more she was lifted upwards among 
showers of spray, which flew off from the white-crested 
seas, deluging us fore and aft. Overhead the wild scud 
flew fast, the stern Cape looked more solitary and grand, 
and the sea-fowl with discordant shrieks flew round and 
round, closing in the circles they were forming till they 
almost touched our masts. The ship struggled bravely 
onward on the starboard tack, rapidly increasing her 
distance from the land, but making very little way to 
the westward. 

More than once I held my breath and clenched my 
teeth, as I felt the ship sending forward, and saw the 
wide, deep valley, into which she was plunging, and the 
long, huge, watery height rolling on towards us, and 
looking as if it must overwhelm us. And then, when 
11 * 


126 


LEA.UN THE USE OF MY LEGS. 


having, by a miracle it seemed, escaped the threatened 
danger, to see another valley just as deep and wide, and 
another mountain just as big — and to know that, though 
we might rush ever so fast onward, we should find val- 
ley after valley just as deep, and mountain after moun- 
tain just as big for days and days, or weeks to come, 
perhaps ; when, too, "I heard the howling and whistling 
of the wind; and the creaking and complaining of the 
timbers and bulkheads, and the roar and dash of the 
seas, — I own that I could not help wishing that my 
feet were planted on some firm ground, and that I were 
enjoying the wild scene from a distance. 

“ 0 Jerry, where are we going to ? ” I exclaimed, 
when we first met the full swell of the Pacific. 

“ Going ? why, to the west coast of South America, 
and to Robinson Crusoe’s Island, and to all sorts of wild 
places,” he answered, laughing. “ We have rather a 
rough road before us, as you say; but never mind, 
Harry, you’ll soon, get accustomed to it, and a little 
bumping is good for. the digestion, they say.” 

Jerry was right; in a very short time I was as much 
at home as any one in a gale. 

The puff we had got off the east coast of America 
showed me what a gale was ; but that was mere child’s 
play to the storm now blowing. When I thought any 
thing was at its worst, when matters wore a most gloomy 
and threatening aspect, I could not but admire the cool- 
ness and self-possession of Captain Frankland and his 
officers. They seemed to take it all as a matter of 
course, and walked the deck as composedly as in a calm, 
only they had to bold on pretty tightly at times to the 
weather-railings, when the ship, with a sudden jerk, was 
sent over to port, and then back again almost as far on 


A MAN LOST. 


127 


the other side. It was fine, however, to see the tall 
figure of Captain Frankland, as he balanced himself 
leaning backward when the ship shot downwards into 
the trough of the sea; and I soon gained confidence 
from the perfect composure he exhibited. Very soon 
the wind came round more to the northward of west, 
and the ship looked up rather nearer to her course round 
the Cape. Our satisfaction, however, was soon destroyed 
by the redoubled fury with which the gale came down 
on us. The captain beckoned Mr. Renshaw and Mr. 
Brand to come to him. They stood in earnest conver- 
sation on the quarter-deck. Darkness was coming 
on — I could just see their figures grouped together. 
With startling energy Mr. Renshaw had just given the 
order to furl the fore and mizzen-top-sail, to heave the 
ship to, when there was a loud crash. 

44 Down ! down for your lives ! ” shouted the captain. 
The main-top-mast had been carried away. Masts, and 
yards, and blocks, and rigging, came hurtling down on 
deck in one mass of ruin, injuring two or three of our 
men, and knocking one poor fellow overboard. In vain 
an attempt was made to save him. To lower a boat 
would have been madness. His death-shriek sounded 
in our ears as he dropped astern, and soon sunk beneath 
the dark, troubled waters. We had little time to think 
of his fate — the fate of many a gallant seaman. Our 
own danger was great. The mates sprung forward to 
clear the wreck, and to secure as well as could be done 
the other masts. The fear was, that the fore-top-mast 
and mizzen-top-mast, if not the lower masts, deprived 
of their support, might go likewise. The wreck was 
quickly cleared, and the masts got on- board. To stand 
on or to heave to were equally out of the question. It 


m 


THE CAPE IN A STORM. 


was necessary to put the ship before the wind. Tha 
mizzen-top-sail was furled, the helm put up, and the ship 
■was to be wore round. Now came the danger. In 
wearing, if a sea strikes a ship abeam, there is a great 
risk of her bulwarks being stove in, and of every thing 
being washed from her decks. Every one held on to 
whatever he thought most secure. The ship wore 
steadily round. A huge sea came rolling on, but al- 
ready the fore-yard was squared ; it struck her on the 
counter, and she fiew unharmed before it. Instead, 
however, of running to the eastward, she was headed 
up towards the land. No one turned in that night. 
Sharp eyes were on the look-out for land. Cape Horn, 
like some gigantic spirit of the deep, was seen towering 
up amid the raging ocean. On we kept. Once more 
we were under shelter of the land, the mizzen-top-sail 
was set, and we ran up just outside those islands which 
cluster thereabout so thickly, till at daylight we were 
off the mouth of a channel, up which we ran, and 
dropped our anchor in a fine land-locked harbor. 

“ We are far better off here than battering about out- 
side, and knocking the ship to pieces,” observed Mr. 
Pincott, the carpenter. “ Now, if we could but get a 
fresh spar for a top-mast, we should soon be all utaunto.” 

As, however, we were not likely to find spars large 
enough for the purpose in this part of the world, it was 
necessary to make use of the broken one. While this 
work was going on, it was resolved to hold some com- 
munication witli the natives. A boat was lowered, 
under charge of Mr. Brand — Gerard and I and Mr. 
M‘Bitchie going in her, and two hands, as no more could 
be spared from attending to the repairs of the ship. 
We were all armed, but the captain directed us to be 


VISIT TO THE NATIVES. 


129 


verv careful in our intercourse with the wild people we 
might meet. We had with us some trinkets, glass neck- 
laces, bracelets, rings, gilt lockets, knives, scissors, and 
other trifles, to barter with them, or to win their good- 
will. After pulling some way, we reached a sandy cove 
surrounded with trees of good height, and a quantity of 
brushwood below them. We saw several wigwams 
among the trees, and tw T o canoes hauled up on the beach. 
Beyond the wood were ranges of high hills, the nearest 
ascending almost precipitously from the water, while 
those further off were worthy of the name of mountains. 
It was altogether a very ''beautiful and attractive scene 
— the more so, that it was totally unexpected in that 
region. No natives were visible, so we ran the boat on 
shore, and landed. The wigwams were in shape like 
those of the North American Indians, composed of a 
number of long sticks stuck in the ground in a circle, 
and bending inwards till their other ends met, and were 
secured together with a band. Instead of being covered 
with birch bark, these were thatched very neatly with 
dry grass or reeds, and formed very warm abodes. In 
the centre a pile of ashes showed where their fires were 
placed. Their canoes were very like those of North 
America, being built of bark, with ribs neatly formed, 
and kept in shape by several beams athwartships secured 
to the gunwale. Near the wigwams were two other 
partly finished canoes. While we were examining these 
rude habitations and means of locomotion, a shout from 
the two men left in the boat made us look up, and in an 
opening in the wood we saw some dozen or more sav- 
ages advancing stealthily towards us. Mr. Brand, the 
instant he saw them, told us to fall back behind him 
and he then advanced alone., patting his stomach, — the 


130 FRIENDLY INTERCOURSE. 

sign of amity among these people* It is as much as tc 
say, I suppose, “I have had a good dinner, and I hope 
that you have had one also.” They, in return, all 
shouted and gesticulated most vehemently, pointing to 
their mouths in their eagerness to speak, not being 
aware, probably, that we did not understand a word they 
said ; however, at last they began to pat their stomachs, 
and then we knew that all was right. Accordingly we 
advanced to meet them, patting our stomachs with one 
hand, and holding out the other to grasp theirs. They 
were of a brGwnish copper color, well formed and ath- 
letic, with long, shaggy hair — 'their only clothing being 
a piece of skin thrown over one shoulder. In such a 
climate as that of Terra del Fuego, their being able to 
go without clothes shows that they must be of a very 
hardy nature. We were soon surrounded by some 
thirty or more of these very unprepossessing gentlemen, 
all talking most furiously to us or at us, some patting us 
on the back, and others examining our handkerchiefs, 
and caps, and buttons, or any article of our dress they 
could get hold of.* We patted them on the back in re- 
turn, but as they had no clothes, we took hold of their 
hair and admired it ; and Jerry must needs catch one 
fellow by'the nose, and assured him that he had a very 
handsome nob ! In this way we in a short time became 
excellent friends, though, as we had no interpreter, we 
could only communicate with each other by signs. 
When they found that we did not understand what they 
said, they hallooed louder and louder ; and as they hapl 
voices of most stentorian power, they at last spoke to us 
in a perfect roar, till they almost deafened us! By 
their tones we fancied that they were saying, “ Well, if 
you cannot understand that, you must be desperately 
stupid fellows.” 


I 


EDIBLE FUNGI. 13 1 

When they found that we had come as friends, they 
invited us to accompany them to the village, or, as Jerry 
called it, their wigwamment, about a quarter of a mile 
off, in a sheltered nook among the trees. Fearing no 
treachery, we agreed, and we walked along in the most 
amicable way, they slapping us on the back, and we 
slapping them, while they often indulged in the most 
uproarious shouts of laughter. Stopping suddenly, they 
asked us by signs if we were hungry, and immediately 
gathered a number of fungi, which grew in clusters 
round the roots of a tree which Mr. M‘ Ritchie told us 
was an evergreen beech. They handed them to Jerry 
and me, at the same time patting us on the stomach. 

“ What are these toadstools for, old gentleman ? ” ex- 
claimed Jerry, holding them up and laughing. “ They 
don’t want us to eat these, surely, for our luncheon ? ” 

“ They do, though,” said Mr. M‘ Ritchie. u They arc 
the edible fungi. Just take a piece ; the people here- 
abouts eat them largely.” 

Jerry on this took a large mouthful, but spat it out, 
declaring that he would just as soon eat shoe-leather. I 
ate a small piqce, but thought it tasted very insipid, and 
not very digestible. The savages looked astonished at 
our want of taste, and, to show that they appreciated 
the production more than we did, crammed quantities 
of it down their mouths. 

“ Come, Mr. M‘ Ritchie, for the advancement of science 
you must eat some!” exclaimed Jerry, handing him a 
big fungus. 

This was a favorite expression of the doctor’s ; nor, 
to do him justice, was he slack to put his principles into 
practice. I have since "often remarked in England the 
roots of beech-trees completely surrounded with masses 


132 A NATIVE VILLAGE. 

of fungi not unlike fhem in appearance. The doctoi 
ate enough to redeem our character with the savage^ 
and then we proceeded in the same amicable way as be 
fore, till we reached their village. It consisted of ten 
wigwams, some of considerable size, capable of holding 
twelve or more people. They were neatly thatched 
with straw, and their doorways had a piece of curved 
wood, so as to form an arch overhead. Several little, 
long-backed, sharp-eyed, hairy terriers came barking 
out and snapp’ng at our heels, and were very annoying 
till they were called off by their masters. In and about 
the huts were a number of women and children, the 
former far from unpleasant in their looks, though as 
dirt/ as the men. Indeed, from their appearance, we 
had reason to doubt whether any of the tribe had ever 
washed in their lives. The women had a modest, retir- 
ing look ; and the children seemed in no way frightened 
when they saw us. Cousin Silas had N a happy knack 
of making friends with savages, and especially with 
their children. His secret, I found, was great gentle- 
ness. WMle. Mr. M‘Ritchie, Jerry, and I, sat down on 
a log facing the huts, he advanced slowly towards the 
nearest group of children with some bracelets and 
lockets, which he now first produced, singing and danc- 
ing at the same time^ so as to attract their attention. 
They stared at him with open eyes, but showed no in- 
clination to run away till he got near enough to slip the 
string of a locket over the neck of the tallest child — a 
little girl — -and a bracelet over the arm of another; 
and then, taking their hands, he began slowly to move 
round and round in a circle, beckoning to the rest of the 
children to join hands. This they readily did, and then 
two or three of the men, — their fathers probably, — 


A DANCE WITH NATIVES. 


133 


joined the circle, and we got up and united our hands 
to those of the savages, and then several of the women 
came ; and there we were, — Mr. Brand, and the doc- 
tor, and Jerry, and I, and the savages, — men, women, 
and children, — all singing, and dancing, and jumping, 
and laughing like mad, till we were fain to stop for want 
of strength to go on. To show their satisfaction, the 
savages gave us all round some over-affectionate hugs, 
which, besides nearly squeezing the breath out of our 
bodies, were unpleasant on account of the very dirty 
condition of the huggers. We would not tell them that 
we did not like it, so we had to submit to the ceremony 
as often as they thought fit to perform it, and to put the 
best face we fcould on the matter. 

The dance over, they invited us into a wigwam. It 
was ten feet in diameter, with the fire on the ground in 
the centre. Round it were heaps of dry grass, on which 
apparently they slept; while bunches of grass were 
hung to the roof, probably to dry. The smoke found 
its way out of the doorway, and through a small aper- 
ture, where the poles at the apex joined. There we all 
sat round the fire, squatting on our heels, and talking 
away as fast as our tongues could move, as if we were 
keeping up a very interesting conversation. The smoke 
and heat, not to mention the want of -cleanliness in our 
hosts, made us very glad to get out again into the fresh 
air. Besides the fungi I have spoken of, the Fuegians 
live chiefly on fish, and the shell-fish they gather on the 
rocks, though they eat birds and grubs of all sorts — and, 
I fancy, nothing comes amiss to them. We observed 
that a platform of clay was placed in each canoe, on 
which to place a fire. There was also a sort of well at 
the bottom of the canoe, and out of it a man was con- 
12 


34 


FAREWELLS. 


staidly employed in bailing the water, which leaked in 
through. the seams. The men we met were of good size, 
and robust ; but their legs were - thin and weak, owing 
to their sitting so much in their canoes and walking so 
little. When by degrees we produced our gifts, and dis- 
tributed them among the p.arty, — men, women, and chil- 
dren, — their pleasure knew no bounds ; they danced, 
and laughed, and shouted into our ears louder than ever; 
so that we thought it would be as well to be off while 
they remained in such excellent humor. They were 
much astonished at seeing the doctor pull out his note- 
book and write in it. The doctor, to indulge them, made 
a few clear strokes ; and a young man, who had attached 
himself to Jerry and me, imitated them in a wonderful 
way, considering his rough and uncouth hand. We 
had heard them making a number of strange sounds, 
and at last we discovered that they were imitating our 
words. 

“ Good-by,” said Jerry, as we got up to go away. 

“ Good-by,” replied our young friend as clearly aa 
possible, seeming fully to comprehend the meaning of 
the words. 

“ You speak capital English,” said Jerry, laughing. 

“ Capital English,” repeated the savage, shouting with 
a laughter which was quite catching, as if he had said 
something very clever. 

Then, having gone through another process of hug- 
ging, we proceeded to the boat, accompanied by our new 
friends. Having refitted the top-mast, wv waited till the 
gale had blown itself out; and once more putting to sea, 
we had a very quick passage round Cape Horn, now no 
longer clothed in storms, to Valparaiso, the sea-port of 
Santiago, the capital of Chili. 


ADVENTURES IN CHILI. 


135 



© 


CHAPTER YII. 

ADVENTURES IN CHILI. 

■. * 

One morning, when it was my watch on deck, soon 
after dawn the cheery sound was heard of “ Land on 
the starboard bow!” I looked out; and as daylight 
increased, there appeared, as if rising out of the .ocean 
in their desolate grandeur, capped with snow and tower- 
ing high above the clouds, the lofty summits of a range 
of mountains trending away north and south far as the 
v eye could reach. They were the' giant Cordilleras. 
On we sailed with a fresh breeze. The sun ascended 
with stately pace from behind them, and then a mist 
arose and shrouded their base. Hour after hour we ran 
on, and yet we seemed not to have got nearer, till once 
more the mists lifted, and wild, rocky, and barren heights 
sloped upwards before us from the ocean. Full sixty 
miles were gone over from the time those snowy peaks 
were first seen till we reached Valparaiso, far away 
down at their base. We must have been a hundred 
and twenty miles off them at sunrise. 

Coming so suddenly from the wild regions of Terra 
del Fuego and the unattractive Falklands, Valparaiso 
appeared to us a very beautiful place. It is very irregu- 
larly built, — at the bottoms of valleys, on the tops of 
hills, and on their steep and sometimes rugged sides, 
rising directly out of the blue ocean, with a succession 


136 


PREPARE FOR A TRIP ON SHORE. 


of range, after range of lofty mountains behind it, — th<» 
Cordilleras towering in the background beyond all. 
Gerard and I were very eagereto get on shore ; so was 
old Surley. He wagged his tail and ran to the ship’s 
side and barked, and looked up in our faces and looked 
at the land, as much as to say, “ How I should like to 
have a scamper along the beach there ! ” 

“ Yes, you may all three go, if Mr. M‘Ritchie will 
take care of you,” said the captain, laughing. Fleming 
got leave to accompany us, as he had been unwell for 
some weeks, and the captain thought a trip on shore 
would do him good. We found that there would be 
time to get right up among the mountains, where we 
hoped to^find some good sport, our great ambition being 
to kill a guanaco, — the name given to the llama in its 
wild state. A number of boatmen, good-naturedly, 
helped us to land on the beach, with our guns and 
carpet-bags. It was market-day ; the market was full 
of vegetables and other provisions, and the place bore a 
very cheerful aspect. We heard that, in spite of the 
want of level ground, the town has very rapidly im- 
proved in the last few years. The country generally, 
since order has been established, has become prosper- 
ous. Everybody praises the climate, and perhaps there 
is not a finer in the world ; for, although hot in summer, 
the air is dry and pure, and tempered by the sea-breeze, 
which regularly sets in every forenoon. In the harbor 
were two or three old hulks, the remains of the fleet 
commanded by Lord Dundonald, when he performed 
one of his most gallant exploits — the cutting out of the 
Esmeralda frigate, belonging to the Spaniards, from the 
port of Callao. Fleming was with him, and told me all 
about it. 


CAPTURE OF ESMERALDA. 


137 


“ What a lucky adventure ! ” I remarked. 

“ No, Mr. Harry, it wasn’t luck, it was prudence and 
forethought which gained the day with him then at all 
times. There never was a more prudent, and never a 
braver man. He feared nothing, and took every pre- 
caution to insure success. We were three days getting 
ready. We were all dressed in white, with a blue mark 
on the left arm, — 160 blue jackets and 80 marines, — • 
and armed with cutlass and pistols — all picked men. 
Every man knew exactly what he had to do, — some to 
attack one part of the ship, some another ; others to go 
aloft and loose sails, some to the main, and others to the 
fore-top. The admiral sent all the ships of the squad- 
ron out of the bay except his own flag-ship. At mid- 
night we were told off into fourteen boats. A line of 
booms had been placed across the mouth of the inner 
harbor, with only a narrow entrance. Just then the 
admiral’s boat, which led, ran foul of a Spanish guard- 
boat ; but he whispered to the crew, that if they gave 
any alarm he would kill every one of them ; so they 
held their tongues, and we were quickly alongside the 
Esmeralca. The Spaniards were asleep; and before 
they had time to seize their f arms, we were upon them, 
the frigate’s cables were cut, and we were running out 
of the harbor. Had the admiral’s directions been 
followed in all, points, we should have cut out every 
craft in the harbor, and a rich treasure-ship to boot; 
but he had traitors servings under him, and all was not 
done which ought to have been done.” Fleming told 
me also how Lord Dundonald took the strong forts of 
Valdivia, to the south of Chili, by storm, with his single 
ship’s company ; but I must not now repeat the story. 

We engaged two caleches, rattle-trap vehicles, like 
12 * 


138 


TRIP UP THE COUNTRY. 


gigs with hoods, to carry us to Santiago, the capital of 
Chili. One horse was in the shafts; another on the 
left side, was ridden by a postillion on a high-peaked 
saddle, with a long knife at the saddle-bow ; he being 
dressed with a straw-hat over a silk handkerchief tied 
round his head and the ends hanging down behind, a 
short jacket, coarse pantaloons, high boots, huge' spurs, 
and a poncho hanging over one shoulder. Jerry and 
Mr. M‘ Ritchie went together, Fleming accompanied me, 
and we had old Surley, who sat up between our legs, 
looking sagaciously out before him. Away we rattled. 
The road was much better than we had expected to 
find it in a place so far away from England as this 
seemed. My idea was, that once round Cape Horn, 
we should not see any thing but painted savages or 
long tailed Chinese ; and I was quite surprised to find 
good roads and carriages in Chili. We slept two nights 
on the road ; admired Santiago, which is full of laugh- 
ing gas, the air is so fine ; it stands 1700 feet above the 
level of the sea. Then we started off on horseback 
towards the Cordilleras, to a spot called the Snow Bank, 
whence Santiago is regularly .applied with snow all the 
year round. At the capital we fell -in with an English 
sailor, Tom Carver by name, who had served with 
Fuming under Lord Cochrane ; and having married a 
Chilian wife, had settled in the country. He came as 
our interpreter, for without him a guide we procured 
wbuld have been of very little service. Leaving our 
horses at a small rancho, or farm house, we set off with 
our guns, Fleming and the guide carrying most of the 
provisions, though we each of us had a share. The 
scenery was wild and grand in the extreme, consisting 
of the snow-capped peaks of the Andes, of rugged 


CHASE GUANACOES. 


139 


heights, and of dark glens and gorges, with precipices 
which went sheer down many hundred feet below uS. 
We had not gone far before we came to a suspension 
bridge made of hides, cut info strips and twisted to- 
gether, thrown across a fearful gorge. Bundles of 
sticks placed on the ropes form the road. It was full 
of holes, and, as I looked through, far down into the 
torrent foaming below, I could not help feeling how 
very disagreeable it would be to slip through. Surley 
followed at my heels, and even he did not like it. We 
now reached a wide valley, on the sides of which, far 
up on the mountains, we descried a number of animals, 
which Jerry and I concluded, without doubt, were the 
much-desired guanacoes. Mr. M‘Ritchie, with Sim- 
mons the sailor, and the guide, were ahead ; Fleming 
was with us ; so we agreed, as we could not fail of being 
seen by our companions, we would climb the mountain 
in chase of the game. Up, up, we climbed, old Surley 
after us. He seemed to think it very good fun ; but 
Fleming, not accustomed to such exercise, was soon 
blown. 

“ Come along, Fleming,” cried Jerry ; “ we shall soon 
be up to the beasts ; don’t give in, man.” 

“ No, Mr. Gerard ; you go on, and leave me to follow" 
you slowly,” answered Fleming. “If I stop, you’ll 
easily find me again.” 

We, of course, were ready enough to follow this ad- 
vice ; so Jerry, Surley, and I, pushed on up the moun- 
tain as fast as we could climb, towards the nearest herd 
of guanacoes. They were of a light-brown color, of 
about the size of a stag. I should describe the ani- 
mals we saw as having small heads, with large and 
brilliant eyes, thick lips, and ears long and movable 


HO 


CHASE GCANACOES. 


The neck was very long, and kept perfectly upright, 

- while the haunches were slightly elevated ; so that they 
looked somewhat like little camels, — the purpose of 
which, indeed, they serve when domesticated. We 
could see several herds in different parts on the side of 
the mountain. There was one low down near the path 
in the direction the doctor and his companions had 
taken. They were feeding quietly, when one looked 
up, then another, and away the whole herd scampered 
at a tremendous rate up the mountain. We thought 
that the sight of the doctor’s party had put them to 
flight ; and 'it showed us that we must be cautious in 
approaching the herd we had marked. Old Surley was 
very eager to be after them, and we had great difficulty 
in keeping him back. 

The air was keen and at the same time hot. There 
was not a cloud in the intense blue sky, and the rays 
of the sun came down with great force, and blistered 
our skin and peeled our noses, till, we were afraid of 
touching them ; but we did not think much about that 
trifle, while the guanacoes were in sight. Concealing 
ourselves as much as possible behind rocks and bushes, 
and here and there an evergreen quillay-tree, we got • 
nearer and nearer to them. Sometimes we got behind 
chimps of the great chandelier-like cactus, whose 
sturdy green twisted stems afforded us capital shelter. 

“ It is lucky we are not very big, or we should not 
be able to hide ourselves so well,” observed Jerry as we 
crept on. The valley lay far below- us, with steep pre- 
cipices and a brawling torrent, with rocks and shrubs 
scattered about; and high above us wild jagged peaks 
and snow-covered mountain tops. The stillness of the 
air was most extraordinary. Not a sound reached oui 


FLIGHT OF THE GUAJ<aGOES. 


141 


ears. Never have I been in a wilder or more magnifi 
cent scene. I do not know what our four-footed com- 
panion thought of it, but he certainly enjoyed the idea 
of catching a guanaco — so did we, indeed, more than 
any thing else. We had got within five hundred yards 
of the nearest without being discovered. Hitherto we 
had gone on very cautiously. Our eagerness overcame 
our discretion. We left our cover and ran on exposing 
ourselves to view. 

“ Stop, stop, Harry ! ” sang out Jerry. “We are near 
enough to fire ; stop and let us recover our wind.” The 
advice was good, and I was about to follow it, when one 
of the guanacoes turned his bead and saw us. Before 
we could bring our rifles to our shoulders, they were off 
like the wind. Jerry was going to fire, after them, but 
I stopped him, pointing to another herd a short distance 
further off, along the side of the mountain. 

“•You’ll frighten them too if you do,” I observed. 

*^Let us try to get up to them more cautiously.” One 
great difficulty was to keep Surley back, or he would 
have followed the herd till he had caught one of them, 
or broken his neck over a precipice. Consoling our- 
selves for our disappointment with the hopes of getting 
near enough up to the next herd to fire before being 
seen we scrambled on as before. Now and then we 
glanced behind us, to mark the spot where we had left 
Fleming, while we kept an eye in the direction Mr. 
M‘Ritchie had taken ; and on that broad, exposed moun 
tain side, we did not think it possible that we could miss 
each other. We climbed on, therefore, without any mis- 
givings as to how we should find our way back again. 
I fastened my handkerchief through Surley’s collar to 
keep him back. He was thus able also sometimes to 


142 


OUR SUCCESSFUL SHOTS. 


help me up a steep place or a rook, quicker than 1 
could have got by myself. Jerry followed close behind 
me. The distance was, we found, greater than we 
expected to the next herd. We were, fortunately, to 
leeward of them, and not one of them noticed our 
approach. We halted behind a thick cactus. There 
was a rock some three hundred yards further off, and 
within a good shot of the herd. 

“ Now, Jerry, you mark the fellow to the left ; I’ll 
take the one to the right,” said I, almost trembling in 
my eagerness. “ Don’t let us fire till we get up to the 
rock; then rest a moment, and it will be hard if we 
don’t hit one of them. If we miss we’ll see what Sur- 
ley can do for us.” Jerry nodded his agreement to this 
proposal, and crouching down, we crept on till w r e 
reached the rock. For an instant we waited to recover 
breath, then we lifted up our rifles and rested them on 
a ledge of the rock. It would be impossible to have 
got a better aim. Crack — crack — w r e both fired. 
Off scampered the herd up the mountain. 

“We’ve missed! we’ve missed!” we cried. “Oh, 
bothera — . No, no ! there’s one fellow staggering. 
The one L-fired at,” I exclaimed. “ Hurra ! ” 

“ There’s another ! See, see ! — he’s over — no ! he’s 
up again, and away with the rest!” sung out Jerry. 
“ Let Surley after him, Harry. Hell bring him down. 
Hurra, hurra, what luck ! ” 

With such like exclamations we darted from behind 
our cover, and ran as fast as our legs could carry us up 
to the guanaco I had hit ; while Surley, hounded on by 
us, went off in hot chase after the animal Jerry had 
wounded. We were soon up to the guanaco I had hit. 
Poor beast! he staggered on, and thin over le went on 


OLP SURLEY BRINGS A GUANACO TO BAY. 143 

his side. He looked up at us with his mild eyes, as 
much as to say, “ Oh, you cruel white men, who come 
from far off across the seas, you have well-nigh de- 
stroyed the original people of the country, and now you 
would wage war against us, its harmless four-footed 
inhabitants.” He tried to spit at us, but his strength 
failed him, and in an instant more he was dead. As 
soon as we saw this, off we went after Surley. He had 
singled a guanaco out of the herd, and marks of blood 
on the grass showed that it had been wounded. Old 
Surley was among them. Then one beast was seen to 
drop astern. Slower and slower lie went, kicking out 
all the time at the dog, who ran leaping up to try and 
catch hold of his neck. He got a kick which sent him 
rolling over, but he was up again. 

u Hurra ! ” cried Jerry. “ He has him now, though. 
Remember, Harry, that’s the beast I shot.” 

On we ran and clambered to get up with old Surley 
and the guanaco, which was still struggling to get away. 
He made several desperate springs forward, but he 
struck out with his heels and spat in vain, for the 
stauuch dog was not to be shaken off. He was rapidly 
getting weaker — he struggled less violently — at last 
over he came, and we saw there was no chance of his 
escaping. We stopped, and, like good sportsmen, loaded 
our rifles in case they might be required. By the time 
we got up the guanaco was dead, and old Surley was 
standing over him, looking wonderfully proud of his 
victory. What was to be done with the game now that 
we had got it? was the question. We could not carry 
it away, for each animal was fully four feet high, and 
eight or nine long. We looked about for marks t)y 
which we should know the spot where the last killed 


144 


A PUMA IN SIGHT. 


lay. We thought that we had found some that we 
could not mistake, but, still more certainly to recognise 
it, we piled up all the stones and bushes we could col- 
lect on a rock, till we had made a considerable heap, 
which we thought would be conspicuous at a distance. 
We then began to consider that it was time to look 
about for our companions. We could nowhere make 
them out, but we had no doubt as to easily finding the 
spot where we had left Fleming. First, however, we 
had to go and mark the place more distinctly where we 
had left my guanaco. It took us as long to descend the 
mountain as to climb it; for we often came to steep 
places, which we had to fhake a circuit to avoid. We 
reached the edge of a small precipice, where we had a 
tolerably clear view of the hill side below us, and of the 
valley beyond. In ascending, we had passed on one 
side of the rock. We looked about to discover the spot 
where we had left the guanaco. There it lay ; but not 
a hundred yards from it we saw another animal ap- 
proaching it by stealthy steps. We watched it narrowly. 

“ It must be a big cat ! ” cried Jerry. 

“No, no; it is a puma — the South American lion,” 
I sang out. “ Oh, if we can but get a shot at him it 
will be fine!” 

He was so intent on the prospect of a feast off the 
dead guanaco that he did not see us. He crawled up 
near it, and then sprang on the carcass. We did not 
like to have our game destroyed, so we could not help 
shouting out, “ Get off from that, you beast!” Our 
voices startled the puma, and looking round and seeing 
us and Surley approaching, with an angry growl he 
trotted off down the mountain. We agreed that he was 
probably an old fellow, and that having lost his activity 


/ 


LOSE OUR COMPANION. 145 

he could not catch the live animals. We both fired, 
but we were not near enough, and missed him. Away 
he bounded down the mountain without once stopping 
to look behind him. 

“ I vote we take some slices out of our friend here,” 
said Jerry. His suggestions were generally very prac- 
tical. “ I don’t see why we should run the risk of losing 
our dinner altogether. • The chanees are that another of 
these pumas finds him out and leaves us but poor pick- 
ings.” I agreed to the wisdom of the suggestion, and 
so we supplied ourselves with enough meat for all the 
party. We then raised a mark near our guanaco as we 
had done before. 

“That will do famously,” said Jerry, finishing the 
.heap with a long piece of cactus. Now, let us go and 
look for Fleming. The doctor and guides will be back 
soon. I’m getting very hungry, I know, and if they 
don’t come I vote we make an attack on the prog bas- 
kets without them.” 

“ Let us find Fleming and the baskets first,” I an- 
swered ; for my mind began to misgive me about find- 
ing him as easily as we had expected. The cjiase after 
the guanacoes had led us a long way, and I found it 
very difficult to calculate distances or the size of objects 
in that bright atmosphere, where the proportions of all 
surrounding objects were so vast. Still I did not express 
'my fears ta Jerry. We kept our eyes about us, on the 
chance of falling in with another puma ; for we agreed 
that it would be much better to be able to talk of having 
killed a lion than even two harmless llamas. On we 
went for a long time, scrambling over the crags, and 
precipices, and rough ground. 

“ Where can Fleming have got to?” exclaimed Jerry 
13 


146 


FLEMING ATTACKED BT A PUMA. 


Rt last ; “ I am certain that we are up to the spot where 
we left him/” 1 thought so likewise. We shouted at 
the top of our voices, but the puny sounds seemed lost 
in the vast solitudes which encompassed us. “ I think 
it must have been further on,” said I, after I had taken 
another survey of the country. So on we pushed, keep- 
ing our eyes about us on every side. 

We had gone on some way further, when Jerry laid 
his hand on my arm. “ What is that, Harry?” he ex- 
claimed. “ It is the puma ! See the rascal how stealth- 
ily he creeps along! He’s after some mischief, depend 
on it. I hope he won’t go back and eat up our guana- 
coes.” 

“ We must take care that he does not do that,” said I. 
“We’ll stop his career. Is your rifle ready? We’ll 
creep after him as stealthily as he is going along. He 
is so busy that he does not see us, and the chances are 
tliat we get near enough to knock him over.” 

“ Come along then,” exclaimed Jerry ; and, imitating 
the puma’s cautious mode of proceeding, we rapidly 
gained on him. We had got up almost close enough to 
fire when Jerry whispered, “0 Harry, what is that? 
It’s Fleming, dear ! dear ! ” 

Just below where the puma was crouching down ready 
to make his fatal spring, lay the form of the old seaman ; 
but whether he was dead, or asleep, or fainting, we 
could x not tell. There was not a moment to be lost. In 
another instant the savage brute would have fixed his 
claws in his throat. We rushed on — so did old Surlej 1 . 
The puma had actually begun his spring when we fired. 
Both our bullets took effect, but still he leaped forward. 
He fell close to Fleming. Our shipmate sprang up on 
bis knees, but it was only to receive the claws of the 


WE COME TO THE RESCUE. 


147 


brute on his chest. The blow knocked him over. We 
were running on and shouting ail the time, to distract 
the attention of the puma. 

“ He is killed ! he is killed ! ” cried Jerry. “ No.* 
In an instant, with a clasp-knife in his hand, Fleming 
was up again and plunging away at the throat of the 
brute. He rose to his knees. He gave stab after stab 
and prevented the puma from fixing its jaws on his ow? 
throat, which seemed the aim of the enraged animal 
The brave Surley was at his flanks tearing and biting 
at them with all his might 

“ Hold on, Fleming,” we shouted ; “ we will be up to 
you directly.” 

“Fire! fire!” cried Fleming; “I can’t keep the 
brute back much longer.” 

At length Surley’s attack seemed to produce more 
effect on the puma. For a moment he turned round to 
try to repel him. Fleming seized the opportunity, and, 
taking better aim than he had hitherto been able to do, 
plunged his knife right up to the hilt in the animal’s 
breast, and then sprang back out of his way. We 
came up at the same moment, barely in time to save 
Surley from some severe handling, for the puma had 
turned all his fury on him. We stopped and loaded, 
and then running on, got close up to the beast, to run 
no risk of hitting the dog, and fired. Over he rolled, 
giving a few spasmodic clutches with his claws, and 
with a snarl expired. 

“You’ve saved my life anyhow, young gentlemen,” 
said. Fleming. “When I felt the brute’s claws on my 
breast, before I saw you and honest Surley there. I 
thought it was all over with me.” 

Surley was standing over the dead body of the pu»M«« 


148 


NIGHT BIVOUAC. 


and he seemed to think that he had had the chief hand 
in killing him. We were very proud of the trophy; 
and when we found that Fleming was scarcely injured, 
though his clothes were somewhat • torn, we were very 
glad that the adventure had occurred. Fleming told 
us that when we did not return he had set off to look 
after us ; but at last, overcome again with the heat of 
the sun, he had sat down and dropped asleep. It was 
now getting late in the day ; so after we had marked the 
place where the dead puma lay, we agreed that we 
would return to the bottom of the valley, and try and 
find our companions. That we might enjoy a whole 
day in the mountains, it had been arranged that we 
should bivouac in the valley, and not commence our 
return till the following morning. We looked about 
for the doctor and guides, but they were nowhere to be 
seen. We fired off our rifles, but no one answered in 
return. We began to be anxious. Could they have 
been stopped by robbers? or could any Indians have 
attacked them ? Such things had occurred before now, 
we were told. Sometimes bands of the fierce Araucanian 
Indians had been known to make incursions into the 
province from the south, and to attack farm-houses and 
even villages among the mountains. Robbers, too, in 
large bands once frequented the country, and laid con- 
tributions on all the peaceable inhabitants. Still, since 
the government has been settled and order established, 
such occurrences were no longer heard of. We there- 
fore resolved that it would be unwise to make ourselves 
unhappy ; so, after having partaken of some of the arti- 
cles of Fleming’s basket, to stay our appetites, we set to 
work to prepare for our encampment for the night. 
We .fixed on a spot under a high rock, which would 


\ TWO SIDES OF LIFE. 149 

shelter us from the prevailing wind ; and we then 
looked about for fuel with which we could light a fire. 
We found a plant in greht abundance, but we could not 
tell whether it would burn or not. “ Try, at all events,” 
said Fleming. We made a heap and put some paper 
and matches under it. It burned admirably, exuding a 
resinous smell; and we after.wards found that it was 
called the Alpinia umbellifera . After we had collected 
enough fuel for the night, we sat odfselves down before 
the fire, wrapped up in our cloaks, which Fleming had 
been carrying for us. When enough ashes had been 
made, we produced our meat and toasted some slices at 
the end of our ramrods. 

“ I say, Harry, does not this remind you of the night 
we spent at the Falkland Islands ? ” said Jerry. “ I like 
this bivouacking life amazingly.” I agreed with him 
that it was very good fun in fine weather, but that with 
cold and snow, or rain, I thought we should very likely 
change our tune. 

“ That you would, youhg gentleman,” observed Flem- 
ing. u Remember that you’ve only seen the bright side 
of life as yet. There’s a dark side as well, and you 
should be prepared for it when it comes, otherwise you 
won’t be fit to meet it like men. Don’t go on fancying 
that the sun is always to shine on you, and that you are 
always to be warm and comfortable, and to have plenty 
of money in your pockets, and no troubles and sorrows, 
and pains and sicknesses. You’ll have your share, and 
it is better that you should depend on it, not to make 
you value this world too much.” 

“I saj, Fleming, don’t preach — there’s a good fel- 
low!” exclaimed Jerry. “I want just now to enjoy 
cay slice of guanaco. I know what you say is very 
18 * 


150 


OUR FRIENDS RETURN. 


true, and I’ll remember and think about it by-and- 
by.” 

Fleming might have made further remarks on the 
subject, had not a faint shout, as if from a' distance, 
reached our ears. We listened. Could it be from 
Indians or robbers? Jerry put his hand to the top of 
his head. “ O my scalp ! ” said he ; “ it feels very 
uncomfortable already.” Again the shout reached us. 
We shouted in reffirn. We had little doubt that it 
was raised by the doctor and his companions. Soon 
they emerged out of the darkness laden with all sorts 
of specimens of natural history. We crowed over 
them, however, for they had not killed either a guanaco 
or a puma. They could not doubt our assertions, as.- 
they had proof in the slices of the former which we 
cooked for them. Fleming and old Surley, too, showed 
the marks of their encounter with the puma ; and we 
got great credit for having killed him. We were a very 
merry party as we drew round the fire recounting our 
adventures ; and Surley sat up looking as wise as any 
o is, and if he could but have put his words together, 
he Would have told as good a story as any of us. At 
all events, he dogfully played his part at the feast, and 
ate up with evident relish all the scraps of guanaco flesh 
which we gave him. Mr. M’Ritchie was as satisfied as 
we were with the result of his day’s excursion ; and as 
we had an abundant supply of every thing to make the 
inner man comfortable, and good cloaks to keep the 
outer warm, we were all very happy. Our guide talked 
a good deal, though no one but Tom Carver understood 
a word he said. Tom and Fleming, however, spun the 
longest yarns, all about Lord Cochrane and all the won- 
ders he had done, and how from his daring and bravery 


LORD COCHRANE. 


151 


he made the people of the country believe that he was 
in league with the Evil One, if he was not rather the 
Evil One himself! They gave him the name of the 
Diabo . 

“ No one ever deserved it less,” exclaimed Fleming. 
“ The devil, to my mind, is cunning and cowardly, and 

fool into the bargain. Resist him, and he’ll run away 
Act a straightforward, honest part, and he can never 
get around you. Lord Cochrane, you see, mates, was 
as true and honest as steel, as brave as his sword, and 
so wise, that he never undertook to do anything when 
he did’nt see the way clear before him that would lead 
to success:” Tom agreed also in heartily praising their 
old chief, -though they were not very complimentary to 
the Spaniards or to the people of Chili, whom he had 
come to assist. 

“ I say, Tom, do you mind when we were going away 
from Valparaiso to attack Callao, and you and I were 
serving aboard the O' Higgins, how that lieutenant 
brought the adrairal’slittle son on board ? ” said Flemingj 
for the purpose, I suspect, of drawing his friend out. 

“ Ay, that I do,” answered Tom Carver. “ You see 
the flag lieutenant had gone on shore for some of the 
admiral’s traps, when he fell in with the little chap, who 
wasn’t more than five or six years old. ‘ I want to go 
with father,’ says he. ‘ I must go with* father aboard 
the big ship there. I will go.’ At first the lieutenant 
said he couldn’t take him ; but the little fellow cried out 
so, that he couldn’t find it in his heart to refuse him ; so 
lie lifted him up on his shoulders and carried him away to 
the boat. The child shouted and crowed with pleasure, 
waiving his little hat above his head, just like a sucking 
hero as he was. When the people saw it, they seemed 


/ 


152 A SUCKING HERO. 

as if they would grow mad with delight, and followed 
him in crowds, cheering and crying out, 4 Viva la Pa - 
trial at the top of their voices. I was one of the boat’s 
crew, and certainly there was . something in it somehow 
which took our fancy mightily. Off . we pulled aboard 
the fiag-ship,. before Lady Cochrane found out what had 
become of the child, and I daresay she was in a great 
taking. Well, we only got aboard just as the ship was 
under weigh, and he couldn’t be sent on shore again. 
There was nothing to be done but to take him with us. 
We weren’t sorry to have him, for, you see, next to a 
monkey, there’s nothing does a ship’s company more good 
than having a little child to look after. The small chap 
had nothing but the clothes he was dressed in. ‘ What’s to 
be done with him?’ says the admiral. ‘ Why, bless ye, 
my lord, he’ll have fifty nurses, every one as good as 
the she-maids as has to look after him ashore,’ answered 
Ben Brown, the admiral’s cpckswain ; 4 and as for cloth- 
ing, the ship’s tailor will rig him out in no time.’ To 
my mind, the admiral rather liked having the little fel- 
low with him. Fearless himself, he couldn’t even feel 
fear for one of those he loved best on earth. Young 
master very soon made himself at home among us, and 
in a couple of days the ship’s tailor had as complete a 
midshipman’s uniform made for him as you’d wish to 
see. 

44 We were bound, do you see, to Callao, where the 
admiral discovered that a large Spanish ship was about 
to sail for Europe, with great treasure aboard. Besides 
her, there was a Spanish squadron of considerable force 
lying in the harbor, under the protection of the guns of 
the forts. The admiral was up to all sorts of dodges, so 
he hoisted American colors, and, as two United States 


153 


A CHIP OF THE OLD BLOCK. 

ships of war were expected with another ship, stood in. 
A fog, however, came on, and the Lantaro , one of our 
squadron, parting company, his plan was defeated. How- 
ever, we fell in with a Spanish gun-boat in the fog, and 
took her. Fogs and light winds baffled us for s&ne 
time ; but the admiral was not a man to be turned aside 
from what he had intended ; so at last we got in before 
the forts, and with springs on our cables, began blazing 
away at them and the fleet, of which there were alto- 
gether some fourteen vessels. Well, I was telling you 
of the admiral’s , little son. Of course his father w r as very 
anxious about him, for it was no child’s work we were 
about, so he locked him up, as he fancied, safe in his 
after cabin. As soon, however, as the firing began, the 
youngster thought he should like to see some of the fun ; 
so what does lie do, but work his way out through the 
quarter-gallery window, and find his way up on deck. 
4 Go down below, sir, this moment,’ says the admiral, 
when he sees him. 4 You’ll be having your head shot off 
if you stay here.’ The shot was flying about us pretty 
thick by that time, let me tell you. 4 No, no, daddy,’ says 
he. 4 Let me stay here. You stay, and de oder midship- 
mens stay ; why shouldn’t I ? ’ He couldn’t speak quite 
plain yet, do you see. 4 Take him below out of harm’s 
way, one of you,’ says the admiral, turning to me. You 
see he had plenty to do watching the enemy and issuing 
orders, and had not time to look after the boy. So as 
the admiral ordered, I seized up the young gentleman,, 
and was going to carry him off below, when he began to 
kick up such a hubbub, and to kick and scratch and 
bite, it was as hard work to hold him £s it would have 
been to gripe a rattlesnake. 4 Put me down, I say — - 
put me down,’ he sung out. 4 I’ll not go below. I want 


154 


a father’s alarm. 


to stay on deck and fight the enemy.’ Well, I saw that 
there was no use in taking him below, because, as no 
one could be spared to look after him, he would have 
been^soon up again; besides, to my mind, a shot finds 
its way into one part of a ship as well as another. So 
I put him down again; and there was his little lordship 
as busy as any powder-monkey, handing up the powder 
to the gunners. Well, as I was saying, the shot was 
falling pretty thick about our ears, when a round shot 
takes off the head of a marine standing close to the sm#il 
boy, scattering the brains and blood of the poor fellow 
right over the small chap, almost blinding him. ^he 
admiral was looking that way. His tall figure bent for- 
wards. I thought he would have fallen from the agony 
of his mind. He believed his child was killed. In an 
instant, however/ the little hero recovered himself, and 
dashing the blood from his face, ran up to his lordship. 
4 Don’t be afraid, papa,’ says he; ‘I’m not hurt — the 
shot did not strike me. Tom says the ball isn’t cast that 
can kill mamma’s boy.’ That was true enough, for he’d 
heard some of us say, what we believed, that he couldn’t 
come, to harm any more than his father could. The 
admiral’s face brightened again, when he saw that no 
harm had happened to the boy. I suppose after this he 
thought as we did, for he let him stay on deck during 
the whole action ; and a pretty sharp one it was, when 
I tell you we had two huadred guns firing away at us 
for a couple cf hours. If it hadn’t been for the fog, we 
shouldn’t have had a stick standing at the end of it. 
After this we had several brushes with the enemy! 

“At last the 'admiral considered that it would be a 
great thing to take Valdivia, a strongly fortified place 
oa the south of Chili, still held by the Spaniards. We 


HOW TO GET A SHIP ON SHORE. 


155 


had some Chilian troops on boaid, and very brave fel- 
lows they were, under a French officer. Our own offi- 
cers were worth very little, and the admiral had to look 
after everything himself. One night we were off the 
island of Quiriquina, and he had turned in to take a lit- 
tle rest, leaving the deck in charge of one of the lieuten- 
ants. The lieutenant thought he should like a snooze, 
so he turned in and left a midshipman in charge of the 
ship. The midshipman went to sleep, and when he 
awoke he found the ship all aback. ' In trying to box 
her off he ran her on shore, on the sharp edge of a rock, 
where, if there had been any swell, she would have 
beaten her bottom in. Many of the people wanted to 
abandon the ship ; but the admiral was not a man to 
allow such a thing while there was a hope of getting her 
off ; and telling them that they would be all murdered 
‘by the savages on the coast if they landed, he set all 
hands to work at the pumps. When they came to be 
examined, they were all out of repair ; and as the car- 
penter could make no hand at mending them, what does 
the admiral do but whip off his coat and set to work with 
his own Hands. Didn’t we feel that he was a man we’d 
follow through thick and thin, though we knew that 
pretty well before then. At last, what with pumping 
and bailing, we found that the water did not gain on us, 
so the stream anchor was got out, and heaving on it with 
a will, we once more set the old ship afloat. ‘Never 
mind, my lads,’ says the admiral ; ‘ if we can but make 
her swim as far as Valdivia, we shall do very well with- 
out a ship for a time.’ By that we knew he intended to 
take and occupy the place. The admiral wanted to take 
the Spaniards by surprise ; so he shifted his flag aboard 
the lntrepedo brig-of-war, taking with him the MonUi - 


156 


THE GALLANT MAJOR MILLER. 


2 rxma, a man-of-war schooner, and, in spite of a high sea, 
all the troops were put bn board the two vessels. You 
should just see what sort of a place Valdivia is, with 
strong forts on both sides of a channel not three-quar- 
ters of a mile wide. There is only one small landing- 
place, called the Aquada del Ingles, with a fort protect- 
ing it. Towards that we stood, for the surf sets so heav- 
ily on the shore, that a boat attempting to land anywhere 
else would be knocked to pieces. We had a gallant 
English officer in command of the troops, Major Miller. 
I never saw such a fire-eater. His body was almost rid- 
dled with shot, but he never seemed to mind ; nothing 
sickened him of fighting; and as soon as he got well he 
was as ready for work as ever. So, as I was saying, 
the brig and schooner ran in and anchored close to Fort 
Ingles, keeping the boats, on the other side of the ves- 
sels, out of sight. The admiral hailed the fort, and said 
we had lost our boats coming round Cape . Horn, and 
begged they would send one; but just then one of ours 
drifted astern, and the Spaniards smelling a rat, 'opened 
fire on, us. Instantly the admiral ordered the troops to 
land, and a launch, with the gallant Major Miller and 
some forty-four marines, shoved off, and under a heavy 
shower of musket balls, pushed for the shore. His cock- 
swain was wounded, and he received a shot through his 
hat. On we shoved, (for I was with him), and leaping 
on shore, with loud cheers, we drove the enemy before 
us at the point of the bayonet. I forgot to tell you that 
when the O' Higgins got on shore, we had nearly ail our 
powder spoiled, so that he had to depend entirely on the 
bayonet. There’s no better weapon to be used when 
Spaniards are concerned. They^caiVt stand it. Other 
boats followed, and in less than an hour we had 300 


CAPTURE OP VALDIVIA. 


157 


troops landed. We waited till it was dark to begin the 
attaek. There was a gallant young ensign, Mr. Vidal. 
While the main body advanced in front, firing off their 
muskets, and shouting to show the Spaniards that wo 
were going to give them a taste of the bayonet, he got 
round to the rear of the forts, and opening his fire, the 
enemy got frightened, and took to their heels, while we 
took the forts, — which was what we had come to take. 
At the same time 300 more Spaniards, who were march- 
ing into Fort Ingles, were 'seized with a panic r and all 
fled together. The brave Chilians bayoneted them by 
dozens ; and when the gates of the other forts were 
opened to receive the fugitives, they entered at the same 
time, and thus fort after fort was taken with very little 
loss to us, but a good deal to the enemy. 

“Two days after, we attacked the- forts on the other 
side of the water with the same success, and then took 
the town of Valdivia itself, which is some little way up 
the river. We found a large supply of ammunition in 
the place, and I know that I got a fair share of prize- 
money. That Major Miller, I was telling you of, was 
soon after this again desperately wounded in attempting 
to take another fort. When he had fallen, his faithful 
marines made a desperate charge, and brought him off. 
They were all Chelenos, it- must be remembered. One 
of them named Roxas was a very brave fellow. He 
was the first to land with the major, and had helped to 
carry him to the beach on their retreat. Two out of 
three were wounded, and when the major invited him 
to step into the boat, ‘ No sir/ says he ; ‘I was the 
first to land, and I intend to be the last to leave the 
shore.’ You see, young gentlemen, it is not only 
Englishmen can do gallant things, and I like when 3 
14 


158 


ANECDOTE OF LADY COCHRANE. 


have an opportunity to praise those with other blood in 
their veins. ” 

“ You’d like to know how we took the Esmeralda , I 
daresay ? ” said Tom. 

u I told Master Harry all about that the other day,” 
observed Fleming. “ It was a gallant thing, wasn’t it ? ” 

“ But, 1 say, I wonder if the gentlemen ever heard 
talk of what my lady did ? She was, for a woman, and 
a young, beautiful woman too, just as brave as my lord. 
Well, I’ll tell you. The first part I heard from a man, 
a soldier, a brave, faithful fellow, who was with her ; 
the rest I saw myself. She, with her baby, was up the 
country, at a place called Qhilca, among the mountains, 
when, as she was at a ball at some great man’s house 
there, she heard that the Spaniards had made up their 
minds to seize her and her infant, and to detain them 
as hostages. To think with her was to act. Going 
quietly out of the ball-room and changing her dress, she 
popped the nurse and child into a sort of a palanquin, 
and mounting one of her horses, and ordering out all 
the rest, she started 1 away in the middle of the night, 
and pushed on without stopping anywhere, or telling 
any one where she was going. All that night and all 
next day she travelled on, mounting another horse when- 
ever the one she rode grew tired. At last she arrived at 
a dark ravine, just a split in the mountain some hundred 
feet deep, w r ith a foaming torrent roaring below\ There 
was just the sort of rope bridge we had to pass yester- 
day across it. Some of the ■ people had gone down 
below to haul the horses over, and she had sent her 
own horse across, when what should they hear but the 
sound of the enemy’s bugles. Seizing her child, she 
ordered the palanquin-bearers to go over, and then 


A NARROW escafe. 


159 


followed close behind them herself. Again the bugle 
sounded, — the enemy were close at hand. She hurried 
on ; but the movements of so many people crossing 
made the bridge swing fearfully from side to side. She 
felt as if she must be thrown off into the raging gulf 
below. More and more the bridge swung, and at length, 
overcome with terror, she sank down on the narrow 
pathway clasping the infant to her breast. I’ve heard 
people say they dream of such things. Here was the 
reality. The bridge continued to swing backwards and 
forwards, with a fearful motion, and she clung to it for 
her life. It was a great risk for any one else to ven- 
ture on the bridge ; but, in spite of that, Pedro, the sol- 
dier I told you of, crawled alcfng, and, says he in his own 
language, ‘ Give me the child, my lady, and I’ll take care 
of it ; ’ and, crawling along with it in his arms, he placed 
it in safety. Then he went back, and helped Lady 
Cochrane across. Just then the advance guard of the 
enemy’s troops appeared, winding down the sides of the 
mountains. Pedro and the other men hacked away at 
the bridge ; the ropes parted and fell into the torrent, 
and her ladyship was safe, while the Spaniards ground 
their teeth in vain. On she pushed, till she reached 
the coast, and there she found 'the admiral’s ship, and 
came on board. We were all proud to have her; for 
you see, with all her beauty, there was’nt a bit of vanity 
or nonsense about her, and she would speak kind-like 
tc any one of us, just as if we were her equal. Soon 
after she came on board, the admiral heard that there 
was a rich Spanish ship just about putting to sea, and a 
very good s'ailer. He knew if she once got ahead of us 
we should never catch her up ; so, without waiting to 
land Lady Cochrane, we slipped our cables and made 


JGO LADY COCHRANE IN ACTION. 

sail up to where the treasure-ship and several others of 
the enemy’s vessels lay at anchor. We beat to quarters, 
and got up to them about midnight all ready for action. 
We were not long in beginning the sport, nor they in 
returning the compliments we paid them; for, besides 
the treasure-ship, the Spaniards had some gun-boats 
moored under their forts. While we were firing *way, 
the mother, just like her little son, wouldn’t leave the 
deck, but stood there, like any hero, animating the men. 

“ After some time one of the crew of a gun, a Che- 
leno, seemed to be afraid of firing. What does her 
ladyship do, but, seizing his arm, and guiding the match 
to the touch-hole, fire the gun ! She thought, maybe, 
that the man would be punished if he was observed. 
However, the effort was too much for her ; for you see 
she was but a young woman, and she sank down on 
deck pi a fainting fit. We thought she was wounded ; 
ancf several of us ran forward to lift her up and carry 
her below. It did our hearts good to find that there 
was nothing really the matter with her. When the 
action was over, and we had pretty well knocked the 
treasure-ship and gun-boats to pieces, we returned in 
the morning to our former anchorage. As Itfe were 
furling sails, her ladyship came on deck to show us she 
was all to rights. No sooner was the canvas stowed, 
than we manned the yards of our own accord, and then 
didn’t we cheer her and the admiral with right good will ; 
and the whole crew, one and all, Chelenos and English- 
men, five hundred of us, burst forth with the hymn of 
the Republic, praying at the end that Heaven would 
bless and prosper them. She bowed more than once, 
but didn’t say a word, and then burst into tears. 

“ Ah ! she was^ the lady who knew how to win a 
sailor’s heart ! ” 


rominson crusoe’s island. 


161 


CHAPTER VIII. 
robinson crusoe’s island. 

Fleming and his old shipmate, Tom Carver, kept 
spinning their interesting yarns about Lord Cochrane’s 
gallant deeds till a late hour. At last it was time to go 
to sleep ; so we wrapped ourselves up as closely as we 
could in our cloaks, with our feet to the fire and our 
backs to the rock, to seek repose. Fleming and Tom 
and the doctor, however, kept watch one after the other, 
both to keep up the fire and to prevent our being taken 
by surprise by the visit of a puma, or any other unwel- 
come visitor. By-the-by, the doctor told us that the 
puma very seldom seeks his prey in the day-time, or 
attacks men, though he has been known to do so at 
times. The fellow we killed measured fully five feet 
from the nose to the tail, which was itself, in addition, 
two feet and a half long. The back was of a brownish 
red color, and the breast of a reddish ash color, and the 
lower jaw and throat white. Its face was like that of a 
huge cat, and it is said to be able to climb trees, and to 
drop down' from them on its prey. Its ordinary way of 
{seizing its prey is to spring on the back, and draw back 
the head of the animal till its neck is broken. The 
guanaco, which is common throughout South America, 
was used by the ancient Peruvians, in great numbers, 
as a beast of burden. It carried about a hundred-weight 
14 * 


162 


A NIGHT ON THE ANDES. 


Its flesh also served them for food ; of its skin leather 
articles were made, and its hair was woven into cloth. 
When domesticated, it is known as the llama. It feeds 
on vegetables, and requires no attention. Its voice re- 
sembles the shrill neighing of a horse. Its use as a beast 
of burden has been superseded by the horse, the ass, 
and the mule. The fleece of the tame animal is not sg 
long as that of the wild one. Their appearance I have 
already described. I shall never forget that night 
among the Andes, — how the stars of the southern hemi- 
sphere came out, and shone with a brilliancy I had 
never before seen in that purest of pure atmospheres, 
among those grand old mountains. For a long time I 
could not go to sleep ; at last I did, and it seemed but a 
moment afterwards that Jerry aroused me to go with 
Tom and the Indian guide to bring the guanaco and the 
skin of the puma. With their aid we were not long in 
finding the puma, and in having his skin off him. We 
found the first guanaco untouched, so we took his skin 
and some of the flesh. As, however, we were looking 
for the spot where we had left the other, a huge condor 
rose into the air, followed by two or three others. 

“ Ah ! you’ll not find much beyond his bones, depend 
on that,” said Tom. “ These birds don’t leave pickings 
for anybody else.” 

Such being the case, we agreed that it was not worth 
while to climb up so far, as we were in a hurry to get 
back to the rock to breakfast. Directly after it we set 
off on our return to the city. The natives of Chili, we 
were told, often catch the puma with the lasso. They 
also hunt it with dogs, and shoot it when it climbs up 
trees. When we came to the bridge of hide-rope it 
looked more rickety and impassible than ever. Just 


A DAY AT SANTIAGO. 


163 


fancy a few rotten-looking strips of leather slung across 
a chasm some thousand feet deep ! 

“ Never mind,” said Fleming, laughing ; “ hold on to 
something. If it give way don’t you let go, at all events ; 
and the chances are you are brought up somewhere. 
My maxim is, Never let go of one rope till you have 
got hold of another.” 

However, we crossed in safety, and, spent a very 
pleasant day at Santiago, seeing all the sights of that 
city, though Jerry and I agreed that we would rather 
have been in the mountains shooting guanacoes, or hunt- 
ing pumas, — so, I daresay, would old Surley. We got 
back in good time to Valparaiso. I forgot to mention 
before, the beautiful regularity of the land and sea 
breezes which we experienced at this place. It was 
. the dry season of the year, and the air was wonderfully 
bright and clear. The atmosphere being in a state of 
equilibrium (so the doctor told us), was ready .to obey 
even the slightest impulse, and to rush towards any spot 
where rarefaction was taking place. Thus, at about ten 
in the morning, as the rays of the sun gain power and 
shed their influence over the earth, the air from the sea 
begins to move towards it. As rarefaction increases, so 
does the strength of the wind, till by three or four in 
the afternoon it rushes in with great force, creating a 
considerable sea ; and if a vessel is not well moored, 
driving her before it. Captain Frankland knew what 
to expect, and was therefore prepared for the emer- 
gency. 

On the afternoon of our return to Valparaiso, we put 
to sea. From the cause I have mentioned, respecting 
the strength of the sea breeze, it is necessary to make 
a good offing from the land. We therefore stood off 


164 


A STRANGE SHIP. 


shore till we had sunk the tops of the Andes below the 
horizon. The name of the Pacific was given to this 
ocean by the. Spaniards, who first crossed the Isthmus 
of Panama, under the belief that the whole sea was 
always as calm as was then the portion they beheld. 
Storms, if less frequent, are certainly not less violent 
than in other portions of the world. We certainly 
very frequently experienced the fickleness of the ele- 
ments. As we were about to haul up to the northward, 
the wind suddenly shifted round to that very quarter, 
and then shifted somewhat to the eastward. We stood 
away on the starboard-tack, but were evidently making 
a great deal of lee-way. At last Captain Frankland, 
finding that no progress could be made, hove the ship 
to. Jerry and I had by this time got pretty well accus- 
tomed to knocking about, so that we did not mind it. 
We suffered the greatest inconvenience at our meals, 
because very often the soup which we had intended to 
put into our mouths, without signal or warning, rolled 
away into the waistcoat pockets of our opposite neigh- 
bor. The doctor more than once suffered from being 
the recipient of the contents of Jerry’s plate as well as 
of mine ; but he took it very good-naturedly, and as he 
very soon returned us the compliment, we were all 
square. Not long after dinner, while we were on deck, 
| Ben Yool, who was aloft, hailed to say that he saw 
bearing right down for us a large brig, and, considering 
the gale, that she was carrying a wonderful press of 
canvas's. Her courses were brailed up, but her top-sails 
were set, while the top-gallant sails and royals were fly- 
ing away in ribbons, except the main-royal, which, with 
the mast, had gone over the side. We accordingly all 
looked out for her. We soon, as we rose to the summit 


A FIGHT AMONG PIRATES. 


165 


of a long rolling sea, caught sight of her, plunging over 
the foaming waters, and often half buried in them. 
There was something very strange in her appearance, 
and in the way she came tearing along through the 
waters. Captain Frankland looked at her attentively 
through his glass. 

“ I cannot make it out,” he exclaimed ; “ the people 
on board are either all drunk or must have gone mad.” 

We were not kept long in suspense. On came the 
brig. She was a fine looking vessel ; but such a sight 
met our eyes as I never expected to see. Her deck 
was crowded with men, but instead of attempting to 
shorten sail, they were all shrieking and fighting to- 
gether. One party seemed to have taken possession of 
the after part of the vessel, the rest were forward,-— 
while in the intermediate space several lay weltering in 
their blood. Now one party would rush forward and 
meet the pther in the waist, and then after a desperate 
struggle one would retreat before the other. Thus they 
continued as long as they remained in sight. It ap- 
peared from the glimpse we got of them, as they drove 
by, that the crew had risen against their officers, who 
were fighting to regain the upper-hand. What they 
were it was difficult to say, but their appearance bespoke 
them to be a great set of ruffians. I asked Ben Yool 
what he thought of them. 

“ To my mind, Master Harry, they are nothing better 
than a set of pirates ; and I had just as soon not have 
fallen in with them in smooth water.” 

Every spy-glass on board was directed towards them. 
Strange as it appeared, there could be no doubt about 
the matter. In spite of the terrific gale — in spite of 
the prospect of the masts going overboard, and of the 


166 


HOW THE WORLD GOES ON. 


ship being reduced to a complete wreck, an event which 
might any moment occur, — the wretched crew of the 
brig were destroying each other with the maddest fury. 
From the state of things on board as we saw them, the 
chances were that the survivors of the victorious party 
would not have strength to take in sail or clear the deck 
at the end of the fight. 

“ That was an extraordinary spectacle we have just 
witnessed,” observed Cousin Silas, as Jerry and I were 
holding on to the rails near him as the strange brig dis- 
appeared, hidden by the dark foam-topped waves which 
leaped up between her and us. “Never heard any- 
thing like it before, perhaps you will say, lads. Now, 
in my opinion, you have heard of many things exactly 
like it before. What is the world doing at the present 
moment? What has it been doing since the flood? 
Men have been quarrelling, and fighting, and knocking 
each other on the head, while ruin has been encircling 
them around, from that time to the present. We were 
sent into this world to perform certain duties — to help 
each other in doing them — to love God and to love 
each other. If we obey God, we are promised eternal 
happiness; if we disobey him, eternal punishment. 
We are told that this world must come to an end, and 
that all things in it will be destroyed. What do men 
do? They shut their eyes to all these truths; they 
live as if they and every thing in the world were to 
last forever, — as if there were no God to obey and 
love ; and, like the madmen we have just seen, they 
separate into parties, hating each other, and fight and 
quarrel, and deface God’s image in which he made man, 
utterly regardless of the terrible doom awaiting them, 
—just as the people aboard that ship were doing.” 


THE SHIP IN A GALE. 


16 V 


“ The simile would not have occurred to me, Mr. 
Brand,” observed Jerry. “ I see it now, though ; 
still, if people do as little harm as they can, it is all 
right” 

“ No, no, lad. Don’t for a moment indulge in such 
an erroneous, foolish notion, put into people’s heads by 
the spirit of evil himself, to deceive them. I tell you 
we were sent into the world not only to abstain from 
sin, but to do as much good as we can — to actively 
employ ourselves — to look about us to see how we can 
do good, — not to wait till some opportunity occurs 
that may never come. But we are certain to find some 
good work if we look for it ; and if your heart is right 
towards God, and you earnestly wish to serve him and 
not the world, and not yourself, he will point out to you 
what to do.” 

The conversation was interrupted by a heavy lurch 
the ship made, which sent Jerry and me tumbling away 
into the lee scuppers ; a huge sea at the same moment 
came rolling up with a foaming crest towards us. It 
caught the brig broad on the bow — up it rose like a 
wall, and then with a loud angry roar fell right over us. 
I felt myself swimming in deep water, with my mouth 
full and almost blinded. I heard Jerry’s cry close to 
me. The dreadful thought occurred to me that we 
were both overboard, and the utter impossibility of 
lowering a boat to save us flashed across me. I 
shrieked out for help. A whirl, — a confused sound of 
roaring, hissing waters, — a sensation of battling and 
struggling with them, — an eager desire to clutch at 
something are all I remember. Down came the gale 
on the ship with greater fury than before, — another sea 
from the opposite quarter struck her. I felt myself 


168 


JERRY OVERBOARD. 


grasped by a strong arm, and when I opened my eyes, 
I saw that 1 was being dragged up to windward by 
Cousin Silas, who, at the imminent risk of losing his 
own life, had sprung out with a rope in his hand and 
hauled me on board again. 

“Oh! where is Jerry — where is Jerry?” were the 
first words I uttered. No one answered. “ Oh, he is 
lost! he is lost!” I cried, and burst into tears, forget- 
ting altogether to thank Cousin Silas for having saved 
me. I felt that I could never survive the loss of my 
young shipmate. Just then I saw several of the crew 
running to leeward. Two or three heads were in the 
water, with arms wildly striking out. Shrieks, too, 
rung in my ears. Ben Yool was among them ; I saw 
his face clearly ; he did not seem alarmed like the rest. 
A long rope w r as hove to him. He grasped it. He 
struck out towards another of the swimmers ; it was 
Jerry. Ben seized him in one of his arms, while he was 
striking out with the other. There seemed, however, 
but little chance for him of escaping with his life ; for 
when the ship again surged ahead, the rope would have 
been torn from his grasp ; but just then another cross 
sea providentially rolled up to leeward, and sent him 
and Jerry close up to the bulwarks. There they were 
grasped by the crew, and when the ship rolled over 
again to the other side, they were hauled on board safe 
and sound. Two other men remained in the water. 
They turned their faces with straining eye-balls implor- 
ingly towards the ship, which was drifting from them. 
In vain they shrieked out; no one could help them. 
A foaming, hissing sea rose between us and them. 
Far, far away, the unhappy men were carried, and 
when the ship rose again to the summit of a wave, they 


GALE INCREASES. 


169 


were nowhere to be seen. I felt then how mercifully I 
had been preserved, and grateful to Him who had 
thought fit to save me, while, for his own inscrutable 
ends, he had allowed others to be taken. Jerry, I 
know, had the same thoughts and feelings, though I 
fear their impression soon faded, but not away alto- 
gether. Its traces, however faint, were permanently 
left on our minds, and I believe that they have often 
since had a powerful influence on us. I hope, also, as 
we grow older, that we may often recur to them instead 
of endeavoring to drive them away. Joyful as Cap- 
tain Frankland was at recovering his son, he felt much 
the loss of his two men ; for he truly was the father of 
his crew, and they knew and gladly acknowledged it. 
This was the secret of the influence he had over them. 
The ship still lay to, but the gale increased. Suddenly 
there was a loud report, like a clap of thunder. The 
fore-top-sail, close reefed as it was, had blown out of the 
bolt ropes, and the shreds fluttered in streamers from 
the yards. Away it flew, lashing the yard with fury,-- 
and coiling itself into thick twists of rope. The wind 
unfortunately caught the bow, and bringing her right 
round, exposed her broadside to the sea. The instant 
the accident happened, the mates, with some of the 
crew, had rushed forward, and loosing the fore-stay-sail, 
were hoisting it just as a big sea came roaring towards 
us. It was half way up at the moment the sea reached 
us. u Hoist away, my lads ! ” was the general cry. 
The ship felt its effects ; springing forward, she seemed 
to dash through the sea, which however, broke in a 
deluge over us. Her head came round, and away she 
flew before the storm. . Before, however, the .fore-stay- 
sail was up it was blown clean away, and the ship 
15 


170 


LAND AHEAD. 


dashed on under bare poles to the westward, leaving 
our two poor shipmates in their watery tomb far 
astern. All that night we ran plunging on. In the 
morning watch the wind began to fall. I asked Yool, 
who* was in the same watch with me, what he thought 
was going to happen. 

“ Why, Master Harry, that the gale is tired of blowing, 
and that we shall before long have a calm, or only just 
a light, pleasant breeze,” he answered. So it proved ; 
after this the wind rapidly decreased, and by sunrise all 
hands were aloft bending new sails, and busily employed 
in repairing the damages received in the gale. Just as 
the captain came on deck, one of the mates hailed from 
aloft that he saw a whale, or a rock, or some large 
black object, just rising out of the water, — he could not 
make out what. 

We had been on the point of hauling our wind to 
stand back for Callao ; but the captain ordered the ship 
to be kept on, to ascertain what the object could be. 
I with others had gone aloft to look out also, when as 
the sun arose, I saw before me what I at first took to 
be a cloud ; but gradually it grew more and more dis- 
tinct, till I was certain that it was a lofty mountain. 
The rest of the crew were so busily employed about the 
rigging, and in looking out for the whale or whatever 
it was, that I was the first to see it ; — of this I was 
very proud. 

“ Land ahead ! ” I sung out. 

“ Ay, ay, all right, Harry,” he answered, knowing of 
course what land it must be. I soon after went down 
on deck, where I met Jerry looking rather pale and ill 
after his bath. 

H Do you know what that land is ? ” I asked, pointing 


JUAN FERNANDES. 


171 


»o it; for with the increasing light it was now seen 
clearly from the decL. 

“ Why, it’s no other than Robinson Crusoe’s Island — 
Juan Fernandes; and my father says he intends to run 
in there, as it will be more convenient to repair damages 
at anchor ; and he thinks that very likely the gale may 
come back again on us. Won’t it be jolly to go on 
shore and to see the very cave he lived in, and the sand 
where he first saw Friday’s foot-mark, and the descend- 
ants of the goats he had and various other animals ? I 
am certain I could find out every spot of ground he 
talks about. There’s no place I would rather see than 
this.” 

“ So would I,” I observed. “ But you forget, Jerry ; 
there was no such person as Robinson Crusoe. We 
may be disappointed when we get there.” 

“ I won’t believe it ! ” he answered indignantly. 
“ There was, and there must have been, and there shall 
have been a Robinson Crusoe ! How could he have 
written his life if he had not lived, I should like to 
know?” 

“ There was a man called Alexander Selkirk, who 
was left there from one of Lord Anson’s ships ; and a 
first-rate writer, Daniel Defoe by name, got hold of his 
account, on which he founded the story of Robinson 
Crusoe,” I answered. 

“I tell you that is all bosh,” said Jerry. “I dont 
believe that any man who had not gone through every 
scene he describes, could have given as good an account 
of them as does Robinson Crusoe ; so I intend to stick 
to my belief, and not care what anybody else says on the 
subject.” I must own that I felt very much inclined to 
agree with Jerry, and to look on Defoe very much in 


172 


A WRECK IN SIGHT. 


tne light of a pirate, who had got hold of a ship which 
did not belong to him. The important discussion waa 
cut short by the report of the first mate, who had again 
gone aloft with his glass to take another look at the 
object seen ahead. 

“ As far as I can see, I’ve no doubt that it is the hull 
of a ship floating bottom uppermost,” he sung out ; “ but 
whether any one is still clinging to her or not, is more 
than I can make out.” 

“ Get one of the boats ready, Mr. Brand ; we’ll board 
the wreck, at all events,” said the captain. While the 
boat was quickly prepared, we made good progress to- 
wards the wreck. 

“ There is a man on her ; I can see him clearly,” 
sung out the third mate from forward. u Re is lying 
along the keel. He is alive ; he sees us ; he is waving 
to us.” 

As soon as the ship got up to the wreck, she was 
hove to, and I followed Mr. Brand, with Ben Yool, into 
the boat. There was still a great deal of sea running ; 
and when we got up to the wreck, there was no little 
danger, we discovered, in getting alongside her. There 
were masts and spars still hanging on by the rigging 
around her, which would at once have stove in our boat 
if we had got among them incautiously, and we should 
very likely have lost our own lives. There was only 
one man on the ship’s bottom ; we saw him just lifting 
his head and watching us anxiously as we pulled round. 
We could discover no spot free from danger; so we 
pulled off again to consult what was best to be done. 
The poor wretch thought we were going to desert him, 
and shouted out to us in English and Spanish, implor- 
ing us to have compassion on him, and save his life. 


RESCUE A SEAMAN. 


173 


“ Ay, ay, friend ! ” answered Ben Yool. “ Don’t 
suppose we’d leave you there ; we should be rum sort 
of Christians to do that. Wait a bit; we’ll get you off 
directly.” 

“ He appears to be unable to help himself, or he 
might lower himself down by a rope,” observed Mr. 
Brand. “ Make a line fast round me ; I think that I 
could manage to get in just under the quarter, and so 
haul myself up by some of the ropes I see hanging ovei 
it.” 

To propose was with Cousin Silas to act; and in 
another moment he was striking out towards the wreck. 
Avoiding the main-mast, — close to which, with some 
of its spars, he had to pass, — he at length got hold of 
the quarter without injury. He was soon up alongside 
the stranger. The man was apparently unable to walk ; 
so Mr. Brand supported him, as he helped him along 
the keel, till he reached the after-part, ; and then, secur- 
ing a line to him, he beckoned us to pull in, while he 
lowered both himself and the man into the boat. We 
quickly pulled back again, before the shattered mast 
drove towards the hull. From the appearance of the 
wreck, she did not look as if she would have floated 
much longer. The stranger was a mulatto, a fine, tall 
fellow, apparently, but now looking very wretched and 
weak, from loss of blood and want of food. We soon 
had him on board, dried, and put into a clean hammock, 
under the doctor’s care. His manner at first was rough 
and somewhat sullen ; but it improved by degrees, and 
he seemed grateful for the kindness shown to him. He 
was evidently suffering so much from pain that no one 
asked him for particulars about the wreck, or how he 
had been brought into his present position. It was not 
15 * 


174 


PIRATES IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD. 


till the doctor came into dinner that we began to sus 
pect the truth. 

“ Do you know that that man has received a couple 
of desperate wounds with a long, sharp knife ? ” said he. 
“ When I discovered this, it occurred to me that he must 
have been one of the crew of the vessel which passed 
us yesterday, and that she has met the fate which was 
to be expected.” 

“No doubt about it,” answered Captain Frankland. 
“ I have thought so from the first ; but I did nol wish 
to prejudice anybody against the man.” 

“ He is not disinclined to be communicative 5 but 
whether he speaks the truth or not is another question,” 
said the doctor. “ He says that the vessel capsized was 
a Peruvian brig ; that he and another man had a quar- 
rel, in which he received two stabs; that soon after the 
brig was struck by a squall and capsized ; that one of 
the boats was uninjured, and that some dozen people 
escaped in her.” 

“ I think the latter part of his account is very likely 
in some respects to be true,” observed Captain Frank 
land. “ If so, they are a class of gentry we must be on 
the watch for and keep clear of. They cannot be far 
off, and they are not likely to stand on ceremony, if they 
want a ship, which is probable, about helping them- 
selves to the first they fall in with likely to suit them.” 

Jerry and I agreed, however, that we should very 
much like to meet with the pirates, and have a brush 
with them. ' v 

“ They would find us better prepared than they ex- 
pected,” said he. “ They do not know, besides our big 
guns, what a supply of arms we have on board.” 

Notwithstanding our strong suspicions of the charao 


LAND ON THE ISLAND. 


ITS 


ter of the stranger, he was treated from the first with 
every possible kindness. All this time we were ap- 
proaching Robinson Crusoe’s island. We almost ex 
pected to see a man dressed in goat-skins, with a high, 
conical cap, a gun in his hand, and a negro and goat 
moving behind him, waiting on the shore to welcome us. 
In my opinion, he would have found his dress of skins 
very hot in that climate, while his savage could have 
been only of a lightish-brown color. As we drew in 
with the land, rocks, trees, and shrubs, clothing the sides 
of the lofty and picturesque mountains, grew more and 
more distinct ; and then a few cottages peeped out here 
and there, and a fort guarding the only harbor, with the 
Chilian flag flying over it, showing us that it was no 
longer a deserted island ; but, unfortunately, the inhabi- 
tants we found were not of a class to make it the abode 
of peace and contentment. The Chilian Government 
have turned it into a penal settlement, and the chief resi- 
dents are the convicts and their guards. It is only to 
be hoped that the result of their labors may make it a 
fitter place for the habitation of more virtuous people. 
We ran into the harbor, which is nearly land-locked, and 
dropped our anchor. 

It was a curious feeling, coming suddenly from the 
storm-tossed ocean, to find ourselves surrounded by land, 
with lofty mountains rising up from the shore close to 
us. We all agreed that we were never in a more beau- 
tiful or picturesque spot. Even new the town is a very 
• rough sort of a place. There might have been a hum- 
dred cottages, some neatly whitewashed, but others 
made only of boughs and mud ; and even the governor’s 
tiouse is only of one story. The fort was a mere stock- 
ade, and of little use as a defence. The governor was 


TRIP INTO tiip: interior. 


176 

an Englishman, who belonged to the Chilian navy. Poor 
fellow ! his was a very unpleasant and dull life ; for, 
except a priest and the officer in command of the sol- 
diers, he had no one with whom he could converse. 
While the crew were employed in setting up the rigging, 
Jerry and I and the doctor accompanied Captain Frank- 
land on shore. We were received on landing by a very 
ragged set of soldiers, many of whom had not even shoes 
on their feet, and all, more or less, seemed to have bor- 
rowed some of Robinson Crusoe’s garments. Besides 
the governor’s house, there was a chapel, — a little, low 
building, with a cross on the top of it to show its object. 
The poor soldiers crowded round us, and asked if we 
had shoes to sell. Fortunately there were some cases 
on board, one of which the captain sent for ; and the 
third mate, who acted as supercargo, disposed of the 
whole of them, though there was some difficulty in find- 
ing articles for barter when their cash ran short. Had 
not the governor helped them, they would have remained 
shoeless. We were delighted with the quantity of fruit 
which was brought to us. There were cherries, and 
very large strawberries, and melons, and grapes — all of 
which, we had no doubt, were planted originally by Rob- 
inson Crusoe. We lunched with the governor; and 
then, while the captain returned on board, Jerry and I 
and the doctor started with a guide to take a long walk 
into the country. Away we went, highly delighted, and 
soon found ourselves in a beautiful and fertile valley, 
with waterfalls coming down the sides of the hills, and 
bright streams and ponds. We came, too, upon a flock 
of goats; and one very old fellow had a nick in his ear, 
so we had no doubt that he was one of those left by 
Robinson Crusoe himself. The doctor would not give 


Crusoe’s cave. 


177 


an opinion on the subject, but Jerry asserted that there 
could not be a shadow of doubt about it. Going on a 
little further, we came upon a cave — a veritable cave 
— in the side of the mountain, with a sort of rough porch 
in front of it, built of boughs and thatched with straw. 
Jerry uttered a loud shout of delight. 

“There!” he exclaimed. “I knew it was all true. 
Why, there is the very hut Robinson Crusoe built for 
himself.” 

His voice must have aroused some one who was within ; 
for a door was pushed open, and a figure appeared, who, 
if he was not Robinson Crusoe, was very like his pic- 
tures. He had a long beard, and was dressed in goat- 
skins, and had sandals on his feet, and a thick stick in 
his hand — altogether a very wild-looking character. 
Jerry drew back, and looked at him very much as if by 
some incantation he had conjured up the spirit of the 
long departed hero. 

“ It can’t be Crusoe,” he gasped out. “ Yet, if it isn’t, 
who can he be ? ” At length he gained courage, and 
both of us slowly approaching the man, he said, with a 
desperate effort, “ Pray tell me who you are ? ” 

A grim smile lighted up such of the features of the 
man as could be seen through his bushy beard, whiskers, 
and moustaches. He shook his head. Jerry repeated 
the question. 

“ No intende,” he answered. 

“Then he can’t be Robinson Crusoe if he doesn’t 
understand English,” whispered Jerry with a sigh. 

The doctor, who had been behind gathering plants, 
now came up. He laughed heartily when we told him 
that we had had great hopes that the rough-looking 
stranger might turn out to be Robinson Crusoe himself 


178 


MEMORIALS OF CRUSOE’S ISLAND. 


gone back to live on his own island. He exchanged a 
few words with the stranger. 

“ The man tells me that he is a goat-herd — a con- 
vict — unjustly banished here; — that of course. He 
begs that we will give him a few coppers to buy a glass 
of rum.” 

Jerry and I eagerly searched in our pockets, when 
we discovered some Chilian coins, which we bestowed 
on the poor goat-herd ; but even as I dropped them into 
his hand, I could not help feeling that I was offering an 
insult to a great man in distress, by giving him such a 
trifle. The provoking part of the affair was, that, as 
the doctor told us, the man himself had never even 
heard of Robinson Crusoe in the whole course of his 
life. We had a delightful ramble through the valleys 
and over the hills. We found an abundance of the san- 
dalwood-tree growing on the mountains, and myrtles in 
great quantities, with a variety of other aromatic shrubs. 
Vegetables of all sorts were growing in profusion, and 
there were a number of cattle and horses and mules. 
There was also plenty of milk ; and from what we saw 
at the governor’s table, there was no lack of provisions 
of any sort. 

Old Surley was with us, and he scraped acquaintance 
with a great number of the canine race of high and low 
degree, though those of low degree, I must say, vastly 
predominated. We made a collection of all sorts of 
things, — bits of myrtle and sandal-wood and leaves 
and flowers and shells ; for we were sure our friends at 
home would highly prize every thing coming from 
Robinson Crusoe’s Island. We got some delicious milk 
also, I remember, — which sailors as well as Londoners 
know how to value. There is an abundance of wood 


OTTR NEW SHIPMATE. 


J79 


on the island, and delicious streams of pure water, one 
of which runs through the centre of the town. I must 
not forget to mention the immense quantity of fish we 
caught. This abundance of fish, Captain Frankland 
considered, is owing to a cold current which flows by 
the island from the southern pole, and at the same time 
tempers the air and adds fertility to the soil. The island 
is about 300 miles from Valparaiso, 33° 30' south lati- 
tude. It is about fifteen miles long and five broad. 
After we had seen it in all directions, we agreed that it 
was indeed a pity that it was in the possession of those 
who were so little able to make a good use of it. I never 
saw a more idle set of people than the inhabitants who 
were not compelled to work. All the time we were on 
shore, they did nothing but walk about or lie down in 
the shade, wrapped up in their big cloaks. 

When we returned on board we accompanied the 
doctor to see his patient, the mulatto we had rescued 
from the wreck. The doctor asked him whether he 
would not go on shore, where he might have fresh fruit 
and vegetables, and be better taken care of than he 
could be on board. 

“ No, no,” he answered. “ Thank you, though, much. 
There are no good people in this place. I do not want 
to be among them.” 

“ Then you know something about them ? ” said the 
doctor. 

u There are very few places where I do not know 
somebody,” he answered evasively. 

The doctor did not press the point. Indeed, the poor 
man was not in a condition to be carried. He told us 
f hat his name was Manoel Silva ; that he had al his 
(ife been knocking ab)ut the world, and that h( did 


180 


OUH LAST DAY ON THE ISLAND. 


not look upon any one country as his home. We asked 
him no questions, and he did not choose to tell us how 
he had got on board the vessel where we found him. 
The next day, when we went#ou shore, the governor 
told us that he had often difficult work in keeping the 
convicts in order ; and that not long ago a dozen of them 
contrived to run off with a boat, headed by a desperate 
fellow who had been a seaman. They got clear away, 
and soon after news was brought that a large brig had 
been attacked and taken, and all the crew made to walk 
the plank. 

“ It will be necessary for us then to be on our guard,” 
remarked the captain , “They would be Ugly custom- 
ers to fall in with.” 

“ Indeed it will,” observed the governor. “ They 
were desperate and cunning fellows, too ; and they will, 
I fear, do no small amount of mischief before they come 
to an end. ,1 have sent notice to the Chilian Govern- 
ment, who will despatch one of their ships of war in 
search of the fellows ; but in this wide ocean, with 
thousands of islands among which they may lie hid, 
there is but little chance of them being found.” 

We had another day’s delightful ramble over the hills 
and across the valleys of this lonely island ; and except 
that Robinson Crusoe must have found it somewhat dull, 
being alone for so long before Friday came to him, 
Jerry and I agreed that he was in no way to be pitied, 
and that nothing we should like better than having to 
spend some time there. We did not quite settle how 
long. There are a number of caves high up in the sides 
of the mountain, overlooking Cumberland Bay harbor, 
as it is called ; and those barbarous fellows, the Span- 
iards, compel the convicts, who labor at the stone quar- 


PREPARED FOR PIRATES. 


181 


ries, to live in them. The challenges of the sentinels, 
reaching all the way down to the harbor, broke the stilly 
silence of the night, as we lay at our anchors, ready to 
sail with the first dawn on* the following morning. A 
light wind wafted us away from that romantic spot, our 
visit to which is among the most pleasing recollections 
of our voyage. We gazed astern as if we were looking 
our last on the land of our birth, and did not leave the 
deck till its faint blue mountains had sunk beneath the 
horizon. In consequence of what we had heard from 
the governor, we got our guns and small arms, in order 
to be ready for the supposed pirates, should we fall in 
with them, while a sharp lookout was kept that we might 
not be taken unawares. Captain Frankland was too 
brave and experienced a man to be afraid of taking ne- 
cessary precautions on all occasions. It did not occur 
to the captain, till we had been some time at sea, to 
inquire of Manoel Silva whether he knew any thing of 
the pirates. Grave suspicions had begun to cross his 
mind that he was in some way connected with them. 
Of course Silva denied all knowledge of them. When 
pressed to give some account of himself he replied, “ I 
am grateful for all your kindness. If I have an oppor- 
tunity I will show it. I do not wish to tell you false- 
hoods, therefore do not press me on that subject.” With 
a favorable breeze we steered a course for the coast of 
Peru. 


182 VISIT TO THE EMPIRE OE THE INCAS. 


CHAPTER IX. 

VISIT TO THE EMPIRE OP THE INCAS. 

To the south of Lima, in the Bay of Pisco, are found 
three small islands, or rather barren rocks. Not a tree 
grows on them — not a blade of grass. The feathered 
race for ages past, probably since the last flood rolled 
over the face of the globe, have made them their abode. 
Strange as it may seem, they are of more intrinsic 
value than the richest mines of Potosi, yet their pro- 
duce is all on the surface, and to be obtained but with 
little labor. They are the three Chincha Islands, and 
their produc.e is guano. It is the result of the drop- 
pings of birds, which in that dry and rainless region 
has preserved all its fertilizing qualities, and has been 
stored up, by the decree of a beneficent Providence, to 
restore strength and vigor to the far-off lands of the 
Old World. We sighted them one morning, and run- 
ning in, brought up in their neighborhood. There were 
sixty ships, mostly English, anchored near them for the 
purpose of loading with guano — and sometimes there 
are upwards of a hundred. A boat was lowered, and 
the captain, Jerry, the doctor, and I, went in her. We 
had to climb up to the top of one of the islands by a 
ladder ; the cliffs are so steep, and being composed of 
feldspar and quartz, so broken away by the action of 
the sea, that it is the only method of reaching the sum- 


GUANO ISLANDS. 


183 


mit. The island was covered with thick layers of 
guano, and one cutting, about a hundred yards from the 
cliff, was sixty feet deep, or rather high, for the cutting 
is made into it from the side, just as a slice is cut out of 
a cheese. A steam-engine is employed in digging it 
out, and filling a set of cars which run on a tramway to 
the edge of the cliff, under which the vessels lie to load. 
Two hundred convicts were engaged in shovelling down 
the guano, and a number of stout negroes are employed 
in the hold to distribute it as it comes down through a 
canvas shoot. They have to wear iron masks, as the 
fresh guano is stronger than volatile salts, and more 
penetrating than coal-dust. 

The bird which produces the guano is a sort of tern, 
with red bill and legs. It has a long whisker-like 
feather curling out under the ear on each side. The 
top of the head and the tips of the wings and tail are 
black. The body, which is about ten inches long, is of 
a dark slate color. Large flocks of gulls, divers, and 
pelicans, likewise visit the islands. It is calculated that, 
on one island alone, there were 2,000,000 tons of 
guano ; and althpugli from 200,000 to 300,000 tons are 
annually imported into England, it will take some time 
to exhaust the supply. Guano is a corruption of the 
Quichua word huanu. The Quichua is the language of 
the Incas. Under the enlightened government of the 
Incas the value of guano was well known, and severe 
laws were enacted against any one disturbing the birds 
during their breeding season. Pulling away to another 
island, we found a number of Chinese employed in 
digging out the guano. We were not surprised at 
seeing them look very miserable and unhappy ; for tht 
oppressive odor arising from the fresh-dug guano was 


184 CALLAO, THE PORT OF LIMA. 


intolerable to us even for a short time. We were told 
that many of them in their wretchedness commit sui- 
cide, flying, through their ignorance, from present evils 
to those they know not of, instead of endeavoring man- 
fully to support their lot, if inevitable, or to seek 
proper means to escape from it if they have the power 

— not that I thought this at the time, by-the-by. I 
only remarked to Jerry that they were very great fools 
for their pains. A little way up the bay, on the main- 
land, is the seaport of Pisco, a neat Spanish-built place. 
In the neighborhood are numerous remains, which prove 
how populous must have been the country under the 
sway of the Incas. 

Sailing north, we entered the Bay of Callao, the port 
of Lima. Before us lay Callao, with rich green plains 
on either side, covered with white farms and willow- 
trees, with the high cliffs of Morro Solar to the south, 
and below it the bathing-place of Cherillos. Six or 
eight miles inland appeared the white towers of Lima, 
surrounded by orange groves, while above them, far 
into the blue sky, rose peak beyond peak of the ever- 
glorious snow-capped Andes. Such is the scene which 
for many ages past, has been looked on ; but a change 

— a great and important one — is taking place in the 
land; and what was our surprise, when we went on 
shore, to see English omnibuses and broughams — and 
more than that, the terminus of a railway, the carriages 
of which ran rattling on to Lima. 

“Funny,” cried Jerry, when we found ourselves, 
with the captain and the doctor, in one of the aforesaid 
carriages, “ to think that we are all away on the other 
side of that great big straggling continent of America, 
and yet to feel, as we look about this box, as if we were 
only skurrying off* from London to Liverpool.” 


EARTHQUAKE IN PERU. 


185 


I entered into his feelings ; and the voyage round 
Cape Horn, and our different adventures, seemed like a 
dream, till we looked out and saw the giant Cordilleras, 
and then we were soon reminded where we were. We 
met a Peruvian gentleman on the railway, who told us 
much about the country. Among other things, while 
the Marquis of Villa Garcia was viceroy of Peru in 
1746, on the 28th of October, during a warm, but per- 
fectly calm evening, while the inhabitants of Callao and 
Lima were not dreaming of evil, on a sudden, without a 
moment’s warning, the earth shook with tremendous 
violence. Every house in Callao fell level with the 
ground, crushing their hapless inmates. Many of those 
in Lima were likewise overthrown ; and, as the af- 
frighted survivors looked seaward, a vast wave, like a 
gigantic wail, came roaring on towards the devoted 
place. In an instant every living soul in Callao, with 
the exception of one man who clung to a piece of tim- 
ber, was overwhelmed by the raging waters. Not a 
vestige of the town remained. On went the wave, 
carrying with it a Spanish frigate, the St. Fernim , and 
other vessels, leaving them high and dry far inland. 
Lima narrowly escaped complete destruction, and it 
was long before the inhabitants recovered from the 
panic into which the catastrophe had thrown them. 
For years, after the destruction of the Inca rule, un- 
happy Peru groaned under the misgovernment and 
tyranny of the Spaniards, and rapidly and surely the 
aboriginal inhabitants decreased in numbers. Several 
revolts occurred, but were crushed with barbarous 
severity. At length the colonists of Spain conceived 
the hope" of throwing off the yoke of the mother coun- 
try. Although frequently defeated, the people of Chili 
16 * 


186 


TEMPLE OF PACHACAMAC. 


were, by the aid of Lord Cochrane, at last successful. 
General San Martin, who had become the president, 
entered Lima on the 19th of July 1821, the viceroy La 
Cerna being cut off from any support from Spain by 
the Chilian fleet having retreated to Cuzco, where he 
took up his head-quarters. Ultimately he was com- 
pletely defeated, and his whole army was destroyed. 
On the 20th the independence of Peru was proclaimed, 
and though the republic was long subject to intestine 
commotions, from what we could learn and see, it now 
appears to be making very satisfactory progress. 

We next wished to get up to Cuzco, the ancient 
capital of the Incas, situated high up among the Andes ; 
but we had no time to accomplish the journey. We 
heard, however, of a very interesting place, twenty-five 
miles to the south of Lima, on the coast. It was the 
city and temple of Pachacamac, “ the creator of the 
world,” supposed to have been built in times long 
anterior to those of the Incas. We had two days to 
spare before the ship was to sail, and the captain said 
we might visit the place. The doctor, Jerry, and I, 
with a guide, a half Indian, set out, accordingly, at an 
early hour on horseback. We were accompanied by 
Silva, who, from speaking Spanish perfectly, went as 
our interpreter. He was still ill, and weak from his 
wounds and his exposure on the wreck, but he begged 
so hard that he might go on shore, that the doctor 
could not refuse him. He had won the regard of all 
by his respectful and unobtrusive manners, and had 
managed completely to obliterate the suspicions which 
the captain at first entertained of him. The doctor told 
us, during the ride, more than I knew before about the 
country. The early inhabitants were worshippers of 


DESTRUCTION OF THE SHRINE BY PIZARRO. 187 

Pachacamac, and wlien the Incas introduced the reli- 
gion of the Sun, instead of destroying the faith they 
found existing, with an enlightened policy they allowed 
the temples of both to exist side by side. Passing 
close to the lofty cliffs of the Morro Solar, we rode 
through a large sugar estate, and then across a sandy 
desert, with several lakes in it stocked with water-fowl, 
and soon afterwards, from the top of a gentle ascent, 
we saw before us the hill on which stands the remains 
of the once celebrated temple. The mighty fane stood 
at the top of the hill, with terraces encircling it, and 
surrounding the base was the town. Beyond were seen 
the blue waters of the Pacific rolling on the sandy 
shore. We could not help feeling sad and awe-struck 
as we rode into the deserted city. The walls were 
there, although many were battered down, but the 
roofs of all had disappeared. Passing through the 
town, we climbed up a height 400 feet from the sea, 
where the remains of the great temple were standing. 
The walls surrounding the centre space are about 20 
feet high, and we discovered even some of the vermilion 
paint with which they were adorned still adhering to 
them. Below this wall were a succession of three 
broad terraces. The interior shrine was entirely de- 
stroyed by Hernando Pizarro, when he was sent by his 
brother, at the suggestion of the Inca Atahuallpa, to 
collect the treasures which it was supposed to contain. 
The priests had got notice of his purpose, and flying, 
had concealed the greater portion of their wealth. Dis- 
appointed in his expectations, Pizarro having stripped 
the shrine of all its gold and ornaments, levelled it with 
the ground. The interiors of the larger portion of the 
nouses were full of sand. 


188 


PROSPECTS OF BEING ROBBED. 


Having wandered about through this melancholy relic 
of the past, with old Surley at our heels, who in no way 
seemed to enter into our enthusiasm, we turned to re- 
trace our steps to where we had left our horses. We 
had observed some figures at a distance among the ruins, 
but they seemed to take no notice of us. Suddenly 
they disappeared. We found our guide standing by our 
horses where we had left him. He seemed rather agi- 
tated, but we could not make out what had happened, 
as we did not understand a word of his language. 
When we mounted, he inquired of us by signs whether 
we had got pistols. We showed him that we had not, 
or arms of any sort. He did not treat us, as we after- 
wards thought he might have done, had he not been an 
honest man, and say, “ Oh, if that is the case, I will rob 
you myself.” He shook his head, and showed us his 
own Jong knife, and signified that very likely we should 
have to use it for our defence. Such was the interpre- 
tation, at all events, tha* -we put on his various signs. 
Silva, who had been a little behind, now came up. 

“ The poor man has seen some blacks who bear a bad 
character, it appears, and he is afraid they will attack 
us,” he observed. “ However, show a bold front, and 
we shall easily drive them off if they do.” As there 
was no avoiding the danger, whatever it was, so we 
made up our min Is to meet it as well as we could. 

“It has something to do with those fellows we saw 
among the ruins,” said Jerry. “ Only I think they 
would have robbed us then, had they intended to do 

BO.” 

“ Perhaps we are mistaken altogether, or what is as 
probable, our guide^has unnecessarily frightened him* 
Belf, and tried to frighten us,” observed the doctor. 


ATTACKED BY THIEVES. 


189 


“We shall see, doctor,” said I. il I hope you are 
right.” Just then we reached a small hut, such as is 
inhabited by Indians. Jerry declared that he must have 
a draught of milk, as we saw some cows feeding near, 
and before the guide could stop him, he had knocked at 
the door. Instead of the kindly face of an Indian ap- 
pearing at his summons, out rushed a big, savage-look- 
ing negro, and by his angry gestures seemed to inquire 
what we wanted. 

“ A calabash of milk, friend Sambo,” answered Jerry, 
in no ways daunted. While, however, he was speaking, 
two other blacks appeared at the door, while three or 
four more, flourishing long knives, came running toward 
us from a neighboring wood. 

“ Put spurs to your horses, boys, and let us get away 
from this ! ” cried the doctor. As we were attempting 
to follow his advice, one of the blacks seized Jerry’s 
rein, and though I struck the fellow a heavy blow with 
my stick, he would not le&> go his hold. The conse- 
quence of the blow was very nearly fatal to me, for the 
fellow ftith his other hand struck at me with a long, 
glittering knife, and had not I pulled back my horse by 
an involuntary movement, he would have plunged it 
into my side, — as it was, he cut my trousers and drew 
blood from my leg. Seeing things come to this pass, 
the doctor and Silva, who proved himself a brave fellow, 
began to lay about them, one with his stick, and the 
other with a heavy Spanish riding whip ; while old 
Surley, who, after growling fiercely, saw that the time 
for action had now arrived, began to bite away at the 
negroes’ thin calves and long heels, greatly to their an- 
noyance. Each man, as he found himself bit, turned 
round and endeavored to stab the dog, and very much 


190 OLD SURLEY SUPPORTS US BRAVELY. 

afraid I was that they would succeed ; but so actively 
did he jump about from side to side, now bounding here, 
now there, that not one of the numberless blows which 
were struck reached him, while his furious barking and 
repeated bites served most materially to distract the 
attention of our assailants. Still they were fully eight 
armed savages to five people with sticks and a whip 
and a dog ; and as Jerry and I were only boys, and old 
Surley had only his teeth to fight with, it must be 
acknowledged that we were very unequally matched. 
Feeling this, we should certainly have felt it no disgrace 
to run away if we could ; but the black held on so tightly 
to Jerry’s rein that we could not escape. At last the 
negro I speak of, finding that he had missed me and 
could not hit the dog, lifted up his long knife and made 
a desperate lounge with it at Jerry. I saw what he was 
about to do, and crying out to Surley, my stick instinct- 
ively came down with all its force on the ruffian’s arm, 
while the dog sprung up and caught him by the throat. 
He let go at that moment the rein. 

“ Now on, boys, on ! ” sung out the doctor, \$ho saw 
what had occurred, and bringing our sticks down on our 
horses’ backs, we dashed past the infuriated negroes, on 
whose heads Silva bestowed many a terrific whack with 
his stout stick, as they attempted to catch his rein. We 
were followed closely by the guide and our valiant ally, 
old Surley, at whom several blows were aimed, but he 
escaped them all, and at full gallop we pushed on over 
the sandy plain pursued by our black assailants, hap- 
pily they had no fire-arms, or we should have fared ill. 
When we had got beyond their reach, we pulled up and 
congratulated ourselves on our escape, while old Surley 
came in for his lue share of praise and thanks. H<3 


A WORD ON EMANCIPATION. 


191 


wagged his tail and opened his mouth, as if he were 
about to speak and say, i( I only did my duty, masters ; 
you feed me well, and treat me kindly, and I love you, 
and am ready to fight for you, and do you any other 
service in my power, as I hope to prove whenever I 
have the opportunity.” 

It was very late when we got back to Lima, to the 
house of a merchant who had asked us to stay with him. 
He told us that the blacks who had attacked us were, 
ae had no doubt, emancipated slaves, who had always 
borne a very bad character. Had they been properly 
educated, and prepared for freedom, they might have 
turned out well ; but those wretches -are a melancholy 
example of what will be found to be the case in other 
countries where slavery still exists, should the slaves 
suddenly be made free, or should they rise and win their 
freedom for themselves. Unless they are carefully 
trained — taught to depend on their own exertions, and 
instructed in the pure truths of Christianity — they will, 
when freed, sink into a state of sloth and wretchedness ; 
or if they rise to obtain their own freedom, they will, 
very certainly, be guilty of the most dreadful murders 
and every kind of atrocity in carrying out their designs. 
I often have since thought of what our friend said, and 
have prayed that the people of the United States will 
make due preparation for the day of emancipation 
which will, sooner or later, arrive. On the nature of 
that preparation it depends (I have often heard Captain 
Fraukland say) whether that day will be one of joy 
and gladness, or of bloodshed and wailing. 

The next morning, before returning to Callao, we rode 
out to visit the ruins of an Inca town, situated on a hill, 
forming one side of a fertile and well-irrigated valley. 


m 


ABORIGINES OF PERU. 


The walls of the houses were built of unburnt brick and 
mud, carefully constructed at right angles to each other 
and very thick — indeed, they put us in mind of some 
of the pictures we had seen of Egyptian architecture. 
We were surprised to hear of the great number of 
Indians who still exist in the country. Under the pres- 
ent government they live happy and contented lives 
among the lovely valleys of their ancestors. Their huts 
are generally built of stone, and covered with red tiles, 
creepers being taught to trail over the walls, over which 
often a huge pumpkin is seen to hang, while a prickly 
cactus stands as a sentinel at the door-way. The dress 
of the men is a serge coat of an emerald green color, 
without a collar, and with a short skirt; loose black 
breeches, open at the knee, after the Spanish fashion ; 
and a long red waistcoat with large pockets. Pieces of 
llamas’ hide fastened round the feet, serve them for 
shoes, while their legs are stockingless. On their heads 
they wear broad-brimmed hats or caps, adorned with 
gold lace or ribbons of gay colors. The women wear 
the same hat as the men, with a mantle over the shoulder 
secured in front by a silver pin ; a red bodice, and a blue 
petticoat reaching a little below the knee. Altogether 
they present a very picturesque appearance. We saw 
enough of the country to make us long to see more of 
it. but were obliged to hurry back to the railway sta- 
tion to get to Callao, once more to embark on board the 
Triton. 

It was night by the time we reached the harbor, the 
sea calm as glass; and it struck me that there was 
something peculiarly solemn as we looked out on that 
dark, silent expanse of water, after gazing as we had 
done for some days on the lofty snow-capped Cordilleras, 


LUMINOSITY OF THE OCEAN. 


m 


and the laughing green valleys round Lima. Dark as 
was the water, no sooner were the oars dipped in it, 
than it appeared as if they were ladling up some red- 
hot fluid metal ; and as the boat which was sent to take 
us off pulled towards us from the ship, she left a long 
line of fire in her wake. Even when we scooped up the 
water in our hands and threw it into the air, it appeared 
like sparkles of fire, so long did it retain its brilliancy. 
The slightest movement in the water caused a^lash of 
light. Jerry and I agreed that we had never seen any 
thing more beautiful. The doctor told us that this 
phosphorescence or luminosity of the ocean is caused by 
a minute animal, scarcely perceptible to the naked eye, 
though sufficient to tinge the water of a brown or red- 
dish color. Other marine substances, are, however, 
luminous. While we were waiting to step into the boat, 
the bay having returned to its original darkness, on a 
sudden it appeared as if it had become a vast Caldron 
of molten lead. The waters tumbled and rolled about 
in sheets of flame. 

“ It is indeed a beautiful sight,” exclaimed the doc- 
tor ; — “ never saw such a display of luminosity.” 

“Grand, grand!” cried Jerry. “A thing to talk 
about ah ! what is -that ? ” 

We were all silent. There was a low, rumbling, 
awful noise, neither like distant thunder nor the report 
of cannon — nor, indeed, any thing else I ever heard; 
the earth seemed to sink under our feet, and then as if 
it were being crushed together — rocks and earth and 
sand, all in one lump by some mighty force. It was 
very dreadful. Our knees positively trembled under 
us, at least I felt mine doing so. The boat rose and fell 
several times. I remembered, the way in which old 
17 


194 


PANAMA. 


Callao had been destroyed, and I began to fear that a 
similar catastrophe wa$ about to occur. For a time 
there was a perfect rest, no movement of earth, or water 
or air -T- not the less awful on that account though. 

“ Is it all over ? ” at length exclaimed Jerry, who was 
the first to break the silence. 

“I hope so,” answered the doctor; “but let us get 
into the boat, and pull on board ; we shall be safer there 
than on shore, at all events.” 

We followed his advice. As the boat clove her way 
through the water, she seemed to be gliding over a sur- 
face of gold, overlaid by some dark sand which was 
parted as she went by. When we got on board, we 
found that our shipmates had felt the shock, the vibra- 
tion of which must have come up as they supposed, by 
thfe chain cable. For a long time we walked the deck, 
expecting another shock, but the night passed off quietly ; 
and when morning returned there was nothing to indi- 
* cate that an earthquake had taken place. I ought to 
have said that the present town of Callao was built at a 
little distance from the site of the old town destroyed 
by the earthquake, and on a higher and more command- 
ing position. 

Once more we were at sea. One of the most inter- 
esting places we called at, on account of its position and 
associations, was Panama. For many a year it slept 
on neglected and almost forgotten. Now it has been 
completely aroused from its lethargy, to find itself in 
the middle of the highway to California, and the chief 
resting-place of gold-diggers. It is bounded by the sea 
on three sides, and surrounded^ by a wall, with ditch and 
bastions, on the land side. In the centre is the plaza , 
into which converge several streets of old-fashioned, 


. LETTERS FROM HOME. 


195 


sedate-looking Spanish houses, with broad verandas and 
heavy folding-shutters. Now a change has rudely come 
over them. Above the dopr of one appeared, in huge 
characters. — “American Hotel;” while a board an- 
nounced that “ Good Lodging, Brandy Smashes, Sice, 
and Egg-nog” were to be obtained within. There are 
several other hotels with conspicuous signs, all denoting 
that they have been established by citizens of the United 
Spates, while there exist several restaurants, cafes, and 
newspaper and billiard rooms besides. A steamer had 
arrived only a few days before at Aspinwall, on the east 
side, and the town was consequently full of passengers 
who had come across by the railway. Nowhere, per- 
haps, are the past and the present brought into greater 
contrast. We visited the ruins of several churches and 
other buildings, with massive walls, which probably 
never were finished, — all attesting the departed impor- 
tance of the place. Now palm-trees grow in their lonely 
courts ; tropical climbing "plants throw their festoons in* 
rich luxuriance over their elaborate architecture; and 
banana-trees have taken root in the clefts of the crumb- 
ling walls. Panama, however, is not the identical city 
whence Pizarro sailed for the conquest of the kingdom 
of the Incas. That city stood six miles down the coast; 
and after it was sacked and utterly destroyed by Mor- 
gan, who murdered every soul then within it, none 
returned to take up their habitation there, and it still 
remains as he left it, a heap of ruins, now ovc rgrown 
by rank vegetation. 

We -were fortunate in finding the directions Captain 
Franlyland expected to guide his future course, and I 
got letters from home. How greedily I devoured them I 
Every word I read over and over again, and I kissed 


196 INDICATIONS OF A COMING STORM. 

them more than once, when I knew Jerry was not look 
ing at me. I do not give a longer account of the place, 
because I was engaged most of the time I was there in 
writing home. I judged from the delight I felt in get- 
ting letters, that mine would afford a somewhat similar 
pleasure ; so I found they did ; and I advise those of my 
readers who have to go away from home to remember 
this, and never to lose an opportunity of writing. We 
were bound for San Francisco, the giant mushroom city 
of the wondrous gold-bearing regions of California. I 
had always fancied that the Pacific was, as its name 
betokens, a wide expanse of island-sprinkled water, 
seldom or never ruffled by a storm. At length I had 
practical proof of my mistake. We had made a good 
offing from the coast, to give a wide berth to that nar- 
row strip of land which runs from north to south, and 
is known as Lower California. I saw the captain look- 
ing constantly at the barometer; Jerry and I looked 
,al§o, for we guessed that something was the matter. 
The quicksilver sank lower and lower in the tube, show- 
ing that the superincumbent atmosphere had become 
lighter, or more rarified, and that a current of air^would 
soon come in from some direction or other to fill it up. 

“What’s going to happen ?” I asked of Jerry, seeing 
that the glass, or rather the fluid in it, fell more and 
more. 

“ Why, we are going to have such a gale as we don’t 
often meet with, I suspect,” he answered. Just as he 
spoke, his father’s voice was heard on deck. We im- 
mediately hurried there as fast as we could fly. At the 
time there was but little wind, then it became perfectly 
calm, with only a long heavy swell from the southward. 
The calm was of short duration. 


197 


A GALE IN THE PACIFIC. 

“ All hands shorten sail ! ” sung out the captain. The 
crew sprang aloft ; so did . Jerry and I. We never 
shirked our duty, and Captain Frankland knew that it 
he let us do so, whatever the excuse, we should nevel 
become true seamen. It was hard work to hold on to 
the yard, much more to get in the stiff canvass. 1 
have heard of people having their teeth blown down 
their throats by a gale; I bought mine would have 
gone, and then I should have gone too, for I literally 
had to hold on^by them to steady myself on the yard. 
Jerry was not far from me. We tugged and hauled 
away, and at last got the canvas rolled up as we best 
could ; but I must own that it was far from well done. 
The gale was still increasing in strength, and we were 
not sorry to find ourselves safe on deck again — so, I 
think, was the captain to see us. Perhaps, however, 
he had got so accustomed to the risks his son was con- 
stantly running, that he did not think about it. 
Scarcely had we come down from aloft, and were look- 
ing about to see what was going to happen, than we saw 
away to the south-east, far as the eye could reach, a 
tumbling mass of foaming waters, rushing on at a furi- 
ous rate towards us. 

1 ' 

Meantime the storm stay-sails had been set, and the 
helm being put down, the ship was hove to with her 
head to the eastward. As the seas came with the swell, 
they were regular; and though the ship plunged vio- 
lently, now rising to the summit of a wave, now sink- 
ing down into the trough, there was no fear of any of 
them breaking on board, provided our masts stood. 
Such was the' state of things when night came on. 
The wind howled and whistled and shrieked ; the sea 
roated and hissed; the timbers and the masts, groaned 
17 * 


198 


PLEASURES OP A GALE AT SEA. 

the bulkheads creaked ; and every thing and everybody, 
which was not secured very tightly, tumbled and rolled 
about in a most uncontrollable manner. For my part, 
I confess that I more than once wished I were safe on 
shore again. As to turning in, not one of us thought 
of doing that. Still the -glass was falling, and still the 
gale was increasing. With regard to eating, also, all 
we could do was to nibble a biscuit; for, as Jerry ob- 
served, had we attempted to put any thing into our 
mouths with a fork, the chances were that we should 
have sent fork and all down our throats, or dug the 
prongs into our eyes or noses, or done some other mis- 
chief. Every now and then Jerry and I started up on 
deck to see how things were going on, not that we could 
be of any use there. Just as we had agreed to go be- 
low again, a blast, as if a fresh hand had been added to 
the bellows, came down upon us; there was a terrific 
report ; the ship heeled over on her side, as if she were 
going down, and away flew the stay-sails out of the 
bolt-ropes, followed by nearly all the canvas, which, 
ill-furled in our hurry, broke loose from the gaskets, 
and, fluttering away with loud flaps, was soon reduced 
to ribbons, knotted and twisted in every conceivable 
way. As the ship fell off into the trough of the sea, 
when her sails rent, a foaming billow came roaring up, 
and striking her, made a clean breach over us. There 
were shouts and cries fore and aft. Jerry and I held 
on for our lives. Happily the stanchions we held to 
did not give way. Half- ter rifled, and not knowing 
what was next to happen, we tried to pierce the gloom 
which surrounded us. Jerry’s chief anxiety was for 
his father ; so was mine, and for Cousin Silas likewise, 
and indeed for our kind friend the doctor. I had time 


SCUDDING UNDER BARE POLES. 


199 


also, strange as it may seem, to think about old Sin ley. 
and to hope that he had not been washed overboard, for 
unwisely heiiad followed us on deck. Very soon we 
were satisfied that the captain was safe, for we heard 
him issuing orders in a clear voice, which sounded high 
above the gale. Directly afterwards, Cousin Silas 
passed us on his way forward, to get the fore-stay-sail 
on the ship, to bring her head round. 

“ If that does not do, what will happen ? •” I asked of 
Jerry. 

“We shall have to cut away the mizzen-mast and the 
main-mast too,” he answered. “ Pleasant won’t it be ? ” 
I hoped that we should not be driven to this alternative. 
As soon as the captain had given the necessary orders 
for the safety of the ship, we heard him telling Ben Yool 
to go and look for us. 

“ They be safe enough, sir,” was the answer. “ I see’d 
them after the squall.” 

“ Ay, ay, father, we are all right here,” sung out Jerry. 
How high and shrill his voice sounded amid the roar of 
the tempest ! By this time the sail was hoisted, the helm 
was put up — the ship’s head rose and fell, ancb rose 
again. At length the canvas felt the force of the wind. 

“ Hurra ! hurra ! ” was shouted fore and aft. Slowly 
round came her head — the helm was righted. The 
fore-stay-sail was quickly hauled down again, or the next 
squall would have taken it out of the bolt-ropes, and away 
we flefv under bare poles — now plunging headlong into 
the deep valleys before us, our stern lifted high up 
above the seas — now climbing the opposite side of the 
watery hill, the wave following us as it came up, vast 
and indistinct in the gloom of night, looking as if it must 
overwhelm us. 


200 AL'ARM FOR OLD SURLPiT. 

“ But what has become of old Surley ? ” I asked of 
Jerry, when we had time to draw our breath a little 
more freely. “ Can the dear old fellow be washed over- 
board ? ” 

“ I hope not- — perhaps he didn’t like the look of things 
on deck, and skulked down below again,” answered 
Jerry. “Let us go and look for him.” 

This was no easy work in the way the ship was pitch- 
ing and tumbling about, and not without considerable 
risk ; but on that point we did not very much trouble 
our heads. Old Surley was always ready to fight for 
us, and had we thought about the matter, we should 
have been ready to go through any amount of danger 
for his sahe. Letting go our ’hold, therefore, away we 
crawled, grasping at anything we could reach, to prevent 
ourselves from being rolled away to leeward. At last 
we reached the forecastle where the men had all hud- 
dled together, but old Surley was not there. This made 
us very anxious about him. No one had seen him. We 
began to fear that, as he had not hands to hold on by, 
he must have been washed overboard, when the heavy 
sea struck the ship which had laid her on her beam 
ends. 

“ You’d better not be scuttling about the decks, young 
gentlemen,” said Ben Yool. “Another of those big 
seas may come, and then if you are caught by it, you 
may be carried away further off than you’ll like.” 

“Thank you, Ben,” we answered. “We’ll take care 
of ourselves ; but we must first find old Surley, whatever 
happen.” Saying this, we began to work our way att 
again, peering ancLputting our hands into every place 
where we thought he could be stowed away. As we 
were passing along close to the booms on the starboard 


RELEASE OUR FRIEND. 


201 


side under the long boat, I thought, amidst the howling 
of the tempest, that I heard a low whine. I told Jerry. 
We together hunted about the spot, till our hands 
touched a hairy coat. It Avas that of old Surley. Of 
that we were certain, by hearing him again whine. He 
could not move. Poor fellow, he had been jammed in 
among the booms.- We judged that there would be 
great difficulty in releasing him, but after feeling about 
in all directions round him, we determined to make the 
attempt. I took his head, and Jerry took his tail, and, 
watching our opportunity, as the spars separated by the 
movement of the ship, we lifted him out of the trap in 
which he had been caught. He licked my face and 
hands, and then turned round and did the same to Jerry ; 
indeed, he took every means to evince his gratitude. 
We were very happy to find that none of his bones had 
been broken, and together we all three scrambled back 
in the best way we could to the cabin. Old Surley 
seemed to be very hungry after his imprisonment, so I 
made another excursion on deck to the cook’s larder, 
and got him a piece of meat, with which I returned to 
the cabin. We should have been glad of something of 
the sort ourselves ; but as we could not attempt to cook 
anything, and the meat I had brought was raw, we gave 
the whole of it to our four-footed friend. We all sat 
down on the deck of the cabin, holding on by the legs 
of the table, — that is to say, Jerry and I held on, and 
Surley lay between us. The doctor was in his berth. 
A.fter, as he said, he had sufficiently enjoyed the scene 
on deck, he had wisely turned in, feeling that he could 
be of no use anywhere else. Never before had I spent 
so uncomfortable a night. on board. We were very wet, 
and cold, and hungry, and not at all certain that the ship 


202 


JERRY'S CONSOLATION. 


would not go down, and carry us and all hands with 
her. 

“ It’s not so bad, though, as the time w6 spent on the 
bottom of the .boat among the Falkland Islands,” ob- 
served Jferry. 

“ But that only lasted a short time,” I remarked. 
“ For what we know, it may blow as hard as it does 
now for a week to come. What shall we do then ? ” 

“ Grin and bear it. That’s the only thing to be done 
that I know of,” answered Jerry. 

All that night we sat up, as I have described, now 
and then dozing off jor a short time, but then waking 
up again, as the ship gave a more tremendous plunge 
than before. At last the captain came and lay down on 
the sofa, and seeing that we were all safe, went to sleep ; 
but he was soon on deck again, and remained there till 
daylight. All that day tlie^ale blew as hard, if not 
harder: than ever, and we went rolling and pitching away 
before it. All the people were sent below, except the 
hands at the wheel, and they secured themselves there, 
lest they should be washed away by the seas 'which 
threatened every moment to break aboard us. As to 
looking out, all we could see were the foaming moun- 
tains of water rising up in broken masses around us, 
and the' sheets of spray which never ceasingly fleV over 
us. Night came on again, and matters had nbt mended. 
The glass was still lower than ever. Jerry and I had 
managed to shift our clothes, so that we were more 
comfortable than on the former night, and old Surley 
had had a lesson not to venture on v deck again. His 
coat. was thus dry, and we all lay down together to pass 
the night Having scarcely cloned our eyes the night 
before, we soon went to sleep. Never have I slept 


A METEOR ALOFT. 


203 


more soundly. Suddenly I woke up. The ship was 
plunging as heavily as before, and the wind was howl- 
ing and the sea roaring as loudly as ever. Still only 
half awake, I found my way up the companion-ladder. 
I looked out. No one was to be seen on deck — the 
dark mountain seas and the confused mass of rigging 
could alone be perceived. I cast my eyes aloft. What 
was that I saw? High up in the air, at the main-top- 
„ mast head, there was perched a ball of fire. I was so 
astonished, and, I may say, alarmed, that I could not 
speak. What could the phenomenon portend ? It 
stayed there for some time ; then all of a sudden it glided 
down, and went out to the main-top-sail yard-arm — a 
bright, glowing, flaming ball. It will be setting the ship 
on fire ! I thought that I would go and rouse up some 
one to tell what I had seen^in case there was any dan- 
ger tb be apprehended. Still I could not tear myself 
away from my post. I shouted out to Jerry, but he did 
not hear me. I was just returning below, when I found 
Cousin Silas at my shoulder. 

“ So, Harry; you want to find out when the gale will 
have done blowing,” said he. 

“Yes, I do indeed; but look there!” I exclaimed, 
pointing to the ball of fire. 

“Ah, there’s old Jack o’ lantern!” he answered com- 
posedly. “ Not a bad sign either. A gale seldom lasts 
long after he ha9 come. Look at him, he is rather 
playful to-night.” He was indeed. Sometimes the light 
would ascend and then descend the masts, then run 
along the yards, and waiting a little at each yard-arm, 
would be back again and slip down one of the stays to 
the fore-mast, and mount up in a second to the fore-top- 
mast head. Sometimes, when the ship rolled very much, 


204 


HOW TO CATCH JACK O’LANTERN. 


the mast-head would leave it floating in the air, but as 
she rolled back again it would quickly re-attach itself. 
More than once it got divided into several parts, as it 
flew about the rigging, but was very speedily re-united 
again. Cousin Silas laughed when I told him that I 
thought it might do us some injury. 

“ O no, Jack is a very harmless fellow,” he answered. 
“ More than once, when it has not been blowing as hard 
as it does now, before I was out of my apprenticeship, I 
and others have chased Jack about the rigging, and 
caught him too. When near, he seems to have a very 
dull, pale light. I and another- fellow determined to 
have him. At last I clutched him. I felt that I had 
got something clammy, as it were, which stung my skin 
like a handful of thin jelly fish. I brought him down 
on deck, and clapped him into a box. In the morning 
I could feel that there was something in’ the box, but 
all the light was gone, and the box hadn’t been opened 
bug, before the thing, whatever it was, was gone too.” 

Had anybody but Cousin Silas given me this account, 
I should scarcely have believed him ; and even in this 
case I had some little difficulty in not supposing that he 
must, in some way or other, have been deceived. 

Jack, however, did not bring us the fine weather we 
wished for. Daylight returned, and we were little better 
off than before. We nibbled some biscuit, as Jerry 
said, to keep our spirits up, and then had a look at the 
glass. It had risen two degrees. -Still the sea ran very 
high. Jerry and I went at last on. deck, followed by 
Surley. The captain and officers were there, for they 
had resolved to try and bring the ship to, as she was 
running a long way out of her course. This, after a 
time, was done, when the wind lulled, under a clos&* 


JERRY OVERBOARD. 


205 


reefed fore-top-sail. We rode after this much more 
pleasantly, and then the sea began to go down, and once 
more we could move about the deck without danger of 
being washed overboard. 

“ All hands make sail ! ” was at length the cheering 
cry, just as the sun had set, as the 'poets say, in his 
ocean bed- We sprang aloft — Jerry and I racing who 
should be first, up on the yard-arm. Surley looked as if 
he would like to follow. Jerry beat me. The ship was 
still rolling heavily in the swell after the gale. He was 
springing out towards the yard-arm, laughing gaily at 
his success, when the ship gave a roll, and away he was 
sent clear of the bulwarks and into the sea." To glide 
down by a back-stay, and to jump overboard after him, 
was the work of a moment. I scarcely knew what I 
was doing. I fancied that I just heard the cry of u A 
man overboard ; ” but I was not certain. I knew that 
1 was for my size a good swimmer, and I wanted to 
save my friend. He could swim, but not much. He 
threw up his arms ; I saw him, and struck out towards 
him. I had a companion, I found, hastening also to his 
rescue. It was old Surley. He swam faster than I 
did, seeming to know the importance of haste. We 
were not without means of support, for as Jerry fell the 
life-buoy had been let go. It was such as are carried 
by men-of-war, and could support several people. I 
sung out to Jerry. He heard my voice, but he only 
answered faintly. He had got his mouth full of water, 
and had been stunned and confused by his fall. He 
was beating the water wildly, forgetting apparently, that 
he could swim. 

“ Help ! help ! ” he sung out ; “ I’m sinking I I’m 
sinking ! ” 


18 


206 


RESCUE OF JERRY. 

I did my utmost to reach him, but was stiU some way 
off. Surley dashed towards him, and seized him by the 
collar, holding his head above water. I saw that the 
best thing I could do was to tow the life-buoy up to him. 
It was not far off. Surley seemed to divine my inten- 
tion, and swam towards it. At last I got it up to Jerry. 
He had just strength enough left to catch hold of it. Old 
Surley put his paws in the beckets to support himself, 
and then we all three were hanging on to the life-buoy, 
while the ship, as it seemed to us, was running far away, 
already almost concealed by the thick clouds of spray 
mth which we were surrounded. 


ADVENTURES IN MEXICO. 207 


CHAPTER X. 

ADVENTURES IN MEXICO. 

“ I am so glad you are saved, Jerry,” said I. Thesu 
were the first words I spoke after we had got hold of 
the life-buoy. 

“ But are Ave saved ? ” he exclaimed. “ Will the ship 
be able to come back ? and if she does, will they see us, 
do you think ? ” 

“ They’ll not desert us — of that we may be certain,” 

I replied ; and I thought how heart-broken Captain 
Frankland would be when he found that his son had 
fallen overboard and was too probably lost. Strange to 
say, I did not think at all of my own perilous position. 

I had gone to save Jerry, and it seemed a matter of 
course that I must save him. It must be remembered 
that our heads were very little above the level of the 
water, and that although the sea had gone down con- 
siderably, we were surrounded by masses of foam — now 
sinking into the trough, now rising to the top of a wave 
Our view, therefore, was very limited. We were look- 
ing out eagerly for the ship through the thickening 
gloom. Happily, when the life-buoy was let go, the 
trigger was pulled. This set off a sort of blue light, 
which burned at the top, and which water could not 
extinguish. We felt sure, therefore, that as long as 
that light continued burning we should be seen by those 

0 ' ~ 


( 


208 


ARE YOU PREPARED TO DIE? 


on board. Our great dread was that the light would go 
out before the ship could get back to us. We strained * 
our eyes in the, direction of the ship. The thickening 
gloom and mist were rapidly encircling her, and shroud- 
ing her from our sight. 

“ O Harry, Harry, she’s going away, and they won’t 
know where to look for us ! ** cried Jerry. “ Poor father, 
what will he do ? and my carelessness has brought you 
into this trouble, and poor Surley too. I wish you hadn’t 
jumped overboard for me.” 

“ I’m very glad I did, for I don’t think that you would 
have been alive now if I had not,” I answered; “and 
don’t have any regrets about me — I only did my duty, 
and I am sure that you would have done the same for 
me. But I say, Jerry, do you remember what Mr. Brand 
talked about when we were in the bottom of the boat 
among the Falklands ? ” 

“Yes, I do; something about our being summoned 
before many moments to stand before the Judge of all 
the world,” answered Jerry. “ I’ve been thinking of 
that just now.” 

“ So have I,” said I. “ Well, it strikes me that if we 
thought about it oftener we should be better prepared 
for the time when it does come. Come it will, I know, 

• — ‘as a thief in the night,’ the Bible says. I’ll try and 
think more on the subject, so that when the moment 
does come I may be ready.” 

Many people make resolutions as we did : how few 
keep them ! It is extraordinary that we should have 
been able to talk so much in the position in which we 
were placed. As I was saying, we strained our eyes 
gazing after the ship. 

“Jerry,” I exclaimed suddenly, “she has hove about 


THE SHIP APPROACHES US. 


209 


*— I am certain of it ! See ! see ! she is coming — - 
nearer 1 ” 

Breathlessly we watched. Even though the gloom 
was thickening, we could discern that her bow was 
turned toward us. We shouted in our eagerrjess — not 
to show where we. were: there was no use in that, nor 
could we have made ourselves heard ; the light also from 
the life-buoy was still burning brightly. On came the 
ship towards us. There was no doubt about the mat- 
ter. 

“ There’s down with the helm!” cried Jerry. “They 
are going to heave to — hurra ! hurra ! ” 

In another minute the ship lay hove to, a short dis- 
tance to windward of us. She looked like some huge, 
dark spirit, rising out of the ocean. We knew that they 
must be lowering a boat, though we could not see her. 
Then we shouted, to show that we were all right and in 
good heart. A shout from the boat’s crew was given in 
return, and a light was held up to show us that help was 
coming. O.ver the waves it came dancing towards us. 
In a few minutes more the boat was up to us, with Mr. 
Brand at the helm. Whenever any very important work 
was to be performed, I observed the captain liked to in- 
trust it to Cousin Silas. 

“ Take old Surley ofHirst ! ” exclaimed Jerry. Man- 
uel Silva, who had, it appeared, insisted on coming, was 
about to help him in. “ He has had hard work to hold 
on, poor fellow.” So Surley was taken into the boat, 
and then I, for Jerry would not get in till the last; and 
then the life-buoy was lifted in, and in a very short time 
we were all safe on deck, and the ship once more steer- 
ing towards the American coast. 

We were carried below — that is to say, Jerry and I 
18 * 


210 


MANUEL SILVA. 


The men took care of Surley. We were put into our 
berths, and the doctor came to us, and we were rubbed, 
and had some hot brandy and water ; and then I, at all 
events, felt all to rights. Jerry had been hurt by his 
fall, and it took him much longer to recover. The 
captain went and sat by him ; and Jerry told me that 
he heard him offering up his thanks to our merciful God 
for having restored his son to him. He then came and 
talked to me, and told me how sorry he should have 
been had I been lost, and how grateful he felt to me for 
having been the means of saving his son’s life. I do 
not know exactly what I said. I remember I told him 
what I was sure of, — that Jerry would have done ex- 
actly the same for me. There was this difference, that 
I could swim very well, and that Jerry could swim very 
little, so that I deserved less thanks than he should have 
done had he jumped in for me, considering that he would 
have run far greater risk for my sake than I had done 
for his. The captain smiled when I said this, but made 
no remark!* He had always been kind to me, — he was 
now kinder than ever; but this did not prevent him 
from taking every means to make me a sailor, and to 
keep me do my duty, while at the same time he afforded 
me every opportunity of seeing as much as possible of 
the world through which we were passing. 

Silva, as I before have said, by his quiet manners, 
readiness to lend a hand when any work was going for- 
ward, and anxiety to be on good terms with all, had 
completely won the good-will of everybody on board. 
He was evidently a man of some attainments, and was 
more likely to have been an officer than a man before 
the mast. With Jerry and me he was apparently very 
frank. He told us how when a young lad he had been 


211 


ON THE COAST OF MEXICO. 

turned adrift into the world to seek his fortune, without 
parents or anyone to care for hin^;-and how he had 
battled on, picking up information when he could, read- 
ing what books he could lay hands on, and laying in a 
store of knowledge for future use. 

u I have served on board vessels of every description. 
I’ve been on board slavers, and merchant vessels, and 
men-of-war of several nations. I’ve served with Lord 
Cochrane both in the Pacific and Atlantic ; and for a 
long time I was in an opium clipper in the China seas ; 
but as you know, lads, a rolling stone gathers no moss, 
and here I am, as poor as I was when I first began life. 
However, there are plenty of ways by which a man may 
make his fortune if he chooses, and I must find one of 
them some of these days.” 

He spoke in a desperate, careless tone, as if he in 
reality cared very little what became of him, or what he 
did. We had begun to feel a strong liking for the man, 
and were now inclined to pity him sincerely. 

I will not describe another gale which came on, and 
drove us away to the southward and westward for 
several days, the wind shifting about so much that we 
scarcely knew where we had got to. At length when 
it had moderated, so that an observation, could be taken, 
we found that we, were on the coast of Mexico, not far 
from the harbor of Mazatlan, near the entrance of the 
Gulf of California. The ship had been so battered about 
during the gale, that the captain was glad of an oppor- 
tunity of running into harbor to repair damages, before 
proceeding to San Francisco, where he could not expect 
to find workmen, and where, if he remained long, his 
own crew might be tempted to desert. As we stood in 
for the shore, a few barren rocks or small islands 


212 


AN INN IN MEXICO. 


appeared in sight, and running through 'we found our. 
selves before a pretty little town, part of it standing on 
the foot of a steep promontory, and partly on a sandy 
bank which encircles a wide lagoon. This was Mazat- 
Ian. It is inhabited by Mexican Spaniards. The first 
mate, Mr. Renshaw, had not been on shore during the 
voyage, so the captain insisted on his going with the 
doctor and Jerry and me. We first went to an inn, — 
a meson , as it was called. It consisted of a quadrangu- 
lar building, with a court-yard in the centre, and a cor- 
ridor running round it. All the rooms opened into this 
corridor, and had no communication with each other. 
The corridor w r as the general Iounging-place ; and at 
night many of the guests who preferred air to privacy, 
slung their hammocks in it. Round the walls, or on 
the pillars, they also hung up their -saddles and other 
riding gear. As to furniture, there is something like a 
bedstead, a wooden elevation which keeps the sleeper 
from the floor ; but chairs and tables are luxuries sel- 
dom met with, while wash-hand-stands are things un 
heard of, — washing being but little in vogue among the 
travelling population. We were fortunate in falling in 
with two Englishmen ; — that is to say, one, Captain 
Driscoll, was an'Irishman, who had been in the Mexi- 
can service ; and the other, Mr. Dwyer, was a merchant. 
They knew the country well, and were travelling toward 
Durango, the largest town in the neighborhood. They 
had with them two young men, sons of rancheroes , as 
the Mexican cattle farmers are called. They both lived 
some way up the country, and as they also were bound 
to Durango, and had speedily to return, it was Arranged 
that we should all travel together. With the addition of 
our new friends’ two servants, we thus together mus- 


PREPARATIONS FOR OUR JOURNEY. 213 

tered ten persons. We were all of us well armed, and 
not without necessity ; our friends told us that the coun- 
try had lately been infested by large bands of Comanche 
Indians, who had been driven away from the borders of 
the United' States, and had discovered that they were 
able to carry on their depredations among the Mexicans 
almost with impunity. “ They are not likely to attack 
a well armed party, and if they do, we can give a good 
account of thejn.” This account only the more excited 
our interest, and we quite hoped that the Indians would 
attack us. When we first went to the inn, we saw a 
large party on horseback just setting out, we understood, 
in the same direction. They were all armed to the 
teeth, — with pistols in their belts, some with swords by 
their sides, and others with lances or rifles. They 
made a gay appearance on their richly caparisoned 
steeds, with their broad-brimmed hats and feathers, 
bright-colored sashes, trousers open at the knees, with 
silver buttons, and loose jackets, with yellow boots and 
large silver spurs. They were laughing loudly and 
talking, and as they flourished their spears and rifles 
they boasted how they would treat any Indians who 
might dare to attack them. The doctor said he thought 
that it was a pity we had not been ready to accompany 
them. 

“ Let them go alone,” answered our friend ; “ I know 
those boasting gentlemen too well to trust them. If 
attacked, they would leave all the fighting to us. We 
shall be better off by ourselves.” Our friends provided 
horses and all necessaries for the journey, and in high 
spirits we started, mounted on high Spanish saddles, 
from which it seemed impossible that we. could ever 
tumble off. I will not attempt to describe the scenery 


214 


A FARM HOUSE. 


in detail. It was hilly and woody and rocky, Avitli val- 
leys and waterfalls ; now and then we came to a plain 
with a wide extent of open country, and then had to 
cross rocky ridges, and climb lofty heights among crags 
and pine-trees; but nothing came amiss to us or our 
horses. The young farmers had pressed us to stop a 
day at their father’s house, which was only a little out 
of the way. It was built in the fashion of the inn I 
have described, surrounded by the farm-buildings and 
pens for cattle. The father was a fine, hearty old man, 
dressed in the ancient Spanish costume ; and their 
mother and sisters were kind, fresh-looking people,, veiy 
unlike the parchment-skinned, withered crones we had 
seen in the town. They gave us for supper tortillas , 
which are thin cakes made of com, and eggs and fried 
beans, and some other things, to which we did justice. 
The next morning our friends asked us if we would like 
to see a hunt. 

“ Of what ? ” we asked. 

“ Of a bear,” was the answer. “ One has been seen 
in the neighborhood, and his destruction is resolved on.” 

“Oh, by all means!” we exclaimed, wondering in 
what way the bear was to be hunted. “ Let us go.” 

After an early breakfast we set out on horseback, 
accompanied by several men on foot carrying long poles. 
Each of the young ranclieroes had a long coil of rope 
round his saddle-bow' to which one end was fastened — 
at the other was a running loop. This I found was a 
lasso, — a weapon (for so it may be nailed) in their 
hands of very formidable character. The appearance 
the young rancheroes presented on horseback was very 
picturesque. Their saddle-cloths and saddles were richly 
worked, and the head-gear of their horses was adorned 


ADVENTURE WITH A BEAR. 


215 


with gay tassels. Round their own heads and necks and 
waists they wore bright-colored handkerchiefs. Their 
jackets and trousers were made very loose, and adorned 
with a profusion of silver buttons ; while on their heels 
they wore huge silver spurs with rowels as large as the 
palm of a man’s hand. Two other rancheroes joined 
us. They had seen the bear and found out his haunts. 
We reached a wild, rugged country, with a few trees in 
the valleys, and numerous large rocks jutting out in the 
sides of the hill. 

“ The rancheroes say that the bear’s cave is not faT 
off from here,” observed one of our English friends. 
“We must be prepared for him. Keep by us and do 
as we do.” Scarcely had he spoken when a loud growl 
or snort was heard, and not a hundred yards from us a 
huge, grisly, brown monster, rushed out from behind a 
rock, showing his teeth, and standing upon his hind legs ' 
as if ready to fight. I had never seen a more ferocious- 
looking monster. While we were looking at him he 
went down on his fore paws, and with a loud growl, 
made a rush at us. 

“ Put spurs to your horses, and gallop down the val- 
ley, or he will be upon us ! ” exclaimed our friends. We 
were no*t slow to follow this advice. I looked round — 
the bear was following us. Fast as we went, unwieldy 
as the monster looked, he came as rapidly after us. 1 
could riot help thinking if one of our horses fell, what 
would become of the rider. It was not unlikely either, 
that one of us, especially the first mate, who was not ac- 
customed to ride, might tumble off If so, the bear 
would certainly kill him. On we went as fast as our 
horses’ legs could carry us. The bear was, notwith 
standing this, gaining on us. I kept alongside Jerry, sc 


216 


jerry’s escape. 


did the mate. The horses could not go faster. I won- 
dered what had become of the rancheroes ; I did not 
see them. Another terrific growl was heard, and, look- 
ing over my shoulder, I saw that thejbear had- gained 
still more on us. He was not Eighty -paces from us. 
Just then I saw Jerry pulling at his horse’s bridle, fie 
hauled away lustily, but it was too late. Down went 
the poor animal over a big stone, and away flew Jerry 
over his head. I shrieked with terror. How could I 
help him ? I turned round, hoping to divert the bear’s 
attention ; but the monster took no notice of me, and 
made straight at Jerry. At that moment, when Tthought 
that it was all up with him, I heard a loud switch , as if 
something were passing rapidly through the gir, and 
two of the rancheroes darted out from behind a cliff, 
having thrown their lassos over the bear’s head and 
shoulders. Away they galloped in an opposite direc- 
tion to which he was- going, till their ropes were at their 
fullest tension, and then their horses drew up, planting 
their feet firmly on the ground, and dragging against 
the astonished animal. Instead of seizing the prey he 
expected, he found himself drawn up with a halter round 
his neck, and beating the air in a vain endeavor to 
escape. When he found that he could make no head 
against the two rancheroes, who were endeavoring to 
stop him, he turned round in a fit of fury and endeav- 
ored to overtake them. Keeping their lassos at full 
stretch, away they went before him ; and if he stopped 
a moment to try to get rid of the nooses, they gave him 
a jerk which made him move on again. Jerry was, 
happily, not hurt by his fall, and having caught his 
horse, the mate aSid I helped him quickly to mount and 
to overtake the rest of the party who were following the 


THE BEAR CAPTURED. 


2li 


hunters. After galloping along the valley, for a quarter 
of a mile or so, the two other rancheroes darted out 
from behind a rock* and whirling their lassos round 
their heads, cast them with unerring aim over the shoul- 
ders of the bear, and then galloped away from him. The 
monster had now four lassos round him. Mighty as 
was his strength, and fierce as were his struggles, he 
was in an instant brought to the ground. He bit, and 
struggled and snarled, or rather growled, in vain ; tighter 
and tighter grew each noose till he was hauled over on 
his back. Some of the men on foot, who had been 
hidden in the neighborhood, rushed forward, and threw 
their lassos over his legs. He was now utterly help- 
less. Then the men came with their long poles, with 
■which they formed a sort of litter, and off they carried 
poor Bruin in triumph. It was certainly much pleas- 
anter examining him now he was made fast than when 
he was at liberty. We w r ere told that his strength is so 
great that he can, without difficulty, overcome the huge 
bison whom he meets with in the plains. The doctor 
called him the Ursus ferox. His claws were long and 
strong, his canine teeth of great size, and his eyes deeply 
sunk in his head. We followed the huge prisoner in 
triumph till we came to a road, when he was put on a 
cart and rumbled off to the farm. Thence he w r as for 
warded to Mazatlan, and very likely shipped off to some 
distant part of the world. 

On our way back to the rancho, we encountered a 
herd of wild cattle, one of which the young rancheroes 
wished to capture. Off they set in pursuit of a fine bull 
they had singled out from the herd. One of them rode 
up on the right side of the animal about twenty feet off, 
the other kept a little behind at about the same distance 
_19 




218 


CAPTURE OF WILD BULLS. 


on the' left side. Away flew the noose of the right-hand 
man over the head of the beast ; at the same moment 
the ranchero behind cast his, by a peculiar knack, over 
the left hind-foot, as the animal lifted it in running. The 
sudden jerk brought him to the ground, and the other 
ends of the lassos being fastened to the saddles, the 
horses stood perfectly still, dragging away with all their 
might in opposite directions. Their masters quietly dis- 
mounted, and leaving their horses thus keeping the bull 
secure, they leisurely approached him. They then se- 
cured his feet in such a way that he could only just walk, 
and bent his head down to his legs, so that he could not 
butt, and making him get up, led him aw T ay a prisoner. 
Several were treated in the same way. We wonder- 
fully enjoyed our day’s excursion. 

The next morning by daybreak we set off to continue 
our journey. It was very pleasant travelling. Some- 
times Jerry and I rode together, sometimes with the 
doctor or Mr. Renshaw, and at others with our two Eng- 
lish friends, from whom we gained a good deal of infor- 
mation. From all I heard, I should not at all like to 
live in Mexico. . The descendants of the fierce conquer- 
ors have become a most degenerate race, without relig- 
ion, without morality — each man ready to destroy his 
neighbor for the sake of getting into his place. That 
object seems to be the only end and aim of all their pol- 
itics. As to patriotism, it does not exist. The nearest 
approach to the sentiment is made by those who wish 
for a settled government, that they may enjoy their prop- 
erty in peace and quiet. The consequences of the con- 
stant change of government are, that brigands- abound, 
that the confines of the country are left open to the dep- 
redations of the Red Indians, and that the army of the 


VILLAGE DESTROYED BY INDIANS. 


219 


state is left in a dreadfully disorganized condition — ill 
paid, ill fed, ill clothed, and utterly unable to cope with 
the evils which beset them. We stopped for a few hours 
at a ruined house tc take our mid-day meal, and then 
continued our journey. Soon after this we came to some 
blackened walls which showed where a village once 
stood. We learned from the rancheroes that only a few 
weeks before there existed on the spot a pretty hamlet, 
with a contented and happy population of some fifty per- \ 
sons or so. One morning, just as they were setting forth 
to their work, the dreaded warwhoop of the Indians 
was heard. Two or three hundred Red Indian warriors, 
armed with spears, rifles, and round shields, were seen 
galloping towards the devoted village. Some of the 
people fled. All tried to flee, for so completely unpre- 
pared were they that there was no time to make any 
defence. The women and children, as they w r ere over- 
taken were indiscriminately slaughtered. The plun- 
der that was considered worth carrying 'off was collected, 
and then in wantonness the village was set on fire. A 
few of the fugitives had at length reached Durango with 
the tale of their misfortunes. Some troops had been 
sent out with orders to exterminate the savages ; but 
they took very good care not to come near them, while 
the Indians, indeed, were probably making a foray some 
two three hundred miles away. At night we reached a 
rancho, the owner of which was known to our friends. 
He received us hospitably, slung hammocks for us in 
one of ’Die corridors of the house, and gave us the usual 
tortillas, and eggs, and beans for a feast, in addition to 
gome very fine beef. The evening of the, next day was 
approaching, when, as we were descending a hill, we 
saw in the plain below'us a number of horsemen gal* 


220 


A SKIRMISH WITH INDIANS. 


loping about. We were too far off to make out what 
they were. The rancheroes gazed earnestly at them. 
Mr. Renshaw had a good glass with him. 

“ Why, there are red fellows on horseback, with spears 
and shields, but without a rag on them,” he exclaimed. 
“They seem to be fighting with another set of fellows 
dressed as Spaniards, and, hang it, the latter are turn- 
ing heels and flying.” The rancheroes seemed very 
much excited all the time, and rode a little way down 
the hill, that they might better see what was going on. 
They quickly turned round and beckoned to us to join 
them. We did so, and soon saw that if we would save 
the lives of the Mexicans, there was not a moment to 
be lost. Although there were thirty of them, there 
were fully four times as many Indians. It was not diffi- 
cult to divine what had occurred. The Mexicans had 
been taken by surprise, and instead of pulling up #nd 
keeping close together, each man had galloped off in the 
hope of saving his own life, without thinking of his com- 
panions. The Indians had thus got in among them, and 
had already pierced several through with their long 
spears. Each Indian warrior, however, as soon as he 
had killed or disabled a. man, stopped to take his scalp, 
and this gave time to some of the Mexicans once more 
to unite and to present a better front to the enemy. 
The resistance they were making, however, was very 
feeble, and as we galloped on we saw that they had once 
more begun to break. The Indians had been so intent 
on the attack, that they had not perceived our approach, 
neither had ’the Mexicans. 

“Now, my friends,” exclaimed our friend Captain 
Driscoll, who seemed, as if by right to take the com- 
mand, “ keep together, shoulder to shoulder, and dash 


WE REACH THE SCENE OE ACTION. 221 

boldly in among those red villains. Cut them down, 
and pistol them as best you can, shouting at the top of 
your voices. I know them of old; they won’t stand that. 
When they hear English voices they’ll run; they know 
what they are to get. Wait till I give the word 
though.” 

It was very exciting. Down the steep hill we dashed 
at full speed, our horses seeming clearly to understand 
what we Were about. Already several more Mexicans 
had, through their cowardice, lost their lives. We were 
within two hundred yards of the scene of strife. 
“Now’s the time!” shouted our leader. “ Hurra, hur- 
ra ! my lads ! Give way, you red scoundrels ! ” we all 
shouted at the top of our voices. The Indians, hearing 
our cries, turned their heads, and seeing a large body of 
horsemen coming down the road, and not knowing how 
many there might be following, thought that it was high 
time for them to be off. Our appearance, also, gave 
the Mexicans courage, and they charged more manfully 
than they had done before. 

“ Wallop ahoo aboo, Erin gobragh ! ” sung out our 
leader, Captain Driscoll. “ Fly, ye red scoundrels ; fly, 
or we will cut you into mince-meat!” Whether the 
Indians understood what he said I do not know, but as 
he suited the action to the word, wielding a pretty 
heavy Toledo, they took his advice, and, disengaging 
themselves from the melee, urged their horses to a rapid 
flight. We, however, were too close to them to allow 
thfim to escape altogether with impunity, and three of 
them were knocked off the backs of their steeds, two of 
whom were mortally wounded. A third, I thought, Was 
.dead. He lay on the ground without moving, or appar 
ently breathing, his tomahawk still held in his death- 
19 * 


222 


A BRAVE INDIAN. ' 


grasp. The cowardly Mexicans very soon put the 
other two poor wretches out of their pain, by running 
them through and through with their lances. Two or 
three of the heroes were in the act of charging the dead 
man, with the intention of running him through, when 
up he sprung to his feet, and away he went as quick 
almost, it seemed, as a flash of lightning after his com- 
rades ! Several of our party gave chase after him, but 
though he was on foot it appeared as if he would dis- 
tance us. His leg, however, had been wounded, and he 
had miscalculated his strength. His pace slackened. 
Once or twice he stumbled ; he felt that he could run 
no more. He was a brave fellow, and was determined 
to die like a man, with his face to his enemies. Flour- 
ishing his tomahawk above his head, he uttered his war 
cry, and rushed desperately towards us. A Mexican’s 
lance struck him on the shoulder, and brought him to 
the ground. The other Mexicans were about to de- 
spatch him, but Captain Driscoll sung out in Spanish, 
“Spare his life; spare his life; we do not kill fallen 
enemies ;” and Jerry and I, impelled by the same feel- 
ings, threw ourselves before him, and by signs showed 
that we had resolved to protect him. The Indian 
seemed to comprehend what we were about, though per- 
haps he thought we wanted to preserve his life only to 
torture him, for he did not show that he was in any 
way obliged to us. The moment the lance was with- 
drawn, he sprung up with his weapon in his hand, ready 
to fight on ; but one of the rancheroes threw his lasso 
over his shoulders, and, with a jerk which, had it been 
round his neck, would have dislocated it, brought him 
again to the ground. , 

“We will bring him along with us,” said Captain 


THE USE OF THE LASSO, 


223 




Driscoll; “the poor wretch has shown great courage, 
and deserves to live. Perhaps we may learn from him 
something about his tribe.” 

The captive Indian was dragged along; and, finding 
that at present he had no chance of- escape, he came on 
quietly. No less than eight of the Mexicans had lbst 
their lives, so sudden had been the attack of the red 
men, and most of the bodies had been deprived of their 
Scalps. As it was impossible to carry the corpses with 
us, and we had not time to bury them, they were left to 
afford a banquet to the birds of the air and the beasts 
of the forest — a common occurrence in this country. 
Some of those who had run away now came back, and 
by degrees the whole party was once more collected 
together. It was already late in the afternoon, and we 
were anxious to find some place where we could rest 
for the night. There was a village, we heard, at no 
great distance, and by riding pretty hard 'we might 
reach it by nightfall. After what had occurred, this we 
were all well disposed to do, for we could not tell at 
what moment the Comanches, when they found that our 
numbers were smaller than they had supposed, might 
come back and attack us. It was amusing to hear the 
vaporing and boasting of the Mexicans, as our friends* 
with their own comments, translated it to us. The 
greater boasters were tire greatest cowards. Not one 
but could offer an excellent reason for having run away. 
Several were going to procure help ; others to get be- 
hind the Indians, to attack them in the rear; others 
were heroically making a diversion, to draw off their 
attention from their friends. It was nearly dark when 
we reached the village, but not a sign of living beings 
was there — no dog" barked, no child’s cheerful voice 


224 


THE FIGHT OYER. 


was heard, not a cock crew. Alas ! there were black- 
ened roofs and walls, and 'charred door-posts. The 
Indians had been there ; all the inhabitants must have 
been slain or had fled. We rode through the hamlet ; 
not a human being” was to be found. One house — the 
hugest in the place — had escaped entire destruction. 
It had two storys ; a ladder led to the upper one. It 
would afford us shelter during the night, which gave 
signs of being a tempestuous one. Behind the house 
were some sheds, where our horses might be tethered. 
The first thing to be done was to obtain food for them. 
It was more important that they should be fed than that 
we should ; so a party was sent out to cut grass, and 
soon returned with a sufficiency. Most of the people 
had brought provisions, as we likewise had done, and 
thus in that respect we were very w r ell off. Captain 
Driscoll, by tacit consent, was chosen to make the 
arrangements for our security during the night. In 
the lower room was a large hearth, on which a blazing 
fire was made, and by the light of it we ate our some- 
what frugal supper. We then all climbed up into the 
loft, and the Mexicans, with their serapes, and saddles, 
and sadclle-cloths, soon made themselves comfortable 
beds, and we imitated their example. The Indian 
prisoner had been made to come up, and then they 
bound his arms and legs, and he sat in one corner with 
a man to watch him. I had been asleep* some time, 
when I felt Jerry pulling at my arm. I looked up^ 
The light of the moon was streaming in through a gap 
in the roof, for the storm which had threatened had 
passed off. Jerry put his finger to his lips to impose 
silence, and pointed to the Indian. He was sitting up ; 
his hands were free, and he was busily employed in 


ESCAPE OF OUR PRISONER. 


225 


disengaging his legs from the lashings which secured 
them. What to do I scarcely knew. If the prisonei 
would go away without hurting any one, I thought it 
would be the best thing that could happen. Then it 
occurred to me that if he escaped he might give infor- 
mation to his friends of our whereabouts, so I thought 
it would be best to stop him. I was on the point of 
singing out, when up sprung the Indian, the long knife 
of his sleeping guard in his hand. He was about to 
plunge it into the man, when Jerry’s and my shouts 
arrested his arm, and leaping down the trap-hole at 
which the ladder was placed, before those who had been 
aroused could catch hold of him, away he flew through 
the village. Pursuit was instantly made, but before 
the foot of the ladder could be reached, he was out of 
sight. Those who had gone after the Indian returned 
looking very foolish ; and the man who had charge of 
him was soundly rated, but .that was all that could be 
done. I found that the same reason for apprehension 
was entertained by the party which had occurred to me. 
However, after a time, the Mexicans got tired of watch- 
ing, and all lay down again in their places. I could 
not go to slepp. I did not like the thought of that 
Indian escaping, and I wondered that Captain Driscoll 
did not take more precautions to guard, against a sur- 
prise. I found that Jerry was awake, and when I told 
him my ideas he agreed with me. We lay still for a 
little time, and then we got up and looked out. The 
night was perfectly still and fine. We fancied that if 
anybody were stirring we should not fail to hear. We 
went back into the loft, and then found that Captain 
Driscoll was awake. He asked us what we had been 
about. We told him our apprehensions. He laughed, 


226 


SURPRISED BY OUR ENEMIES. 


and replied, that after the drubbing we had given the 
red rascals they would not venture to come near us. 

“ The Duke of Wellington tells us that we should never^ 
despise our enemies, whoever they may be,” I answered. 

Captain Driscoll laughed. “ The duke was not think- 
ing of Red Indians,” he observed. “ Don’t be alarmed, 
my boys, the thieves won’t come.” Scarcely had he ut- 
tered the. words, when there was a neighing, and kicking, 
and stamping of horses’ feet in the court-yard below us. 
We looked out. The place was full of Red Indians ! 

“ To arms ! to arms ! ” shouted the captain. Every- 
body was instantly on their feet. I found that he had 
made more arrangements than I had fancied. The 
Indians had got over the walls of the court-yard, but the 
gate was so blocked up that they could not open it to 
get our horses through. Their only outlet was through 
the house. The door leading to this was instantly occu- 
pied by some of the Mexicans, while others ran their 
rifles through all the crevices and holes in the walls, 
and began firing away at the Indians. They, disap- 
pointed in their attempt to carry off our horses, after 
ham-stringing several of them, leaped back over the 
walls, exposing themselves as they did so to the rifles 
of the Mexicans. Several were shot down, but the 
greater number made their escape. No one attempted 
to follow them, however, for there could be no doubt 
that a large party of them .were in the neighborhood, 
and that they would very likely renew their attack on 
us. They did not disappoint us. In less than a quarter 
of an hour the trampling of horses’ hoofs was heard, 
and through the gloom of night a large body of horse- 
men was seen galloping up through the street of the 
rained village. As they got near, they gave vent to the 


THE ENEMY DEFEATED. 


227 


most unearthly shrieks and cries, intending, undoubt- 
edly, to terrify us. Captain Driscoll was not, however 
totally unprepared for them. He had stationed the 
best marksmen of the party behind the walls of the en- 
closure and at the windows of, the house. There was 
little time, however, to make the arrangements, but 
each man seemed to know pretty well what he had to 
do. Not a shot was fired, not a word was uttered. 
The Indians, expecting an easy victory, galloped along 
the road, flourishing their lances, or holding their rifles 
ready to fire as soon as any one appeared to fire at. 
They got up close to the walls of the house, and there 
halted, fancying apparently that we had already de- 
camped. Some got off their horses, to examine the 
ground for our trail. 

“ Tira / lira ! — fire, my lads, fire ! ” shouted our 
leader in Spanish and English. Every one of us obeyed 
the order with such effect that fully a dozen savages 
were knocked over, and many more wounded. We 
lost not a moment in loading again. The savages, fir- 
ing their rifles at us, rode desperately up to the walls, 
as if intending to jump off their horses andjclimb pvei 
them. Had they succeeded in so doing, they might 
have overwhelmed us with their numbers. They were, 
however, received with another volley, delivered with 
such good effect" thaf their courage failed them, and, 
wheeling about, they galloped away down the road as 
fast as they could tear. Two Mexicans only were 
wounded, and not very seriously. As may be supposed, 
no one went to sleep again that night ; and as soon as 
day broke, we were all in our saddles, that we might 
reach Durango before dark. We now proceeded with 
something like military order, to avoid a surprise ; for 
it was thought probable that the Indians might have 


228 


DURANGO. 


formed an ambush on the road, with the intention oL 
attacking us. In the -afternoon, as we rode along, we 
caught sight of a body of horsemen winding their way 
down a hill on the opposite side of the valley. They 
might be Indians. Each man examined the lock of his 
musket or rifle, and felt his side for his sword. They 
approached, and we then saw that they were a troop of 
cavalry. They were very ragged, and their horses were 
very miserable, and certainly they did not appear as if 
they could contend with the well-mounted Indians we 
had encountered. These Comanche Indians, as the 
Mexicans call them, succeed in their forays by the rapid- 
ity of their movements. They will accomplish a hun- 
dred miles in the day, driving several horses before them. 
When one is tired, they mount another. If any are 
killed by over-riding, their places can always be sup- 
plied from the nearest cattle estate. They strike terror 
among the widely-scattered inhabitants of the borders ; 
but there is no doubt, if they were bravely and system- 
atically opposed, they would be very quickly driven away, 
or compelled to have recourse to more peaceable occu- 
pations for their support. Durango is a pretty little 
town, with white-washed, flat-roofed houses, standing on 
a plain, surrounded by high rugged hills, a remarkable 
feature being the number and size of the American aloes 
which grow in the neighborhood. We put up at a meson, 
not remarkable for its cleanliness, or the luxury of its 
provisions, and were not sorry to find ourselves once 
more in our saddles on our way back to Mazatlan. We 
reached that place without any adventure ; and the same 
evening, having wished our kind friends, Captain Dris- 
coll and Mr. Dwyer, good-by, sailed for San Francisco, 
the wonderful port of the gold regions of California. 


CALIFORNIAN EXPERIENCES. 


229 


CHAPTER XI. 

CALIFORNIAN EXPERIENCES. 

CNE/fine morning we found the Triton — one of a 
crowd of vessels of all rigs and sizes — standing in 
with a fair breeze towards the far-famed harbor of San 
Francisco. High black rocks ran out of the sea before 
us, like monsters guarding the entrance to that domain 
of boundless wealth. Loud roars, too, saluted our ears, 
which, on a further examination of the rocks, were 
found to proceed from a large congregation of sea-lions 
assembled at their bases. As we glided by, not fifty 
fathoms from some of the rocks, they looked up at us 
with inquiring eyes, as if to know why we had come 
there-; and certainly, from their formidable heads, they 
appeared as if they were well able to defend their 
native territory. Jerry could not resist the temptation 
of ^firing his rifle among them. It had a wonderful 
effect on the whole body ; big and little sea-lions, apd 
cows, and seals, all began floundering away in the 
greatest dismay into the water — their awkward-looking 
movements being very amusing; at the same time 
thousands of birds, which had been perched on the 
rocks, or floating in the water, rose into the air with 
loud screams, circling round our heads ; while porpoises, 
Dr some other huge monsters of the deep, kept gambol- 
20 


230 


HARBOR OF SAN FRANCISCO. 


ing around us, and now and then leaping out of the 
water in sportive humor. 

All this exhibition of wild animal life was, it must be 
remembered, within a few miles of the rich and popu- 
lous city of San Francisco. The transition was very 
great ; yet but a short time back a rude fort and a few 
small huts were the only settled abodes of man The 
actual harbor begins at a spot called the Golden Gate, 
where a high rock with a flat summit projects into the 
water. On it the American Government are construct- 
ing a fort which no hostile vessel will be able to pass 
with impunity. Passing this point, we saw before us, 
on the right, a perfect forest of masts, with every flag 
under the sun flying aloft; and behind them appeared, 
on a low hill rising like an amphitheatre from the har- 
bor, the far-famed city itself. It was a busy, exciting 
scene. Some of the vessels brought bands of English 
adventurers ; others crowds of Chinese, with round felt 
hats and long tails ; others Malays ; and some even 
seemed to have blacks on board. At a short distance 
from the city were moored several large ships, their 
masts struck, their rigging unrove, deserted by their 
crews, and some by their officers likewise. The doctor, 
Jerry, and I, were the only persons who accompanied 
the captain on shore. The mates remained to guard 
against all risk of any of the crew deserting. It was 
only just daylight when we landed, but all the world 
was astir. Time is considered too precious here to lose 
a moment. The town itself presented an extraordinary 
collection of strong contrasts : there were wooden sheds, 
and tents, and mud hovels, mixed-up with vast stores 
and large dwelling-houses; while carts, and wagons. 


MARKET OF SAN FRANCISCO. 


231 


and coaches of every variety of build, were moving 
about in all directions, among people from every part 
of Europe, — Germans, Italians, French, Greeks, and 
English — the latter, of course, predominating as 
to numbers ; Yankees, with their keen, intelligent 
looks ; Californians, in their serapes ; Mexicans, with 
their laced breeches and cuffs ; and Chilians, in broad- 
brimmed hats ; Sandwich Islanders, and negroes from 
every part of Africa ; Chinese, with their long tails and 
varied colored robes; and Malays and other people 
from the East. Indeed, Europe, Asia, Africa, and 
America, were there fully represented, — all brought 
together for the one object — a search for gold — all 
thinking of their own business, and caring little or 
nothing for anybody else so that> their aims were not 
interfered with. Those who had been to the diggings 
were pretty clearly to be distinguished by the one dark 
brown earthy hue which pervaded their dress, and such 
parts of their countenances as their huge tangled beards 
and whiskers allowed to be visible. 

We first went to the market; to obtain provisions for • 
the ship. It was already crowded with purchasers. 
There was a magnificent display of fruit and vegetables, 
and fish of all sorts and strange shapes, and huge lob- 
sters and turtle of a size to make an alderman’s mouth 
water ; and then in the meat market there were hung 
up before the butchers’ stalls huge elks with their 
superb antlers, and great big brown bears — just such 
monsters as the one we saw captured, for they are con- 
sidered dainties here — and beautiful antelopes, and 
squirrels, and hares, and rabbits, in vast heaps — not to 
speak of pigs, and sheep, and oxen. The beef, we 
heard was, and found to be, excellent. I mention these 


232 TRADES IN SAN FRANCISCO. 

things to show how the inhabitants of a vast city like 
San Francisco, though just sprung into existence, can, 
by proper arrangement, be fed. A large number of 
the shops are kept by Chinese, who sell all the fancy 
and ornamental work, and act as washerwomen. They 
are said to be great rogues, and are, under that pretext, 
often cruelly treated by greater rogues than themselves. 
It is a sad thing to see heathen people coming among 
nominal Christians, who, paying no regard to the relig- 
ion they are supposed to profess, prevent them from 
wishing to inquire into the truth of a faith they might, 
with a good example before them^be tempted to adopt. 
One Chinese appeared to us so much like another, with 
their thick lips, little slits of eyes, ugly parchment faces, 
in which age makes no perceptible difference, that it 
seemed as if we were meeting the same person over 
• and over again. The signs over their shops are written 
in Chinese, and translated into the oddest English and 
Spanish I ever saw. One of the features in the street 
population of this city which struck us were the shoe- 
• blacks. Each is provided with a comfortable arm-chair 
and a newspaper. He slips his employer into the chair, 
hands him the paper to read, and then kneeling down, 
works away till he has polished the leather boots; fbr 
which his demand is a quarter of a dollar — the 
smallest coin in circulation, it seemed to *js. The sum 
is paid without a word; off walks the man with the 
clean boots, and one with a dirty pair soon takes his 
place. 

There is no want of restaurants and cafes, or ot 
places where food in abundance -could be procured, 
though the price was rather astonishing. Captain 
Frankland had some business to transact with a mer- 


f 


GAMBLING HOUSES. 


233 


chant — he left us at one of them to dine. When he 
rejoined us, he told us tliat he would take us to a scene 
in which he hoped we should never be tempted to mix. 
We went out, and soon reached a magnificent building 
full of spacious halls, with an orchestra keeping up a 
succession of attractive airs. Making our way, not 
without difficulty, through the crowd, we saw before us 
several long green-covered tables surrounded by people, 
who appeared to be engaged in playing, on a grand 
scale, every conceivable game of chance. Never did 1 
see countenances so palpably expressive of the worst 
passions of our evil nature. The keepers of the banks 
were evidently villains of the darkest dye. They sat 
with their revolvers on the table guarding the heaps of 
gold before them, as they skilfully managed the cards 
-und dice over which they presided. The captain 
assured us that they, and those in league with them — 
the professional players — always contrived to collect 
the largest proportion of the gold in circulation — many 
of their foolish victims dissipating in one evening all 
the hard-earned gains of a year. There were ladies, 
too, among them, gambling as eagerly as the men — 
dishonoring their sex. The sight of those counte- 
nances, and the whole air of the place, was sickening. 
“ Fifty ounces ” — u A hundred ” — “ Two hundred 
ounces ” — were the words we heard repeated on every 
side. Presently a man started up — a fine, handsome 
young fellow — from before whom a heap of gold had 
been swept, clutching his hair. “ And I was to have 
started for home to-morrow. 0 Mary ! ” lie exclaimed 
unconsciously, as he passed us. There was the report 
of a pistol — a cry. The young man was picked up 
dead at the door. The players went on as before, 
20 * 


234 


CHINESE /GAMBLERS. 


eoarcely turning their heads to hear the account. Who 
the unhappy youth was no one knew. We had seen 
enough to answer the captain’s object in taking us to the 
place. We strolled on through the city till we reached 
the Chinese quarter. There, also, we were attracted 
by a strange noise intended for music, produced by 
two stringed-fiddles, violoncellos, drums, and gongs, into 
a building — a very shabby place; yet in the centre 
was a table with heaps of gold upon it, and surrounded 
by a number of odd little men in wide jackets, short 
trousers, long tails at their backs, huge embroidered 
slippers on their feet, all deeply engaged, as if some 
most serious matter were going forward — their queer 
eyes twinkling with mistrust as they followed the course 
of a game which was being played. In the middle 
of the table was a heap of counters covered by a 
bowl, under which the players put their hands, and 
drew out a number of them at a time, which they 
counted with a long stick, and then the heaps of money 
changed owners, but on what grounds we could in no 
way discover. 

“You laugh at those odd little Chinese, and think 
them fair objects to joke about,” observed the captain ; 
“ but we must remember that they are men with souls 
to be saved, responsible beings like the unhappy people 
in that gorgeous saloon we were in just now. The 
vice in which we have seen them indulging is the same, 
though, as their light is less, they may be less to blame. 
My hope is, that what you have seen to-night will 
make you wish never to see the same sights again.” 

In the public room of the hotel, where we remained 
for the night, a number of people were collected from 
all parts of the world. Some had been at the diggings ; 


GOLD-DIGGERS IN CALIFORNIA. 


235 


some had made money ; several had come back as poor 
as they went, and much the worse in health ; others 
were about to -go up to try their fortunes, with secret 
hopes of succeeding where others had failed. The^on- 
versatjpn of many of them was very amusing. One 
man -especially interested us by the account he gave of 
his first journey up the country. Fie was evidently, 
from the tone of his voice and manners, a gentleman by 
education, though in appearance as rough and weather- 
beaten as a navvy who has put on a black coat for 
Sunday. He addressed himself to us, as he probably 
thought we had come out to turn gold-diggers,' and he 
wished to warn us of the dangers to be encountered. 

“ I had a good appointment in England, but I wanted 
to become rich in a hurry, so I threw it up, and came 
out here,” he began. “ You may doubt the wisdom of 
the proceeding ; so do I now. I had a companion, and 
with him and the mate of the ship I arrived in, as also 
her carpenter and a Chinese boy, I arranged to go up 
the country. With the implements we- had provided, 
and as much food as we could carry, we got on board a 
small schooner, bound up the river to Stockton. We 
had on board a strange assemblage of people. Many of 
them looked quite capable of cutting our throats. They 
were mostly armed, and bowie knives and revolvers 
were constantly exhibited. When after two days’ voy- 
age we landed, we were glad to get into a wretched hut, 
where we could obtain food, and. rest, and shelter, to 
prepare ourselves for our tramp to the diggings. We 
remained only one day, for the charges were so high at 
the inn that we should have been ruined had we stayed 
longer. Of the forty people who had come up jn the 
schooner, very few accompanied us. We found a party 


236 


OVERLANDERS. 


of about thirty starting, with five or six mules carrying 
provisions. We joined ourselves to them. Each of us 
had a rifle slung to his back, in addition to a week’s 
pro>isions and our mining utensils, while our pistols and 
knives were stuck in our belts. We went on for two 
days pretty easily. I shall never forget the appearance 
of some people we met, who had come overland from 
the western states of America, — their haggard eyes, 
long matted hair, shrunk forms, and tattered clothes, 
which hung on them like loose rags fluttering in the 
wind. They were the remnants of a large party, the 
greater number of whom with their horses and cattle 
had died in the way, from the hardships they had to en- 
counter. The latter part of the road, they said, was 
strewed with the whitening bones of men and animals, bro- 
ken-down waggons, and abandoned furniture. The next 
day’s journey gave us a specimen of what those poor 
fellows had endured. The sun came out with intense 
fury, and struck scorching down on our heads. Not a 
drop of water could be got. There was a pool, we were 
told, some way on. We reached the spot: it was dry. 
Our thirst grew intolerable. Those who had been ac- 
customed to take spirits suffered more than the rest. 
We lay down that night at a place where there was no 
wood. We had no fire, therefore, to cook our provisions. 
We could not eat the meat we had brought with us raw. 
All night long the wolves howled horribly in our ears. 
At daybreak we arose and pushed on. There was a 
water-hole, we were told, a few miles ahead. We 
reached the spot': it was dry. Many who had hitherto 
held out gave way to despair. The muleteers had skins 
with water, but they guarded them, revolver in hand, 
to moisten their own and their mules’ lips. Their lives 


HEARTLESSNESS OF GOLD-SEEKERS. 


237 


depended on those of their animals. A few of us had 
flasks, but we could only venture to take a drop of the 
precious fluid at a time. One man had a bottle of 
brandy. He boasted at first of his cleverness in having 
secured it. Now, he went about offering the whole of 
it for a drop of water. Several of the brandy drinkers 
sank down. They had agreed to keep together. They 
implored us to help them. A deaf ear was turned to 
their entreaties. Our own lives depended on our has- 
tening on. Three or four others dropped by the way, 
one by one. No one waited for them. * On, on, on ! J 
was the cry ; ‘ Water, water, water ! ’ At length, 
towards evening, the mules pricked up their ears : trees 
appeared in the distance. We hurried on. A glitter- 
ing stream gladdened our sight. We rushed into it, 
greedily lapping up the water. Our mules drank eager- 
ly. We felt revived and strengthened. There was 
abundance of wood : we lighted a fire and dressed our 
provisions. Several birds, and two or three animals 
were shot to increase our feast. 

“ Ha, ha, ha, how we laughed. To-morrow, we said, 
we shall be able to push on to the mines, and begin to 
dig for gold. In an instant every one was talking of 
gold. 4 Gold, gold, gold,’ was heard on every side. 
Did any Qne think of the poor wretches we had left 
dying on the road, — men — brethren by nature, by a 
common faith — men with souls ? Not one of us thought 
of going back. At all events, not one of us offered to 
go back. An all-powerful loadstone was dragging us 
on — the lust of getting gold. Had we gone back to 
relieve our fellow-beings, we should have been unable 
to proceed the next day for the diggings. A whole day 
would have been lost. Oh, most foul and wretched 


238 


REACHING THE DIGGINGS. 


was the mania which inspired us ! Unnatural ! no ; it 
was that of fallen, debased human nature ; it was too 
true to that nature. Those miserable men must have 
died horribly — devoured by wolves or scalped by 
Indians. The next day we pushed eagerly on ; yet we 
had to sleep high up on the side of a snow-capped 
mountain ; thence we were to descend to the scene of 
our labors. Bitterly cold it was ; yet we dared not 
move, for frightful precipices yawned around. We 
reached the first diggings that evening. The miners 
had just knocked off work, and crowded round us to 
hear the news, and to see what we had brought. Rough 
as they looked, by far the greater number, I judged by 
the tone of their voices, belonged to the educated classes. 
And shall I become like one of these men ? I thought. 
I soon became like one of them, and rougher still. ‘ I 
expected a friend about this time/ said one, describing 
him. He was among those who had fallen and been 
deserted. He made but faw other inquiries. He knew 
that such events were too common to complain. I saw 
him brush away a tear, as he turned from us. That 
man was too good for the company he was among. We 
encamped by ourselves, we knew not wholn we must 
trust. After this our travelling party broke up. My 
companions from the ship and I were to wor^ together. 
We fixed on a spot, and erected our rude hut; then we 
bought a rocker and shovel, pick-axe and spade, with 
two tin pans, and set to work. I dug out the earth, 
another carried it, and a third washed it in the rocker. 
Our success was tolerable f but it was many days before 
we got enough to pay for the articles we had purchased, 
and our provisions. In the mean time, what scenes of 
wretchedness, misery, dissipation, and violence, did I 


COMMENCE GOLD-DIGGING. 


239 


behold ! In every direction men were dying of fever 
and dysentery. At night the gambling booths were filled 
with those who rapidly got rid of the earnings of many 
days. I was witness, too, of an encounter between two 
large parties of diggers. One party had encroached on 
the ground prepared by the other, and refused to quit 
it. Bowie knives, and pick-axes, and hatchets, rifles 
and pistols, were instantly brought into play. A sanguin- 
ary encounter ensued. Numbers fell on both sides; at 
last one party turned and fled. I visited the scene of 
the strife soon after. A dozen or more human beings 
lay on the ground dead, or dying — arms cut off — 
pierced through and through with knives — skulls frac- 
tured with spades and pick-axes, and many shot to death. 
The dying had been left to die alone without aid or pity, 
while their companions returned to their gold digging. 
Often and often I sickened at the sights I beheld, but 
still I continued at the work. I was compelled to con- 
tinue at it. I had given up every thing for it. I was 
like a slave chained to it by the leg. Gladly would I 
have gone back to my steady occupation and quiet life, 
surrounded by those I respected and loved. I have 
only partly described the hardships w”e endured. We 
had famine, and cold, and rain. Often we were without 
fuel, our clothing was ragged and insufficient, and sick- 
ness in every form came among us. Besides desperate 
quarrels among the diggers, the Indians came down 
upon us — fierce, sanguinary warriors, eager for our 
scalps. Their vengeance had been (excited by aggres- 
sions made on them by the whites. We could scarcely 
leave the camp without risking an attack from them. 
Many diggers became their victims. Such was our life 
for months. At length my companions and I, by unex- 


240 


LIFE AT THE DIGGINGS. 


pected good fortune, saved a sufficient amount of gold 
dust to enable us to return to San Francisco. Steady 
work at home would have enabled me to lay by nearly 
as much, while my health and spirits would not have 
been broken as they now were. We kept together to 
defend each other. Many diggers on their way to the 
city, after laboring for years, have been robbed and 
murdered. My companions spent most of their hard 
won wealth, and returned to the diggings, where, one 
after the other, they fell victims to disease, or the knives 
of assassins. I had had enough of the life, and my 
knowledge of business enabled me to procure a situa- 
tion in a merchant’s office in this place, where by em- 
ploying the sum I had scraped together, and by strict 
attention to business, I have realized an amount four 
times as large, in a quarter of the time it took me to 
collect it at the diggings.” 

“What you have said, sir, is very true,” observed 
another gentleman present. “ Things, however, have 
somewhat mended of late. Still, a gentleman has to 
lead little better than a dog’s life in those regions. For 
my part, although I was what is considered, very lucky, 
I soon sickened of it, and considered myself fortunate in 
being able to get away with my gold in my pocket, and 
a whole skin on my back. Still this is a wonderful 
country, and will become a great country some day. I 
have travelled over a good deal of it. Not long ago I 
travelled up one of the most beautiful valleys in the 
world. At the bottom was a green grassy sward with a 
pure bright stream running rapidly through it, over a 
clear, pebbly bottom. The hills on either side were 
clothed with trees of yarious descriptions, rocks here and 
there jutting out between them of many fantastic forms. 


A LOVELY LAKE. 


241 


while my ears were assailed with the cheerful sound of 
failing water, and my eyes gladdened by the sight of 
sparkling cascades flowing into basins, whence arose 
masses of white foam. Further on arose, appearing at 
the end of the valley, range beyond range of mountains, 
the higher capped with snow. Though the sun was hot, 
the air was pure and cool as it came off the mountains, 
tempered by the numerous cascades. At length I 
reached a spot where the valley widened, and there, 
spread out before me, lay a blue shining lake fringed by 
lofty trees, with the hills rising gradually behind them, 
while the water seemed alive with fish, which leaped 
from its calm depths, and with the w r ater-fowl which 
skimmed over its surface. You’ll all say that was a 
lovely spot.” 

We all agreed that it must be, and that we should like 
to take up our abode there. 

u So I thought,” he answered. “But as a man can 
not well live on fish and water-fowl without corn and 
potatoes and vegetables, not to speak of beef and mut- 
ton, and none of these things were to be procured within 
a hundred miles of the place, I was glad to get out of it. 
There’s another wonderful spot away to the south, near 
Sousa, where I have been. There is a stream called the 
Stanislas river. Up it I went, and then journeyed along 
one of its tributaries, the high banks of which are cov- 
ered with trees, till I reached a broad valley. I could 
scarcely believe my eyes. There arose before me a 
number of trees larger and taller than any I supposed 
existed on the face of the globe. It is called the Mam- 
moth-tree Valley, and is 1,500 feet above the level of 
the sea. There were no less than ninety of them scat- 
tered over a space of about forty acres, and rising high 


242 


THE GIANTS OF THE FOREST 


above the surrounding pine forest. They are a species 
of pine or cone-bearing trees.* In the larger ones the 
branches do not begin to spread out till the stem has 
reached a height of 200 feet, and some are upwards of 
300 feet high. One was 32 feet in diameter, — that is, 
96 feet in circumference, — while the smallest and weak- 
est is not less than 16 feet in diameter. The tops of 
nearly all have been broken off by storms, or by the 
snow resting on them. The Indians have injured others 
by lighting fires at their bases, while the white men have 
cut down one and carried away the bark of another to 
exhibit in far off lands. It took five men twenty-five 
days to cut down the 4 Big tree,’ for so it was called. 
They accomplished their work by boring holes in the 
stem, and then cutting towards them with the axe. The 
stump which remains has been smoothed on the top, an? 
the owner of the property, who acted as my guioe. as 
sured me that sixteen couple could waltz on it. In one 
a spiral staircase has been cut, so that I was able to 
ascend to a considerable height by it. My acquaintance, 
the owner of the estate on which these monsters grow, 
has given names to all of them. ' One he calls Uncle 
Tom’s Cabin, because there is a hollow in the trunk 
capable of holding from twenty to thirty people. One 
hollow trunk has been broken off and lies on the ground 
and a man on horseback can ride from one end of it to 
the other. There are two trees called Husband and 
Wife, and another he called the Family Group, consist- 
ing of father, mother, and rather a large progeny of 
twenty-five children, regular sons of Anak. The father 
fell some time ago, and striking another tree broke off 
the upper part. That portion measures 300 feet, and 

* Coniferae (Wellington! a gigantea). 


MANUEL SILVA LEAVES THE SHIP. 243 

the part which still stands 150 — so that the whole trea 
was 450 feet in height. Three hundred feet is the ordi- 
nary height of the giants of the forest. From various 
calculations it would seem that these trees must have 
existed for three thousand years at least — perhaps 
more; I can only say that I considered the spectacle 
well worthy of the long journey I took to behold it.” 

We thanked the stranger for the account he had given 
us. We heard many other wonderful stories, the truth 
of some of which we had reason to doubt, so I have not 
repeated them here. Captain Frankland was very, glad 
to get away from San Francisco without losing any of 
his own crew. Probably, had he allowed them to have 
any communication with the shore, this would not have 
been the case. 

On our return on board, the first mate told the cap- 
tain that a strange brig had come into the harbor and 
anchored near us — that soon afterward Manuel Silva 
was seen holding some communication with the people 
on board. In a little time a boat came off from her, and 
after some conversation with a man in the boat, he said 
that he must bid us good-by. No persuasions the mate 
used could induce him to stop, and he stepped into the 
boat, and nothing more had been seen of him. We 
were very sorry to lose him, and it struck us at the time, 
I remember, that there was something mysterious in his 
way of departure. * 

We were at sea about twenty-two days without fall- 
ing in with land. It was late one evening when we 
sighted Woahoo, the largest of the Sandwich Islands, of 
which Honolulu is the chief port and capital of the king- 
dom. It was dark by the time we brought up in the 


244 


HONOLULU. 


roadstead outside the harbor. As I, of course, had read 
how Captain Cook was killed by the Sandwich Islanders, 
and had often seen prints in which a number of naked 
black fellows are hurling their spears and darts at him, 
I had an idea that I knew all about them, and had pic- 
tured to myself exactly what I should see when next 
morning we went on shore with our boat’s crew well 
armed to trade with them. The next morning at day- 
break the anchor was hove up, and with a light breeze 
we stood in through a narrow passage in a coral reef, 
which extends from one point of land to another, and 
forms the harbor. What was my surprise to see before 
us, when we dropped our anchor, a neat, pretty-looking 
town, with a fort on the right side bristling with can- 
non, a fertile valley extending far into the country on 
the left, and lofty mountains rising in the distance. 
Over the fort flew the Hawaian flag. It is formed of 
the British union-jack, with alternate blue, red, and 
white stripes. The streets are broad, and run at right 
angles to each other. There were numerous hotels, 
some of them really very handsome buildings on an exr 
tensive scale, and managed after the American fashion, 
while in the streets were a number of large and well- 
furnished shops. There are several churches and chap- 
els of very respectable architectural pretensions. The 
custom-house is a handsome stone building near the 
fort, and the regulations as to duties are strictly ob- 
served. The chief place of business is in the centre of 
the town ; and the most fashionable locality, where the 
residences of the leading people among the natives are 
situated, is a green sward skirted by -the beach and 
shaded by lofty cocoa-nut and plantain trees. The 


ODD COSTUMES OF NATIVES. 


245 


European Villas are generally further back — many of 
them very prettily built, and surrounded by gardens 
full of the most delicious fruit and flowers. Many of the 
foreign consuls and merchants live in villas a few miles 
up the country. Good wharves have been built, and 
ships of 700 tons can refit alongside them. Altogether 
Honolulu is a very wonderful place. 

Jerry and I and the doctor, as usual, went on shore 
to see what was to be seen, and this time we were accom- 
panied by Mr. Brand. The ship was to remain in the 
harbor for several days, and we were very anxious to 
make a journey to some distance into the interior, that 
we might see the natives as they were away from the 
centre of civilization. We-had introductions here to 
several gentlemen, who promised to forward our views. 
We were amused with the extraordinary appearance of 
the natives in the streets, — barbarism and civilization 
met together. The former dress of the men was the 
taro, a kilt joined between the legs, so as to form a wide 
and very short pair of breeches. Some to this now T 
add a blue shirt, sometimes with the tails tucked in, 
sometimes flowing gracefully. Some wear cast-off coats 
or jackets, or trousers, of Europeans ; but few of the 
common people have more than one of these garments 
on at a time, and still fewer ever encumber themselves 
with shoes and stockings. The women had on gener- 
ally long blue chemiseS, or gowns and bonnets of every 
variety of color and shape, and put on in all sorts of 
ways — some placing them hind part before; indeed, 
they had apparently exercised their ingenuity to make 
them as unbecoming as possible. Formerly, we were 
told, their head-dress was a wreath of flowers, which 
suited their dark skins, and had a very pretty effect 
21 * 


246 


DISEASES OF THE NATIVES. 


The chiefs^ however, and their wives, were dressed in 
European costume, and the king in public wears the 
Windsor uniform. It is supposed that the inhabitants 
of the Sandwich Islands derive their origin from the 
Malays, and that at a very remote period a Malay junk, 
or fleet of junks, was cast on those shores. Their skins 
have the same dark hue, and their features the same 
form, as the Malays of the present day. It is said that 
this group is becoming rapidly depopulated. The peo- 
ple themselves have taken up the idea that their race is 
to become extinct, and seem willing to yield to their 
fate without a struggle. The diseases introduced by 
Europeans have tended to cause this, but they them- 
selves have many pernicious customs. Among others, 
no sooner does a native feel himself attacked with fever 
than he rushes into the sea, or into the nearest cold 
stream, as he fancies, to cool himself. The result is 
that — the pores being closed instead of kept open and 
perspiration encouraged — death comes in a few hours. 
Among our friends here was Mr. Callard, a missionary, 
who had resided in the island for some years. He has 
gone into a hamlet, and found not a person remaining 
alive. On one occasion he met an old man sitting at 
the door of a hut ; he asked where the rest of the people 
were. 

“ All dead,” was the answer. 

“Then do you come with me* and I will provide for 
your wants.” 

“ No,” said the native, gloomily ; “ I will not move. 
I am preparing to follow them.” 

The islands produce the paper mulberry, from which 
their cloths and cordage are made ; the acacia, used in 
the construction of their canoes ; the banana, the sugar- 


PKODUCTIONS OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS. 247 

cane, the } r am, the bread-fruit ; and, the most important 
of all, the taro root. Of late years, coffee, cotton, rice, 
tobacco, indigo, melons, the vine, oranges, peaches, figs, 
tamarinds, guavas, and many other plants and fruits, 
have been introduced. The natives pay the greatest 
attention to the cultivation of the taro root. It is planted 
in square patches, either in swamps or in ground easily 
irrigated, with banks and sluices, so that the water can 
be let on at pleasure. It takes eleven months to come 
to perfection. When dried, it is pounded on a smooth 
stone by means of another held in the hand, while a 
little water is poured on it, when it is reduced to a 
paste called poi, which is then fit to eat. Much labor 
and patience is required to bring it to perfection ; and 
by the exercise of these qualities, there can be no doubt 
that the natives have acquired those habits of industry 
which are scarcely known among other savages. The 
only animals found in the island were dogs and pigs, 
undoubtedly brought there by their ancestors. The 
roots of the taro are from six inches to a foot in length, 
and three or four inches in diameter. In substance it 
is rather more fibrous than the potato. It is often eaten 
whole, like a potato. The skin is scraped off with a 
shell, and the taro, split into two or three pieces, is then 
placed on leaves in an oven containing stones, heated as 
usual, the whole being then covered up with earth to 
steam for half an hour. 

Honolulu has become a great place of call for ships 
from all parts of the world, since San Francisco sprang 
into existence. Vessels coming round the Horn, to 
make a good offing, steer for it. Otners from Australia, 
China, and the Eastern Archipelago, touch here ; while 
whalers have long been in the habit of putting in 


248 THE KING OF THE SANDWICH ISLANDS. 

here to refit and recruit. The extreme healthiness of 
the islands induces many people from California to 
come here, and the hotels and lodging-houses are filled 
with invalids, often possessors of considerable wealth ; 
but, at the same time, from their profligate and dissi- 
pated habits, they set but a bad example to the natives. 
The natives are called Kanakas. They are generally 
fine-looking men. The women are fairer, and with 
regular features ; many of them ride on horseback with 
men’s saddles, dressed in gay riding-habits, and with a 
wreath of flowers encircling their raven tresses, which 
gives them somewhat of a theatrical appearance. The 
islands are governed by a sovereign, King Kamehameha 
III., who has a large family, and an income of about 
£1,500 a year. He has likewise an army, clothed in 
gay uniforms, but there are almost as many officers as 
men ; indeed, as the kingdom is under the joint protec- 
tion of England, America, and France, there can be but 
little employment for soldiers. The police are of far 
more use in apprehending drunken sailors, and keeping 
ofder in the town. They are dressed in a blue uniform, - 
with a gold-laee cap, and armed with a staff with a 
ffrass knob. The monarchy is hereditary, and limited. 
The king’s ministry consists of a premier and other 
officers, similar to those of the English government, and 
many of them are English or Americans, and very 
intelligent men. We found that in the town there were 
all sorts of places of public amusement, and, among 
others, a theatre, where English plays are acted, and 
where the king constantly attends. We went, and were 
not a little surprised to see the boxes filled with very 
gaily-dressed people, mostly whites. It was a very hot 
night. The play was “ Hamlet.” Hamlet had been 


HABITATIONS OF THE NATIVES. 


249 


using a pocket handkerchief very liberally all the even* 
fng, pressing it to his brow and cheeks, and at last h<T 
said, “Oh, that this too, too solid flesh wouldn’t' melt, 
and resolve itself into a dew ! ” Jerry and I applauded 
him very loudly. He gave us a wink, as much as to 
say, “ I see you understand me.” He was evidently $ 
wag, and Hamlet was not suited to him, nor he to 
Hamlet. There was no reason, however, because the 
royal Dane had been murdered, that his son should 
murder the Queen’s English at the rate he did, or the 
character of Hamlet as Shakespeare drew it. Who 
would have thought of Shakespeare in the Sandwich 
Islands ? Shakespeare never acted in so pretty a thea- 
tre. 

Many of the natives, although able to afford habita- 
tions of a European style, still live on in those used by 
their ancestors. They are generally of an oblong shape, 
with a very high-pitched roof, thatched with grass and 
plain tain leaves ; and as the eaves slant down to within 
a short distance from the ground, they hav^e a very pic- 
turesque appearance. They are cool in summer, and 
are impervious to rain. The ceilings, which are very 
elegant, are composed of polished bamboo, neatly inter- 
woven, while the floors are carpeted with mats of col- 
ored grass. The walls are decorated with a native 
cloth, called tapa, which serves the purpose of tapestry. 
The house is divided into separate chambers at night 
by mats hung up on lines. The beds are primitive ; a 
mat serves for every purpose, and a wooden roller as a 
pillow. Many of the Kanakas are well educated, and 
read and write not only their own, but several European 
languages likewise. There is one newspaper in the 
Hawaian language, if not more, and several works have 


250 PREPARE TO VISIT HAWAII. 

A 

been published in it, while the translation of the Bible 
is to be seen in every native hut. Of course, all this 
information I picked up from different- people during 
our stay at Honolulu. 

“ We have not had any fun for a long time ; I won- 
der what will turn up next,” said Jerry to me, after we 
had been there a couple of days. 

The next morning, Mr. Callard, the missionary, who 
was an old friend of Captain Frankland’s, came on 
board and invited Jerry and me and Mr. M‘Ritchie, 
and Mr. Brand, if he could be ‘spared, to accompany 
him to the large island of Hawaii, round which he was 
going to make a visitation tour. Having to wait here 
for information on some important matters, he gave us 
the leave we asked. 

“ You may take Ben Yool with you also,” said he. 
“ The schooner is rather short-handed, and you will find 
him useful at all events.” 

Jerry and I were highly pleased with this, for Ben 
was a great favorite. We were soon ready with our 
rifles and knapsacks, not forgetting to take old Surley 
with us ; it was a long time since the poor fellow had 
had a run on shore. 

“ Take care that the natives don’t cook and eat him,” 
said Mr. Renshaw, as we shoved off. 

The little mission schooner, the Dove , was in readi- 
ness to receive us, and in a few minutes, with a fair 
breeze, we were standing away to the southward, to- 
wards the large island of Hawaii, or Owhyhee, on the 
shores of which the immortal Cook lost his life. 


EXCURSION IN HAWAII. 


251 


V 

CHAPTER XII. 

EXCURSION IN HAWAII. 

We had a pleasant run for two days, with a light 
wind, and hoped the next morning to land at Kailua, 
the capital of the island of Owhyhee ; but at sunset a 
sudden squall struck the little vessel, and had not Ben 
Yool been at the helm, and instantly luffed up, while 
Terry and I let fly the fore-sheet, we should in all 
probability have been over, and become food for the 
sharks; It came on very dark and blowy; and as it 
was too late to make a harbor, we gave the shore a 
wide berth, and ran on. The next forenoon, when we 
made the land, we found that we were to the southward 
of Kailua. As we stood in, Mr. Callard told us that on 
the shore of Karakakooa Bay, which was before us, 
Captain Cook met his death, and that he would show 
us the very spot where the event happened. I felt as 
interested as if I were about to visit classic ground. 
Often and often as I had been reading through Cook’s 
Voyages with delight, I little thought that I should see 
the very spots he describes, much less that one which 
has become sacred in our memory. Before us appeared 
a line of volcanic cliffs, of considerable height, the land 
rising again above them, covered with the richest ver- 
dure; which makes the summits of the rocky and lofty 
mountains beyond appear still more sterile and uninvit 


252 


scene of cook’s death. 


in g. To the right, among groves of palms and cocoa- 
nut-trees, appeared the steep, sloping roofs of a mative 
village ; while on the left, where the cliffs sink towards 
the water, and groves of various tropical trees appear 
scattered about, our friend pointed out to us the very 
spot where Cook was killed. The cliffs near are full of 
caves, which are used by the natives as places of sepul- 
ture; and in one of these, it is said, the bones of the 
great navigator were deposited by the priests, and val- 
ued by them as relics. Our friend told us that he had 
constantly made inquiries among the chiefs and natives 
as to the affair, and that he is certain the attack on the - 
whites was not premeditated. Some of the people had 
stolen a boat for the sake of the nails in her, with which 
they wished to make fish-hooks. He landed with some 
boats to recover it. While speaking to some of the 
chiefs on the subject, a number of native^ collected ; 
and without his orders the marines, believing that he 
was about to be attacked, fired. A chief was killed. 
The natives advanced, and, while he was in the act of 
ordering his people to desist, he was pierced through 
the body by a spear. Grief and dismay took posses- 
sion of the hearts of both parties when he fell. By the 
then superstitious natives he had been looked upon as 
their deified and long-lost sovereign, ftono. This Rono 
(so their legends asserted) had in a fit of anger killed 
his wife, when, repenting of the act, his senses deserted 
him, and he went about the islands wrestling with 
whomsoever he met. At last he took his departure in 
a vessel of a strange build, and no one knew where he 
had gone, but all expected him to return. When Cap- 
tain Cook appeared, the priests believed that he was 
Rono, and, clothing' him with the garments kept for their 


RONO THE DEITY OF THE NATIVES. 


253 


god, led him to their temples, and offered sacrifices to 
propitiate his favor, while the people prostrated them- 
selves before him, — he all the time little suspecting the 
reason of the honors paid him. , After his death some 
of the people naturally doubted that he could be Rono, 
but others still affirmed that he was ; and it is believed 
that the priests took some of liis bones and preserved 
them in a wicker basket covered over with red feathers, 
which are highly prized by the natives. In this they 
were every year carried about from temple to temple, 
when the priests went to collect tribute of the people. 
After the abolition of idolatry in 1819, it is not known 
what became of them ; perhaps they were concealed by 
some old priest who still clung secretly to the ancient 
faith. 

Talking of nails, it is extraordinary what excellent 
fish-hooks the natives will manufacture out of them. 
They prefer them to the best made in England. They 
still set a high value on them ; but they are not quite 
so simple-minded as some of the Friendly islanders we 
heard of, who, on obtaining some nails, planted them, 
in the hope of obtaining a large crop from the produce ! 
Scarcely had we dropped our anchor when we were sur- 
rounded by the canoes of the natives, who wore but the 
primitive maro. They brought off bread-fruits, cocoa- 
nuts, bananas, and other products of the soil, in the hope 
of thus making themselves welcome. One of them, who 
spoke English tolerably, undertook to pilot our boat on 
6hore. We were eager to land. As we pulled in, a 
number of men, women, and children came down to 
welcome us. The men, like those in the canoes, wore 
the taro, but the women were dressed with the loose 
blue gowns I have described, and with wreaths of flowers 
22 


254 ENTERTAINED AT A NATIVE HABITATION. 

round their heads. We ran in among the masses of 
lava which lined the shore, and were kindly helped by 
the people to land. We observed that they were all 
especially grave, for .nowhere are more merry creatures 
found than the native women. A s we walked along 
they followed us~in silence. At length our guide stopped 
and pointed to the ground on which we stood. 

“There, white men — there, friends — there it was 
your great sea chieftain fell.” He repeated, we found, 
the same words in his own language. The natives 
listened to what he said, and then hung their heads 
ashamed, as if they had . been guilty of the sad deed. 
We broke off several pieces of the lava from about the 
spot, to take to our friends at home, and sent them on 
board the schooner. We were to accompany the mis- 
sionary overland to Kailua, where the schooner was to 
meet us. After the missionary had spoken to the peo- 
ple, we were anxious tp proceed on our journey, and 
one of the principal natives, who lived a few miles to 
the north, insisted that we should remain at his hut for 
the night ; and we, accordingly, gladly accompanied him. 
We found the feast preparing outside the door in the 
usual oven. Knowing that Englishmen have an objec- 
tion to eat dogs, he had killed a fatted pig. The oven 
was a simple affair. A hole was dug in the earth, in 
which a large fire was lighted upon some stones, till all 
the earth around was hot ; piggy was then put in, and 
the hole was covered up with loose earth ; clouds of 
steam then issued from the earth, and when no more was 
perceptible the meat was declared to be cooked properly. 
We all sat round on mats in the primitive fashion, the 
food being placed before us either in calabashes or on 
large leaves. Instead of bread we had the bread-fruit 


NATIVES SWIMMING. 


256 


It lias somewhat the flavor of bread, and answers its 
purpose, but has neither the appearance nor consistence 
of our staff of life. It is about the size of the shaddock, 
and, when fresh gathered, the flavor of the citron ; but 
it is always eaten baked, when it has the solidity of a 
roasted chestnut. Besides these luxuries, we had some 
fish nicely cooked, wdiich we ate with the thick interior 
of the cocoa-nut, which may truly be called theycream, 
while the juice served to quench our thirst. We had 
a number of visitors, who all, both men and women, 
chatted away most merrily, especially the women, who 
kept up a continued peal of laughter. At night the hut 
was lighted up with chips of a resinous wood, calleu 
kukia, which were stuck all round on the posts which 
supported the roof ; and when we expressed a wish to 
retire to rest, mats were hung up to partition off our 
sleeping chambers. 

It is, I find, impossible to describe all the interesting 
habits and customs we observed of this primitive people. 
The next day about noon, we found ourselves, on issu- 
ing from a grove of cocoa-nut trees, on the shore of a 
beautiful bay, with high black rocks running out on 
either side, and a yellow, sandy beach. From the way 
the sea broke, first with great violence, and then a second 
time with diminished force, there were evidently two 
lines of coral reefs, one without the other. A number 
of people were seated on the rocks watching with great 
interest what was going forward. Some men, women, 
and children were in the water, while others with their 
boards, about a foot wide and four feet long, in their 
hands were preparing to follow them. Placing the 
boards on the water, they threw themselves on them, 
and then swam out, diving under the breakers of the 


256 


HOW TO ENCOUNTER SHARKS. 


inner bar, and appearing on the in-shore side of the 
outer one. The great art appeared to be, to remain on 
the steep slope of the outer sea roller as it swept majes- 
tically on towards the land, and then, just before it 
broke, to dive under it .and to re-appear mounting up 
(he side of the following watery hill. Sometimes a lad 
would keep above water too long, and the surf would 
foil him over, and carry away his board ; but he quickly 
recovered it, and soon regained his credit. Shouts of 
laughter bursting forth on all sides when any such mis- 
hap occurred, showed that there was little fear of dam- 
age. The women and children kept generally on the 
inner bar, but were quite as expert as the men. On 
mounting to the top of the rocks we saw two of the men 
swim out beyond the rest, on the further side of the 
breakers. The natives seemed to be watching them at- 
tentively. Soon one of them w r as seen to dive, then the 
other. In a little time they both appeared, flourishing 
their knives above their heads, and at the same moment 
two huge black bodies floated to the surface, and were 
borne in by the rollers towards the shore. 

“What can they be?” I exclaimed to Jerry. 

“Sharks,” he answered, watching them. “Well, 1 
should like to know how to tackle to with one of these 
monsters. I own that I shouldn’t much like to have to 
fight one of them with a suit of armor on, and a spear 
or battle-axe in my hand. I suspect even St. George 
who killed the dragon would have found it somewhat a 
tough job, and yet these naked fellows make no difficulty 
about the matter.” 

“ It is just what a man has been used to,” I answered. 
“ I dare say one of them would be very unhappy with a 
suit of armor on and a battle-axe.” 


A MISSIONARY STATION. 


257 


ISfo surprise seemed to be created by the achievement, 
And the bold swimmers took their places among the 
rest on the rollers as if nothing had happened. When 
swimming out in this way, every man has a knife se- 
cured to his board. As soon as he sees a shark he 
swims away a short distance. The shark approaches 
— he pretends to be very awkward. Keeping his eye 
on the monster, who begins to fancy he has got a feast 
prepared, he watches his time, and suddenly diving, 
sticks his sharp weapon with all his might in the under 
part of the monster. Sometimes the shark attempts to 
fly, but generally the blow is fatal, and he is towed in 
triumph on shore. 

After spending a day at Kailua,’ the capital of the 
island, where there is a fort and a governor, and where 
several merchants reside to supply whalers with pro- 
visions, we embarked once more on board the schooner, 
and ran round the south of the island to a small har- 
bor in the neighborhood of Whyhohino, a chief mission- 
ary station. We were received very kindly by the 
missionaries, and they procured us ‘horses to enable us 
to accomplish one of the chief objects which had 
brought us to the place — a visit to the summit of the 
great volcano of Kilanea. They also found us two 
guides who were to accompany us to the crater, while 
two other men were to remain with the horses below. 
Mr. -Callard himself had his duties to attend to, so that 
he could not accompany us. Ben Yool had been left 
with the schooner, so our party consisted of Mr. 
M‘Ritchie, Cousin Silas, Jerry, and I, not forgetting old 
Surley. He always kept close to us, suspecting, 
perhaps, if the natives caught him, they might cook and 
eat him. We were well supplied with provisions and 
22 * 


‘258 


TAKE SHELTER IN A CAVERN. 


with bottles of water which we could replenish on the 
way. We travelled at first along the coast, and then 
struck, inland, directing our course towards the' lofty 
summit of the mountain, whence, even at that distance, 
we could see pillars of smoke ascending to the sky. It 
was getting dark when our guides told us that close at 
hand was a cavern in which we might pass the night 
sheltered from the weather. Torches of resinous wood 
were soon procured, and they led the way down a steep 
path, till we found ourselves at the entrance of an im- 
mense cavern formed in the lava. It was^ome hundred 
feet square, and from fifteen to twenty high. When 
lighted up by the torches it had a very wild and pic- 
turesque appearance. The horses were tethered in one 
part, while we all went out and collected grass and fern 
leaves for our beds, and a good supply of fuel for our 
fire. Having cooked our supper, we sat round the fire, 
while one of the natives, who spoke English very well, 
told us some of the wonderful tales about Pele, the god- 
dess of the burning mountain, and her numerous diabol- 
ical followers. Though our guides were now Christians, 
and professed to disbelieve all these fables, it was evi- 
dent that their minds were considerably affected by 
them, so difficult is it to get rid of early associations. 
The cavern had become rather smoky, and Mr. Brand 
had gone out to enjoy the cool air, when he called us to 
him. We looked towards the summit of the mountain, 
which rose in majestic grandeur before us, the summit 
crowned by wreaths of flame, which rose and fell as if 
impelled by some secret power within. After admiring 
it for some time, we returned to our bandit-looking 
gbode for the night. 

The next morning, leaving our horses, we set out on 


ARRIVE AT A BURNING MOUNTAIN. 259 

foot towards the crater. A mass of smoke alone rested 
on the summit of the mountain. The road was very 
rough, vegetation in many places destroyed, and, in 
general, we found ourselves passing over masses of lava, 
with deep crevices in some places and huge masses in 
others, while here and there the crust was so thin that 
it gave way beneath our feet. The heat was very 
great ; but we found a red berry growing on a low 
bush, which was very refreshing. At length, after 
some hours of toil, we found ourselves standing on the 
summit of a cliff, while below us appeared a vast plain 
full of conical hills, and in the centre of it a mass of 
liquid lava like a wide lake of fire. It was what we 
had come to see — the crater of Kilanea. Below the 
cliff, inside the basin, was a ledge of considerable width 
of solid lava. We looked about for a path by which 
we could reach the plain. At last we found a steep 
bank where the cliff had given way. By this we now 
descended with the help of sticks, with which we had 
been provided. The descent was difficult and danger- 
ous in the extreme, as the lava gave way before us, and 
huge masses went rolling and tumbling away, some in 
front and some behind us, as we slid down the steep 
oank. The appearance of the ground was such that 
we with reason hesitated on trusting ourselves to it. 
Old Surley, too, smelled at it, and examined it nar- 
rowly, as if very doubtful about running over it. Still, 
our guides assured us that other Englishmen had been 
there; and where olhers had been we knew that we 
could go. At last we reached the bottom, and walked 
on, with our staffs in hand feeling the way. More th&n 
once I felt the ground cracking under my feet. It was 
not hot, but it struck me - 1 — suppose it is only a crust, 


260 JERRY SINKS THROUGH THE CRUST. 

) 

and one of us were to slip through into the boiling 
caldron beneath ! I own that I more than once wished 
myself back again on cool and solid ground. To go 
through the ice is disagreeable enough, but to slip down 
under this black cake would be horrible indeed. Not 
five minutes after this idea had crossed my mind, I 
heard a cry. It was Jerry’s voice. I looked round — 
his head and shoulders only were appearing above the 
ground, and his arms were stretched out wide on either 
side, while with his fingers he tried to dig into the lava, 
to prevent himself from slipping further. 

“ Oh, help me ! help me ! ” he shrieked out ; “ I can- 
not find any rest for my feet, and shall sink into some 
horrible pit?’ 

“ Stand back — stand back,” shouted Mr. Brand, as 
the rest of us were running forward ; “ you will all be 
going in together. Stay, let me see first what I can do. 
Hold on, Jerry ; don’t move, my boy,” he added. Then 
taking another pole from one of the guides, he laid him- 
self along the ground ; he gradually advanced till he 
had placed a pole under each of Jerry’s arms. “ Now, 
swing your legs up, and I will draw you away,” he 
cried out. Jerry did as he was told, and was dragged 
on to firm ground. The ground had given way just as 
if it had been a piece of egg shell. Probably it had 
been formed by a sheet of lava flowing rapidly over 
some fissure without filling it up. Jerry was most 
thankful for his preservation, but he had too much 
spirit to wish to go back, and insisted on proceeding on 
to the borders of the liquid fiery lake. Before us, 
amidst the burning expanse, rose two lofty cones, one 
of them insulated, the other joined by a causeway to 
the ledge of lava. Besides these, a number of smallei 


AN ERUPTION OP THE MOUNTAIN. 


261 


cones were seen in various directions. The’ ground was 
also full of pools of burning sulphur, or other liquid 
matter, while huge black shapeless masses of lava lay 
scattered about in every direction, thrown out, undoubt- 
edly, from the mouth of one of the large cones before 
us. On we pushed our way, notwithstanding, and at 
last we stood on the very brink of the lake of fire ! 
I could not altogether divest myself of the idea that it 
might bubble over and destroy us. It was strange that 
no heat appeared to proceed from it, and yet the points 
of our sticks were instantly burned to cinders when we 
put them into it. After we had got accustomed to the 
strange scene, we agreed that we should like to mount 
to the top of the cone by the causeway. Off we set. 
We reached it, and began the hazardous ascent. There 
was an outer crust, which often gave way under our 
feet — still we pushed on. Our guides urged us to 
desist, saying that no one had evefr ventured thus far 
and returned alive. Still they followed us. Up the 
cone they climbed. It was a strangely wild scene. 
The fiery lake below us, around us ; the vast masses of 
lava piled upon the plain ; *the high black cliffs on every 
side ; the wild, hopeless desolation of the country 
beyond ; and the numerous cones, each the mouth of a 
miniature volcano, sending forth smoke in every direc- 
tion. We had nearly reached the summit of the cone, 
when a thick puff of sulphureous smoke almost drove 
us back headlong. A loud roar at the same time, 
louder than a thousand claps of thunder, saluted our 
ears. 

“ Fly ! fly ! ” cried our guides ; “ the mountain is 
going to vomit forth its fiery breath.” Not a moment 
did we delay. Down the side of the cone we sprung — 


262 


NARROW ESCAPE. 


none of us looked back. Thicker and thicker came 
forth the smoke. Rivulets of lava began to flow, 
streaming down the cone into the lake below ; some 
came towards the causeway, leaping down its sides. 
On we went, every instant dreading a fall through the 
thin crust. Ashes came forth and fell around us, and 
then huge masses of rock came down with loud splashes 
into the fiery plain. Some went even before us, and 
were buried deep in the ground over which we had to 
tread. The roar of the mountain continued. Down 
we sprung ; a blow from a stone would have killed us 
— a false step would have sent us into the fiery pool, 
to the instant and utter’ annihilation of our mortal 
frames. I felt as if I could not cry out. An unspeak- 
able dread and horror had seized me. At length the 
plain of lava was regained. No one was hurt ; yet the 
danger was not past. Still the lava streamed forth. 
It might overflow '"’the banks of the lake for aught we 
could tell. Ashes and masses of rock fell in showers 
around us. We. fled like Lot and his family, nor stop- 
ped till we reached the cliff. Then it was searched in 
vain for a way to mount to’the summit. We did now 
look back to see if the lava was following us, but the 
glowing lake lay as calm as before. The outburst 
seemed to have subsided. Now and then a jet of lava 
and fire came forth, and a puff of smoke, but both soon 
ceased. At last, walking round under the cliff, we 
found a practicable way to the top. We were saved, 
and grateful for our escape, while our curiosity was 
amply satisfied. We were suffering much from thirst, 
when what was our surprise to come upon a pool of. 
clear water with reeds growing round it, though in the 
very neighborhood of hot basins of sulphur, and of 


QUIT THE STATION. 


263 


cones spouting forth wreaths of smoke ! We expected 
to find the water hot, instead of which, it was deli- 
ciously cool and refreshing. On ascending the cliff, we 
found that it was too late to descend the mountain that 
night, so our guides led us to a hut built to afford ac- 
commodation for travellers. It stood overlooking the 
cones and the lake of fire, and never shall I forget the 
extraordinary appearance of that scene, as, we watched 
it during the greater part of the night, or the magnifi- 
cent spectacle which gladdened our eyes when the glo- 
rious sun rose from out of his ocean bed, and lighted up 
the distant snow-capped peak of the lofty Mouna 
Roa, which is 14,000 feet above the level of the 
sea. 

We collected several specimens of sulphur and lava, 
and also a quantity of what the natives call the hair of 
P41e. Every bush around was covered with it. It if 
produced from the lava when first thrown up, and 
borne along by the air till it is spun into fine filaments 
several inches in length. It was of a dark olive color, 
brittle, and semi-transparent. In our descent of the 
mountain we entered long galleries, the walls and roof 
hung with stalactites of lava of various colors, the 
appearance being very beautiful. They are formed by 
the lava hardening above, while it continues to flow 
away underneath — thus leaving a hollow in the centre. 
We might have spent many days in wandering about 
that strange, wild region, but we had seen enough to 
talk about ever afterwards. We got back safe to the 
station ; and when there, we found that Mr. Callard had 
resolved to remain some time on the island. He begged 
us, consequently, to take N back the schooner to Hono- 
lulu, with directions for her to return for him in a for* 


264 


A MYSTERIOUS SHRIEK HEARD. 


night. It seemed quite strange to us to be at sea again 
after the wonderful scenes we had witnessed, and Jerry 
declared that he was well content to find himself afloat 
with a whole skin on his body. The wind came round 
to the north-east, and we had to stretch away to the 
westward to lay a course for Honolulu. We were 
about thirty miles off the land when the w r ind fell light, 
and gradually a thick fog arose, in which we found our- 
selves completely shrouded. We still stood on, keeping 
as good a look-out as we could through the mist, lest -we 
shbuld run foul of any other vessel — not that such an 
event was likely to happen just then in the Pacific. 
When night, however, came on, the fog grew still 
thicker, and the darkness became so great that we lite- 
rally could not see our hands held out at arm’s-length 
before us. ' Mr. Brand had kept the middle watch, and 
then Jerry and I, with Ben Yool, went on deck, with 
some of the native crew, to take the morning watch. 
We glided slowly on over the dark waters, the breeze 
falling gradually, till it was almost a calm. Jerry and 
I were walking the deck together, talking of the strange 
sights we had lately seen, when, happening for a mo- 
ment to be holding our tongues, a cry, or it might have 
been a shriek, struck my ears, as if wafted from a dis- 
tance across the water. 

“ Did you hear it, Jerry ? ” I asked. 

“ Yes ; did you ? What can it be ? ” he answered. 
*Ah! there’s another — it cannot be fancy.” 

“ No ; I heard it_ distinctly,” I remarked. “ There 
is some mischief going forward, I fear. What is to be 
done ? ” Again that faint, wailing cry of distress reached 
our ears. 

“ You don’t believe in ghosts, do you ? ” said Jerry, 


WE AGAIN HEAR THE CRY. 


265 


u If there were t such things, I should fancy that those 
cries were uttered by them, and nothing else.” 

“ Nonsense, Jerry,” said I, half vexed with him, for 
I saw that he was inclined to give way to superstition. 
“ If those sounds are not the effect of fancy, they must 
proceed from some human beings in distress; but what 
can be the matter is more than I can say.” We found, 
on going forward, that Ben Yool had heard the cries, 
and was still listening, wondering what caused them. 
They had also reached the ears of the native seamen. 
They declared that they must be caused by the spirits 
of the storm roaming over the water, and that we should 
have a heavy gale before long. Again a shriek reached 
us, louder and more thrilling than before. 

“ Oh, this is dreadful ! ” I exclaimed. “ There mhst 
be some foul mischief going on somewhere not far off. 
We must call up Mr. Brand, and see what steps he will 
think fit to take.” I went and roused him up, and told 
him of the strange sounds we had heard. Both he and 
the doctor were soon on deck. At first he laughed at 
our description of the sounds we had heard ; but after 
he had listened a little time, another long, deep-drawn 
wail came wafted across the ocean. 

u That is the cry of some one in mortal fear or agony,” 
he remarked. u There is another ! ” It was a sharp, 
loud cry, or rather shriek. 

“ The calmness of the sea and the peculiar state of 
the atmosphere would enable a sound to travel from a 
long distance,” observed M‘ Ritchie. “ It may come 
from a spot a mile, or even two miles off.” 

“ We must try and find out the direction, and go to 
the help of the poor people, whoever they are,” exclaimed 
Mr. Brand. 


23 


266 ME. brand’s expedition. 

46 pow is that to be done ? ” asked th^ doctor. . “ Ouf 
cockle-shell of a boat will only hold three or four people, 
and the chances are that some ruffianly work is going 
on, and we shall only share the fate of the victims.” 

“ It must be done, though,” answered Cousin Silas. 
“ I cannot stay quietly here when perhaps our appear- 
ance may prevent further mischief. I will go in the 
boat, and I dare say I shall have volunteers to' accom- 
pany me.” 

“ In that case I will go with you, Brand,” said the 
doctor, who was as plucky as anybody. “ I still say, 
however, that we should be wiser remaining where we 
are till daylight.” 

“No, no, doctor,” returned Cousin Silas; “you are 
not a fighting-man. Your life is too valuable to be 
risked. You stay on board and look after the lads.” 

“ But we want to go with you, Mr. Brand ! ” exclaimed 
Jerry and I together you won’t leave us behind?” 

“ I dare say, boys 1 ” answered Cousin Silas. “ What 
account should I have to give to the captain if either o/ 
you got knocked on the head and I escaped ? You re- 
main on board the schooner. It will be daylight soon ; 
and if I do not return before then, you’ll be able to see 
where to pick me up.” 

“ If you resolves to go, why, d’ye see, sir, I goes with 
you,” said Ben Yool, stepping up. “ One^of these brown 
chaps says he’ll go, and that’s all you want. To my 
mind, if we can frighten the villains from going on with 
their murderous work we may do some good ; but as to 
forcing them to hold their hands," we couldn’t do it if we 
were even to lay the little Dove alongside them.” 

Mr. Brand thanked Ben for his promptness in offer- 
ing to support him, and accepted his .services ; and arm-, 
ing themselves, they both, without further delay, accom- 


BEN ACCOMPANIES HIM. 


267 


panied by a tall, strong Sandwich islander, lowered the 
schooner’s dingey into the water. 

“ What I’d advise, sir, is this,” said Ben : “ Let us 
get as close up to where the cries come from as we can 
without being seen, and then let us hail the vessel, or 
raft, or whatever it may be, in gruff voices, and say that 
if they don’t knock off their murdering work, and let the 
people they are harming go free, we will blow them all 
up into the sky. If they don’t heed us, we’ll shriek and 
cry y and make all sorts of noises, as if a thousand demons 
were about to board them ; and, as people who are about 
any bad work are certain to have bad consciences, they’ll 
fancy that the noises are ten times louder and worse 
than they are. If that does not succeed, we must try 
some other dodge ; we shall hit off something or other, 
I dare say.” 

While Ben was thus delivering himself, Mr. Brand 
was loading his pistols. All things being ready, they 
stepped into the boat and shoved off. They were im- 
mediately lost to sight in the thick darkness which sur- 
rounded us. Their oars had been muffled ; but we could 
hear the gentle lap of the oars in the water for long 
afterwards, showing to what /distance sound could travel, 
and that the scene of the outrage we had been listening 
to might be further off than we supposed. As Mr. 
Brand had taken the bearings of the Dove, and proposed 
pulling directly to the south-west, whence the sounds 
came, and directly in the eye of the wind, such as there 
was, which had shifted to that quarter, we knew that he 
would have no great difficulty in getting aboard us 
again. Still we could not help feeling very anxious 
about him. The plan, however, proposed by Ben Yool 
struck us as likely tXT prove as effectual as any that could 
be conceived ; — much more so than had the little Dovt 


268 PROCEEDINGS DURING THE MATE'S ABSENCB. 


herself appeared ; for, as she did not measure more than 
twenty tons, she was not calculated by her size to com- 
mand respect, especially as she had no guns on board, 
and we had only our rifles. Scarcely had the boat left 
the side of the schooner when the shrieks were repeated. 
They seemed louder, or at all events more distinct. We 
could no longer have any doubt that they were* uttered 
by human beings in distress. Old Surley thought so 
too. He kept running about the deck in a state of great 
agitation, and then stretched out his neck, and howled 
in reply to the cry which reached his ears. We kept 
slowly gliding on under all sail, keeping as close to the 
wind as we could, so as to beat up in the direction of 
the sound. It had been arranged that we were to go 
about every quarter of an hour, so that Mr. Brand would 
know our whereabouts and on what tack he was likely 
to find us on his return. Our ears were kept open to 
catch any fresh sound, and our eyes were looking about 
us in all directions, in case a break in the mist should 
reveal any object to us; but an hour passed away, and 
no other cry was heard. There was a little more wind, 
and it had shifted a point or so to the westward, and 
perhaps that prevented sounds reaching us, we thought. 
Another hour crept by, but still Mr. Brand did not re- 
turn. We began to be anxious about him. We con- 
stantly went “to the binnacle lamp to look at our watches. 
It wanted but a short time to daylight. The doctor, I 
saw by his manner, was seriously alarmed about the 
party, though he said nothing to us. We fancied that 
we heard a hail, and then a shout and a cry ; but we 
could not quite agree N about it. We kept pacing the 
deck anxiously, tacking as we had been directed by Mr 
Brand ; and thus the night wore on, and dawn once more 
broke over the world of waters. 


CAPTURED BY PIRATES. 


269 


on / 

•< ' * . . ' .J-»' ’ ■' 

CHAPTER XIII. 

CAPTURED BY PIRATES. 

Daylight increased; and as the sun, like a vast 
ball of fire, rose slowly above the horizon, the mist lifted 
as if it had been a curtain from off the surface of the 
water, rolling away in huge wreaths of vapor before 
the breeze. The wind had once more hauled round to 
the southward, and then away to the westward, when, 
beneath an arch of clouds, we saw two vessels alongside 
each other. One was a schooner, a fine, rakish-looking 
craft ; the other a large brig. The latter had her royals 
and top-gallant-sails flying loose, her top-sails were on 
the caps, her courses were hauled up, her yards were 
braced here and there ; indeed she presented a picture 
of most complete confusion. Her appearance would too 
plainly have told us that something wrong had taken 
place, even had we not heard the cries in the night. 
In vain we looked round on every side for the dingey ; 
she was nowhere to be seen. We examined the vessels 
through a spyglass we had with us. She was not visi- 
ble alongside either of them. Again and again we 
swept the horison, but not a speck could we discover 
that might be her. 

“ What is to be done ? ” exclaimed Jerry, in a tone 
of deep grief. I, too, felt very sorry for fear harm had 
happened to Cousin Silas; nor did I forget Ben and 
the Sandwich Islander. 

23 * 


27-0 


A SINKING SHIP. 


“ Hallo ! hallo ! Look there ! what is happening 
now ? ” Jerry added. We looked. The schooner had 
parted a little distance from the brig, and the latter 
vessel, after rolling once of twice to starboard and port, 
seemed to dip her bows into the^e'a. We gazed ear- 
nestly with a sickening feeling. Her bowsprit did nojt 
rise again. Down, down she went, slowly and calmly, 
as if making a voluntary plunge to the depths of the 
ocean. The water closed over her decks, her lower 
masts disappeared, her top-masts followed, and the loose 
sails for a moment floated above the spot where she had 
been, and then sank also, drawn down by the halliards 
beneath the waters. 

We felt almost stupefied with horror. Combining 
the .shrieks we had heard and the occurrence we had 
just witnessed, we could have no doubt that the schooner 
we saw before us was a pirate, and that her crew had, 
after murdering those on board the brig, sunk her, to 
destroy, as they might hope, all traces of their guilt. 
They had had in us, however, witnesses of the atrocity 
they had committed, when they thought no human being 
could be cognizant of the fact. What, however, had 
become of Mr. Brand and Ben and the native ? Had 
they been on board, we should probably have acted 
wisely in endeavoring to get away from the pirates, as 
they would undoubtedly, if they could catch us, and 
thought that we suspected what had occurred, treat us 
much in the same way that they had treated the crew 
of the brig. Still, how could we think for a moment of 
running away and deserting our friends, — such a man, 
too, as Cod sin Silas, who we felt sure would never have 
deserted us while the slightest hope remained of ouf 
being alive ? 



DREADFUL SUSPENSE. 


271 


For some time after the brig had sunk, the schooner 
appeared to take no notice whatever of us, while wa 
continued to draw nearer and nearer to her. We had 
an Englishman, Mr. Stone, w^ho acted as master of the 
Dove , and two other natives. Stone was a simple- 
minded, honest man. His principle w^as, if he received 
an order from a superior, to obey it. Therefore, as 
Mr. Brand had directed him to continue beating up to 
windward till he returned on board, it never occurred 
to him to propose running away from our suspiciously 
dangerous neighbor. The natives held their tongues, 
but did not look happy. Mr. M’Ritchie was the most 
agitated. He kept walking our little deck with hurried 
steps. We were drawing nearer and nearer to the big 
schooner. Suddenly he stopped and looked at us, the 
tears starting into his eyes. “ My dear lads,” said he, 
“ it is very, very sad to think of, but there can be no 
doubt, I greatly fear, that our friend and his followers 
have beem murdered by yonder piratical villains. If 
they are still alive, (and what chance is there of it ?) 
they will certainly not be allowed to return to us. We 
are, therefore, only sacrificing our own lives by allowing 
ourselves to fall into the powder of the villains. While 
there is time let us escape. Captain Stone, don’t you 
agree with me ? ” 

“ Well, sir, I cannot but say I do,” answered the cap- 
tain. “ If you order me, as I consider that the craft is 
under your charge, we’ll keep away at once, and make 
all sail to the northward. I feel that we ought to have 
done it as soon as we made out what that craft there 
was.” 

The doctor hesitated still — a violent struggle was 
going on in his mind. He passed his hand across his 


272 


CHASED BY A SCHOONER. 


brow. “ Yes, it must be done. Keep her away, and 
make all sail,”> he exclaimed. 

Scarcely was the helm put up, and a large square-sail 
of light canvas the little schooner carried hoisted, when 
the stranger seemed to observe our presence. We had 
not run on for ten minutes when her head came slowly 
round towards us, he? square-top-sails were hoisted up, 
her fore-sail was rigged out, a square-sail was set, and 
after us she came like a greyhound in chase of a hare. 

“ What chance have we, do you think, of getting 
away from her, Mr. Stone ? ” said Jerry, pointing to the 
big schooner which was coming up hand over hand 
after us. 

Stone, who was at the helm, looked over his shoulder 
at the stranger. “Why, none whatever, Mr. F rank- 
land,” he answered, after a minute’s deliberation. 

“Then I do not see much use in running away,” ob- 
served Jerry. “ If we are to be killed, let us be killed 
at once, and have it over.” 

“ JSTo, sir ; as Mr. Callard says, it’s our duty to strive 
as long as we can. Our lives are in the hand of God. 
He may find means to enable us to escape, though we 
do not in our blindness see them. Perhaps it may fall 
a dead calm, and we may make use of our sweeps ; or 
a squall may spring up and carry away the stranger’s 
masts ; or another vessel may heave in sight, and site 
may think it wise to slip out of the way.” 

“ I see that you are right, Mr. Stone,” answered Jerry. 
“ But I wonder, if they do catch u's, what they will do 
to us all ? ” 

s 

“ Cut the throats of every mother’s son of us,” he an- 
swered quite calmly. “ I’ve often thought of death, and 
I am prepared to die, for I trust in One who is mighty 


CAUSE OF THE MASTER’S CALMNESS. 273 


to save my soui alive. Have you the same hope, young 
gentleman ? I trust you have. It’s my duty as a fel- 
low man to urge you to lay hold of it. There’s nothing 
else will save us, depend on that. From what I heard 
your officer, Mr. Brand, say, I know on what he trusted, 
and I hope he has not failed to speak to you about the 
same matter.” 

“ Ay, he spoke to us in a way we ought never to have 
forgotten, once when -we were drifting out to sea on the 
bottom of a boat, and we had little chance of being 
saved ; and then he swam off at the still greater risk of 
his own life, to save ours,” answered Jerry. ^ 

“ I knew that he was just the man to do that sort of 
thing. He yras a Christian man, too, I am certain of it. 
Well, it’s a great comfort to feel that of a man who you 
believe has just been taken out of the world,” observed 
the master. “ I hope your man, Yool, was a trusting 
believer. I know our man was, poor fellow.” 

Mr. M 4 Rifchie had been listening, and seemed much 
affected at what had been said. The master spoke so 
confidently of Mr. Brand’s death, and of the others, that 
we began ourselves to realize the melancholy fact. 
What, however, was likely to be our own fate ? we had 
several times asked ourselves. What could we expect 
but to be instantly murdered ? We_ anxiously scanned 
the horizon on every side. There was not a sign of a 
sail of any description. The wind remained steady. 
There was no prospect of a storm or of a calm. The 
stranger was coming up after us with fearful speed. We 
were within range of her guns, but she did not fire — so 
we concluded that she had none on board. It Was use- 
less for us to attempt to do any thing by fighting. Jerry 
and I talked about it, but we gave it up as a hopeless 


274 


THE STRANGER FIRES UPON US. 


case. The stranger could quickly have settled the 
matter by running us down. 

Mr. Stone showed us that he did not boast in vain. 
He was calm and unmoved in spite of the dreadful 
danger which threatened us. Still holding the tiller' in 
his hand, and keeping his eye on the sails, he knelt 
down and offered up an earnest prayer for our safety. 
We followed his example, as did the natives ; and when 
we arose from our knees, I, for my part, felt that I was 
much better prepared than before to meet with resigna- 
tion whatever might befall us ; so, I have no doubt, did 
my companions. 

The stranger had now got within musket Tange, but 
still she did not lire. Those on board, of course, ex- 
pected that in a few minutes more they would be up 
with us, and perhaps did not think us worth their pow- 
der. 

“ What chance'have we now, Mr. Stone ?” asked the 
doctor, eyeing our big pursuer with a look of horror. 

“ None, sir, that I see,” was the answer ; “ but then, 
as I said, there may be means prepared which I don’t 
see, so we’ll hold on, if you please.” 

After a minute or two the patience of the pirates 
appeared to have been exhausted. ^There was a report, 
and a musket ball came whistling through our* sails. 
Jerry and I bobbed our heads, for it felt so terribly near 
our ears. Jerry looked up indignantly. “ I have a 
great mir^l to have a crack at them in return,” he ex- 
claimed ; and before any one saw what he was about, 
he had seized his rifle from the cabin, and sent a shot 
back at them in return. 

“Oh, sir, there was~no use doing that; you will only 
the more anger those wicked men,” said Captain Stone 
quite calmly. 


THE master’s death. 275 

“ No, no, let’s die game,” answered Jerry. “ We 
may kill some of our r nemies before they kill us.” 

“We may kill soir } of our friends as likely,” replied 
the captain. “If wi could prevent them injuring us, 
^we might kill them but as we cannot, we must pa- 
tiently wait the result/’ 

The doctor seemed to agree with the captain, so 
Jerry refrained from again loading his rifle. The effect, 
however, of his single shot was most disastrous, for the 
pirates, supposing that we were about to show fight, 
brought several muskets forward, and opened a hot fire 
on us. As the bullets came rattling about our ears, I 
thought not one of us would escape. The two poor 
Sandwich islanders were brought to the deck, one 
directly after the other, desperately wounded. The 
matter was becoming very serious. I thought that we 
ought to lowbr our sails ; so did the doctor, but Captain 
Stone begged us to keep all standing* “ We oan’t tell 
still, sir, but what we may escape. Hold on, hold on,” 
he cried out. “ There is One who watches over us. 
I£ it is his will that we are to be destroyed, his will be 
done.” Scarcely had he uttered these words of true 
piety than he suddenly lifted up his arm, letting go the 
tiller, and fell to the deck. Jerry ran to the helm. I 
tried to lift him up, while the doctor knelt down by his 
side. “ Hold on, hold on, I counsel you,” he whispered, 
raising his head. “ They have done for me. Doctor, 
you cannot help me, I feel. It’s all right ; we were 
doing our duty. We know in whom we trust. He is 
mighty to save our souls alive.” With these words he 
fell back, giving one look at our pursuer, and urging us 
by a sign to hold on our course. The doctor took his 
hand. After holding it for a minute, he shook his head. 


276 


OVERTAKEN BY THE PIRATE. 


“ He’s gone,” he remarked ; “ as brave a man as I evei 
met, and as true a Christian.” 

Jerry meantime stood undauntedly at the helm. No 
sooner, however, had the captain fallen than the pirates, 
seeing what had occurred, ceased firing. They had now 
got so near, that, had they chosen, they might have 
picked every one of us off without difficulty. At last 
they came up almost abreast of us. 

“ Heave to, you young jackanapes, or we will sink 
you,” sung out a man from forward. The doctor was 
attending to one of the wounded natives, so they did 
not observe him', perhaps. Although the command was 
issued in a very uncomplimentary style, Jerry and I 
agreed that it would be useless to disobey it, so going 
about, while he stood at the helm, I ran forward and 
let fly the jib-sheet, while the fore-sail remained to 
windward. 

“ Send your boat aboard us,” shouted the same Voice. 

“We haven’t got one,” answered Jerry. “ You know 
that well enough, I should think,” he added in a lower 
voice. 

“ Oh, we’ll send one, then,” replied the speaker. 

During this time the big schooner was hove-to quite 
close to us. Presently some of the crew went aft, and 
a long gig was lowered from the schooner’s quarter, and 
a set of as ugly-looking ruffians as I ever cast eyes'on 
got into her, and pulled 'towards us. From the specimen 
we had witnessed of their conduct, we could only expect 
to be cut down and thrown overboard as soon as they 
stepped on deck. The least unattractive was a man, 
apparently an officer, who sat in the stern-sheets. As 
he got near I could not help examining his countenance. 
He was a mulatto, with handsome, regular features. I 


THE PIRATES BOARD US. 


277 


felt certain that I had seen him before, and not long 
ago. He had on his head a large broad-briramed straw 
hat, a gaily-colored handkerchief, and a waistcoat of red 
silk, while his jacket was of the finest material. He 
wore a sash round his waist, and a dagger and a brace 
of silver-mounted pistols stuck into it. When he came 
alongside, he - sprang lightly on to the deck of the 
schooner, and looked about him. 

“Now, my lads, be prepared; show no fear,” said 
the doctor. “ Remember that the worst they can do 
is to kill us, and they’ll gain nothing by that ; so, per- 
haps, they will let us live.” 

As we made not the slightest attempt at resistance, 
which would have been madness, even the pirates had 
no excuse for injuring us. All we did was to stand 
quietly at the after part of the deck waiting what was 
next going to happen. 

One of the other pirates soon proceeded without cere- 
mony into the cabin, and the rest went forward down 
the fore-hatch. 

The officer looked at me, and I looked at him. Old 
Surley, who at first had been very much inclined to fly 
at the strangers, growling fiercely, went up to him and 
quietly licked his hand. In spite of his clean shaven 
face/his gay clothes, and well filled-out cheeks, I imme- 
diately recognized him as Manoel Silva, as he called 
himself, — the man whom we had with so much risk 
saved from the wreck of the Spanish brig. “Yes, I 
remember you,” he whispered in his broken English ; 
“ but don’t let others know that. I’m not a man to for- 
get kindness, that’s all.” 

“ Do you know any thing of Mr. Brand and the other 
men?” I asked eagerly. He made no reply;- and 
24 


278 CARRIED PRISONERS ON BOARD THE PIRATE. 

immediately afterwards, assuming an air of authority, 
he ordered the doctor, Jerry, and me, to get into the 
boat. 

The doctor entreated that he might be left to attend 
the two wounded Sandvvich Islanders. The men when 
they came on deck laughed at his request. “ We have 
got wounded too, and shall want you to attend on 
them,” they answered; “if you are- a doctor you are 
welcome.” Still the doctor pleaded so hard for the poor 
men that at last they consented to take one of them ; 
the other, indeed, was already beyond all hopes of re- 
covery. We turned a last look at the body of poor 
Captain Stone. 

“ What is to be done with him ? ” asked Jerry. 

“ Never mind him, youngster,” answered one of the 
men ; “ we’ll soon dispose of him.” 

Silva, leaving three men on board, ordered us to get 
into his boat to return with him to the big schooner. As 
we were shoving off, old Surley, who had been smelling 
about after the other men, gave a loud bark, as much as 
to say, “ Don’t leave me behind,” and leaped in after us. 
Truly glad were we to have him, poor fellow. He 
might prove to us a friend in need. 

We stepped on deck ; the crew, we thought, eyed us 
with very sinister looks, but' no one spoke to us tiU a 
man we took to be the captain, stepped up to the gang- 
way. “ Who are you, and where do you come from, 
who go about prying into other people’s affairs?” he 
exclaimed in a gruff voice. He stamped with his feet 
as he spoke, as if lashing himself up into a rage. He 
was a pale, long-faced man, with a large beard, and a 
very evil expression in his eye. 

“We have no wish to pry into anybody’s affairs,” 


LEFT ON THE DECK OF THE PIRATE. 279 


answered the doctor, quietly. “We missed a boat with 
some of the people belonging to this schooner, and we 
thought they might be aboard your vessel.” 

“I know nothing of the people you talk of; but as 
you have seen more than you ought, I suspect you’ll re- 
main with us. We happen to want just such a schooner 
as yours, so say no more about it. You may think 
yourselves fortunate in not losing your lives. There’s 
no disguise about us, you see.” 

Had we before felt any doubts on the subject, these 
remarks would have revealed to us too clearly the char- 
acter of the people among whom we had fallen. I was 
thankful, Indeed, that we were not immediately mur- 
dered. Why the desperadoes allowed us to live was a 
mystery. The doctor, they thought, would be useful to 
them; and perhaps, as Jerry remarked, they did not 
think us worth killing. The doctor, he, and T, stood 
together near the gangway, with Surley at our feet, 
waiting what was next to happen. Meantime the poor 
wounded Sandwich Islander' had been handed up, and 
placed on tl\e. deck forward. 

The vessel on board which we found ourselves was 
a large, handsome craft, of fully a hundred and eighty 
tons ; and, from her great beam, her taunt, raking masts, 
the broad white ribbon outside, and the peculiar paint 
and fittings on her deck, she was evidently American. 
There were a good many white men mmong her crew 
but there were also many blacks and mulattoes of every 
shade of brown and hue of olive or copper. Never had 
I seen people of so many nations and tribes brought 
together, while every one"of them to my eyes appeared 
most villanous cut-throats. 

We saw the boat go back to the Dove and deposit a 


280 


DUiATH OF THE KANAKA. 


couple of more hands aboafd her, and then both vessels 
hauled- their wind and stood away to the south-west. 
Just then some of the crew hailed the doctor : — “ Here ; 
your patient seems to be about to slip his cable. You’d 
better come and see what’s the matter.” We accom- 
panied the doctor, and knelt down by the side of the 
wounded man who was evidently dying. He took the 
doctor’s hand. “ You kind to us, but you no help me 
now,” he whispered, with his failing breath. “ If you 
once more see Mr. Callard — my love to him — I die 
happy. I trust in Him he taught me to cling to. 
Once I was poor savage. He made me rioh.” These 
were the poor Kanaka’s last words. A few years ago. 
and how differently would one of his countrymeu have 
died ! The doctor closed the eyes and arranged the 
limbs of the dead man, and threw a handkerchief which 
he took from his neck over his face. “ There,” he said, 
u he’ll not give you any more trouble.” The men said 
not a word, but walked about as composedly as if nothing 
had happened, while we went back to our place near 
the gangway. 

Shortly afterwards, a man, who seemed to be an offi- 
cer, went forward. “ Heave that corpse overboard,” 
he exclaimed ; “ why do you let it remain there cumber- 
ing the deck?” The men looked at each other, and 
then, lifting up the body of the poor Kanaka, threw it, 
without form or ceremony, into the water. We looked 
astern. There it floated, with the arms spread out, and 
the face turned towards us, for the handkerchief had 
fallen off the head. Its lips seemed to move^ I thought 
it was uttering a well-merited curse on the hateful craft 
we were on board. It seemed to be about to spring out 
of the water. I could not help crying out. I shrieked, 


MYSTERIOUS APPEARANCE. 


28! 


I believe. Many of the pirates looked with horror. 
“ Is he following us ? ” I cried. No. Down sunk the 
body from sight, as if dragged by some force from below 
“ Ah, a shark has got him ! ” said Silva, who had been 
looking on with the rest. Many of the ruffians shud- 
dered, for they knew full well that such might any day 
be their own fate. 

While this scene was enacting, a similar one was 
taking place on board the Dove . Her captors, having 
time to look about them, had taken up the bodies of 
poor Captain Stone and the other Kanaka, and, without 
shroud or a shot to their feet, had hove them overboard. 
They also were immediately attacked by the sharks 
Jerry and I shuddered, as well we might. The doctor 
looked -on with more composure. “It matters little 
whether sharks or animalcule first devour a body,” he 
observed. “ One or other will inevitably swallow it 
before long, only the sharks make greater speed with 
the process. Happily there is an essence which neither 
one nor the other can destroy, which survives triumph- 
ant over death ; so, lads, when you mourn the loss of a 
friend, think of him as living in that essence, not in the 
mortal frame you see torn to pieces or mouldering in 
decay.” A new light seemed to burst on me as the 
doctor said this. The idea aided me to get over the 
horror I had felt at seeing the fate of the missionary 
captain, and enabled me better to bear the first remark 
which the pirate leader deigned to make us: “Well, 

, youngsters, if you don’t behave yourselves, you’ll come 
to that very quickly, let me tell you.” 

“ T^e have no wish to do otherwise than behave our- 
selves, sir,” answered Jerry in his politest way. “ Per- 
haps you will tell us what you wish to have done.” 

24 * 


282 


OUR COMPANION SURLEY. 


<c To hold your tongue’and be hanged,” answered the 
ruffian, turning aside ; for Jerry’s coolness puzzled aud 
enraged him. ■ 

~ The doctor was now summoned down below to look 
after some sick men, the mate, who called him, said 
but, as Jerry whispered, he suspected they were sick 
from having swallowed more bullets ^than they liked. 
We two, in th$ mean time, sat ourselves down on a gun 
with Surley at our feet. He put his nose between us, 
and looked anxiously up into our faces, as if to learn 
what it all meant. We were there allowed to remain 
unmolested, while the pirates went past us attending to 
the duty of the ship. On seeing the guns, we wondered 
that the schooner had not fired at us ; but we concluded 
that they had coveted the Dove for their own objects, 
and had not wished to injure her. It was evidently 
from no compassion to us that they had not knocked 
her to pieces. No one interrupting us, Jerry and I 
began quietly to talk to each other. 

“ What can have become of Mr. Brand, and Ben 
Yool, and the Kanaka ? ” said I. “ Is it possible that 
they are aboard here all this time, do you think ? ” 

“I am afraid not,” answered Jerry, shaking his head 
sorrowfully. “ I think it’s much more likely that a shot 
was hove into the dingey if they went alongside, and 
that they were sent to the bottom. My only hope is, 
that they missed their way and never came near this 
craft. If so, they may have been picked up by some 
vessel, or may find their way back to Owhyhee.” 

“ That last idea never occurred to me before. Oh, I 
hope it may be so ! I wonder what the doctor thinks ? ” 
said I. 

The doctor was absent for a long time. When he 


PAINFUL THOUGHTS. 


283 


came back to us he said that he could not give an opin- 
ion on the subject. He was very silent, and we 
thought that he looked more sad and thoughtful even 
than at first. 

The day wore on. A black cook brought us some 
soup and a bowl of farinha, which, as we were very 
hungry, we were glad enough to eat; and at night, 
Silva told us that we three might occupy the small 
deck cabin which was vacant. We were glad enough 
to creef) in there, and to forget our sorrows in sleep. 
For some time we slept as soundly as people who have 
undergone a great deal of mental excitement generally 
sleep, though the realities of the past mixed strangely 
with the visions of the night. The most prominent was 
the picture of the' sinking ship which we had seen go 
down ; but in addition I beheld the agonized counte- 
nances of the murdered crew — some imploring mercy, 
others battling for life, and others yielding hopelessly to 
their fate. Among them, to my greater horror, I 
thought I saw Mr. Brand and Ben Yool. They were 
bravely struggling in the hands of the ruffians, as I am 
sure they would have done. How one was up, now the 
other. The pirates tried to force them Overboard, but 
they always again clambered up the side of the vessel. 
Their boat was sunk beneath them; still they fought 
on, clutching hold of ropes and the chain-plates — never 
for a moment losing heart. “ That is the way to fight 
the battle of life against all enemies, spiritual and car- 
nal,” said a voice. It was Cousin Silas who spoke. 
Then, the pirates made another desperate attack on him 
and Ben, and th^y were forced back into the deep 
ocean. 

I awoke with a loud cry. “ What’s the matter 9 


284 


PLANS FOR ESCAPING. 


where are we ? ” asked Jerry, stretching out his arms. 
“ 0 Harry, what dreadful dreams I have had ! What 
is going to happen ? Now I know. 0 dear ! O dear ! 
My poor father, how miserable he will be when he fan- 
cies I am lost ? ” When we told each other our dreams, 
we found that they had been very much .of the same 
nature. 

Our talking awoke the doctor. He was, I dare say, 
not less unhappy than we were, but he told us not to 
give way to unmanly fears, and scolded us for talking 
about our dreams. “It is a foolish and bad practice 
silly people are apt to indulge in. It makes them ner- • 
vous, promotes superstition, and, worse than all, fre- 
quently causes them to doubt God’s superintending care 
and watchfulness. Your dreams have just been made 
up of what has occurred, and of what your imagination 
has conjured up. Just set to work and think and talk 
of how we may escape from our present position, and 
perhaps you may think and talk to good effect.” As 
soon as we got up, we took our place as we had done 
the previous day, as much out of the way of the rest of 
the people as possible. 

We took the doctor’s advice, and did little else for 
some time than talk of how we might escape. The 
most feasible plan which occurred to us was to watch 
for an opportunity of deserting the ship whenever she 
might touch at any place for water. We agreed that 
it would be well to try and lull the suspicions of our 
captors, by pretending to be perfectly contented with 
our lot, and by making ourselves as much at home as 
possible. 

“We’ll not seem to care about going on shore our 
selves,” observed Jerry; “but after a time we’ll talk 


RESOLVE TO RUN FROM THE SHIP. 


285 


about old Surley not being accustomed to remain on 
board so long, and we’ll ask leave to take him a run on 
the beach ; then he’ll run on, and we will run after him, 
till we get out of sight of the vessel, and then won’t we 
put our best legs foremost — -that’s all. Surley will like 
the fun, and we will whistle him on ; and v if any of the 
pirates meet us, we can say we are running after him ; 
and so we shall be, you know. We can hide away in 
some tree, or in a cavern, or somewhere or other till the 
ship sails, and then we must trust to what may turn up 
to get away from the place, wherever it may be.” 

“ The chances are that it may be a desert island, and 
one rarely or never visited by ships. If so, perhaps we 
may have to live on it for years without being able to 
escape from it,” I observed. 

“ Well, no matter if that is the case,” he answered ; 
“ any thing is better than living among these cut-throats,” 

“ I agree with you,” said I ; “ but what is to become 
of the doctor? We must not leave him behind.” 

“ Certainly not,” said Jerry ; “ we will tell him what 
we propose, and I dare say he will find means to follow 
us. If he cannot, perhaps he will propose some plan 
which will be better than ours.” 

We talked till we talked ourselves very hungry, and 
were not sorry when the black cook brought us a bowl 
of farinha for our breakfast. We should not have ob- 
jected to a slice of cold beef or a piece of fish, but we 
agreed that it would be wiser to take what was offered 
to us, and appear thankful. The doctor was asked in 
to breakfast with the captain. He certainly would 
rather not have gone, but as nothing.eould be gained by 
refusing, and something might by accepting the invita- 
tion, he went. Tom Congo, the cook, did not forget old 


286 


AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE. 


Surley, but, when the officers were below at breakfast, 
brought him a mess, which he gobbled up with no little 
satisfaction. 

Silva appeared to take no notice of us ; yet we could 
not but believe that it was owing to his intercession our 
lives had been spared, and that we were not ill-treated. 
It will be remembered that, after the story we heard of 
the escape of the convicts from Juan Fernandez, serious 
suspicions had been entertained of his character. We 
had now, from finding him associated with pirates, 
every reason to believe that our suspicions were correct. 
Still, pirate as he was, all the right feelings of our 
nature had not been blunted in him. While on board 
the Triton he had always behaved well, and he now 
showed ns that he was grateful for the kindness he had 
received. Such was the opinion Jerry and I formed of 
him. 

For three or four days things went on much in the 
same way as at first. We had our food brought us 
regularly by our friend the black cook, and were 
allowed to walk the deck as long as we liked, and to 
creep into our cabin at night. Nobody interfered with 
us. The people who acted as officers passed us by with- 
out notice, and the seamen did not take the trouble to 
exchange a word with us. At last Jerry and I agreed 
that it was time to try and make ourselves more at 
home, or we should not be able to carry into execution 
the plan we had proposed. Surley, too, seemed to think 
it very dull work sitting all day long with his nose rest- 
ing on our knees. How to set about ingratiating our- 
selves with the fellows was the difficulty. We generally 
talked over our plans when the doctor was away, as he 
was for a considerable time every day attending to the 


A FRIEND IN NEED. 


287 


sick. We determined tirst to try and win over old Tom 
Congo, the black cook, as he seemed disposed to be 
- friendly with us. 

“I say, cook,” exclaimed Jerry, “you give us very 
good food to eat, but couldn’t you add a bit of meat now 
and then ? Surley gets some, and we who have been 
accustomed all our lives to it would like to have it now/ 

“ Oh, oh, you hab some of Surley’s den,” answered 
Tom Congo with a^grin. 

“ You are too kind to wish to make us eat scraps and 
bits,” said Jerry ; “ we should just like a piece of beef 
or pork.” 

Congo looked pleased ; and though he would not 
promise to bring us any meat, we saw that he would. 
Now, we did not care so much about the meat, but we 
thought that, by asking him a favor which he could 
easily grant, we might gain his interest. It was a com- 
pliment to him, and made him feel as if he were our 
superior, for the time being at all events. The next 
day, at dinner time, he brought us a very nice piece of 
boiled beef and some potatoes. We consulted what we 
could give him in return. Our knives were too valua- 
ble to part with, but Jerry had a silver pencil-case which 
he offered to him. Old Tom asked what it was fcfr, and 
when told to write with, he grinned from ear to ear, ob- 
serving that, as he could not write even his own name, 
it would be of no manner of use to him, but that he 
thanked us all the same. 

The feeling that there were two people on board who 
were disposed to be friendly with us raised our spirits. 
We got up and began to chase Surley about the dfck, 
making him run after a ball of spun yam till we got 
tired of the game* Then we walked up and down the 


288 


A NEW ACQUAINTANCE. 


deck till we got right aft, where we could catch a glance 
at the compass. We were steering about south-west 
and by south. 

“Where are we going to, my friend?” said Jerry, 
addressing the man at the helm. 

“ Ask the captain ; he’s likely to tell you, youngster.” 

“ Oh, no matter,” answered Jerry carelessly, “ I only 
asked for curiosity. If it’s to China, or round Cape 
Horn, or to California, it’s all the same to me.” 

“You’re an independent little chap, at all events,” 
answered the man; “if you were one of us, you’d do 
well, I doubt not.” 

“Oh, I’ve no objection to do well,” said Jerry; “just 
show me the way, and I’m your man.” 

“ I like your spirit, and I’ll say a word in your favor 
with the crew. I daresay you know something about 
navigation, which is more than most of the officers do ; 
so, if you join us, it won’t be long before you are made 
an officer.” 

“ Thank you for your good opinion of me,” said Jerry ; 
“but I’m not ambitious. I just want to do what I like, 
and if nobody interferes with me I’in content.” 

“ You’re a merry little chap, at all events,” observed 
the pirate. “ I like to see a fellow with some spirit in 
Jiim, and I’ll keep you out of harm if I can.” 

“Thank you,” said Jerry, making a dash after Sur- 
ley’s tail ; “ I thought you looked as if you were a kind 
chap, and that made me speak to you.” 

Thus by degrees we made ourselves at home among 
the crew. Before the evening we were chasing each 
other about the rigging. The men forward had a mon- 
key, and we got hold of him, and made him ride upon 
Surley’s back. 'Neither 'animal liked it at first, but by 


\ ' ; ' S . • ' 

OUR WANT OF A BIBLE. 289 

coaxing them we managed to reconcile them to each 
other. Jacko would etery now and, then take it into 
his head to give old Surley a sly pinch on the ear or 
tail, and then the dog would turn round and elideavor 
to bite the monkey’s leg; but the" latter was always too. 
quick for him, and would either jump off, or leap upon 
his back as if he were, going to dance there, or would 
catch hold of a rope overhead and swing himself up 
out of his way. It really was great fun, and often we 
almost forgot where we were and our sad fate. It 
made the pirates also think us light-hearted, merry fel- 
lows, and they gave themselves no further concern about 
watching, us. Now, of course, it sounds very romantic 
and interesting to be on b 7 oard a pirate vessel, among 
desperate cut-throats, to be going one does not know 
where ; but the reality is very painful and trying, and, 
in spite of all we did in the day to keep up our spirits, 
Jerry and I often lay awake half the night, almost cry- 
ing, and wondering what would become of us.'- It was 
not till we remembered what we had heard at home, 
and what Captain Frankland and Mr. Brand had told 
us often, — that in all difficulties and troubles we should 
put our trust in God, — that we found any comfort. 
How much we now wished for a Bible, that we might 
read it to each other! We now saw more clearly than 
we had ever before done its inestimable value. There 
were several on board the Dove , but we were not likely 
to be able to get them. 

The poor doctor was more to be pitied than we were. 
He grew thinner and thinner every day. Evidently he 
felt his captivity very much. His prospect of escaping 
was much smaller than ours, because he was of far 
greater use to the pirates than we were. We might 
25 


290 


AN EXPECTED PRIZE. 


have been of some service to them as navigators, but 
without our books and instruments we could do very 
little for them even in that respect. 

Several more days went by in this way. The pirates 
now began to grow fidgety, and they were constantly 
going to the mast-head, and spent the day in looking 
out on every side round the horizon, in search of land 
or a vessel, we could not tell which. At last, one fore- 
noon, one of. the look-outs shouted from aloft, “ A sail ! 
a sail!” 

“Where away?” asked the captain, who till that 
moment seemed to have been half asleep on deck. He 
sprang to his feet, and he, with every one on board, in 
an instant was full of life and animation. 

“ On the lee bow,” answered the man. u She is a 
large ship standing to the southward.” The wfind was 
from the westward. 

Several of the officers and jnen hurried aloft to have 
a look at the stranger. When they came down they 
seemed highly satisfied. 

u She’s a merchantman from California,” observed 
one. “ She’ll have plenty of gold dust on board.” 

“ She’s the craft to suit us, then,” observed a second. 

“ She’s a heavy vessel, and the fellows aboard will 
fight for their gold,” remarked a third. 

“ Who cares ? a little fighting will make the prize of 
more value,” cried another. “We’ll show them what 
fhey’ll get by resistance.” 

The word was now passed along to clear the decks 
for action, and with the men at their guns, we bore 
down on the stranger. 


VOYAGE IN THE PIRATE VESSEL. 291 


\ 


CHAPTER XIV. 

VOYAGE IN THE PIRATE VESSEL. 

* 

The stranger saw our approach, and from the eaget 
way in which we carried on sail, those on board must 
have hac^ some suspicion of the character of the 
schooner. She was a fine large ship, and was evidently 
a fast craft, but still the schooner managed to overhaul 
her. As we had hitherto'Stood on under easy sail, the 
Dove was able to keep up with us, but now we left her 
far astern. Before we parted company, however, the 
captain signalized heK where to^meet him. I forgot to 
say that for soipe time we did not know the name of the 
pirate chief, but at last we heard him called Captain 
Bruno. Though this name had a foreign sound, he 
was, as I have before said, either an Englishman or an 
American. The schooner was called the Hawk and she 
was not ill named. 

As we drew near the ship we ran up English colors, 
while in return, up went at her peak the stars and 
stripes of the United States. On we stood. The ship, 
so Jerry and I concluded, did not suspect the character 
of the schooner, for she made no attempt to escape ps, 
but appeared as if those on board expected a friendly 
greeting. I observed Captain Bruno very frequently 
turn his telescope towards the stranger, and examine 
her narrowly. The officers, too, began to talk to each 


292 


THE PIRATES CATCH A TARTAR. 


other and look suspiciously at her. I asked Mr 
M‘Ritchie, who was near us, whether he thought the 
pirates would attack the ship and murder the crew, as 
we believed they had done that of the brig. 

“ I dread something terrible, but I have very little 
apprehension for the fate of the people on board the 
ship,” he answered in a low tone. “ Immy opinion, the 
pirates will find that they , have caught a tartar. Mark 
me — yonder craft is no merchantman, but a ship of 
war, either American or English, or perhaps Chilian. 
I should not be surprised to find that she is on the 
watch for our friends here. Scarcely do I know what 
to wish. If they fight at all, they will fight desperately, 
and we shall run as great a chance of being killed as 
they will, — though, if they are captured, we may re- 
gain our liberty. If, on the other hand, they escape, 
our captivity will be prolonged.” 

“ But if yonder ship prove to be what you suppose, 
and the schooner is captured, perhaps we may be hung 
as pirates,” said Jerry. “ How can we prove that we 
are honest people ? ” 

“There will he but little difficulty about that,” an- 
swered Mr. M‘Ritchie. “ The pirates themselves will 
acknowledge that we have been brought on board 
against our wfill, and the account we can give of our- 
selves is too circumstantial not to gain credit. At all 
events, we must hope for the best. But see, Captain 
Bruno at last suspects that something is wrong. 

We had by this time got almost within the ordinary 
Tsfnge of a ship’s guns. Suddenly the captain sprang 
to the helm. “ Haul aft the main and fore sheets I ” he 
sung out in a voice of thunder. “ Brace up the yard* ! 
Down with the helm ! Keep her as close as she’ll go* 1 **’ 


THE PIRATES’ TRICK TO ESCAPE. 


293 


The crew flew to obey these orders. They knew full 
well that their lives depended on their promptness. 
Already the schooner had approached too near the 
strange^. That she was a man-of-war she no longer 
left us in doubt. Before the orders issued by Captain 
Bruno were executed, a line of ports were thrown open, 
and eight long guns were run out, threatening to send 
us to the bottotn if we showed a disposition to quarrel, 
and aft at her peak flew the stars and stripes of the 
United States. 

The pirates saw that they were caught through their 
own folly and greediness, but the captain showed him- 
self to be a man of undaunted courage and full of re- 
sources. “ Hold on ! ” he sung out, before a sheet was 
hauled in. “We may lose’ our sticks, if we attempt to 
run. - I’ll try if I cannot deceive these clever fellows, 
and put them on a wrong scent.” The v pirates seemed 
mightily pleased at the thought of playing their enemy 
a trick, and highly applauded the proposal of their cap- 
tain. The schooner, therefore, stood steadily on, till 
she ran close down to the corvette. Then she hove to, 
well to windward of the ship, however. A boat was 
lowered, and Captain Bruno, with four of the most 
quiet-looking of the crew, got into her, and pulled away 
for the ship. When we hove to, the corvette did the 
same, an eighth of a mile to leeward of us. We 
watched the proceedings of the pirate with no little 
anxiety. 

“ If that fellow succeed in deceiving the captain of 
that ship, I shall acknowledge that impudence will 
sometimes carry the day,” observed Mr. M‘Ritchie. 

“ Couldn’t we contrive to make a signal to let tii8 
25 * 


294 CAPTAIN BRUNO’S AUDACITY. 

people of the man-of-war know that we are kept here in 
durance vile ? ” observed Jerry. 

While he was speaking, I looked round, and saw twc 
of the most ruffianly of the crew standing close to us, 
with pistols cocked in their hands, held quietly down by 
their sides. I hoped that our captors had not overheard 
what Jerry had said. I touched him as if by chance on 
the shoulder, and after his eye had glanced at the pis- 
tols he said ^nothing more about making signals to the 
corvette. Our position was every instant growing 
more and more critical. If the pirate captain was 
seized on board the man-of-war, it was impossible to say 
how his followers might wreak their vengeance on our 
heads. We watched him with no little interest, till he 
ascended with perfect coolness the side of the ship. 
Our anxiety still further increased, after he reached the 
deck and disappeared below. Minute after minute 
slowly passed by, still he did not return. The pirates 
with their pistols got up closer to us, and one, a most 
hideous black fellow, kept looking at us and then at his 
weapon, and. grinning ^from ear to ear, as if he was 
mightily eager to put it to our heads and pull the trig- 
ger. We tried to look as unconcerned as possible, but 
I must own that I could not help every now and then 
turning round, to ascertain in what direction the muzzle 
of the pistol was pointed. The black and his compan- 
ion looked so malicious, that I feared, whatever occur- 
red, we should be the sufferers. Iff Captain Bruno 
escaped, we should still remain in captivity ; or should 
he be suspected and detained, probably the pirates 
would wreak their vengeance on our heads. I was 
afraid of speakings and almost of moving, lest, even 


IMPUDENCE CARRIES THE DAT. 


295 


should I lift an arm, it might be construed into the act 
of making a signal, and I might get a bullet sent 
through my head. The American corvette, with her 
spread of wliite canvas, looked very elegant and grace- 
ful as she lay liove-to, a short distance from us. I 
wished very much that I was out of the pirate, and 
safe on board her, even though the former- might get 
free away without the punishment she deserved. But 
all such hopes, it appeared, were likely to prove vain. 
After the lapse of another ten minutes Captain Bruno 
himself appeared on deck. As he stood at the gang- 
way, he shook' hands cordially with some of the offi- 
cers. He seemed to be exchanging some good joke 
with them, for he and they laughed heartily when he 
went down the side and stepped into the boat. A:, he 
pulled back to the schooner, he waved his hand, and 
took off his hat with the most becoming courtesy. 
“Well,” thought I to myself, “certainly impudence will 
sometimes carry the day.” 

He was soon again on board. “ Make sail,” he said 
with a calm smile r “ the corvette and we are going in 
search of a rascally pirate, which has committed all 
sorts of atrocities. I wonder whether we shall find 
her.” The joke seemed to tickle 'the fancies of all on 
deck, for a quiet chuckle was heard on every side. 
“ Keep the rest of the people below,” he said to Silva ; 
“ it might surprise the crew of the man-of-war to see so 
many ugly fellows on board a quiet trader.” The order 
was strictly obeyed. A few only of the crew appeared 
on deck, and they were soon seen employed' in the usual 
occupations of a merchantman,. The wind was light, 
so the schooner began leisurely to set sail after sail, till 
every stitch of canvas she could carry was spread. 




296 THE PIRATES HOPE TO ESCAPE. 

./ 

corvette did the same, and both vessels were soon going 
along under a clofid of canvas. The schooner, we saw, 
had the advantage. Gradually we were increasing our 
distance from the man-of-war. Captain Bruno chuckled 
audibly. Still, at times he cast an anxious look astern. 

Jerry and I were allowed to walk about the deck, 
and to observe what was going on. We remarked the 
captain watching the corvette. “ Depend on it,” said 
Jerry, “ he has been leaving some forged paper with 
the Americans, or playing them some ti^ck which 
he is afraid will be found out.” I thought at first this 
must be Jerry’s fancy. We had no opportunity of ask- 
ing Mr. M‘Ritchie’s opinion without being overheard. 
Away we glided over the smooth ocean. More and 
more we increased our distance from the corvette. The 
further ahead we got the more Captain Bruno seemed 
pleased : and as I watched his countenance, I became 
convinced that Jerry’s surmises were correct. As we 
walked the deck and watched the captain, we agreed 
that -if he dared he would like to wet the sails to make 
them hold more wind. An hour or so passed away, 
when suddenly the corvette yawed a little, a puff of 
white smoke appeared with a sharp report, and a shot 
came flying over the* water close to us. “Ah! have 
you found me out, my friends?” exclaimed Captain 
Bruno, leaping down from the tpffrail. “ All hands on 
deck ! Swing up the long guns ! We must try to wing 
this fellow before he contrives to clip our feathers.” In 
an instant everybody was alert : tackles were rove, and, 
in a short time, two long and very heavy guns, with 
their carriages, were hoisted, up from the hold. The 
guns were quickly mounted and run. out, and a brisk 
fire kept up at the corvette. She also CQntinued to fire, 


CHASED BY THE MAN-OF-WAR, 


297 


but as to do so with effect she had to yaw each time, 
the schooner, which could fire her stern guns as fast as 
she could load them, had a considerable advantage. It 
was a game at long bowls, for the two vessels were 
already so far apart, that it required very good gunnery 
to send a shot with any thing like a correct aim. Silva 
seemed to be one of the best marksmen on board. Sev- 
eral times when he fired, the shot went through the 
sails of the ship of war. The great object of the pirates 
was to cripple her, as was that of the Americans to 
bring down some of the schooner’s spars. Had the 
latter found out the trick sooner which had been played 
them by the pirate, the probabilities are that some of 
our rigging would have been cut through, and we should 
have been overtaken ; now there appeared every chance 
that we should effect our escape. Still, several of the 
shot which came from the corvette struck us, or went 
through our sails, but the damage was instantly repaired. 
The crew had got up from below a store of spare ropes, 
and sails, and spars, so that even should we receive any 
severe injury, it could, we saw, be speedily put to rights. 
As I before said, our prospects of getting our throats 
cut, or our brains blown or knocked out, were pretty 
well balanced against those of our being made free, 
should the corvette come up with us; so we scarcely 
knew what to wish for. Every time a shot came near 
the vessel, the pirates cast such angry glances at us, as 
if we had had any thing to do with the matter, that we 
half expected some of them would let fly their pistols 
and put an end to our lives. 

Hour after hour thus passed away. A stern chase is* 
a long chase, as everybody knows, and so the Americans 
must have thought it. The wind continued much as at 


298 


DESPERATE EFFORTS TO ESCAPE. 


first for some time. This was all in favor of the 
schooner, which sailed in a light wind proportionably 
better than the corvette. Towards evening, however, 
clouds , began to gather in the eastern horizon. The 
bank rose higher and higher in the sky. Now one mass 
darted forward — now another — and light bodies flew 
rapidly across the blue expanse overhead. First the 
surface of the ocean was crisped over with a sparkling 
ripple, and then wavelets appeared, and soon 'they in- 
creased to waves with frothy crests ; and the schooner 
sprung forward, the canvas swelling, the braces tauten- 
ing, and the masts and spars cracking with the addi- 
tional strain put on them. For some time, though she 
still continued to fire, scarcely a shot from the. man-of- 
war had come up to us, as we had still further increased 
our distance from her. She, however, now felt the 
advantage of the stronger breeze, and our pace became 
more equal. Still the breeze increased. The captain 
stood aft, his eye apparently watching earnestly every 
spar and rope aloft,, to see how they stood the increas- 
ing strain. Away we now flew, the water hissing under 
our bows, and the spray leaping up on either side, and 
streaming over us in thick showers. The white canvas 
bulged, and tugged, and tugged, till I thought it would 
carry the masts away, and fly out of the bolt ropes. 
Captain Bruno, however, gave no orders to take it in. 
He looked astern ; the corvette was going along as fast 
as we were — perhaps faster. This was not an occasion 
for shortening sail. The crew seemed to have the same 
opinion. They were fighting with halters round their 
necks, every one full well knew ; and though this con- 
sciousness may make men desperate when brought to 
bay, it will assuredly make them run away like arrant 
cowards if they have a possibility of escape. 


A GALE COMES ON. 


299 


Tlie sea by this time had got up considerably, and 
the schooner began to. pitch into it as she ran before 
the wind. The corvette at first came on rather more 
steadily, but she likewise goon began to feel the effects 
of the troubled water ; and away we both went, plung- 
ing our bows into the sea as we dashed rapidly onward. 
I could not help feeling that the movements of both 
vessels s'howed that serious work was going on. The 
corvette, with her wide fields of* canvas spread aloft, 
every sail bulging out to its utmost extent, looked as if 
intent on the pursuit ; while the eager, hurried way in 
which the schooner struggled on amid the foaming waves, 
made it appear as if she were indued with conscious- 
ness, and was aware that her existence depended on her 
escaping her pursuer. 

It was now blowing a perfect gale. Every instant, 
as I kept looking aloft, I expected to hear some dread- 
ful crash, arid to see the top-masts come tumbling down 
over our heads ; but though the top-gallant-masts bent 
and writhed like fishing-rods with a heavy fish at the 
end of the line, they were too well set np by the rig- 
ging to yield even with the enormous pressure put on 
them. 

Captain Bruno called Silva to him again. They held 
a consultation for some minutes. They looked at the 
corvette, and then at their own sails. The result was, 
that some of the people were summoned aft, and once 
more the long guns were run out, and, watching their 
opportunity, as the stern of the vessel -lifted, they 
opened fire on their pursuer. “ If we could but knock 
away their fore-top-mast with all that spread of canvas 
on it, we should very soon run her out of sight,” ob- 
served Sjilva, stooping down to take aim. He fired 


300 THE PIRATES STILL FIGHT ON. 

The canvas stood as before; but, as far as we could 
judge, the shot had reached the man-of-war, and hands 
were seen going aloft to repair some damage which it 
had caused. 

The pirates cheered when they saw that the shot had 
taken effect. “ Hurra ! hurra ! Fire away again, Silva ; 
fire away,” they shouted. Thus encouraged, he con- 
tinued firing as fast as the guns could be loaded. Shot 
after shot was discharged. Still the pursuer came on 
as proudly and gallantly as before. Now and then a 
shot was fired from her bow chasers ; but the difficulty 
of taking any thing like an aim in such a sea was very 
great, and they generally flew excessively wide of their 
mark. Silva, indeed, after the first shot, had but little 
to boast of as a marksman. His anger seemed to rise. 
He looked with a fierce glance at our pursuer. Both 
the guns were loaded. He stooped dawn to one and 
fired ; then, scarcely looking up to watch the result, he 
went to the other. The schooner was sinking into a 
sea; as she rose to the summit of the next, a shot left 
the muzzle of the gun. Away it winged its flight above 
the foaming ocean. Now the pirates cheered more lus- 
tily than ever. Good cause had they. As if by magic, 
the wide cloud of canvas which had lately towered 
above the deck of the corvette seemed dissolved in air. 
The race is not always to the swift, nor does Fortune 
always favor the best cause. The pirate’s shot had cut 
the corvette’s fore-top-mast completely in two, and we 
v could see it with its tangled mass of spars, and sails, and 
rigging hanging over the bows, and still further stop- 
ping the ship’s way. 

“ Now we may shorten sail,” sang out Captain Bruno. 
“ Aloft, my lads ; quick about it.” The men needed 




ESCAPE FROM THE CORVETTE. 301 

not to be . told of the importance of haste. They flew 
aloft, and soon handed the top-gallant-sails, and took 
two reefs in the top-sails. Relieved of the vast weight 
which had been pressing on her, and almost driving her 
over, the schooner now flew much more easily over the 
seas, and with scarcely diminished speed. 

We kept watching the corvette. She, of course, could 
carry sail on her main-mast, but it took some time to 
clear away the wreck of the fore-top-mast, and to set 
up the fore-stay, "which had been carried aw r ay. This 
it was necessary to do before sail could be set on the 
main-top-mast. All this work occupied some time, and 
enabled the schooner to get far ahead. Night, too, was 
coming on. The weather promised to be very thick 
The pirate’s chance of escape was very considerable. 
Our hearts sank within us as we saw the prospect of 
our prolonged captivity. ^Proportionably the pirates 
were elated as they felt sure of escaping. On we -flew; 
the sails of the corvette grew darker and darker, till a 
thin small pyramid alone was seen rising against the 
sky in the far horizon. Mr. M‘ Ritchie, who had joined 
us on deck, heaved a deep sigh. To him captivity was 
even more galling than to us. Darkness came on, and 
the corvette was lost to sight. 

It was a terrific night. The wind increased, and the 
sea got up more than ever, — the thunder roared, and 
the lightning flashed; and as the schooner went plung- 
ing away through the foaming ocean, often I thought 
that she was about to sink down and never to rise again. 
The dark, stern features of the pirates were lighted up 
now and again, as they stood at their posts, by the 
lightning^as it played around us ; but, strange to say, 
'they appear to / have far more dreaded the anger of 
26 


302 


A DREADFUL PICTURE. 


their fellow men than they did the fury of the elements. 
Now and then, perhaps,, conscience whispered in tha 
ears of some one not totally deaf to its influence, that 
his last hour was approaching, and that he must soon 
stand in the presence of an offended God, whose laws 
he had long systematically outraged; but, generally 
speaking, the consciences of that reckless crew had long 
since been put to sleep., never to awake till summoned, 
when hope should have fled, at the sound of the last 
trump. On every side those countenances — bold, fierce, 
God-defying — broke forth on me out of the darkness 
as the bright lightning gleamed across them. Each 
individual face of the dreadful picture is indelibly im- 
pressed on my memory. At length the doctor went to 
his berth, and Jerry and I followed him to the cabin 
and crept into ours, — wet, hungry, and sorrowful. We 
slept, — we had been so excited all day that w T e could 
not help that from very weariness ; but my dreams, I 
know, were strangely troubled. 

At last I awoke and found that it was daylight. I 
sprang up, calling Jerry, and we went on deck to learn 
what had become of the corvette. She was nowhere to 
be seen. The wind had gone down very much, but it 
was still blowing fresh, and a heavy sea was running. 
The sky, however, was blue and clear, and the waters 
iparkled brightly as the beams of the rising sun glanced 
over them. The schooner had escaped all damage in 
the gale. Our spirits rose somewhat with the pure, fresh 
air of morning, and very well pleased were we to devour 
a good breakfast, when our friend the black cook placed 
it before^us on deck, in a couple of large basins, with 
heavy silver spoons to feed ourselves. 

All day we were looking out in expectation of seeing 


UNPLEASANT ANTICIPATIONS. 303 

/ ^ 

the corvette again. Hour after hour passed, but she 
did not appear. 

She will not find us again, Jerry,” said I. “ I won 
. der what the pirates wil 1 do with us?” 

“ Turn us into pirates somehow or other, I am afraid,” 
answered Jerry. “ If we don’t pretend to be satisfied 
with our lot, perhaps they will get tired of us and will 
cut our throats, or throw us overboard just to be rid of 
' us.” 

“ That cannot, perhaps, be helped,” I replied. “ But 
Jerry, I sa^ do not for a moment ever think of turning 
pirate, even if it were to save your life. Do right, what- 
ever comes of it, is what Cousin Silas has often said to 
us — remember.” 

“ I was not quite serious,” answered Jerry. “ But 
still if we did, we should have a better chance of get- 
ting away.” 

“ That is the very thing that we should not do,” I 
replied. “Never do what is wrong that good may 
come of it. The pirates are not likely to ask us to join 
them; but if they do, all we have to say is, that we 
would rather not. We need not go into the heroics 
about it, and show a vast amount of virtuous indigna- 
tion, but just quietly and civilly refuse, ^and stick to it. 
Don’t fancy that we shall get away faster'^ doing what 
is wrong. As I said, let us do what is right, and trust 
all the rest to Providence.” ’ 

“ I see, of course, you are right, Harry. I’ll try and 
heartily agree with you ; but just now I was consider- 
ing how we might deceive the pirates by pretending to 
join them, and I thought that I had got a first-rate plan 
in my head. But, Harry, from what you have been 
saying, I now understand that I was wrong.” 


304 WHAT HAS BECOME OF THE DOVE ? 

We took two or three turns on deck. 

“ I say, Harry,” exclaimed Jerry suddenly, “I won* 
der what has become of the Dove ? ” So interested had 
we been with', what concerned ourselves especially, that 
we ^had not till that moment thought about her. 

“ If she did not go to the bottom during the gale 
yesterday, perhaps the corvette got hold of her,” said I. 

“ If the corvette did catch her, the people in charge of 
her are verydikely to get their heads into a noose, for ' 
they will be puzzled to explain in a satisfactory way 
how she came into their possession.” # 

Captain Bruno seemed to care very little for the loss 
of the people in the little schooner. He swore and 
grumbled somewhat under the idea that she might have 
fallen into the power of the corvette, and seemed rather 
to wish that she might have gone to the bottom. How- 
ever, as she was a capital sea boat, it was possible she 
might have weathered the gale, in which case Jerry and 
I concluded that she would find her way to some rendez- 
vous or other with the pirate. We hoped she might, 
for vague ideas ran through our minds that she might 
by some means or other enable us to make our escape 
from our captors. We could not tell how, but We 
thought that perhaps we might some night get on board 
her in some harbor, when the large schooner was refit- 
ting, and run off with her. Very slender hopes serve 
to buoy up people in circumstances like ours. 

Three or four days passed away, and the pirates be- 
came pretty confident that the man-of-war was not 
likely again to fall in with them. As Jerry and I 
passed the compass, we carelessly cast a glance at it, 
and found that we were still steering a course to the 
southward. The pirates were now constantly on the 


1 

THE PIRATE CHASES A SHIP. 305 

alert. It was evident that they were on the watch for 
some vessel or some island. We considered that they 
were looking for a vessel, from the various directions 
in which they were looking out, — north, south, east, 
and w r est ; and sometimes we lay hove-to for hours to- 
gether. 

“ I say, Harry, would it not be a joke if they were to 
fall. in with the corvette again?” observed Jerry when 
no one was near. “ The Americans would not let us 
escape quite so easily as before.” 

“ The pirates will be too wary for that,” I answered. 
u But look ! there is something in sight from the mast- 
head. There is ‘ up helm.’ Away we go in chase of 
her, whatever she may be.” - 

There was a strong breeze from the ^ north-west. 
Our course was about south-east. Mr. M‘ Ritchie joined 
us m our walk on deck. He looked more grave and 
sad even tfian before. He had heard, we concluded, 
that the pirates were about to commit some fresh act of 
atrocity. They expected some fighting, at all events, 
we soon discovered ; for the magazine was opened, 
powder and shot were got up, and all hands' were busily 
employed in overhauling their arms, giving them an ad- 
ditional cleaning, and loading their pistols. 

We did not venture aloft, but we looked out eagerly 
ahead to discover the vessel, of which it was clear the 
pirates were in chase. First royals, then top-gallant- 
sails, and top-sails slowly rose above the horizon. At 
last her courses appeared, and we could see the whole 
of her hull. She was a large barque, and there could 
be little doubt that the pirates were right in supposing 
her to be a merchantman. We had just done breakfast 
26 * 


v 


306 


OVERTAKE THE STRANGER. 


when she was first seen ; it was almost sunset by the 
time we had completely risen her hull. 

Our appearance did not seem to have created any 
alarm on board, for she stood on steadily in her course 
to the southward. We followed like a bloodhound 
chasing its prey. The pirates were in high glee ; they 
recognized the vessel >as one which had been unloading 
in San Francisco when ' they had been there, and they 
seemed to have no doubt, from the number of people 
who appeared to be on board, seen through their glasses, 
that her passengers were gold-diggers, returning to their 
distant homes with their hard-earned gains — some 
obtained, undoubtedly, by honest, laborious industry — 
others, perhaps, by the many lawless means to which 
people will resort when excited by the lust of getting 
money. 

As darkness settled down on the ocean, we cduld 
just see the vessel ahead. We kept on in ‘her wake. 
As we much outsailed her, we quickly stole up after her, 
till we could make out- the dark figures of the crew, as 
they, stood on deck, wondering, probably, what we 
could be. Not a shot was fired — no words were ex- * 
changed between the two vessels. “ Perhaps the large 
vessel is prepared for the strife,” I thought to myself. 

“ If so, the pirates may again find' that they have 
caught a tartar ; still, it is strange that no one on board 
takes notice of us.” We were still following in the 
wake of the stranger, but rapidly overhauling her, 
Jerry and I remained on deck to see what would 
happen. We had got close up on her quarter. Our 
helm was put to port, and this placed us on a line, which 
enabled us to run up alongside. Not till our bows 


NIGHT ENGAGEMENT 


807 


were almost lip to the stranger’s quarter did any one 
hail us. 

“ What are you ? what do you want ? ” asked some 
one, in a tone of surprise. 

“We’ll show you,” replied Captain Bruno. 

“Oh! is that- your game?” exclaimed a person ou 
board the stranger. “ We thought so ; — fire I ” 

The order was obeyed, and several shot came crash- 
ing into the bows of the schooner. The pirates were 
not slow in returning the compliment. Their fury was 
speedily worked up to the highest pitch. They labored 
away at the guns, shouting and uttering terrific oaths, 
more like demons than men. We quickly ranged up 
alongside, keeping a little further off 1 than we probably 
should otherwise have done, in the hope of crippling 
our opponent before attempting to board. The stranger 
had evidently many more people on board than the 
pirates had expected. They fought their guns well, 
and bravely too ; but the further off we got the less 
effect had they, showing that they were handled by men 
without practice ; while the pirates, on the other hand, 
seldom missed their aim. Thus fiercely engaged — the 
roar of the guns and the shrieks and cries of the com- 
batants breaking the silence of night, while the flashes 
lighted up. the darkness and revealed the hideous scene 
— w'e ran on in the same course as at first. The effect 
of the pirates’ practice with their guns soon began to 
tell on the stranger ; spar after spar was shot away, and 
her lofty canvas came dropping down in torn shreds on 
deck. The pirates shouted with satisfaction and tri- 
umph as each fresh shot told on their opponent. We, 
consequently, had to shorten sail, to keep abreast of her. 
Still, her shot sometimes searched out a pirate as he 


308 THE STRANGERS DESPERATE DEFENCE. 

labored at his gun, and several lay writhing in agony 
on the deck, while the voices of others were silenced for- 
ever. At last down came the fore-mast of the barque, 
followed by her main-top-mast. She was completely in 
the power of the pirates, for the schooner could sail 7 
round and round her, while her crew were unable to 
fight their guns, overwhelmed as they were with the 
wreck of the masts. The pirates cheered ferociously, 
and, keeping away, crossed the bows of the barque and 
fired a broadside right into them. Shrieks and cries 
arose from the deck of the stranger, but still no signal 
was made that she had given in. On the contrary, as 
soon as she could get the guns on the port side to bear, 
she began firing away again on us. We tacked, and 
once more stood towards her, so as to rake her as we 
passed under her stern. For a minute there was an 
entire cessation of firing; none of her guns could be 
brought to bear on us, and the pirates were reserving 
their fire to pour it into her with more deadly effect. 
Dim and indistinct, we could just make out her hull and 
shattered rigging amid the gloom ; and the pirates, 
believing that she would quickly be in their power, 
were calculating on the rich booty which would soon be 
theirs, when bright flames darted up from the midst of 
her — a roar like the loudest thunder deafened our ears, 
— up, up flew spars, and rigging, and human forms, and 
pieces of burning plank — illuminating the dark ocean " 
far and wide around; while the fire, which burned 
brightly, lighted up the countenances of the pirate's as 
they stood watching the catastrophe they had caused. 
Some gleamed with anger, others with disappointed 
avarice; some few looked horrified, and a few were 
pale with terror, lest the same fate were about to be 


INCLINATION OF THE CREW TO QUARREL. 309 

theirs. No attempt was made to save any of those 
who, escaping from the burning wreck, might be strug- 
gling in the waves., Jerry and I fancied that we could 
hear some shrieks and cries for help, but they were 
soon silenced, as the waters closed over the heads of 
those who were struggling, but struggling in vain. 
Uttering a fierce oath, Captain Bruno stamped on the 
deck, to give vent to his disappointment, and then 
ordering the helm once more to be put up, stood away 
on his course to the southward. Such are pirates, such 
they have always been, in spite of the veil of romance 
which has been thrown over their misdeeds. 

For some days the schooner stood on, happily meet- 
ing with no other vessel to plunder and destroy. We 
all the time were kept in anxious doubt as to what was 
to be our fate. We had another cause of anxiety, in 
observing that the crew w~ere inclined to quarrel with 
each other. The pause of this we could not understand, 
but the factf was very evident. A party seemed to be 
formed against the captain, and it appeared to us that 
Silva was at. the head of it. Of course this was only 
conjecture. He was certainly not on such good terms 
with the captain as he had been at first. He was not 
a man of a quarrelsome or ambitions disposition, and 
piobably some of the rest of the crew put him forward 
as their chief, knowing that he Would be the principal 
sufferer if their plans failed, and believing that they 
could easily get rid of him if at any time they found it 
convenient so to do. Now and then disputes arose to a 
high pitch. Knives would be drawn and pistols flashed. 
More than once matters were brought to extremities ; 
wounds were given and received, and blood was spilt 


310 


A PIRATE MURDERED. 


It had the effect of cooling their tempers for a mcment, 
but at the slightest provocation they again broke out. 

One day two men were talking together, apparently 
on very good terms. One of them we saw pull a dice- 
box out of his pocket, with several gold and silver 
coins; the other likewise produced his money. They 
began to play, — at first laughing in a friendly way at 
the various turns of their fortunes. Then the laughter 
ceased, and they grew more earnest and intent on the 
game. One looked very triumphant, as the gold lately 
owned by his antagonist began to swell his heap. At 
last the other had no money left. He produced a 
watch, a clasp-knife and several jewels, a golden cruci- 
fix (which he kissed before parting with), and a silver- 
mounted pistol. His teeth were firm set; his eyes 
began to roll. He played on. Again he lost ; but he 
had nothing wherewith to pay. He turned his pockets 
inside out. The winner seemed still to be insisting on 
payment. A deadly pallor came over the countenance 
of the loser. He sprang to his feet ; a sailor was pass- 
ing, with a long knife stuck in his red sash ; he snatched 
it from the mankind uttering an exclamation equiva- 
lent to “ Have at you, then ! take all I have to give ! ” 
plunged it up to .The hilt in the body of the winner, who 
fell to the deck without a groan. The action brought 
all those on deck around him. He insulted me,” he 
exclaimed ; ‘ “ he won all I had, and then asked for 
more.” The bystanders seemed to acquiesce in the 
justice and rightfulness of the action. They did not 
attempt to tduch the murderer, but they lifted up the 
body of the man he had wounded. He was already 
quite dead. None of the officers attempted to interfere. 


WE LONG TO ESCAPE. -811 

The murderer searched in the pockets of his victim for 
the money and jewels, and counting out the coin, took 
possession of what had been his own. Again with 
blasphemous mockery he kissed the cross, evidently 
believing that he was doing a righteous action, and 
then sat down on a gun with folded arms, as if he had 
been an unconcerned spectator of the scene which was 
enacting. The rest of the dead man’s property the 
pirates distributed among themselves, and then lifting 
the body to the side of the vessel, without an expres- 
sion of regret, threw it into the sea. 

The tragedy was over, but the countenance of the 
murdered man haunted us, while, his murderer con- 
tinued walking with an unconcerned look about the 
deck, as if his hands were perfectly innocent of 
blood. 

“Jerry,” said I, “the sooner we are out of this, 
though even On a desert island, the better.” 

“O yes, Harry, it is not safe to live with such 
wretches,” was the answer. 

It would be better' if men remembered at all times 
that it is not good to dwell with sinners. 


312 


OtJR PERILOUS VOYAGE. 




CHAPTER XV. 

1 

OUR PERILOUS VOYAGE. 

. ♦ ' > 



As we emerged from our cabin one morning we 
found that the schooner was standing toward what ap- 
peared to be a fleet of vessels at anchor. 

“ Why, we shall soon be among a whole squadron of 
buccaneers ! ” exdaimed Jerry in a tone of despair. 
We shall be separated, Harry — turned into cabin boys, 
and never 'have a chance of escape. 0 dear ! O dear ! 
My poor father ! — what will he do ? ” 

“Why, Jerry, I am not quite so certain that those 
are vessels,” I remarked; “just observe them atten- 
tively. Hillo ! they have disappeared ! Stay, we shall 
soon rise to the top of the swell again. There they 
are ! They are steady as church steeples. Those are 
not the masts of vessels. They are cocoa-nut and palm 
trees, depend on that. They are growing on one of 
those coral islands which abound in these latitudes. 
Watch again. On we go.” (Here I caught sight of 
the glittering, white, sandy beach.) “ How the surf 
breaks on the reef outside it ! How bright and clear it 
appears, rising out of the deep ocean ! How green the 
ground looks under those tall trees, and how intensely 
blue the lagoon in the centre ! It is a lovely-looking 
spot — quite a fairy land. I hope that we shall be put 
on shore there, though I would rather have a few ‘liilla 


I 


THE CORAL ISLAND. 


313 


and valleys to diversify the scene, if we are to remain 
there long.” 

While we were talking we were rapidly approaching 
the coral island. The doctor joined us, and was watch- 
ing it also. The schooner stood on, and we thought 
she was going to pass it. The doctor, though not less 
anxious to leave the vessel than we were, did not ap- 
pear to agree with our wish to be set on shore there 
(e It is dreadfully hot there, without shelter from sun or 
wind. There is also but little variety of food ; and, 
green as the ground looks from hence, we should find 
'nothing to be compared to a green lawn "when once 
we set foot on it,” he remarked. Still Jerry and I 
were ready enough to run the risk, hoping that, at all 
events, we might soon find the means of getting away. 
When, however, we had abandoned all hopes of land- 
ing there, the schooner was once more haule'd up close 
to the wind. We found that she had stood on to 
clear a reef. She stood in under the lee of the land, 
and hove to close to where an opening appeared in the 
reef. 

Our hearts beat quick, for now we felt certain that 
something or other was going to happen, though nobody 
had said any thing to us. It seemed strange , that we 
could have lived so long surrounded by our fellow- 
creatures, and yet so entirely alone. A boat was 
lowered. A cask of bread, and another of salted meat, 
and some hatchets, and a few old sails, and, indeed, 
more things than I can here enumerate, were put into 
her. The doctor was summoned into the captain’s 
cabin. He remained a short time, and when he re- 
appeared he looked happier than he had done for many 
days. Jerry and I were then ordered into the boat ; 

27 


314 


QUIT THE PIRATE SHIP. 


the doctor, to our great satisfaction followed. Ola 
Surley, as may be supposed, would not consent willingly 
to be left behind, and, watching his opportunity, he 
sprang in after us, and, as if he thought he might be 
carried back again if perceived, immediately hid him- 
self under the seats between our legs. We were de- 
lighted to have the old fellow, and trembled lest the 
pirates, among some of whom he was a favorite, might 
insist on keeping him. It was with great satisfaction, 
therefore, that we found the boat shoved off from the 
schooner’s side. 

Four of the pirates formed the crew of the boat, jmd 
taking the oars they pulled towards the shore. We did 
not leave the pirate ship with any regret, though few 
people w.ould desire to be landed on a desert island in 
the middle of the Pacific. Tom Congo, the black cook, 
was the only person who wished us good-by. He was 
evidently sorry to lose us. We had no means of show- 
ing our gratitude to him, except by a few hurried words. 
We saw his good-natured black visage grinning at us 
over the bulwarks, as we left the vessel’s side. Sud- 
denly he started back. There was some violent dis- 
turbance on deck. Shouts, and cries, and. pistol shots 
were heard. The outbreak we had anticipated was 
taking place. There was a mutiny. Some of the crew 
had risen against the captain ; there could be no doubt 
abouj; that. Some of the men in tifie boat wanted to go 
back to join in the fray, but an old man among them 
shook his head and said, “ No ! Let the fools fight it 
out. 'When we go back we shall know which side to 
join.” The rest saw the worldly wisdom of the advice, 
and calming down their eagerness, they pulled on to 
the shore. 


jerry’s unexpected bath. 315 

We quickly passed through the reef, and the boat 
grounded on the beach, which we found was composed 
of broken corals and shells, and rose some ten feet out 
of the water. Had it not been for the disturbance on 
board, the boat would probably have returned as soon 
as the stores intended for our use had been landed ; but, 
as an excuse for remaining, the crew offered to carry 
them up to any place we might select under the trees 
where to pitch a tent. We selected one to leeward of 
a heap of coral, where, several trees also growing close 
together*, some shelter might be obtained. Near it was 
a pure spring of water, bubbling up through the hard 
rock, and flowing into a basin some five feet in diam- 
eter, but of its depth we could not judge. The water 
w r as so clear that, as we looked 'into it, it appeared but 
a shallow pool. Jerry, being very thirsty, stooped down 
to drink from it, and, baring his arm, intended to rest 
his hand at the bottom to support himself while he 
stooped over. Down he went on his knees, but he got 
more water than he had bargained for. Suddenly over 
head and heels he went, and was floundering about in 
the pool, which must have been nearly three feet deep. 
Sad as was our condition, the doctor and I could, mot 
help laughing heartily at his surprised countenance as he 
popped his head up again after his summerset, and we 
assisted to haul him out. Even the* saturnine- pirates 
joined in the laugh. As the sun was very hot, his 
clothes quickly again dried, and he was in no way the 
worse for his ducking. 

Surley had not mended matters by jumping into the 
pool and swimming about in its cool waters. As soon 
as he was out, off he set scampering about the island, 
scaring the wild fowl, whisking his tail, and barking 


316 


KINDNESS OF TIIE PIRATES. 


with delight at finding himself free after his long im« 
prisonment on board ship. I felt Very much inclined 
to follow his example, and to run about after him shout- 
ing at the top of my voice. I restrained myself, how- 
ever, as the state of affairs was too serious to allow me 
to indulge in any such exuberance of spirits. 

We thanked the pirates with as good a grace as we 
could command, for helping us to carry up the Stores. 
u Oh, no need of thanks, mates,” was the answer. “ You 
won’t find it very pleasant here, perhaps ; but there’s 
many an honest fellow worse off than you are, and 
there are not many who come aboard us who get away 
as well as you have done.” We had too much reason 
to believe this assertion true to hazard a reply. Per- 
haps Jerry’s tumble into the water had put them in 
good humor ; but whatever was the cause, they seemed 
inclined to help us, and volunteered to assist in cutting 
down some frees to build our hut, which the canvas 
would make tolerably comfortable. While so employed, 
however, they kept looking up constantly towards the 
schooner. 

“ I say, Tom, don’t you think that there is a chapce 
of her making sail, and leaving us here ? ” observed one 
of them to the old pirate, Tom Roguish. 

“ No fear of that, mate,” answered old Tom, shaking 
his head. They know our value too well to do that. 
I’ve watched what has been going on for some time, 
and it’s my belief Silva’s party will find that they have - 
made a mistake. The captain has been too wide awake 
to be taken by surprise, depend on that.” 

“ Hillo ! what are they about now ? ” exclaimed 
another of the men. The schooner, which had stood 
still closer in towards the shore, had lowered another 


REAPPEARANCE OF MR. BRAND AND TOOL. 317 


boat, at the same time firing a gun as a signal to recall 
the one which had brought us. We all ran down a3 
fast as we could to the spot nearest to her, and we 
could see that several persons were being lowered into 
the boat. 

“Well, good-by, mates, a pleasant residence to you,” 
exclaimed old Tom, insisting on shaking hands with us ; 
and then he and his companions stepped into the boat 
and shoved s off from the shore. We were not sorry, 
however, to see their no very pleasant visages grow 
less and less distinct, till they were lost in the distance. 
They/ stopped rowing as they passed the other boat, and 
exchanging a few words, again pulled on. We, anxiously 
watched the approach of the other boat, to ascertain 
who she contained. One of the chief mates was steer- 
ing. Silva also, to our surprise, was in the boat. His 
head was bent down, and, from his attitude, it appeared 
as if his hands were lashed behind him. But there 
/ were two other people. We looked and looked again. 
“Why,” exclaimed Jerry, in a joyful tone, “its Mr. 
Brand, and no other than Ben Yool ! How fortunate ! 
Now we shall go all right.” I at the same time, with 
no less surprise and satisfaction, recognized my kind 
cousin and old Ben. Mr. M’ Ritchie did not appear to 
be as surprised as we were. He all th$ time, we 
found, had known that they were on board, but had 
been directed not to mention it to us. He tcld us that, 
as far as he could make- out, Silva had been the means 
of saving the lives of Cousin Silas and Ben, as he had 
saved ours, but that the pirates had kept them below, that 
they might not discover whereabout they were landed ; 
and, for the sapae reason, had prevented them communi- 
cating with us. Silva had another reason also for con- 
27 * i 


318 


SILYA MAROONED. 


Benting to this arrangement, for he was afraid that their 
appearance might excite the anger of the pirates, and 
that they might perhaps throw us all overboard together. 
Indeed, it was owing to a happy combination of circum- 
stances that our lives had been spared by that gang of 
blood-thirsty and cruel desperadoes. Even now, we 
were not quite certain that they might not take it into 
their heads to shoot us all, and w r e longed to see them 
making sail and clear away. The provisions, however, 
they had left with us, showed that the intentions of some 
of them had been kinder than the conduct of the crew 
in general would have led us to expect. 

The second boat now reached the beach. Silva was 
assisted out, apparently suffering much pain, and then 
Cousin Silas and Ben followed with their limbs at lib- 
erty. We ran forward to welcome them, which we did 
most warmly, while they seemed very well pleased to 
meet us. Poor Silva was left, wounded as he was, stand- 
ing on the beach. Some more casks and several other 
things were landed from the boat, 'and then the crew, 
without addressing a word to. any of us, shoved off as 
fast as they could, and pulled back to the schooner. 

As soon as the pirates were gone; we went up to Silva 
and asked him what had occurred. His rage and indig- 
nation, added to the pain he was suffering, almost pre- 
vented him from speaking. “ Partly because I did not 
ike to see so much blood shed, and partly because the 
captain was jealous of me. he had, I discovered, resolved 
o get yid of me,” he replied, stamping on the ground. 

I, however, was always on my guard. Many of the 
people liked me and trusted me, and I got information 
of all he intended to do.' He, however, it seems, had 
his spies, who got into the confidence of some of my peo< 


THE DOCTOR DRESSES SILVA’S WOUNDS. 319 


pie, and the captain saw that we were very likely to be- 
come the strongest party. Some of his allies took the 
occasion of your being put on shore to accuse me of hav- 
ing favored you for my own ends. Words quickly led 
to blows. My friends rallied round me, but some of 
those I could best trust were sent away in the boat with 
you. The captain’s party made a rush forward, and, 
wounded and bleeding, I was seized. They would have 
killed me at once, but my friends declared that if I was 
hurt they would blpw up the vessel and all hands together. 
I doubt if they would have kept their word. However, 
the captain agreed to spare my life, and to put me on 
shore with you, if they would not create any further dis- 
turbance. This “they very quickly agreed to, the cow- 
ards, and so here am I, lately as free and independent 
as any of them, left to share the fate of those whose lives 
they considered it a great favor to have spared.” 

“ Well, Silva, we will try and make you as comfort- 
able as we can,” said Cousin Silas, taking his arm. “ We 
have a doctor to tend you, which you would not have 
had on board ; and as we feel fully that through your 
influence our lives have been preserved, we will do our 
best to show our gratitude. Cousin, Silas said this as 
we were showing the path up to the spot where we had 
commenced our hut. 

- In one corner we quickly made a bed of leaves and 
dry grass. Over this we spread a piece of canvas, and 
thus -constructed a very good bed, on which we placed 
Silva. Dr. M‘Ritchie having examined his wounds, 
washed them and bound them up ; but he observed that 
he considered his case somewhat serious. As soon as 
this was done, we set to work to cut down some more 
trees, so as to increase the dimensions of onr habitation, 


820 


WE BUILD A HUT. 


We were employed for two entire days in building oc? 
hut, for we agreed that, as we might have to remain a 
considerable time on the island, and as probably heavy 
gales -might at times prevail, it would be wise to con- 
struct 'a habitation which could not easily be blown 
down. To do this, to every upright post we put another 
at a considerable angle, and then secured our canvas 
tightly down to it. We also beat heavy lumps of coral 
tight down round the thick ends of the posts, so that it 
was scarcely possible for the wind to drag them out of 
their holes. We had been considerately supplied by 
Silva with a saw, and hammer, and nails, and mother car- 
penter’s tools ; and he now most unexpectedly benefited 
by his kindness to us, as we were able to put a comfort- 
able shelter over his head much more rapidly than we 
could otherwise have done. I need scarcely say that 
Cousin Silas .took the lead in every thing. Indeed, I 
suspect, without him We should have managed but badly. 
Whenever our spirits flagged, he restored them by his 
resignation and cheerfulness, and he reminded us that 
although we might think our fate a hard one, we should 
be most thankful .that we had escaped with our lives 
from the hands of such blood-thirsty miscreants as Bruno 
and his associates. 

So busy were we at first, that it was some time be- 
fore we had an opportunity of inquiring how it was that 
the pirates had not murdered him and Ben, when they 
pulled alongside the schooner. “I believe that they 
were so astonished at seeing two strangers on their.deck, 
not knowing where we had come from, that it did not 
occur to them to heave us overboard again. This gave 
time to Silva, who at once recognized us, to form a 
scheme for saving our lives. Going up to us, he wel- 


MU. brand’s account of his escape. 321 

corned us as old comrades, hinting that we had some 
mysterious powers which enabled us to go about over 
the ocean wherever we liked, seated on our cloaks, 01 
in cocoa-nut shells, for aught I know. The pirates, on 
hearing this, received us in a very friendly way, and all 
of them swore that no harm should happen to us. How- 
ever, when we were required to take the oaths of the 
fraternity, and steadily refused, some of them began to 
suspect that Silva had been deceiving them. Our punt 
alongside showed that at all events we had not come on 
our cloaks. However, as they had sworn no harm 
should come to us, they kept their word, with the inten- 
tion of landing us, as they have done, on this or some 
other uninhabited island. After Silva had lost his au- 
thority, I suspect that our treatment would have been 
very different to what we found it at first.” 

“ Well, Mr. Brand, we are so very glad that you and 
Ben have escaped. What should we have done with- 
out you ? ” exclaimed Jerry. 

I could do no more than take his hand and wring it 
warmly. 

“ Now, tell us, what do you think we ought to do 
next ? ” added Jerry. 

“Make ourselves as happy as we can, and collect 
every thing which will serve us as food, in case we have 
to make a long sojourn here, which it is, I think, very 
probable we shall have to do,” replied Mr. Brand. “ A 
ship may come off here in a few days or weeks, but we 
must remember that perhaps months or years may pass 
before one is seen. I cannot say whereabouts we are, 
hut I suspect that the pirates would not have left us in 
the usual track of vessels coming north round Cape 
Horn, or going east or west. The next thing we have 


322 


ERECT A FLAG-STAFF. 


to do is to strip the branches off the tallest palm on the 
island, and make it serve as a flag-staff. We’ll then 
make as large a flag as we can of our handkerchiefs 
and shirts, and any stuff which will be light enough to 
fly well.” 

We very soon carried out this project, and all of us 
working away to join our handkerchiefs, we had by the 
next afternoon a big flag flying from what we called 
our mast-head. 

“ Why, we shall turn into regular Robinson Crusoes 
if we stay here as long as you were saying we might 
have to do, Mr. Brand,” observed Jerry, as we were 
working away at our flag-staff. “ I cannot say, how- 
ever, that I like the look of this island as much as I did 
that of Juan Fernandez. If we had our choice, we 
would rather be there, I should think.” 

“Very likely, but as you see, Jerry, we have not our 
choice, we must make up our minds to be content where 
we are,” answered Mr. Brand cheerfully. “ Probably, 
if we were at Juan Fernandez, supposing it still unin- 
habited, we should be wishing to be on the main-land. 
Let us strive, therefore, wherever we are, or whatever 
happens to us, to be content. Depend on it, we were 
not placed here by our merciful and all-loving Maker 
without an object, though we may never discover it. 
I do not for a moment mean to say that we are to sit 
down idly and not to endeavor to improve our condition. 
We are sent into this world to struggle — that we may 
in a variety of ways be tried — that all our trials may 
tend to our improvement. What I wish to impress on 
you, my lads, is, that we should be contented in every 
condition in which we are placed ; we should be thank- 
ful for every step we gain, while our chief aim in life is 


MB. BRAND’S WISE ADYICE. 


323 


our religious and moral improvement. But remember 
above all things, that we must always look beyond this 
world. This is not our abiding-place — this is not even 
our resting-place — there is no rest here. If we only 
strive ff>r something in this world — however noble, 
however great the position — -we shall altogether fall 
short, very short of the aim, the object of life.” 

Mr. Brand warmed with his subject, and much more 
he said of a similar nature which I will not now repeat. 
Jerry and I listened very attentively, and old Ben Yool 
tried also to take in what he was saying. I think he 
succeeded, and, certainly, on all occasions after that he 
bore without a grumble all the hardships to which we 
were exposed. Poor Silva lay on his bed all this time 
suffering much from his wounds, while Mr. M‘Ritchie, 
when he could leave his side, went off with his gun to 
explore the island, and to search for specimens of its 
natural history. There was, however, a good deal to 
be done before we could accompany him. First, we 
had to finish our house, and then to store within it all 
the provisions and articles which the pirates had left 
with us. The doctor had kept his gun, and we had 
ours, which had been brought from the Dove , given to 
us as we left the schooner. These fire-arms would have 
been of no use to us had not Silva given us a keg of 
powder and a bag of shot. These treasures we resolved 
to husband with great care, as we knew that we might be 
placed in positions in which uur very existence would 
depend on our having the means of killing game, or of 
defending ourselves against enemies. 

“ Before we do any thing else we should take an 
inventory of all we have,” answered Mr. Brand “We 
must calculate how long lur provisions will hold out, 


324 


TAKE ACCOUNT OP OUR STORES. 


in the first place, and not imitate the example of many 
savages who eat up all they have got and then starve.” 

This advice was followed. We found that we had 
provisions for four or five months ; but we hoped to 
make them last a much longer time, if necessary, by 
eating the birds which swarmed on the island. There 
were cocoa-nuts and some other fruits, and we hoped 
also to catch an abundance of fish which are generally 
to be found about the reefs surrounding coral islands in 
the Pacific. Our labors being concluded, we all sat 
down together on the beach below our habitation, to 
talk over our prospects. Happy, indeed, was it for us 
all that we had a man like Cousin Silas among us, to 
give us his advice, and to set us an example of patience 
and hope, and faith in God’s merciful providence, and 
a cheerfulness which nothing could overcloud. "Really, 
after talking with him for some time, I often felt that 
our lot was rather to be envied than dreaded, and' that 
we were only doomed to undergo a somewhat prolonged 
pic-nic. This example and conversation had ultimately 
a great influence with the doctor, who had been inclined 
to repine and to become morose, looking with gloomy 
apprehension as to the future. 

A week passed by, and we found ourselves perfectly 
settled in our new home. Silva was gaining strength 
and his wounds were healing, and we were all in excel- 
lent health. The doctor also had almost recovered his 
spirits. We began now to take a more extended survey 
of our island. We calculated that it was from ten to 
fifteen miles from one end to the other, or rather right 
across ; and as it was nearly circular, with a large la- 
goon in the centre, we had to walk from thirty to forty 
miles to go round it. It was about a mile across in 


THE BIRDS OF OUR ISLAND. 


325 


most places. The beach was formed of broken coral 
and shells, while the upper portion of the land consisted 
of the debris of coral, the dung of birds, and vegetable 
earth. Out of this composition grew tall cocoa-nut 
trees, and palms, and pandanus trees, besides a variety 
of shrubs. 

The birds had been partially driven away from the 
spot where we landed and had been working, but we 
found them in prodigious numbers a little way on. 
Cousin Silas insisted on our tying up old Surley, to 
prevent the unnecessary destruction which he dealt 
among them. Before committing any great slaughter 
among them, Cousin Silas advised us to kill only a few 
of each description, to ascertain w r hich were the most 
palatable for present consumption, and which w r ere 
likely to preserve best for future store. Sitting on 
nests roughly constructed of sticks among the shrubs, 
were a number of frigate birds (the Tachypetes Aquila). 
He is a magnificent fellow, allied in some respects to 
the cormorant, but with shorter legs and having a 
forked tail. His plumage is a rich empurpled black, 
and the beak, both mandibles of which are curved at 
the tips, is red. His wings are of immense length, and 
his power of flight is wonderful. He can fish perfectly 
well for himself, but he is a most irreclaimable pirate, 
and likes to watch till other birds have seized their prey, 
and then he drops down upon them and carries it away. 
Sailors also call them men-of-war birds, but I think they 
ought to be called pirates. We looked into their nests, 
and found only one egg in each. 

While sitting down taking our luncheon, we observed 
a snake crawling along out of the grass, and wriggling 
his way towards the sea. For what he went there I 
28 


i 


326 


THE FRIGATE BIRD AND ITS PREY. 


do not know. He had better have kept away. Just 
as he got below high-water mark, out darted from the 
crevice of a rock a huge crab, and seized him by the 
nape of the neck. The snake wriggled, and twisted, 
and tried to free himself in vain. Mr. Crab held tight 
hold of him, and seemed resolved to eat him up. Poor 
snakie tried to get his tail round a bit of rock, to keep 
himself out of the water; but crabbie pulled and 
hauled, and, in spite of all resistance, got him down to 
the very edge of the water, knowing that when once 
under it his struggles would very soon cease. Crabs 
have, however, to learn the lesson that there is many a 
slip between the catch and the feast. A frigate bird 
had from afar espied the combat, and, flying like a flash 
of lightning, downward he darted and seized the snake 
by the back. The voracious crab held on, not liking to 
lose his prey, till he found himself borne upwards from 
the ground, and in unpleasant propinquity to the frigate 
bird’s sharp beak. He must have felt that if he did 
not let go at once, he would be dashed to pieces ; still, 
as a miser clutches his bags of gold, did Mr. Crab the 
snake. Fortunately for him, the frigate bird had flown 
seaward, so that when he did let go he fell into the 
water, and, probably, however his temper might have 
suffered, he was not much the worse for the ducking. 
Had he fallen on the rock, he would inevitably have 
had his shell broken, and would himself have become 
the prey of the pirate. 

There were also sooty terns and gannets. It was 
interesting to watch the careful way in which the latter 
guarded their eggs, placed in holes on the ground. 
Wishing to make their offspring hardy, they do not 
build nests for them, I suppose; or, perhaps, the 
warmth of the rock assists the process of incubation. 


TROPIC BIRDS. 


327 


There were probably a greater number of tropic birds 
than of any others. They would not get out of our 
way as we walked along, allowing us to shove them 
over rather than move. We literally also took their 
eggs from under them, without their attempting to 
make any defence. This apathy, as we called it, we 
thought arose from stupidity, but the doctor examined 
one of them, and showed us how weak its legs were, 
while its feet were adapted only for swimming. Its 
wings, however, were very long and powerful. There- 
fore, had it been up in the air, or skimming along over 
the summit of the waves, it would probably have acted 
in a very different way. “ Never judge of people till 
you know the sphere of life in which they have been 
accustomed to move,” remarked the doctor. “ A really 
sensible, clever man, may appear very stupid and dull, 
just as these poor birds do, simply because he is out of 
his element.” 

The tropic bird is a species of gull, about 'the size of 
a partridge. It has a red bill and legs.. The feathers 
are white tipped with black, and the back is variegated 
with curved lines of black. The tail consists of two 
long, straight, narrow feathers, almost of equal breadth 
during their whole length. Their flight is most grace- 
ful, — they glide along with scarcely any perceptible 
motion of the wing. They return every night to roost 
on land. They live entirely on fish. The natives of 
the South Sea islands ornament their persons with their 
feathers. 

We saw a number of snakes, but none of them at- 
tempted to bite us ; and the doctor said from their 
appearance that he did not believe them to be of a 
venomous character. Whenever we went near the 


328 


SOLDIER CRABS. 


water among the rocks, we saw large fish darting about, 
of every color and shape ; huge, long eels, gliding in 
and out between the rocks, and fierce, voracious sharks 
pursuing their prey. 

There were a great variety of mollusks, indeed the 
whole shore was composed of shells. We naturally 
thought that the shells were empty ; but as we watched 
them, thousands of them began to move, each tenanted 
by a soldier crab, and a whole army of them slowly 
advanced out of the sea and marched across the land, 
devouring all the insects they encountered in their pro- 
gress. Now and then two of them would stop and have 
a fight over a beetle or a spider, when perhaps a third 
would step up and carry off the cause of dispute. We 
found the spiders’ webs stretching in every direction 
between the bushes. The spiders themselves were 
great, ugly, black fellows, very disagreeable to look at, 
and still more unpleasant when we found them crawl- 
ing over our faces. 

I wish that I could describe the variety of shrubs we 
found on the island. Many were evergreens. One, 
which the doctor called the suriana, emitted a peculiarly 
strong, though not unpleasant odor. We used to be 
very glad, when the rays of the sun came down fiercely 
on our heads, to take shelter under these trees, and to 
rest during our long journeys from one end of our 
dominion to the other. 

We in a short time were acquainted with nearly 
every portion of the island. Our habitation was about 
ten miles from the entrance to the lagoon, so that in 
one direction we were able to travel twenty miles, when 
we arrived at the termination of that part of the circle ; 
and by going the other way, ten miles brought us to the 


PREPARE TO SWIM ACROSS THE LAGOON. 329 

end of the other. The passage into the lagoon was 
probably the eighth of a mile broad. 

One day Jerry and I set off, he taking the shorter 
distance and I the long way, that we might have the 
pleasure of looking at each other across the passage. I 
do not know that we had any better reason. Accom- 
panied by old Surley, I set oif by daybreak, as over 
such rough ground it was difficult to make good more 
than two miles an hour. It was therefore the evening 
when I got there. I looked eagerly across the channel. 
There stood Jerry, shouting and beckoning to me. 1 
shouted to him, and made all sorts of signals expressive 
of my delight at seeing him. 

After we had played these sorts of antics for some 
time, I began to consider that it would be rather tire- 
some to have to walk all the way back by myself, and 
that either I must go across to Jerry, or get him to 
come over to me. I was the best swimmer, so I re- 
solved to go over to him. I made signs that I would 
do so, and he signified that he was very glad to hear- it. 
Old Surley seemed as pleased as I was at seeing Jerry, 
and leaped and bounded about, barking every now and 
then, after his own fashion, to show his satisfaction. 
Two or three times he ran down to the water, as if he 
intended to plunge in and to swim across ; and each 
time he came back whining and looking up in my face, 
as if he had thought it would be wiser not to venture 
in. I had good reason afterwards to admire the reason 
which prompted him to refrain from doing what he 
evidently wished to do. 

I had my gun with me, as well as some provisions, 
which, of course, I did not wish to wet ; and so I had 
to consider how I could get them over dry. A raft 
28 =* 


330 


CATCH SIGHT OF A SHARK. 


was the only means, but I reflected that it might prove 
somewhat difficult to tow. Still, I did not like to be 
beat, so I made signs to Jerry what I was going to do. 
With a hatchet which I carried in my belt, and with 
which I had provided myself to make an arbor for the 
night, I soon cut down wood enough to form a raft 
which would carry all my things, including my clothes ; 
and I had a line in my pocket strong enough to tow it 
along. 

All was ready ; I launched my raft, and was loading 
it with my property, when my eye caught sight of a 
shoal of fish darting up through the passage, followed 
by a black, triangular fin, which I quickly recognized 
as that of a huge shark. I saw the horrid monster 
overtake and gobble up some of the fugitives, and then 
quietly come back, as it appeared, to swim sentry at the 
entrance of the lagoon. Perhaps he knew that the fish 
would make an attempt to get out again the same way. 
Be that as it may, I felt no inclination to encounter the 
gentleman. 

When Jerry at length discovered the cause of my 
hesitation, he made signs entreating me to go back 
rather than to endeavor to cross, as I proposed. Still, 
I did not like to be driven back, even by a shark. I 
made signs that I would make a raft for myself. There 
were plenty of materials. The work would not take 
long, and it would be a triumph to have overcome a dif- 
ficulty. I thought the idea a very bright one, so I at 
once set to work to build a raft large enough to carry 
me across the channel. Jerry tried to make me under- 
stand something or other, but I was so absorbed with 
my own idea, and the work on which I was engaged, 
that I could not make out the meaning he wished to 


MAKE A RAFT TO CROSS ON IT. 


331 


convey. While I was working, old Surley looked on 
very attentively, as if he wanted to help me and fully 
understood what I was about. 

I had built the raft close down to the water, but even 
so, I had considerable difficulty in getting it afloat. I 
succeeded, however, in so doing at last, by means of a 
long piece of wood, which served me as a liandspike. 
Just as I was going to step on it, I fortunately saw the 
branch of a tree floating by out to sea, at a rate which 
showed me that I might very possibly be carried away 
by the current before I could get across I therefore 
converted my neck-cloth and pocket-handkerchief into 
a tow-rope, and towed the raft inside the lagoon. I 
had made myself two strong paddles — ■ one to serve in 
case the other should break. At last I reached a point 
where I thought I might embark with safety. Surley, 
who had before hesitated, now came and placed himself 
by me. I had put on my shirt again, but the rest of 
my things were on the small raft. 1 gave my raft a 
desperate shove, and away I went, paddling as hard as 
I could up the lagoon. 

I thought that I had gone far enough, and was in 
a hurry to get across, so I began to direct my course 
athwart the current. At first I made great progress, 
and laughed and shouted at the idea of thus easily accom- 
plishing my undertaking. When, however, I turned 
my head over my shoulder, I found to my dismay that 
1 had not got so lar from the shore whence I started as 
I had fancied, while I was still a long way from that on 
which Jerry stood, eager to welcome me. I plied my 
paddle with all my might, but I appeared to make very 
little progress, and the current was evidently carrying 
me rapidly down the passage. I looked seaward. I 


832 


CARRIED AWAY BY THE CURRENT. 


had ample cause for anxiety, if not for dismay. A long 
line of huge breakers was rolling in on an outer reef, 
while the . passage between them was so narrow, that I 
scarcely hoped that the raft could ,be carried through it. 
And if it was, where was I to go? Out to sea, to be 
starved to death ! If, on the other hand, I was thrown 
among tne breakers, I felt certain that I should soon 
become the prey of the hungry shark I had just seen 
swimming after the shoal of fish. These reflections 
gave strength to my arm, and made me paddle away 
even faster than before. 

Jerry full well understood my danger, and I saw him 
wringing his hands in his anxiety. Yet he saw that he 
could do nothing to help me. I felt that I had been 
very foolish, and the poignancy of my regret was 
heightened when I remembered that I had placed my- 
self in my present predicament without any necessity, 
or an adequate object. I had little time, I own, to 
indulge in such reflections, for all my thoughts and feel- 
ings were soon engrossed with the danger which imme- 
diately threatened me. Jerry ran along the shore as I 
was carried by, in vain stretching out his arms as if he 
would help me. Old Surley sat still, only now and then 
uttering a low whine, as if well aware of our peril, but 
feeling that he was unable to render me aid. Now and 
then he looked into the water, as if he would like to 
swim ashore, which he might possibly have done ; but 
then, perhaps, he remembered the shark he had seen, 
or he was unwilling to desert me. I truly believe that 
it was the latter cause made him remain so quiet by my 
side. I am certain, from the expression of his counte- 
nance and the turn of his head, that he was fully aware 
of our danger. 


EFFORTS TO SAVE MYSELF. 


333 


I paddled and paddled away with all my might, all 
the time facing the shore, and getting nearer to it, but 
at the same time gliding down seaward. I was about 
a hundred yards from the shore. I looked towards the 
angry breakers, and was not more than twice that dis- 
tance from the mouth of the channel. In a small boat 
there wou’d have been no danger, but I found my raft 
a very heavy thing to move. I put still greater force 
into my strokes. My paddle snapped in two. Jerry 
uttered a cry of despair, for he thought I must now 
inevitably be lost. I seized the spare paddle, and 
flourishing it above my head, began to ply it as I had 
done the first. I made some progress, but not suffi- 
cient, I feared, to attain my object. I was approaching 
the last point. Jerry ran out to the end of it, and 
rushed into the water up to his arm-pits, hoping to stop 
the raft. I shouted to him to go back, for at that 
moment I saw close to me the fin of a monster shark. 
The savage fish darted on towards him, and he was 
barely in time to escape his ravenous jaws by springing 
into shallow water. Had he caught hold of the raft, I 
saw that he would be lifted off his legs, and carried 
away with me. Still I hoped to get within his reach 
where he stood. But vain was the wish. I drifted past 
the point. What hope had I now of being preserved ? 
I felt inclined to throw away my paddle, and to give 
myself up to despair. But I aroused myself. I be- 
thought me how Cousin Silas would have behaved 
under similar circumstances. I prayed for strength 
and courage to Him who is alone able to give them to 
those in deep distress. He heard me, or I should not 
be alive to tell my tale. Again I seized my paddle, 
and plied it with all my might. Still I drifted towards 


304 


REACH THE SHORE. 


the roaring breakers. I vividly pictured the horrid 
fate which awaited me. I scarcely dared look sea- 
ward. I kept my eye on the shore, paddling without 
intermission. Suddenly I felt the raft arrested in its 
progress towards the breakers. It was partly whirled 
round, and I found it gliding parallel with the shore. 
This encouraged me — hope once more revived. I 
directed the raft towards the shore. I saw Jerry wav- 
ing his hands with joy. He was answered by a cheerful 
bark from old Surley. I got nearer and nearer. Oh, 
how thankful I felt when I found the blade of my 
paddle grasped by Jerry, and was towed by him safely 
to the shore ! Old Surley sprang off on to dry ground, 
and began leaping up and licking Jerry’s cheeks and 
hands, to show his gratitude. Jerry and I hauled up 
the raft, with its little tender, and landed my things ; 
and then, overcome with fatigue and the revulsion of 
feeling which I experienced, I fainted. I very soon, 
however, recovered, and kneeling down, joined by Jerry 
I returned my heartfelt thanks to Him whose arm I 
knew, most certainly, had saved me. Afterwards I 
dressed, and sitting down, we made a supper from some 
of the provisions we had brought with us. 

We had lost so much time that it was impossible to 
get back to our companions that night, so we set to 
work to prepare a hut and bed for ourselves before we 
were overtaken by the darkness, which comes on so 
rapidly in those latitudes. We were not long in con- 
structing a bower, and in raising a platform, under and 
on which we might sleep secure from the attacks of the 
snakes, and other crawling things which abounded ; but 
night came down on us before our work was quite com- 
pleted. However, free from all fear of savages or wild 
beasts, we lay down, and were soon asleep. 


OUR RESIDENCE ON THE ISLAND. 


886 


CHAPTER XVI. 

OUR RESIDENCE ON THE ISLAND. 

Our journey back appeared very long, for I was 
weak and tired, and, from the exertion I had undergone, 
every muscle in my body ached. We met Cousin Silas 
coming to look for us ; for he had become anxious at 
not seeing Jerry return at all events, and feared some- 
thing might have happened to us. Ben Yool had set 
off in the other direction, to search for me. Therefore, 
instead of gaining a great deal of credit, as we expected, 
by the feat we had accomplished, we found that we had 
caused our friends no little trouble and anxiety. It was 
a lesson to me ever afterwards not to attempt to perform 
any useless undertaking simply because it might be 
difficult or dangerous. Many people have lost their 
lives by such folly. 

Silva had by this time completely recovered his 
health, but his spirits were very uncertain. Sometimes 
he would sit for hours brooding over his past life, and 
the treatment he had received from his companions ; 
then he would start up and walk about the beach, 
waving his arms, and calling down imprecations on 
their heads. At other times he was very quiet and 
sociable, and would talk rationally on any subject un- 
der discussion. 

The lagoon swarmed with fish ; but though very beau 


836 


SILVA MAKES FISH-HOOKS. 


tiful in appearance, our difficulty was to catch them. 
We could manage to make some coarse lines out of 
some rope yarns which had been thrown into the boat 
with the canvas ; we could cut rods from the younger 
trees which grew around ; and there were plenty of 
projecting masses of rock on which we might sit and 
angle ; but a very important portion of our gear was 
wanting — we had no fishing-hooks. 

“Has any one a file?” asked Silva. We all exam- 
ined our knives. I had one in my knife handle, but it 
was broken, and I had neglected to get the blacksmith 
to put a new one in its place. We hunted eagerly in 
our box of tools. Nothing like a file could we -dis- 
cover. 

“What is this?” exclaimed Jerry, pulling out a bag 
of nails from the bottom of a cask. “ Here is some- 
thing larger than a nail inside.” It proved to be part 
of a file. 

“ There is enough here to file through an iron bar, if 
properly used,” said Silva, examining it. “ Hand me 
the nails — I will see what I can do.” Seating himself 
under the shade of a cocoa-nut tree near the' hut, he 
began working away most assiduously. With a pair of 
pincers he twisted the nail into the shape of a hook, 
and very soon filed out a barb, and spme notches in the 
shank with which to secure the line. In the course of 
two or three hours he had produced a dozen capital 
hooks. “ Now we may go fishing,” said he. “We may 
catch as many fish as we can want, but we should be the 
better for a canoe.” 

“ Or a raft, eh, Harry ? Should you like to try an- 
other cruise on one?” asked Jerry. 

I shuddered at the thought of the danger from which 


jerry’s escape. 


337 


I liad been preserved. However, as we all felt that 
our health would benefit by some fish diet, we soon had 
our gear fitted, and all hands, including the doctor, 
might be seen perched, like so many cormorants, at the 
end of all the projecting points in the neighborhood 
Jerry and I were near each other. The rest of the 
party were pulling in fish pretty quickly, and we had 
caught several very beautiful-looking fellows, a specie? 
of rock fish, when Jerry sang out that he had got a bite 
of some big fish, and called to me to help him. Leav- 
ing my own rod, I ran round towards him. 

“ Quick, quick, Harry ! ” he sung out, holding on by 
his rod with all his might ; “ I shall be in ! I shall be 
in ! ” Still he would not let go his stick. 

I sprang forward, and was just in time to seize him 
by the leg, when over he went splash into the sea. At 
the same instant I caught sight of the malign counte- 
nance of a huge shark, which had undoubtedly caught 
the fish he had at first hooded. I exerted all my 
strength to haul him in ; for the monster, instead t>f 
being intimidated by the splash, made a dash forward 
for the purpose of grabbing him. I almost shrieked 
with horror as I beheld the savage fish ; but Jerry had 
just time, as I drew him up by the legs, to put his 
hand on a point of coral, and to throw back his head, 
though the shark’s snout almost touched his nose as he 
did so. 

“ Not a pleasant fellow to get ar kiss from,” exclaimed 
Jerry, as he scrambled up the rock and shook off the 
water from his clothes. Then he added, in a more seri- 
ous tone, “ O Harry, what an ungrateful wretch I am 
to be joking at such a moment, before I have expressed 


338 


WE BUILD CANOES. 


my gratitude to God who has preserved me, or thanked 
you for coming to my assistance ! ” 

While on the island we had had more time than 
usual for reflection, and had profited also by the exam- 
ple and exhortations of Cousin Silas, so that we were 
both happily becoming much more serious and thought- 
ful than heretofore. Indeed, I have learned that what 
we consider misfortunes, if seen in their proper light, 
may become the cause of the greatest blessings. 

Ben Yool had seen the accident from a distance, and 
now came hurrying up to us. He was inclined to scold 
Jerry for the fright he had given him. I believe truly 
that the old man loved us as much as if we had been 
his own sons, and would have been miserable had any 
accident happened to either of us. 

On examining the fish we had caught, we found that 
although very beautiful in appearance, few of them 
were likely to prove palatable to the taste. Some, Silva 
thought, were altogether poisonous ; and those we 
cooked had very little flavor. 

“ If we had but a canoe we might go off into deeper 
water, and then we might catch a greater variety, and 
many fish very fit for food,” he remarked, eyeing as he 
spoke several trees which, he said, would make good 
canoes. One or more canoes we accordingly resolved 
to have ; so at once we set to work to cut down a couple 
of trees. That operation our axes quickly accomplished. 
It did not take us long to fashion the outside. To 
scoop out the inside was more difficult. Our axes did 
the rougher portion, and then we heated stones and bits 
of iron, and burned out the remainder, scraping off the 
black part with our knives. In about a week we had a 


NATURAL HISTORY OP OUR ISLAND. 


339 


couple of small canoes completed, with seats across, and 
with three paddles in each. Silva took charge of one, 
Cousin Silas of the other. The doctor and I went 
with him, while Ben and Jerry accompanied Silva. 

With no little satisfaction we launched our fleet into 
the lagoon. Both canoes swam very well, and off we 
paddled with great delight across the lagoon. How 
bright and clear were its waters ! It was almost impos- 
sible to estimate their depth, we could so completely see 
down to the bottom. After pulling some time, we 
rested on our oars. As we looked over the side, how 
beautiful was the sight which met our view ! It was 
like a fairy land. Coral rocks of the most fantastic 
shapes sprang up around. Caverns, and arches, and 
columns, and pinnacles appeared. Gorgeous and va- 
ried were the hues. There were white, and blue, and 
yellow corallines. Among them grew marine vegeta^ 
bles of every description. Here the delicate sea-green 
stem of the fucas twisted round a rock ; and near it the 
ocean fan expanded its broad leaves. Every point was 
occupied by some feathery tuft of lovely tints, while 
from each cleft projected the feelers of some sea-anem- 
one or zoophyte. Among the heights of the submarine 
landscape moved thousands of living beings to which 
the doctor gave some learned names which I do not 
pretend to remember. Some he called chetodons. 
They were flat and of an oval form, of a rich silvery 
hue, and had blue stripes downwards. They swam in 
a perpendicular position, with one long slender fin from 
the back curving upwards, and another from the oppo- 
site side curving downwards. Several came and looked 
at us, as if to inquire why we had visited their domains 
Others of still more curious forms and tints were dart> 


340 


ATTACKED BY A SHARK. 


ing in and out among the rocks ; and there were huge 
lobsters, and crabs, and cray-fish, of various sorts, pok- 
ing their long attenm out of gloomy caverns ; and sea- 
urchins, and star-fish, and the beche-de-mer, lay 
scattered about ; while huge clams opened wide their 
broad valves to catch their unwary prey. 

While we were all looking over the side, what had 
hitherto appeared to be a huge piece of rock began to 
move, and the piercing, savage eyes, and cruel jaws of 
a vast shark approached the canoe. I felt a shudder 
run through my frame as I saw the monster darting out 
of his ambush. “ Give way,” cried Cousin Silas ; “ he 
means mischief.” The doctor and I plied our paddles. 
The brute made a dash at mine, and almost bit it in 
two. Away we went as fast as we could towards the 
shore, pursued by him. We shouted as loud as we 
could and splashed our oars about, to frighten him away ; 
but he seemed in no way disposed to be alarmed. Silva 
hearing our shouts now came paddling toward us. Jack 
Shark, however, seemed resolved to play us a trick if 
he could. Swimming off* to a short distance, he darted 
back, clearly with the intention of upsetting the canoe. 
Cousin Silas turned her away from him just in time, 
and giving the gentleman a smart blow over the snout, 
made him think better of his intention. Silva coming 
up at the same moment, so distracted his attention that 
we reached the shore without his succeeding in doing 
us any material damage. 

Sharks are generally quickly frightened by splashing 
and a noise, and I had never seen any so bold and fero- 
cious as those we met with about this island. In a 
little time we got accustomed to them, and often have I 
seen them gliding in and out among our lines, far down 


HOW TO BOIL A FISH IN A BASKET. 341 

in the depths of the lagoon, though they did not pre- 
vent us from catching as many fish as we required 
Sometimes, however, as we were hauling up a fish, a 
sh^irk would catch hold of it and deprive us of our 
prize. We never went out without catching a large 
quantity, so we had always a good supply of fresh fish — 
the rest we preserved. We had two ways of doing this. 
Some we cut open and dried in the sun ; others we 
salted. We made some salt-pans by blocking up the 
outlets in the rocks when the water ran off at high-tide, 
and by scraping others in the sand. We thus had a 
supply of salt for all our wants. Mr. M‘Ritchie also 
found in his chest some papers containing a variety of 
vegetable seeds. We accordingly scraped a spot clear 
for a vegetable garden, and it was surprising how quickly 
many of them sprang up and became fit for food. Thus 
I may say that we were furnished with many of the 
necessaries of life. 

We were somewhat scantily supplied with kitchen 
utensils ; our sauce-pan, or boiling-pot, especially, had 
seen much service. Silva showed us how we might 
boil our fish without it. He collected a quantity of very 
fine grass, and set to work to plait a large basket. So 
neatly did he put it together, that, after he had soaked 
it in water, he filled it up to the brim and not a drop 
ran out. Then he put the fish in ; and lighting a fire, 
eated a number of large stones. These, as soon as they 
ere hot, he kept putting into the basket. As soon as 
he supposed that all their caloric had left them, he hooked 
them out with a forked stick. In this -way, by keeping 
the water boiling by a constant supply of hot stones, he 
thoroughly cooked the fish. I should think any thing 
29 * 


342 DISCOVERY OF TURTLE. 

which does not require much boiling might be cooked 
in the same way. 

Thanks to the example set us by Mr. Brand, we were 
never idle. Of course a good deal of our time was 
occupied in procuring provisions, as is generally the 
case with those living in a savage state. We had not 
made any excursion to a distance for some time, when 
one day Jerry, Ben, and I, set out to take a long walk. 
After proceeding for about two hours, we saw before us 
a bay, with a wide, sandy beach. Ben put his hand on 
our shoulders and pointed eagerly at the bay. The 
shore was covered with a number of black spots. 

“ What are those ? ” I asked. 

“ Turtle,” he answered ; “ won’t we have a fine feast 
of them ! ” 

We approached the bay carefully, following Ben’s 
footsteps. There must have been a hundred fine, large 
green turtle, basking in the sun before us — enough to 
make the mouth of an alderman water. Ben crept up 
to the nearest, a fine fat fellow, and catching him by the 
flapper, turned him over on his back, where he lay help- 
lessly kicking, but unable to stir. Jerry and I, watch- 
ing how he did it, turned over several more, though 
our united strength only enabled us to do it. We had 
got over a dozen or more when we came to a big fellow 
who was too heavy for us. We had got him almost 
over, when down he came again on his belly, and very 
naturally, not appreciating the honor of being turned 
into turtle-soup, began scuttling away as hard as he 
could towards the sea. As may have been discovered, 
neither Jerry nor I were fellows who ever liked to give 
in ; so we held on to the turtle with all our might, every 


TURNING TURTLES. 


343 


now and then lifting up one side in the hope of getting 
him over, when, in spite of his strength, we should have 
made him ours. We shouted to Ben to come and help 
us; but he was busily employed in turning the other 
turtles, which, disturbed by our noise, were moving 
away towards the sea. Our friend had got actually 
into the sea, and away all three of us went till we were 
up to our middles in water. We thought that by stick- 
ing to him we might now more easily get him over. 
We did succeed in lifting him up a little way, but he 
dealt us such severe blows with his flapper that over 
we both went, getting our mouths full of sand and water, 
and, of course, wet to the, skin. Ben now saw that it 
was time to come to our aid, lest the turtle should actu- 
ally swim away with us. He rushed into the water; 
but just then our friend struck out with both his pad- 
dles, and darting away we fell back head over heels, nor 
were sorry when Ben helped us to regain terra firm a 
with our arms and legs not a little bruised with the 
blows we had received. 

We had no time to think of our hurts. “ Come along,” 
shouted Ben ; “we must turn a few more before they 
all go away.” We had succeeded, we found, in cap- 
turing nearly thirty. Leaving the poor brutes on their 
backs — and very uncomfortable they must have found 
themselves — we hurried back to get the canoes, that 
we might convey some of them without delay to our 
home. We found that each canoe could only carry 
three at a time, so that we had to make five or six trips 
to get them up to the house. We enclosed a place in 
the shade where we placed them, and kept them well 
supplied with wet sea-weed, so that we had hopes the^ 
would be preserved in good condition for a long time. 


844 


YOUNG- TURTLE SEEKING THE SEA. 


Each time we visited the bay we found it crowded 
with turtle. We discovered that they assembled there 
to deposit their eggs. This they do in holes which they 
dig out with their flappers in the sand. They cover 
them up again with the same instruments, and leave 
them to be hatched by the sun. We had not thought 
about this, when one day, as we were pulling across the 
bay in our canoe, we remarked the great number of 
sharks, and dog-fish, and sting-rays, swimming about. 
Presently, as we got close in with the shore, we saw a 
number of young turtle crawling out of the sand and 
making their way to the sea, expecting, of course, to 
enjoy a pleasant swim ; instead of which, a very large 
number of the poor little innocents must have been 
gobbled up by the voracious monsters. It would seem 
as if none could escape, but I suppose that some manage 
to run the gauntlet and to get clear off into deep water. 

We had now a supply of turtle sufficient to last us 
till the return of their brethren the next year, should 
we be kept on the island so long. We thought that 
very probably we might have to remain even longer 
than a year. Even four or five years might pass with- 
out a ship coming near us. 

We had made steps up to the top of our flag-staff, 
and one of us never failed to climb up there every 
morning, noon, and evening, to take a look round to see 
if any sail was in sight. Sometimes we talked of build- 
ing a canoe in which we might cross to some other 
island, or perhaps even reach the mainland of South 
America. This was Silva’s proposal. He had seen, he 
asserted, birds -flying in that direction. Some did not 
even stop on our island; and this circumstance con- 
vinced him, he said, that land could not be far off. Mr. 

♦ 


SILVA URGES US TO BUILD A BOAT. 


345 


Brand did not approve of this proposal. He said that 
without a compass, and without knowing the direction 
in which land was to be found, the experiment was too 
hazardous, in so frail a bark as we had it in our power 
to construct. Still Silva constantly harped on this sub- 
ject, and seemed quite angry when nobody seemed in- 
clined to make the attempt. 

Weeks and months rolled on. Silva used to listen 
to what Mr. Brand said to him, and he always behaved 
very well. Indeed we had ceased to remember that he 
had been a pirate, and had joined in the most atrocious 
murders ; still, I do not know that he was a changed 
man — I am afraid not ; that is to say, I am afraid had 
a piratical vessel come off the island, he would not have 
refused to join her. One very hot day Jerry and I had 
accompanied him in an excursion along the shore, when 
suddenly he said that he should like to bathe. We 
walked on a little further, leaving him to undress, and 
then we agreed that the water looked very tempting, 
and that we would bathe also. We were by this time 
at some little distance from him. We were partly un- 
dressed when we saw that the tide was rising, so we car- 
ried our things higher up the beach. 

“ If it were not for those horrid sharks, I should like 
to have a good long swim,” exclaimed Jerry. 

“ But those sharks are quite sufficient reason why we 
should not attempt any thing of the sort,” I remarked. 
“ Here, I think, we are pretty safe ; but we must keep 
our eyes about us, depend on that.” We were inside a 
reef where sharks were unable to come. 

While we were speaking we observed Silva walk 
slowly into the water, and we thought he was going to 
$toop down and swim off. First, he put a foot forward, 


346 DISAPPEARANCE OF SILYA IN THE WATER. 

then he placed the other near it, and seemed to be try 
ing to lift them up ; and then he put an arm down, and 
then another. We, not thinking of danger, ran into the 
water and swam about for some time, enjoying our- 
selves excessively. When we came out we looked for 
Silva ; he was nowhere to be seen. What had become 
of him ? We dressed as fast as we could, and ran along 
the beach to the spot where he had been. There were 
his clothes, but there was no other trace of him. We 
shouted, but we shouted in vain. Much alarmed, we 
ran back to the settlement, as we called our hut, to get 
Cousin Silas or Ben to accompany us in our search for 
him. Mr. Brand had gone in an opposite direction, but, 
after waiting some time, Ben Yool came in. After he 
had heard our account he launched the canoe, and all 
three of us set off along the coast to the spot where 
Silva had last been seen. As we got near it we saw 
the doctor, and hailing him, told him what had occurred, 
Silva’s clothes showed us exactly where to look for him, 
though, believing that a shark had carried him off, we 
had little hopes of finding his body. As we were pull- 
ing in quite close to the shore, Ben exclaimed, “ Why, 
there he is, poor fellow, moored head and stern ! What 
can have got hold of him ? ” We called the doctor to 
come and see ; and Jerry, jumping on shore, gave up 
his place to him in the canoe. When the doctor got 
over the spot, after a short examination he exclaimed, 
“ Why, it is a monster cephalopod — a squid, a horrid 
polypus has got hold of him. Poor fellow, what a 
dreadful death to die ! There can be no doubt how it 
happened. He must have stepped on the squid, which 
caught hold of him with its long and powerful tentaculae, 
and gradually infolding him in its dreadful embrace, 


silva’s dreadful death. 


347 


dragged him under the water. What strength the crea- 
ture must have ! for Silva was a very strong man, and 
would not easily have given in.” Thus the doctor went 
on lecturing on the polypus over the dead body of our 
late companion — his love of natural history making him 
for the moment almost forget the horrors of the scene. 
How to rescue the body from the grasp of the monster 
was our next consideration. Returning on shore, we 
cut some long sticks, intending to attack him with them. 
Again we launched the canoe, but when we reached 
the spot the squid and the body of the pirate had disap- 
peared. 

This dreadful catastrophe had a great effect on me. 
Mr. Brand also was very much grieved when we got 
back and told him of what had occurred. When one 
out of a small number, cut off as we were from the rest 
of our fellow-creatures, is taken away, the loss must 
always be much felt. It was many days before we 
recovered our spirits. When I thought of the sharks, 
and the dog-fish, and these still more horrid polypi, I 
could not help feeling as if we were on an enchanted 
island, surrounded by terrific monsters to prevent our 
escape. 

As time wore on, even Mr. Brand began to talk of 
the possibility of building a canoe in which we might 
endeavor to get away. One great difficulty seemed to 
be that of carrying a sufficient quantity of water and fuel 
with which to cook our food. Of provisions we had an 
ample supply. Jerry proposed filling all the cocoa-nuts 
we could collect with water. The idea did not seem a 
bad one ; but the first thing to be done was to get our 
canoe built. 

We all the time kept a constant look-out from our 


348 APPEARANCE OF A STRANGE CANOE. 

flag-staff head. One forenoon I was up there as usual* 
when I thought I saw a speck on the water. It grew 
larger and larger. I watched it eagerly, till I saw that 
it was a canoe with a large sail. It was approaching 
the island at a point a mile or so from the house. I 
hailed to say what I had seen, and advised ray friends 
to get our arras ready, that we might be able to defend 
ourselves should the strangers come as enemies. Mr. 
Brand told me to come down. He then went up, and, 
after watching the craft for some time, pronounced her 
to be a large double canoe, and probably full of people. 
On his coming down, a council of war was held. As 
we could not tell what sort of savages those on board 
the canoe might be, we agreed that it would be wise to 
be prepared, if necessary, to meet them as enemies. 
Accordingly, we put ourselves under Mr. Brand’s orders. 
He took the musket, and Jerry and I were armed with 
our fowling-pieces — Ben and the doctor providing 
themselves with hatchets and knives and long pointed 
sticks. Thus prepared, we hastily advanced towards 
the spot for which the canoe was making. That we 
might not be seen, we kept ourselves under cover of the 
trees and shrubs, or ran along a path on the lagoon side 
of the island. 

We reached a good place for concealment behind 
some rocks and thick bushes before the canoe came to 
land, so that we had plenty of time to examine her. 
She was, as Mr. Brand had before discovered, a large 
double canoe — that is to say, there were two canoes 
secured side to side, and sharp at both ends. I after- 
wards had an opportunity of measuring her. Each 
canoe was upwards of thirty feet long, and of fully 
vhree feet beam ; and as they were about two feet apart, 


THE CANOE COMES TO SHORE. 


349 


with a platform between them, the whole structure was 
about nine feet across. Each was also between three 
and four feet deep, so that she had considerable hold in 
the water, and was able to carry a large supply of pro- 
visions. Each end was fitted for a rudder, so that she 
could sail either way without tacking. The canoes 
were completely decked over, thus affording a cabin to 
their crews, and the means of preserving their cargo • 
from damage. This also enabled the craft to go through 
very heavy seas without foundering. This canoe, how- 
ever, was only half the size of the large double canoes 
of the Fejee and Tonga islanders, which are often a 
hundred feet long, and proportionally deep and wide. 

Meantime we were watching with deep interest the 
approach of the strangers, expecting any moment we 
might be called on to engage in deadly conflict with 
them, should they discover us and be inclined for war. 
Cousin Silas had, however, charged us on no account 
to commence hostilities till it was evident that they 
would not allow us to retain peaceable possession of our 
island. As they drew near they lowered their largo 
mat sail, and took to their paddles. We held our breath 
with anxiety, for we could count nearly forty people on 
board the canoe. Besides the men, there were both 
women and children. The men were tall, fine-looking 
fellows ; some had on turbans and cloaks, and all had 
wide kilts of native cloth, and the women were decently 
habited in petticoats. We observed among them spears, 
and bows and arrows, and two or three muskets, which 
they held up conspicuously above their heads. As they 
approached the shore they looked about, apparently to 
discover any signs of inhabitants. Perhaps their quick 
sight had shown them our hut and flag-staff. On they 
30 


350 


PREPARE FOR BATTLE. 


came. They passed the passage through the reef, and 
running the canoe on to the smooth sand, both men and 
women leaped out, and began to haul her up on the 
beach. Now was the time to appear before them, and 
to attack them if they gave signs of hostility ; but just 
as we were going to rush out to take them by surprise, 
they had hauled up their canoe sufficiently high to pre- 
vent the possibility of her drifting away, and then one 
and all, climbing up the beach, fell down on their knees, 
lifting up their hands and bursting forth into a hymn 
of praise. There could be no doubt about it; the 
words were strange to our ears, but the tune was one 
well known to us all. Then one — the eldest of the 
party — uttered a prayer in a deep and solemn voice, 
all the rest joining afterwards in a response. About 
that, also, there could be no doubt. 

Savages though they might seem, they were evidently 
Christians, and though we might not be able to under- 
stand each other’s language, they would receive us in 
the bond of brotherhood. We all, I doubt not, felt 
ashamed of our previous suspicions, — though, to be 
sure, the precautions we had taken were very right and 
just. At a sign from Cousin Silas we advanced slowly 
from our ambush, and kneeling down at a little distance 
from them, joined them in the tune of the last hymn 
they sang. They looked surprised, but no one moved 
till the hymn was over ; and then they got up, and ad- 
vancing fearlessly towards us, we shook hands cordially 
all round. 

On a nearer inspection, we saw, by their emaciated 
looks and the battered condition of their canoe, that 
they must have undergone much hardship. Perhaps 
they thought us rather a rough set for Englishmen, for 


THE CHRISTIAN INDIANS. 


35 


our clothes were somewhat tattered, and Mr. Brand’s, 
and the doctoi s, and Ben’s beards, whiskers, and mus- 
taches were of considerable length, and not a little tan- 
gled. 

After some experiments we found that one of the 
men could speak a little English, but we failed to get 
out of him an account of their history. We were, how- 
ever, able to explain to them that, if they would accom- 
pany us, we would supply them with food, water, and 
shelter, of which they evidently stood much in need. 
We first assisted them in hauling their canoe still 
further up the beach, so that she could not drift off 
again at the top of high-water ; and then we all com- 
menced our journey to our house. Many of the poor 
creatures were very weak and ill ; and it was interest- 
ing to see Ben carrying a baby in each arm and helping 
along the mothers at the same time. We all did the 
same, but his way was more remarkable. He would 
talk to the poor women, and encourage them by his 
tone, if not by his words ; and then he would kiss the 
children, and dance them, and sing, and whistle, and 
chirp to them, greatly to the delight of the little 
creatures, and, I have no doubt, to that of their mothers 
also. 

When we reached our settlement, we made up beds 
for the most sickly-looking, and the doctor examining 
them, administered some restoratives. While he was 
doing so, we got fires lighted, and putting all our pots, 
and pans, and cooking-baskets into requisition, we soon 
had fish frying and boiling, and turtle stewmg, and 
bread-fruit and various roots baking; indeed the eyes 
of the poor creatures glistened — as well they might — • 
with the anticipated feast. The doctor, seeing their 


852 'YE ADMINISTER AID TO THE STRANGERS. 

eagerness, warned us to take care that they did not eat 
too much at a time ; and, to prevent their doing so, 
assisted in serving out a small share only to each. To 
the invalids and children he only gave at first a few 
spoonfuls of turtle-soup ; but that had a great effect in 
reviving them. The people seemed to comprehend 
clearly the reason why we gave them only a small 
quantity. Hungry as they were, before any one would 
touch the food, one of the elders stood up and, spread- 
ing out his hands uttered a grace over it, in which the 
rest joined, evidently with pious sincerity. I could not 
help thinking to myself, How differently do these poor 
Christian savages, as they may be called, act to what 
w r ould be the case with many civilized Christians under 
similar circumstances ! The prayers of these poor 
people are undoubtedly acceptable to the all-loving God, 
who bestows his bounteous gifts with so lavish a hand 
on us his unworthy creatures : but what can we say of 
the hurried, scarcely muttered ejaculations to which the 
master of many a house in civilized England gives vent, 
as if afraid, in the presence of his polished* guests — 
miserable -worms like himself — of uttering a word of 
thanksgiving to the great Dispenser of all the blessings 
bestowed on him ? Should a bishop, or some high dig- 
nitary of the church be present, then perhaps, in an os- 
tentatious tone, he is requested to ask a blessing on the 
banquet ; and grace for once is uttered in an audible 
voice. Far be it from me to say that this is always the 
case, but who can deny that it is too often so ? My 
young friends, I have learned many things in my voy- 
age round the world, and this matter among others from 
those missionary-taught savages. Grace being said, 
they quietly partook of the provisions set before them, 


PIETY OF OUR GUESTS. 


353 


and though the eyes of some of the younger ones wan- 
dered towards the pots and the fire, no one even asked 
for more than we gave them. 

When they had eaten, we made signs for them to lie 
down and rest. This they did with the most perfect 
confidence, as if not the shade of any suspicion of treach- 
ery crossed their minds. Some were suffering from 
sores and ulcers, brought on by constant exposure and 
wet, and to these the doctor at once attended with evi- 
dent solicitude ; which, it was clear, completely won 
their hearts. We watched over them carefully while 
they slept, driving away the flies and insects which 
seemed disposed to settle on them ; indeed, in every 
way, to the best of our power, we treated them as men 
should men, and not as so-called Christians too often 
treat their fellow-creatures. What we might have done 
had not Cousin Silas set us the example, I cannot say ; 
I only know that we were, happily, much influenced by 
his conduct and exhortations. My long stay in that 
lone island had, I feel, a very beneficial effect with me. 
I had time to meditate, to reflect, to look into myself, 
to examine my own heart and feelings, which I might 
never have done had I been mixing with the bustling, 
thoughtless world. Again and again I must urge my 
young friends to examine themselves, — to reflect con- 
stantly. Do not say that there is no time, — make 
time. It is one of the most important works of your 
life. Do not let trivialities put it off. Nothing you can 
possibly gain by the neglect can recompense you, how- 
ever important you may for the time thinK the work in 
which you are engaged. 

The first thing the strangers did on waking was to sit 
up and sing a hymn, and then several of them pulled 


354 


MISSIONARY INDIANS. 


out of the pockets secured to their waists books, which 
we had no doubt were Bibles ; others had hymn-books, 
or devotional books of some sort. 

The next day two or three of the strongest made 
signs that they would like to go and look at their canoe ; 
but the others seemed content to remain where they 
were, — indeed, many of them could not have moved 
even had they wished it. Jerry and I accompanied our 
new friends to the canoe. They seemed satisfied when 
they saw that she was safe ; and having procured a few 
articles from her, and among them several cooking 
utensils, they returned with us to the settlement. They 
made signs, as they examined the canoe, that she would 
require much repair before she was again fit to put to 
sea. She was, to our eyes, a wonderful structure. 
There was not a nail in her ; all her planks were sewed 
together, and secured in the same way to the ribs. This 
made her very strong and elastic, and accounted for her 
being able to endure the rough seas to which she must 
have been exposed. 

Several days passed away, and our guests showed 
that they were recovering from the effects of their 
voyage. All this time we could not tell from whence 
they had come, or where they were going. They tried 
to explain, but we could not understand them. They 
were coming from some Christian island, and they were 
probably going to one; or perhaps they were native 
missionaries anxious to carry the gospel of salvation to 
their benighted fellow-beings among the inhabitants of 
Polynesia. We soon came to the conclusion that some 
were missionaries, who had their wives and children 
with them. One was a chief, who was escorting them, 
and the rest were the seamen of the canoe. Mr. Brand 
arrived at this conclusion. 


THE INDIANS BUILD CANOES. 


355 


“ But, sir,” said Jerry, “ I thought missionaries always 
wore black coats and white ties ! ” 

“John the Baptist was a missionary, but his raiment 
was of camel’s hair, and his food locusts and wild honey,” 
was the answer. “ A man may be a first-rate mission- 
ary, who dresses in a fustian jacket and leather gaiters, 
or whose costume is not more elaborate than that of 
these poor people. A friend of mine told me that he 
has often, sitting hammer in hand on the roof of a cot- 
tage nailing on shingles, preached the gospel to a con- 
gregation who were as attentive as if he were in a high 
pulpit, and were habited in lawn sleeves.” 

There was something in the manner and the grave 
and thoughtful countenances of the missionaries which 
enabled us to distinguish them from the rest, and the 
one who already spoke a few words in English, quickly 
acquired more by which to explain himself. 

When they grew strong enough to move about, they 
made signs that they would not longer consume our 
store of provisions, but would, if we would let them 
have our canoes, go and fish for themselves. To this, 
of course, we gladly consented ; and they never came 
back without offering us a portion of what they had 
caught. We saw that they were preparing to remain 
some time on the island. They built themselves huts 
near their big canoe, and built three small canoes for 
fishing. Whatever fish they caught which they did not 
wish to consume, they carefully cut in two and dried iij 
the sun. They also discovered a plantation of gourds, 
some of which they dried to serve as jars for holding 
water. We also went on with our preparations for a 
voyage. When they discovered what we were about, 
they seemed much satisfied, and intimated that they 


356 


WE QUIT OUR ISLAND. 


hoped we would accompany them. We, in reply, as- 
sured them that we would be very glad to do so. They 
then took us to the big canoe, and showed us how care- 
fully they were at work repairing her. Whenever any 
of the lacing which kept her together was in any way 
worn or chafed, they put in fresh with the greatest 
neatness, covering all the seams up with a sort of gum 
which they collected in the woods. In this we could 
not help them, but we assisted in curing a large supply 
of fish and birds, and in collecting roots and filling the 
cocoa-nuts and gourds with water. When they saw that 
we had still a number of turtle alive, they seemed highly 
pleased, and signified that they would prove a very val- 
uable and wholesome provision for the voyage. 

Every thing was at last ready. The canoe was 
brought round into the lagoon to load. We all assem- 
bled. One of the native missionaries offered up in his 
own tongue some earnest prayers for our safety, and 
thanksgiving for mercies bestowed. Mr. Brand followed 
his example in English. Then all went on board — the 
women and children first ; the missionaries went next, 
followed by the chief and the sailors ; and we five Eng- 
lishmen, with Surley, brought up the rear. Another 
hymn was sung, the canoe was cast loose, the seamen 
seized their paddles, and slowly, to the music of a hymn 
sung by all the natives, we paddled out of the lagoon. 
The sea was smooth, though there was a fresh breeze ; 
£he sail was hoisted, and away we glided at a rapid rate 
to the eastward. 


A VOYAGE IN A SOUTH SEA CANOE. 


*57 


CHAPTER XVII. 

A VOYAGE IN A SOUTH SEA CANOE. 

Once more we were on the boundless ocean, out of 
sight of land, the stars only as our guides, and the sagac- 
ity of the Polynesian chief and his followers to depend 
on. What made us feel most strange was our utter igno 
ranee where we were going. From the quantity of 
provisions and water the natives had thought it neces 
sary to provide, it was evident that we had a long voy- 
age before us, — perhaps many weeks might be occupied 
in performing it. We could scarcely hope not to ex- 
perience a gale of wind even in the Pacific during that 
time, and how could we hope to weather it out in so 
frail a craft, especially deeply laden as we were ? 

When Jerry and I expressed our apprehensions, after 
we had been some days on board, and were beginning 
to get very tired of being cramped up, the answer of 
Cousin Silas rebuked us, — “Trust in Providence, my 
lads — on the arm of Him who has already preserved 
us from so many dangers. He would not have sent 
this canoe full of Christian men to us, unless for some 
good object.” Jerry and I felt that Cousin Silas spoke 
the truth, and we made no further complaints. 

It was surprising how delicate and attentive the 
islanders were to us; — I will not call them savages. 


358 


EFFECTS OF CHRISTIANITY 


They devoted the end of one of the canoes for our ac- 
commodation, and raised over it an awning with mats, 
that we might be shaded from the beat of the sun, 
which was at times excessive. They selected the most 
delicate and the best dressed food for us, and always 
served us first. Their habits were cleanly, and they 
were always kind and courteous towards each other, as 
they were especially to us. Now, as all this was so dif- 
ferent to what I had fancied the natural character of 
the inhabitants of the islands in this part of the Pacific, 
I could not but suppose that their Christianity had pro- 
duced the change. Had I known that the immediate 
ancestors of these very people, and, indeed, some of the 
men on board, had been cannibals and savages of the 
worst description, I might have been still more aston- 
ished. Oh, it is a glorious thing to know what a 
mighty change pure, simple Christianity will work in 
the heart of man, vile and deformed as sin has made it ! 
Cousin Silas often used to remark, that the world was a 
very useful book, if we could but read it aright ; and, 
thanks to him, I learned many important lessons from 
it. No lesson was more important than that which 
taught me the great change which the doctrines of 
Christianity, under the influence of the Holy Spirit, 
produce on men of the most savage natures. It con- 
firmed and strengthened my faith in the power of the 
gospel; and I wish that all my young friends would 
read the accounts which they may find of the labors of 
missionaries in those and other hitherto benighted re- 
gions, and they will, if I mistake not, find the same 
result produced on their hearts which I experienced in 
mine. However, I must continue my narrative. 

W e had brought with us our fishing-hooks and lines. 




AN ISLANDER LEARNS ENGLISH. 


359 


and, whenever the breeze was moderate, we used to 
throw them out, and seldom passed an nour without 
catching some fish. This afforded a pleasant and whole- 
some change to our diet, and economized our provisions. 
Our progress was slow, and we were unable to ascer- 
tain how long the voyage was likely to last. Hitherto 
we had enjoyed only the finest weather ; the wind had 
always been favorable, and even the strongest breeze 
which had wafted us along had only covered the ocean 
with a brisk ripple. 

I mentioned that one of the missionaries spoke a few 
words of English. So great was his desire to acquire 
a further knowledge of the language, that all day long 
he was engaged in learning it from one or other of us. 
He first obtained a large vocabulary of substantives. 
These he noted down in a pocket-book which he cher- 
ished with great care, and then he began upon verbs. 
These are more difficult to obtain, when neither master 
nor pupil understands the other’s language. However, 
by dint of various signs, he obtained a good number, of 
which he began very soon to make use. We got on 
talking by degrees, till we really did understand each 
other very fairly. By degrees we gleaned from him 
the following narrative : — 

He and his companions belonged to an island in the 
neighborhood of Otaheite, all the inhabitants of which, 
from the teaching of some missionaries, had embraced 
with joy the Christian faith. From living in a state of 
constant warfare, no one for a moment knowing if his 
life was safe from the assaults of his fellow-islanders, 
they had all become peaceable and contented, life and 
property being as secure as in any part of the world. 
The missionaries had taught them many useful arts, 


/ 



360 


THE ISLANDER’S NARRATIVE. 


and liad introduced into the island many vegetables, 
and a variety of fruits, with some few animals ; so that 
they had now a constant and ample supply of all the 
necessaries of life. 

Highly valuing all the blessings they enjoyed, they 
heard that there were some islands lying far away to 
the west, the inhabitants of which were still ignorant 
savages. Some of their people had occasionally visited 
them in trading vessels, and some of their canoes had, 
it was said, formerly gone there occasionally. At ail 
events, they believed that the inhabitants understood 
their language. If, then, some of their people had ven- 
tured so far for the sake of gain, much more did it 
behove them to go there for an object inestimably more 
important — the salvation of the souls of a number of 
their fellow-creatures. A daring chief undertook to 
head an expedition, and six native preachers volunteered 
to go and settle with their wives and families among 
the heathen islanders, and to convey to them faithfully 
the gospel of salvation. 

Two large canoes were fitted out, strengthened for 
the voyage, and stored and provisioned. The whole 
population of the island assembled on the beach to bid 
their countrymen farewell, and to offer up their prayers 
for their safety. They knew somewhat of the dangers 
they must encounter, perhaps not all of them, but they 
had counted the cost, and had they been greater than 
those of which they did know, they would not have 
been deterred from the attempt. With a fair breeze 
the two canoes set sail, and glided on over the smooth 
sea, towards the far distant group of islands. Day 
after day they sailed on ; no land greeted their sight, 
but they believed that they were on the right course, 


THE CANOES SEPARATED. 


361 


and fearlessly committed themselves to the care of a 
merciful Providence. They knew that however they 
might be directed, it would be for the best. 

For many days the two canoes kept together, and 
the crews encouraged each other ; their voices raised in 
hymns of praise being wafted afar across the waters, as 
they joined in chorus, and sang alternately with each 
other. At length dark clouds were seen gathering in 
the horizon, light scud flew across the sky, the sea 
began to rise — the canoes labored much — soon they 
were pitching violently into the quick coming seas : still 
they were skilfully managed, and the wind allowed 
them to keep their course. Gradually, however, they 
drifted further and further apart. Night came on, but 
the tempest did not abate. Several of the people were 
kept continually bailing, for in spite of all their care, 
the sea constantly broke over them, and from the strain- 
ing of the canoe many a leak was formed. No one who 
endured them, could ever forget the horrors of that 
night. “ Had we been as we once were,” said the mis- 
sionary, “ we should have resigned ourselves to our 
fate, and perished ; but we knew that it is the duty of 
Christians to strive to the last, trusting in the arm of 
Him who is all-powerful to save, and while praying and 
prepared for death, we never abandoned hope. The 
morning at length came. The other canoe was nowhere 
to be seen. In vain we stood up and strained our eyes 
on every side, as w T e rose to the top of a sea ; not a 
sign of her could we perceive. Still we trusted that 
our friends might have been preserved. That day the 
gale blew as furiously as before ; but in the evening it 
moderated, though the sky was covered with clouds, 
and we knew not whither we were drifting. For several 
31 


562 SUFFERINGS FROM WANT OF WATER. 

days we drifted on, .ignorant of our position. Every 
morning, when daylight returned, we looked out eagerly 
for our friends, but we never saw them again. We live 
in hope that they may have been preserved. All is lor 
the best. 

“ We thought that when the gale abated, and the sea 
grew calm, and the sun came out, our sufferings would 
have an end ; but they only then began. Our stock of 
water was growing less and less. Many of our provis- 
ions had been so damaged by the sea, that they quickly 
decayed. The sea became calm as the lagoon inside a 
coral isle ; the sun burst forth with intense heat ; our 
thirst grew excessive. Our island is plentifully sup- 
plied with water ; we had always been accustomed to 
an abundance : yet now we dared not drink more than 
the shell of a small nut could hold at a time. Carefully 
we husbanded the precious fluid ; we had learned to 
know its value. At last the time came when not a drop 
remained. Every calabash was examined over and 
over again — the last drop was drained out. We sat 
down, and looked mournfully at each other. Our thirst 
increased. We dipped our heads in salt water — we 
continually sprinkled each other over with it ; but that 
did not convey coolness to our parched tongues. ‘ We 
must die,’ exclaimed some one. ‘ No, no,’ answered one 
of our missionary brethren ; 4 we will pray without 
ceasing — we will trust in God. He will send us relief 
when we least expect it.’ That very evening a flight 
of sea-fowl flew close to the canoe. We were able to 
knock over several. Their blood assisted to quench 
our thirst; their flesh, too, revived our strength. The 
next day several fish were caught ; but it was not food 
we wanted. ‘Water! water! water!’ was the cry from 


MISSIONARIES LAND ON AN ISLAND. 


363 


old and young alike. Still a day passed away — there 
was no sign of land — no sign of' rain. The next day 
came ; intolerable was the thirst we endured by noon 
Hr vain we strained our eyes through the hot, quivering 
atmosphere ; the sky was blue and pure as ever ; not i 
speck could we discern in the horizon. We had hoped 
that we might reach the group of islands to which w< 
had been bound ; we accordingly kept, as we believed 
a direct course for it. Another morning broke. Dur 
ing the night, our sufferings had been intense. Could 
we survive through another day? We stood up to 
glance round the horizon. Directly before us arose, as 
if sprouting out of the water, a line of palm and cocoa- 
nut trees ! How eagerly we plied our oars to reach the 
island on which they grew ! How thankfully our voices 
sang the morning hymn, and uttered our accustomed 
prayers ! We rapidly neared the spot. We might have 
run close by it in the night without seeing it. We pad- 
died round to find a spot on which to land. Tantalizing 
indeed was it to see the ground where we might hope to 
gain life and strength, and yet not be able to place our 
feet on it. At last an opening appeared in the sur- 
rounding reef, we ran in, and, hauling up our canoe, 
hurried off in search of water. No water could we find, 
but the strongest climbed some of the cocoa-nut trees, 
and quickly threw down a supply of their refreshing 
fruit. Oh, how delicious and cool was the milk which 
they afforded us ! Still, pure water was what we most 
wanted ; but though we searched in every direction, and 
dug dow r n as deep as we could w r ith our rough wooden 
teols, not a drop could we find. 

“We remained here a week hoping for rain, but it 
tame not. The juice from the cocoa-nuts restored our 


364 


THE REVIVING SHOWER. 


1 / 


strength. We collected all we could gather for our 
voyage. Once more we resolved to trust ourselves to 
the sea. We embarked, and hoisting sail, stood away 
on our former course. No land appeared in siglit. 
Many days passed away. Our supply of cocoa-nuts 
was almost exhausted. Again death by thirst stared 
us in the face. Oil, how carefully we husbanded the 
few precious nuts which remained ! They at last were 
exhausted. The hot sun again arose, and we had no 
liquid with which to quench our thirst. The burning 
rays of the bright luminary struck down on our heads 
with intense force. 4 Water ! water ! water ! * we re- 
peated as before. Some almost gave way to despair. 
‘ We have before been preserved, why give up all hope 
now ? ’ said others. In the evening a small cloud was 
seen to rise out of the sea. It spread wider and wider. 
There was no w r ind. It advanced toward us. Fast 
from it fell a thick shower of pure, sweet water. On it 
came, we opened wide our mouths, we spread out our 
hands. Oh, how gratefully it moistened our parched 
lips! We stretched out our sail and all our garments, 
and let the precious streams we thus gathered run into 
our gourds and pots. All that evening the rain came 
down in a continuous fall, and every moment we were 
occupied in collecting it, till all our receptacles were 
full' to the brim, — not a shell did we allow to remain 
empty : and then we poured it down our throats in a full, 
refreshing stream. Scarcely were we satisfied when the 
rain ceased — the dark cloud blew onward — the stars 
shone forth brightly from the clear sky, and we pursued 
our course. 

“ The next island we came to was barren — no water 
and no nuts ; we must have perished had we been cast 






THE INHABITANTS OF AN ISLAND CONVEBTED. 365 


on it. Then we reached another with some inhabitants 
on it. We understood, in part, their language. Their 
ancestors had, they believed, been cast on it wandering 
as we were across the ocean. Their canoe had been 
destroyed, and they had remained there without wish- 
ing to depart. They had been driven forth from their 
native isles by cruel wars, in which the greater number 
; of their kindred had been destroyed. They received us 
in a friendly manner, and invited us to remain with 
them. They had heard nothing of the Truth. The 
gospel message had never reached their ears. From 
consulting with them we were convinced that we had 
been driven so far out of our course that we should 
never reach the islands of which we were in search. 
Here, however, was work for us to do, pointed out 
clearly by the finger of God. We told the islanders, to 
their joy, that we would remain with them ; and by 
degrees we opened to their wondering ears the glorious 
tidings we had brought. Astonished, they heard, but 
did not refuse to listen. Some speedily believed. The 
news we brought was of a nature their hearts had long 
yearned for ; it spoke of rest from toil — rest from suf- 
fering — rest from sin. Others, in time, accepted the 
truth with thankfulness. Every day we preached, and 
every day some one acknowledged himself a sinner, and 
sought redemption through Him alone who can give it. 
At length our glorious work was accomplished. We 
gave them books; we taught them to read. We told 
them that we must depart to try and reach our own 
homes. They entreated that one of our number would 
remain with them. It was resolved that one should re- 
main to guide them aright. We drew lots. He on 
whom the lot fell, without a murmur, with his wife and 
31 * 


366 VOYAGE OF THE MISSIONARIES RESUMED. 

family, joyfully remained — though he well knew that 
he could never hope again to see the land of his birth, 
and many dear to him there. But I am making my 
story longer than I intended. 

“Once more we set sail to return to our homes. 
Numerous were the hardships we endured, though, no 
one murmured. Several islands were visited. At some, 
food was procured ; at others we were afraid to stay, on 
account of the fierce character and the cannibal propen- 
sities of the inhabitants. We had been ten days out of 
sight of land when we reached your island, and truly 
did we rejoice to find not only whites, but Christian men 
to receive us.” 

With these words the native missionary finished his 
narrative. I was particularly struck with the artless 
simplicity of his account, and the faith and perseverance 
he and his companions had exhibited, so worthy of imi- 
tation. I felt ashamed as he spoke of white men, when 
I recollected how many act in a way so totally at vari- 
ance with their character as Christian and civilized men, 
and how bad an example they set to those whom they 
despise as heathens and savages. I have very fre- 
quently met young men who fancy when they are 
abroad that they may throw off all restraints of religion 
and morals, under the miserable excuse that people 
should do at Rome as the Romans do, — in other words, 
act as wickedly as those among whom they have gone 
to live. What would have become of Lot had he fol- 
lowed the example of those among whom he took up 
his abode ? Now, my young friends, I dare say that 
you will think I am very young to lecture you ; but 
remember that I have been round the world, and I 
should have been very dull and stupid had I not reaped 


ADVICE TO YOUNG TRAVELLERS. 


36 ? 


some advantage from the voyage. What I want to im 
press upon you is, when you leave your homes and go 
abroad, to be if any thing more strict, more watchful 
over yourselves even than you have before been. So- 
ciety will, too probably, afford less moral restraint, the 
temptations to evil will be greater; but pray against 
them faithfully — strive against them manfully, and 
they will not overcome you. 

Our voyage, as I was saying, had hitherto been pros- 
perous ; but a gale came on, and we were exposed to 
the very dangers the missionary had so well described 
to me. We could do nothing except help to bail out the 
canoe, for the natives understood how to manage her 
much better than we did ; and, with all our civilization 
and nautical knowledge, we had to confess that in that 
respect they were our superiors. The canoe labored 
fearfully, and often I thought that she must founder. 
How anxiously we looked out for some sign that the 
gale was abating, but in vain. Had we been in our own 
ship we should certainly have thought very little of the 
gale; but in this frail canoe we had ample reason to 
dread its consequences. At length the wind shifted, 
and drove us on in what the islanders considered our 
proper course. We ran on for some days without see- 
ing land, and then the gale blew over and left us be- 
calmed under a burning sun. We had carefully from 
the first husbanded our water, having the advantage of 
the previous experience of our companions. As it was, 
we had barely sufficient to quench the constant thirst 
produced by the heat. Every day, too, seemed to in- 
crease our thirst and to diminish our stock of the pre- 
cious fluid. Our hope had been to fall in with some ves- 
sel which might either supply us or give us a course to 


A SAIL LN SIGHT. 


868 

the nearest island where we might obtain it. One fore- 
noon, when we had been suffering even more than usual, 
the chief declared that he saw a vessel on our weather 
bow, and that she would cross our course. With in- 
tense eagerness and hope we all looked out for her. As 
we rose her sails out of the water we saw that she Avas 
a schooner. If we could but get on board her we thought 
that we might again in time rejoin the Triton. We 
were very certain that Captain Frankland would not 
cease to look for us while a chance remained of our 
being discovered. Gradually we neared the schooner. 
I saw Cousin Silas and Ben Yool looking at her with 
great earnestness. 

“What is she, Ben, do you think?” asked Cousin 
Silas. 

“ Why, Mr. Brand, as you know, sir, I’ve been box- 
ing about the world for the best part of the last forty 
years, and I think I ought to know one craft from an- 
other, and to my mind that vessel is no other than the 
piratical craft we were so long aboard. I say, if you 
ask me, sir, that we ought to stand clear of her. She’ll 
bring us no good.” 

“ Exactly ray idea,” answered Cousin Silas ; “ the 
wretches might very likely send us to the bottom, or 
carry us off again as prisoners.” 

We were, however, too near the schooner to hope to 
escape from her ; but we agreed that we might lie con- 
cealed while the canoe sailed quietly by her, and that, 
probably, no questions would be asked. We had some 
little difficulty in explaining the character of the vessel 
to our friends. When they did understand it they 
seemed to be much horrified, and undertook carefully 
to conceal us. As we drew near the schooner the rest 


ESCAPE THE PIRATES. 


369 


of our party went below ; but I wrapped myself up in 
a piece of matting, leaving a small aperture through 
which I could see what was going forward. The 
schooner stood close up to us. I was very certain that 
she was the pirate. Several faces I recognized. 
Among them was Captain Bruno. At first I thought 
that they were going to run us down ; then I dreaded 
that they were going to make us come alongside. 
Hauling their fore-sail to windward, they hailed two or 
three times, but in a language which was not under- 
stood. At last an answer was given from the canoe. 
What it was I could not tell. It seemed to satisfy them. 
To my great joy they once more let draw their fore- 
sail, and stood away from us. This was not the last 
time we were to see that ill-omened craft. 

As soon as she had got to some distance off, my 
friends came out of their hiding-place, and I disengaged 
myself from the folds of the mat. Truly thankful were 
we that we had escaped her. The missionary told us 
that the pirates had stated that we were about three 
hundred miles to the westward of Otaheite, and that we 
should pass several islands to get there. Once at Ota- 
heite the chief knew the direct course to his own island, 
and believed that he should have no difficulty in finding 
it. Our escape from the pirate made us, for a time, al- 
most forget our raging thirst ; we could not, however, 
but admire the fidelity and resolution of the natives, 
who, rather than run the risk of betraying us, had re- 
frained from asking for water from the pirate. 

All that day our sufferings were very great. As we 
were running on during the night, our ears were assailed 
by the sound of breakers. We listened; they were on 
pur weather bow. If we ran on we might miss the 


370 


REACH ANOTHER ISLAND. 


island ; so we liauled down our sail, and paddled slowly 
on towards the spot whence the sound proceeded. All 
night we remained within sound of the surf. How 
anxiously we waited for daylight to ascertain that there 
was an island, and not merely a coral reef over which 
the sea was breaking ! That night was one of the most 
anxious we had yet passed. Slowly the hours dragged 
along. It was wonderful to observe the calm and re- 
signed manner of the islanders. The missionaries and 
the chief never gave the slightest sign of distress ; even 
the women did not complain. “ It must be near day- 
break,” said Mr. Brand, waking up out of a sleep into 
which he had at last fallen. “Lookout.” We strained 
our eyes in the direction in which we believed the island 
to exist. A few pale streaks appeared in the east ; and 
then, oh ! our hearts leaped with joy as we saw tail, thin 
lines appear against the sky ; and, as the light in- 
creased, the stems and tops of trees were revealed to 
view. But our joy was somewhat damped when we 
discovered that a long line of heavy breakers rolled be- 
tween us and them. At sight of the island the natives, 
with one accord, raised a hymn of praise and thanks- 
giving which put our doubts to shame ; and the chief, 
pointing to the surf, made signs that we must go round 
on the other side, where we should find a place to land. 
The sail was forthwith hoisted, and we quickly ran 
round to the lee side, where a wide opening in the surf 
presented itself. We paddled through it into the inner 
bay or lagoon, and reaching the shore, the canoe was 
secured. 

The natives did not forget their prayers and hymn of 
thanksgiving, in which we all heartily joined them. 
They then looked cautiously about, to ascertain that 


THE POOL OF WATER. 


371 


there were no people on the island who might treat us 
as enemies. This necessary precaution being taken, we 
hurried about in every direction in search of water. 
Jerry and I kept together. Our tongues were parched 
with thirst. Some of the natives were climbing the 
cocoa-nut trees, in case any might still retain milk ; but 
the season for the fruit was now passing. Indeed, we 
wanted water, pure simple water. We felt that we 
should value it far more than the richest wine from the 
vineyards of Burgundy or the Rhine. At last we ob- 
served a little moisture on the ground near a large tree. 
We followed up its trace, and soon, shaded by shrubs, 
we came to a basin of bright, cool water. We eagerly 
stooped down and lapped up some of the delicious fluid, 
and then shouted loudly to our friends to come and en- 
joy the valued luxury with us. In a very short time 
the pool was surrounded with men, women, and children, 
ladling up the water with their calabashes and bowls, 
the mothers pouring it into the mouths of their chil- 
dren before they would themselves touch a drop, while 
the men knelt down and lapped it up as we had done. 
As I watched the scene, I bethought me that it was a 
subject fit for the exercise of the painter’s highest 
art. 

We spent a week on the island, repairing the canoe, 
catching fish, and filling our water jars with water. 
This may appear an unnecessarily long time to have 
waited on our voyage, but, after being cramped up for 
so many weeks, it was necessary to recruit our strength 
and to stretch our limbs. Much refreshed, we con- 
tinued our voyage. I forgot to state that at every 
island where we touched we engraved our names on 
the trunks of trees, in the most conspicuous situation. 


572 


TOUCH AT SEVERAL ISLANDS. 


and stated the direction in which we were going. We 
had done this also on our own island, as we called it, 
that should any vessel visit the spot she might perhaps 
convey intelligence to Captain Frankland that we were 
alive, and give him some clue as to where to look for 
us. Our friends understood our object, and now added 
some sentences in their own language to the same effect. 
The fine weather continued, and confident in the guid- 
ance and protection of Him who had hitherto preserved 
us from so many and great dangers, we launched forth 
again into the deep. 

We passed several small islands ; some had but a 
few stunted trees growing on them ; others again had 
scarcely soil sufficient to nourish a few blades of long 
wiry grass; while others were barren rocks without 
verdure of any description, their heads but lately risen 
from beneath the waves. I believe that it was at one 
time supposed that these coral formations rose from 
immense depths in the ocean, and that those wonderful 
and persevering polypi worked upwards till they had 
formed submarine mountains with their honey-combed 
structures ; but it is now ascertained that they cannot 
exist below at the utmost fifty feet of the surface, and 
that they establish the foundation of their structures on 
submarine mountains and table-lands, while they do not 
work above low-water mark. How comes it then, it 
will be asked, that they form islands which rise several 
feet above the sea? Although the polypi are the 
cause of the island being formed, they do not actually 
form it. They begin by building their nests on some 
foundation which instinct points out to them. First 
they work upwards, so as to form a wall, the perpen- 
dicular side of which is exposed to the point whence 


HOW CORAL ISLANDS ARE FORMED. 373 

the strongest winds blow and the heaviest sea comes 
rolling in. Then they continue to work along the 
ground and upwards on the lee side of the wall, shel- 
tered by their original structure from the heavy seas. 
They also work at each end of their wall in a curve 
with the convex side exposed to the sea. Thus, at 
length, beneath the ocean a huge circular wall of con- 
siderable breadth is formed. Storms now arise, and 
the waves, dashing against the outer part of the walls, 
detach huge masses of the coral, six feet square or more, 
and cast them up on the top of it, where they remain 
fixed among the rough peaks of corals ; and gradually 
other portions are thrown up, till a mass is formed 
above high-water mark. Other bits, ground by the 
waves into sand, now form a beach, united with shells 
and various marine productions. Birds come and set- 
tle, and leave seeds which spring up ; and trees grow, 
and attract moisture ; and fresh springs are formed, and • 
the spot becomes fit for the abode of man. Some 
islands have had a rock, or, perhaps, the plateau of 
some marine mountain for their commencement, and 
the polypi have simply enlarged it, and formed a reef 
around it.* However, this interesting subject has been 
so often well explained in other works that I will not 
further enlarge on it, though I could not pass it by in 
the description of my voyage without some nrtice. 

Another week we had been out of sight of land. We 
were longing to find some spot on which we might 
stretch our legs, if only for a few hours, and, what was 
more important, obtain a fresh supply of water, when 

* “ The Coral Island.” By R. M. Ballantyne, Esq. Nelson and 
Sons. 


32 


374 


APPROACH A STRANGE ISLAND. 


towards the evening the tree-tops of a large island 
appeared before us stretching away on either side to 
the north and south. We approached near enough to 
be seen from the shore, if there were inhabitants on it, 
of which there could be little doubt ; but we could dis- 
cover no place where it would be safe to attempt a 
landing. Judging that the shortest way to get round 
to the other side would be to go to the south, we pad- 
dled in that direction during the night. The roar of 
the surf prevented any sounds from the shore from 
reaching our ears ; but we observed several fires lighted 
on the beach, which assured us that the island was 
populated. The question, of course, was — Would the 
inhabitants appear as friends or foes? We paddled but 
very slowly during the night, just sufficiently to keep 
the canoe away from the breakers, and to get round to 
the place where it was believed a passage would be 
found. At daylight we perceived the looked-for spot, 
and stood towards it. We observed a number of people 
on the beach. They had scarcely any clothing ; their 
skins were dark, their hair was long and straggly, and 
the men had spears or clubs in their hands. Our chief 
stood up and examined them narrowly. No green 
6oughs were waved as a sign of amity ; on the contrary, 
their gestures appeared somewhat of a threatening 
character. We had just got to the mouth of the pas- 
sage when his quick eye detected a number of canoes 
collected inside the reef, and full of men, armed with 
darts and bows and arrows. He made a hasty sign .to 
his followers to back their paddles, and away we shot 
out of the trap. 

As soon as our flight was discovered! the canoes gave 
r.hase. They were small, each carrying not more than 


HOSTILE RECEPTION. 


375 


six or eight men; but from their numbers they were 
formidable. The men in them were also armed with a 
variety of weapons, and we thought it very likely that 
the arrows and darts might be poisoned. In a long line 
they darted out of the passage through the breakers like 
hornets out of their nest, to the attack. “ There they 
come, the black scoundrels ! ” exclaimed Ben Tool. 
“ Ten, fifteen, twenty, — there are thirty of them alto- 
gether. They’ll give us no little trouble if they once 
get alongside. However, they think that they’ve only 
got their own countrymen, so to speak, to deal with. 
They’ll find themselves out in their reckoning, I hope.” 

As we got away from the land we felt the force of 
the wind, and the chief ordering the sail to be set, we 
shot rapidly ahead. Still the small canoes made very 
rapid way through the water. The chief looked at us, 
as much as to ask, “ What will you do, friends ? ” Mr. 
Brand understood him, and answered by producing our 
fire-arms. Fortunately we had had very little necessity 
to expend our cask of powder and our shot, und we had 
a good supply. The missionaries, when they saw the 
fire-arms, put their hands to their heads as if in sorrow 
that it would be necessary to shed blood, but some words 
spoken by their chief reassured them. We could have 
told them that the sin lies with those who make the 
attack, provided the other party has employed all evi- 
dent means to avoid hostilities. 

By the orders of their chief our people got their own 
bows and spears ready, and then they set to work with 
their paddles again, and pHed them most lustily, much 
increasing the speed of the canoe. This, however, had 
only the effect of making our enemies redouble their 
efforts to overtake us. 


37 6 WE PREPARE FOR 4 FIGHT. 

Mr. Brand and Jerry and I were the best shots ; the 
doctor was not a good one, and Ben knew better how to 
manage a big gun than a musket. 

“You will fire over their heads, will you not?” said 
the doctor. 

“I think not,” answered Mr. Brand. “It will be 
mercy to make them feel the effects of our power. If 
each of us can knock over one of their people they may 
be so terrified that they will turn back at once ; but if 
they once come on and attack us, we know not where 
the slaughter may end, even should we prove victori- 
ous. 

It was agreed, therefore, that as soon as the savages 
got near enough to distinguish us, we were to jump up, 
and taking steady aim, to pick off those who appeared 
to be chiefs in the headmost boats. We explained our 
plan to our chief, and he much approved of it. 

The wind freshening we made good way, but still the 
flotilla of canoes was fast overtaking us. The voices of 
the savages, as they shouted and shrieked at us, were 
wafted across the water ; but they had not the effect of 
intimidating our friends. “ Ah, my boys, you’ll shout 
to a different tune, I suspect, before long,” exclaimed 
Ben, as he eyed them angrily. At length, in spile of all 
the efforts of our friends, the savages got close up to us ; 
and two men in the leading canoe, lifting their bows, 
were about to draw their arrows, when Cousin Silas 
exclaimed, “Now is the time, my lad^s; give it them.” 
We all fired. The two savages dropped instantly, and 
one man in each of the next canoes went head foremost 
overboard. The people in the following canoes hesitated 
for a minute what to do. The delay gave us time to 
reload. Again we fired, while our people jumping up 


UTJR ENEMIES PUT TO FLIGHT. 


877 


sent a flight of arrows among our enemies. Shrieks 
and cries and groans arose from the canoes, which all 
crowded thickly together like a flock of sheep, their 
people astonished and terrified at what had occurred. 
Then they turned round, and all paddled back in evi- 
dent confusion. We shouted, and gave them a parting 
volley ; but this time it was over their heads to hasten 
their movements. We were preserved, — not one of us 
had received the slightest injury. Away we glided, as 
fast as the w'ind and our paddles would carry us, from 
the inhospitable island. 


m 


VOYAGE IN A WHALER. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

VOYAGE IN A WHALER FURTHER ADVENTURES. 

Wearily our voyage had continued for many week*, 
yet we felt that, having been preserved from so many 
dangers, it would be sinful to complain. No one was 
actually sick, not a life had been lost, and by great 
economy our provisions and water had hitherto been 
sufficient for our necessities. A flight of birds had 
passed over our heads, directing their course to the 
north-east. We saw our chief watching them, and he 
at once ordered the canoe to be steered in the same 
direction. All day we stood on. Just as the sun was 
setting, we thought we saw a faint blue peak rising out 
of the water, but even the most practised eye could not 
determine whether it was land or a light cloud. We 
continued the same course during the night. For sev- 
eral hours I watched, then, overcome by fatigue, I fell 
asleep. “ See ! see ! ” I heard Jerry exclaim. I 
jumped up. There appeared before us the lofty and 
rugged peaks of a line of mountains. Of great height 
they seemed, after the low land to which our eyes had 
been so long accustomed. Their sides" were clothed 
with verdure, pleasant and refreshing to the sight ; and 
at their bases were groves, and fields, and ^parklin^ 
streams, with neat, pretty-looking cottages scattered 
about. There was a slight swell. When the canoe rose 


OTAHEITE. 


379 


to the top of it, we could see a yellow beach, with a cir- 
cle of bright, blue, calm water around it, and outside a 
line of white foaming breakers, the guardians of the 
shore. “ Otaheite ! Otaheite ! ” exclaimed the chief and 
liis followers ; and we thus knew that we were on the 
coast of the dominion of the ill-treated Queen Pomare ; 
but we also knew that there were civilized men on shore, 
and that we should probably be received there with 
kindness and hospitality. 

Soon discovering a passage through the reef, we ran 
in, and were at once surrounded by canoes full of 
people, wondering who we were and whence we had 
come. Our friends quickly gave an outline of our and 
their adventures, to satisfy curiosity. They found there 
several people from their own island, — one a chief, 
who had become a wealthy man. He took them to his 
own house, and had their canoe hauled up to be re- 
paired. I need not say that she was visited by all the 
foreign residents, curious to ermine a craft of so frail a 
structure which had performed so long a voyage. Our 
consul was very civil to us, and we were received into 
the house of an English gentleman, who treated us with 
the greatest kindness. As we met with no very inter- 
esting adventures during our stay here, I will content 
myself with giving a brief account of the island. 

Otaheite was discovered in 1767, by Captain Wallis, 
who called it King George’s Island ; but it is better 
known by the name of Tahiti. It is of volcanic forma- 
tion, and consists of two peninsulas joined by a neck of 
low land, about two miles across. The whole island is 
about thirty miles in circumference. The smaller por- 
tion, called Tairaboo, is the most fertile ; but as Tahiti 
proper has the best harbor, it is the most frequented, 
and is the seat of government. 


380 


HISTORY OF OTAHEITE. 


We know very little of the history of the island 
Soon after its discovery, a chief, who assumed the title 
of Pomare I., made himself king. His son, and then 
his grandson, succeeded him, and the present queen is 
his granddaughter; her name is Aimata, but she has 
taken the title of Pomare IV. She has established a^ 
constitution, and seven chiefs act as her ministers. For 
many years both the chiefs and people have professed 
Christianity, having been converted to a knowledge 
of the truth by Protestant missionaries. These mis- 
sionaries were undoubtedly earnest, pious men, but they 
have been unable altogether to check the vices which 
the lawless rovers, outcasts of every civilized nation in 
the world, have introduced among them. Notwith- 
standing the counteracting influences I have mentioned, 
civilization was making progress in the island, under 
the teaching of the Protestant missionaries, when the 
peace was disturbed by the arrival of two French Ro- 
man Catholic priests. They travelled about the coun- 
try endeavoring to teach their doctrines, but in no place 
did they find willing hearers. A few chiefs, who were 
in opposition to the government for political motives, 
gave them some countenance, and they were entertained 
at the house of the American consul. The people, 
however, resolved that they should not remain to at- 
tempt the corruption of the faith in which they had 
been instructed, and, rising in a body, compelled them 
to go on board a small vessel, which carried them to 
Wallis Island, two thousand miles off. The French, 
who had long desired the possession of some island in 
the Pacific inhabited by partly civilized people, were 
too glad to found a pretext on this circumstance for in- 
terfering in the affairs of Tahiti. A. frigate, the Venus y 


PRODUCTIONS OF THE ISLAND. 


381 


commanded by M. Du Petit Thouars, entered the har- 
bor of Papieti. The French captain, bringing his guns 
to bear on the town, demanded satisfaction for the out- 
rage committed on his countrymen. The queen was 
inclined to resist, but the foreign inhabitants, knowing 
that they should be the chief sufferers, collected the 
amount demanded, which was at least four times as 
much as any pecuniary loss the priests had incurred. 
He also forced a treaty on the queen, by which F rench- 
men were allowed to visit the island at pleasure, to 
erect churches, and to practise their religion. This was 
the commencement of "the complete subjugation of the 
Tahitians to the French. So much for the history of 
the island. 

The valleys, and a plain which extends from the sea- 
shore to the spurs of the mountains, are very fertile, 
and produce in great abundance all tropical plants. 
The climate is warm, but not enervating ; the scenery 
is in many parts very beautiful. Thus the natives are 
tempted to lead an easy and idle life, exerting but little 
their physical and mental powers. It is, indeed, to their 
credit that they do not altogether abandon themselves 
to indolence. They are by nature constituted to enjoy 
the beautiful scenes by which they are surrounded. 
Consequently, they delight in building their cottages in 
the most retired and lovely spots they can find. Their 
habitations are surrounded with fences, inside which 
they cultivate the taro., and sweet potatoes, the banana, 
the bread-fruit, the vi-apple, groves of orange and 
cocoa-nut trees, and at times the sugar-cane. Their 
habitations are of an oval shape — often fifty or sixty 
feet long, and twenty wide. They are formed of bam- 
boos planted about an inch apart in the ground. At 


382 


COSTUME OF NATIVES. 


the top of each wad thus formed, a piece of the hibiscus* 
a strong and light wood, is lashed with plaited rope. 
From the top of the four walls the rafters rise and 
meet in a ridge, those from the ends sloping like those 
from the sides. The rafters, which touch each other, 
are covered with small mats of the pandanus leaf, which, 
closely fitted together and lapping over each other, 
forms a durable roof, impervious to the rain. The 
earth, beaten hard, forms the floor. There are no reg- 
ular partitions, but mats serve the purpose when re- 
quired. Their bedsteads are made of a frame-work of 
cane raised two feet from the ground, and covered with 
mats, the most luxurious using pillows stuffed with aro- 
matic herbs. They have neither tables nor chairs. 
Their style of cooking is very simple : they bake their 
food in extemporized ovens filled with hot^ stones. 
Since my return I have often intended to propose hav- 
ing a pic-nic, and to cook all our food in Tahitian fash- 
ion. The dress of the people is undergoing a rapid and 
considerable change. Formerly a native cloak and kilt 
was all that was thought necessary ; now every sort of 
European clothing is in vogue. We had an example of 
this at a feast our English friend gave to a number of 
chiefs and their relations. Some of the gentlemen had 
on uniform coats, with nankeen trousers too short for 
them, and red or some colored slippers. Others had 
top-boots, red shirts, black breeches, sailors’ round jack- 
ets, and cocked hats. Some had high shoes and 
buckles, and others had no shoes at all; but all had 
shirts and trousers, or breeches. Some, indeed, were in 
complete costume : shoes, stockings, trousers, waistcoat, 
coat, shirt, with a huge neck-tie, — every garment of a 
different color, and often too large or too small — while 


MANNERS OF THE TAHITIANS. 


383 


a little straw hat was worn on the top of the head. 
Indeed, it was very evident that their clothes had been 
collected from all parts of the world, many garments 
pcobably having passed a probation in pawnbroker’s 
shops, or in those of old clothes-men in London or Liv- 
erpool. I was peculiarly struck by the total want of 
perception of eongruity as to dress exhibited both by 
men and women after they had abandoned their native 
costume, which, if somewhat scanty, was graceful and 
adapted to the climate. The women we saw were 
dressed in straw bonnets of huge proportions and ugly 
shape, and loose gowns of gay colors reaching from the 
throat to the ankles, with silk handkerchiefs tied round 
their necks. A few wore wreaths of flowers round their 
heads, which formed a picturesque part of their ancient 
costume. The people are said to be very honest, and 
always seemed in good humor, happy and cheerful, while 
we never saw them quarrelling or disputing with each 
other, far less coming to blows. Many of them are 
scrupulous in their attendance on religious worship ; the 
Sabbath is strictly kept by all, not even a boat being 
launched, while those who are seen abroad are decently 
clothed, going to or coming from church. What change 
French civilization may have worked in this state of 
things it is painful to reflect. We visited several schools, 
and, except that their skins were darker, the appearance 
of the children differed little from, that of the same class 
in any part of Europe, while they appeared in no way 
wanting in intelligence. In fact, from all we saw and 
heard, we came to the conclusion that the inhabitants of 
the islands of Polynesia are generally as capable of a 
high state of education and civilization as the people of 
any other race, while their minds are peculiarly suscep- 


384 DEPARTURE OF OUR MISSIONARY FRIENDS. 

tible of religious instruction. Our fellow-voyagers af 
forded us a good example of this. We much regretted 
that we could not converse familiarly with them. Our 
missionary friend had especially won our regard and 
esteem. 

They were now anxious to return to their own island, 
the season of the year being favorable for the voyage. 
It was with much regret that we heard of their intended 
departure. With a large concourse of natives and sev- 
eral English missionaries, we accompanied them down 
to the beach to see them off. Prayers were offered up 
by all present for their safety during their voyage. It 
was an impressive and affecting scene. Many wept as 
the fine old chief and his friends stepped on board. He 
could scarcely refrain from tears, nor could we. The 
frail canoe was launched forth into the deep, the sail 
was hoisted, and away they went on a voyage of three 
hundred miles, with full faith that the God who had 
hitherto preserved them would watch over them still. 

We did not at the moment believe that our departure 
was so near. The next day the Matchless, a Liverpool 
whaler, arrived in the harbor of Papieti. We met her 
master/ Captain Brown, who told us that he was bound 
for the coast of Japan, and that he should touch at the 
Bonin Islands, and probably fish off there some time. 
At this latter place we knew that Captain Frankland 
fully intended to call. How much his plans might be 
changed by our supposed loss we could not tell, but at 
all events we could not hope for a better opportunity of 
falling in again with the Triton. Captain Brown had 
lost several of his people. — some by sickness, others in 
a gale, and others by desertion. Hearing this, Mr. Brand 
offered his own and our services as far as the Bonin 


EMBARK ON BOARD THE WHALER. 


385 


Islands, or for a longer period, should we gain no ac- 
count of our own ship. They were without hesitation 
accepted. The Matchless remained but a few days, 
having called in merely to obtain water and a supply of 
fresh provisions. Our kind English friend, not content 
with having supported us all the time we remained at 
Tahiti, insisted on supplying us with as good an outfit 
as he could procure in the country. When we expressed 
our gratitude and unwillingness to be so great a burden 
on him, he smiled. “ What' is the use of property, un- 
less to do good with it ? ” he remarked. “ Do not say 
a word about the matter. When you reach home, 
should the obligation weigh too heavily on your con- 
science, you can send me back the value ; but I then 
shall be the loser, as it will show me that you will not 
believe in the friendship which induces me to bestow 
these trifles as a gift.” After this very kind speech we 
could do no more than sincerely and cordially thank 
him. The day before we embarked, he told us that he 
had been making inquiries about Captain Brown. “ I 
would rather that you had another man to sail with,” 
he observed. “ He is a person with two countenances, 
I am afraid. On shore he is mild, and obliging, and 
well behaved; but afloat he is, I am told, tyrannical 
and passionate, and often addicted to intemperance. 
You will, accordingly, be on your guard. You will 
probably remain only a few weeks with him, or I should 
advise you to give up the voyage, and wait for another 
opportunity of going westward.” This was not pleasant 
news, but we resolved on no account to delay our de- 
parture, and, thanking our friend for his warning, as well 
as for all the kindness we had received at his hands, we 
the next day went on board the Matchless . 

.33 


386 


SAIL IN THE MATCHLESS. 


She was a fine vessel, and well found with boats and 
gear. How great a contrast did she offer to the frail 
canoe in. which we had lately made so long a voyage! 
Hos^ strongly built and rigged!- How well calculated 
to stand the buffeting of the winds and waves ! How 
impossible did it seem that any harm could come to her ! 
I felt this, I own, as I walked her deck. She had al» 
ready taken twenty whales, or fish, as sailors wrongly 
call them. For some time Captain Brown was very 
civil and good-natured, and we began to hope that our 
friend had received a wrong account of him. 

Although we did not expect to meet with whales, 
men were always kept at the mast-heads on the look-out. 
I shall not forget the excitement of the scene when, 
after we had been a week at sea, the cry was uttered 
from aloft, “ There she spouts ! there she spouts ! ” 
In an instant everybody was alert. “ Where away ? 
where away?” was asked. The point where the whale 
had appeared was indicated. The boats were lowered ; 
the crews leaped into them. The master went in one, 
two mates in others. Off they pulled in hot chase. 
The whale sounded ; the men lay on their oars. In half 
an hour she rose again, throwing up a jet of sparkling 
foam into the air. Again the boats dashed on. The 
master’s headed the rest. His harpoon struck the mon- 
ster- One of the other boats got fast directly after. 
Then off went the whale at a terrific speed, dragging 
the boats after her directly away from the ship. Now 
she sounded, and all their lines were run out; but just 
as they would have to cut, up she came again. We fol- 
lowed under all sail. 

The day was drawing to a close when another whale 
was seen floating idly close to us. The possibility of 


FAST TO A WHALE. 


387 


obtaining another rich prize was not to be lost. Mr. 
Brand had served for three years in a whaler, and was 
now doing duty as mate. He ordered a boat to be 
manned. Jerry and I entreated that we might accom- 
pany him/ “ One only can go,” he answered ; “ I am 
very sorry.” The lot fell upon me. Jerry was never 
jealtus. “ Old Surley and I will take care of each 
other,” he answered. Away we went. A long, low 
island was in sight from the mast-head. The other 
boats could nowhere be seen. We got up to the whale 
before she sounded. I fancy she was asleep. The har- 
poon Mr. Brand shot into her awakened her up. Off 
she went in the direction of the land, at a great rate. I 
wished Jerry had been with us. It was so pleasant to 
be dragged along at so furious a rate, the foam flying 
over the bows of the boat. Formerly harpoons were 
always darted by the hand. JSTow firearms are used. 
The butt of the harpoon is placed in the barrel, and 
the rope is attached to it by a chain. Less skill and 
strength is required to strike the whale, but just as 
much skill and experience is requisite to avoid being 
struck in return and smashed to atoms by the wounded 
animal. Whenever the whale slackened her speed, we 
hauled up in the hope of getting another harpoon into 
her, but she was soon off again ; then she sounded, and 
we were nearly losing our line. Again she rose ; a sec- 
ond harpoon was run into her. Off she was again. At 
length blood mingled with the foam from her spouts. 
With fury she lashed the water around. “ Back ! back 
for your lives!” shouted Mr. Brand. Well it was that 
we got out of her way in time. One blow from those 
tremendous flukes would have destroyed us. 

Loudly we shouted as the monster lay an inanimate 


588 


LOSS OF OUR WHALE. 


mass on the surface of the deep. Then we looked 
about ns. We had approached close to the island, but 
darkness was settling down over the face of the waters. 
The ship was not to be seen. Clouds were gathering 
thickly in the sky. A gale, we feared, was brewing 
Our safest plan was to lie by all night under the lee of 
the whale. The wind came from the very direction 
where we believed the ship to be. We should never 
be able to pull against it. We had got out our har- 
poons from the dead whale, and were putting our gear 
in order, when, just as we were going to make fast to 
it, the huge mass sunk from our sight! We looked at 
each other with blank disappointment. It was gone — 
there could be no doubt about it, and was utterly irre- 
coverable. “Don’t grumble, my lads. We should 
have been worse off had we been fast to it with a gale 
blowing, and unable to cut ourselves adrift, exclaimed 
Mr. Brand. “ Let us thank the Almighty that we have 
escaped so great a danger. We’ll run under the lee of 
that island for the night, and try and find the ship in 
the morning.” Accordingly we bore away, and were 
in a short time in comparatively smooth water. Still 
the weather looked very threatening. We pulled in 
close to the breakers. “ Harry,” said Cousin Silas, “ I 
think we should know that island. I see an opening 
in the breakers, and a clump of trees on it which seems 
familiar to my eyes. We shall be better off on shore 
than here. I will take the boat in.” The men were 
somewhat astonished when they received the order to 
pull in for the land. We exactly hit the passage, and 
soon had the boat hauled up on the beach. “We will 
have a roof over our heads to-night, lads,” said Cousin 
Silas, leading the way, and in a quarter of an hour we 


REVISIT OUR ISLAND. 


382 


were seated under the shelter of the hut where we had 
lived for so many months ! It was strange that we had 
so unexpectedly fallen in with our own island again. 

We lit a blazing fire, and caught some wild fowl, and 
knocked down some cocoa-nuts, which were now in sea- 
son, and picked some bread-fruit, and, with the provis- 
ions we had in the boat, enjoyed a capital meal, which 
somewhat restored our spirits after the loss of our 
whale. As far as we could discover, no one had been 
there since we left the spot, — even our beds were ready 
for us. All hands rested soundly, and by the next 
morning the short-lived summer gale had blown itself 
out. I mounted to the top of our flag-staff, and to my 
no small satisfaction saw our ship lying-to five or six 
miles off to the westward. I was hurrying with the 
rest down to the boat, for I had no wish to be left again 
on the spot though I felt an affection for it, when 
Cousin Silas stopped me. “We have an important 
work to perform,” said he. “ Before we go we will 
obliterate our former directions and write fresh ones, 
saying where we are now going.” I saw the wisdom 
of this precaution in case the Triton might visit the 
place; and, accordingly, with our knives we carved in 
a few brief words a notice that we were well and bound 
for the Bonins. This done, we embarked and ran out 
towards the ship. 

On getting on board we found the captain in a des- 
perately bad humor at having been compelled by the 
gale to abandon the whales he had caught; and our 
account of our loss did not improve his temper. He 
swore and cursed most terribly at his ill-luck, a£ he 
chose to call it ; and, to console himself, opened his spirit 
iase and drank tumblf r after tumbler of rum and water 
33 * 


890 


DRUNKENNESS OF THE CAPTAIN. 


The result was soon apparent : he issued contradictory 
orders — quarrelled with the mates — struck and abused 
the men, and finally turned into his cot with his clothes 
on, where he remained for several days, calling loudly 
for the spirit bottle whenever he awoke. From this 
period he became an altered man from what he had at 
first appeared, and lost all control over himself. 

I will not dwell on the scenes which ensued on board 
the whaler. - They were disgraceful to civilized beings, 
and to men calling themselves Christians. Cousin 
Silas, and the doctor, and Ben, did all they could to 
counteract the evil, — the latter by exercising his influ- 
ence forward, and the others in endeavoring to check 
the officers, who seemed inclined to imitate the example 
of the master. Cousin Silas had charge of one watch, 
and he got Jerry and me placed in another, and he told 
us instantly to call him should we see any thing going 
wrong. Thus three or four weeks passed away. We 
managed during the time to kill two whales, and to get 
them stowed safely on board ; and this put the captain 
into rather better humor. However, the ship was often 
6teered very carelessly, and a bad look-out was kept. 

We were running under all sail one day when, as I 
was forward, I saw a line of white water ahead, which 
I suspected must be caused by a coral reef. I reported 
the circumstance. Fortunately there was but little 
wind. I looked out anxiously on either hand to dis- 
cover an opening. To the southward the line of foam 
terminated. The helm was put down, and the yards 
braced sharp up ; but in five minutes a grating noise 
wasv heard and the ship struck heavily. The seamen 
rushed from below, — they full well knew the meaning 
of that ominous sound, and they believed that the ship 


"WE STRIKE A ROCK BUT GET OFF. 


391 


was hopelessly lost. The captain at the time was 
unconscious of every thing. Cousin Silas hurried on 
deck, and, taking a glance round, ordered the helm to 
be put up again, the yards to be squared, and the 
courses which had been clewed up to be let fall. It 
was our only chance. The ship’s head swung round ; 
once more she moved — grating on, and, the doctor said, 
tearing away the work of myriads of polypi. “ Hurra ! 
hurra!” a shout arose from all forward. We were 
free. Away we flew. 

This narrow escape ought to have been a warning to 
all on board. Unhappily it was not. The same system 
was pursued as before. The other mates grew jealous 
of Cousin Silas, and did their utmost to counteract his' 
efforts. One night Jerry and I were on deck, actively 
moving about, followed by old Surley, looking out in 
every direction ; for it was very dark, and the officers * 
had been having a carouse. For some reason or other 
I was more than usually uneasy. So was Jerry. 

“I should not wonder,” said he, “that something will 
happen before long.” 

“ I hope not, if it is something bad,” said I ; “ but I’m 
not altogether happy. I think that I will go and call 
Mr. Brand.” 

“ What shall we say to him, though ? There will be 
no use rousing him up till we have something to tell 
him.” I agreed with Jerry, so we continued talking as 
before. 

“ What are you youngsters about there ? ” shouted thf 
first mate, who, although it was his watch, was half tipsy 
“ Go below and turn in ; I’ll not have chattering mon 
keys like you disturbing the discipline of the ship.* 
Jerry and I henitated about obeying, and Jerry whis 


392 


ONCE AGAIN ON SHORE. 


pered to me that he would go and call Mr. Brand. But 
the mate sung out, “ Mutiny ! mutiny ! Go to your own 
kennels, you young hounds ! ” and ordered some of the 
watch on deck to carry out his commands. We could 
not help ourselves, so we went below, and turning into 
our berths very soon fell asleep. 

How long we had been asleep I do not know. I was 
awoke by a terrific crash and loud cries and shrieks. 
Jerry and I sprung up, so indeed did everybody below, 
and rushed on deck. It was very dark ; but from the 
way the ship heaved and lurched, and the sheets of foam 
which flew over her, we knew that she was ambi?| the 
breakers, and striking hard on a reef. The fore-mast 
'and main-mast had gone by the board. The mizzen- 
mast alone stood. That fell soon after we got on deck, 
crushing several people beneath it. Anxiously we 
hunted about shouting for Cousin Silas, followed by old 
Surley, who since we came on board scarcely ever left 
our heels. We naturally sought him for advice. It 
was indeed a relief to us to find him unhurt. In a short 
time we discovered the doctor and Ben. We clustered 
together, holding on by the bulwarks; for every now 
and then a sea came and washed over the decks, and 
we ran great risk of being carried away. Nothing could 
we see on either side beyond the white, roaring breakers. 
Cousin Silas said that he was certain we must have 
been driven some way on the reef, or the sea would 
have broken more completely over us, and no one could 
have hoped to escape. Several people had already 
been washed overboard, and had been lost or killed by 
the falling masts ; but who they were we could not tell. 
What, also, had become of the captain we did not know 
He had not, that we could discover, come on deck. 


HOPELESS CONDITION. 


393 


Perhaps, all the time he was helow, unconscious of what 
had occurred. All we 2ould do was to cling on where 
we were, till with daylight we should be able to tell our 
position. Every now and then we felt the ship lifting, 
and it appeared as if she was driving gradually over the 
reef. Another danger, however, now presented itself, — 
we might drive over the reef altogether, and sink on the 
other side ! We strained our eyes through the dark- 
ness ; but, surrounded as we were with spray, it was 
impossible to distinguish the- shore, even though it might 
be near at hand. If there was no land, our lot would 
indeed be sad ; for, wherever we were, it was clear that 
the ship would be totally lost, and, as far as we could 
discover, all our boats were destroyed. After two or 
three hours passed in dreadful suspense, though it ap- 
peared as if the whole night must have elapsed, the ship 
became more steady, and the sea broke over her less 
violently. “We must get a raft made,” exclaimed 
Cousin Silas. The men seemed to look instinctively to 
him for orders, and willingly obeyed him. All hands 
set to work, some to collect the spars which had not 
been washed overboard, others to cut away the bulwarks 
and to get off the hatches, — indeed, to bring together 
every thing that would serve to form a raft. Dark as 
it was they worked away ; for they knew that when the 
tide again rose the ship might be washed over the reef 
and sink, or go to pieces where she lay. How eagerly 
we watched for daylight to complete our work ! The 
dawn at length came ; and as the mists of night rolled 
off, we saw before us a range of lofty mountains, of pic- 
turesque shapes, rising out of a plain, the shore of which 
was not moi*e than a quarter of a mile off. As the sun 
rose, a rich landscape was revealed to us, of cocoa-nut 


394 


LAUNCH A RAFT. 


groves, and taro plantations, and sparkling streams, and 
huts sprinkled about in the distance. 

“At all events we have got to a beautiful country,* 
observed Jerry, as he looked towards it. 

“ One from which we shall be thankful to escape, 
and where our lives will be of little value unless we can 
defend ourselves from the inhabitants, who are, I sus- 
pect, among the most blood-thirsty of any of the natives 
of Polynesia,” answered Cousin Silas. “ However, the 
sooner we can get on shore, and establish ourselves in 
some good position for defence, the better.” 

The raft, which had been constructed with the idea 
that we might require it for a long voyage, was a very 
large one, and, having launched it, we found that it 
could not only carry all the ship’s company, but a number 
of other things. We found an ample supply of arms 
and ammunition — most valuable articles under our 
present circumstances. We got them all up, as well as 
our clothes and every thing valuable in the ship which 
could at once be laid hands on; we also took a supply 
of provisions, that we might for a time be independent 
of the natives. One thing more was brought up — that 
was, the still senseless body of the captain. There he 
lay, totally unconscious of the destruction liis careless- 
ness had brought on the ship intrusted to his care. In 
silence and sadness we shoved off from the ship which 
had borne us thus far across the ocean. Many of our 
number were missing ; two of the mates and six seamen 
had been killed by the falling of the masts, or washed 
overboard. 

We paddled across the smooth water inside the reef 
as fast as we could, hoping to land before any of the 
natives had collected to oppose us. All our people had 


LAND IN SAFETY. 


395 


muskets, and some had cutlasses, so that we were able 
to show a bold front to any one daring to attack us. 
As we neared the shore we saw in the distance a num- 
ber of people with bows and arrows and clubs, hurrying 
towards our party. We soon ran the raft aground, and, 
leaping on shore, were led by Cousin Silas to the sum- 
mit of a rocky hill close to where we were. 

The savages advanced with threatening gestures 
None of them had fire-arms. We thus felt sure that, if 
they ventured to attack us, we should make a good fight 
of it. Cousin Silas called four of the men to the front, 
and ordered them to fire over the heads of the savages, 
to show them thejpower we possessed. The savages 
halted at the sound, and looked about to see .what had 
become of the balls they heard whistling above them. 
While they hesitated, Cousin Silas, cutting down a 
green bough, went to the brow of the hill and waved it 
over his head — a token of a friendly disposition, under- 
stood in all those regions. To our great satisfaction, 
we saw the savages tearing down boughs, which they 
waved in the same manner. Among the whaler’s crew 
was a Sandwich Islander who spoke the language of 
many of the people in those regions. He was told to 
try and see if he could make them understand him. 
Waving a bough he went forward to meet them, while 
the rest of us stood ready to fire should any treachery 
be practised. They did not seem, however, to have 
meditated any, and met him in a perfectly friendly man- 
ner. After talking to them for some time, he came 
back and said he had arranged every thing. He told 
them that we were voyaging to our own country, and 
that we had landed here to await the arrival of another 
ship If we were treated well, our friends would return 


396 


ENCOUNTERED BY SAVAGES. 


the compliment ; but that if otherwise, they would cer 
tainly avenge us. This, undoubtedly, was far from 
strictly true ; but I have no doubt that it had the effect 
of making the savages disposed to treat us hospitably. 
The savages on this put down their arms and advanced 
towards us with friendly gestures. Mr. Brand, conse- 
quently, went to meet them, ordering us, at the same 
time, to keep our arms ready in case of treachery. 
The savages were very dark. Some of them, whom 
we took to be chiefs, wore turbans over their frizzled- 
out hair, and mantles and kilts of native cloth. They 
shook hands with Mr. Brand in a very friendly way, 
and invited us all to their houses ; but he replied that he 
preferred .building a house where we had landed, though 
he would be obliged to them for a supply of food. The 
natives replied very politely that the food we should 
have, and that they hoped we should change our minds 
regarding the place where we proposed building a 
house. 

After some further conversation- the chiefs and their 
followers retired, and Mr. Brand advised all hands to 
set to work to fortify the hill where we were posted, and 
to bring up the greater part of the raft, and every thing 
on it, to our fort. When this was done, we made a small 
raft on which we could go off to the wreck, hoping to 
bring away every thing of value before she went to 
pieces. The natives watched our proceedings from a 
distance, but our fire-arms evidently kept them in awe, 
and prevented them from coming nearer. As soon as 
they had completed the raft, three of the whaler’s crew 
were eager to go off to the wreck ; but Mr. Brand ad- 
vised them to wait till just before daylight the following 
morning, when they might hope to perform the trip 


TREACHERY OF THE NATIVES. 


397 


without being perceived. He warned them that the 
savages wefe especially treacherous, and could in no 
way be depended on. Five or six of them, I think it 
was, laughed at him, and asking why they should fear 
a set of black savages, expressed their intention of 
going on board at once. Accordingly, carrying only a 
couple of muskets with them, they shoved off from the 
shore, and without much difficulty got up to the wreck. 
It was then low-water, but the tide was rising. Wo 
watched them on board, and then they disappeared 
below. We waited anxiously to see them commence 
their return, but they did not appear. “They have 
broken into the spirit-room, I fear,” remarked Cousin 
Silas. “If so, I fear that they will be little able to 
find their way back.” 

An hour passed away. We began to- fear some dis- 
aster had befallen them. While watching the wreck, 
we saw from behind a wooded point to the right a large 
canoe make its appearance, then another, and another, 
till a dozen were collected. It was too probable that 
some treachery was intended. We fired three muskets 
in quick succession, in hopes of calling the attention of 
the seamen. No sooner did the savages hear the sound 
of the fire-arms than they paddled away towards the 
wreck. They had got nearly up to it, when the sea- 
men came on deck, and stared wildly about them, 
making all sorts of frantic gestures. Seeing the canoes, 
they fired their muskets at them, but hit no one ; and 
then throwing down their weapons on the deck, they 
doubled their fists, and with shouts of laughter struck 
out at their approaching enemies. The savages hesi- 
tated a moment, at the discharge of the muskets, but 
finding that they were not again fired at, they paddled 
34 


898 


END OF THE WHALER. 


on at a rapid rate, and getting alongside the vessel, 
swarmed in numbers on board. We saw that the 
tipsy seamen who made a show of fighting were speedily 
knocked down, but what afterwards became of them we 
could not tell. The savages were evidently eagerly 
engaged in plundering the ship, and hurriedly loaded 
their canoes with the things they collected. They, of 
course, knew that the tide was rising, and that their 
operations might be speedily stopped. Some of the 
canoes, deeply laden, had already shoved off, when we 
saw the remainder of the savages make a rush to the 
side of the vessel ; bright flames burst forth from every 
hatchway ; several loud reports were heard ; then one 
louder than the rest, and the ill-fated ship, and all who 
remained on board, were blown into the air ! 


OUR ESCAPE FROM THE ISLAND. 


399 


CHAPTER XIX. 

OUR ESCAPE FROM THE ISLAND. 

After the catastrophe I have described, the ship con- 
tinued to burn furiously — the oil in her hold helping 
to feed the conflagration. The savages who were 
already in their canoes paddled rapidly away ; many 
must have lost their lives, as several canoes appear to 
have been destroyed. Numbers of the unfortunate 
wretches, wounded by the explosion, were swimming 
about, trying to get hold of their canoes or of pieces of 
the wreck ; while others, who had escaped injury, were 
making for the shore. But they had watchful enemies 
in the sea looking for them; the water swarmed with 
sharks, and several, unable to defend themselves, were 
caught by the voracious monsters. What became of 
our poor countrymen, whether they were blown up with 
the ship or carried off by the savages, we could not tell. 

By this accident our numbers were sadly diminished, 
as was our hope of obtaining what we might require 
from the wreck. Cousin Silas took occasion to urge 
upon the remainder of the men the importance of keep- 
ing together for mutual support; but, from the way the 
whaler’s crew took his advice, I saw that they were in 
K> way inclined to follow it. It was with difficulty 
even that he could persuade them to keep watch at 
night. That was a trying period with us. Cousin 


400 


THE CAPTAIN’S DEATH. 


Silas and I, with two of the crew, kept our watch ; and 
Ben, and the doctor, and Jerry, with two others, watched 
the rest of the night. We kept our ears and eyes wide 
open, and fancied that we could see under the shadow 
of the trees the savages prowling about us, and could 
hear their suppressed whispers ; but if such was the 
case, when they found that we were on the alert, they 
refrained from attacking us. 

That first night the captain awoke from his stupor, 
and, sitting up, inquired what had occurred. When he 
was told, somewhat abruptly, by one of his crew that 
the ship was cast away, that the mates and several of 
the men were lost, and that we were surrounded by 
savages ready to destroy us, the account had so great 
an effect on him, that it seemed to drive him out of his 
mind. He shrieked out, “ It is false ! it is false — 
mutiny ! mutiny ! ” and continued to rave in the most 
outrageous and dreadful manner. Thus he continued 
for many hours. The doctor said he was attacked with 
delirium tremens, brought on by his intemperate habits ; 
and thus lie continued, without being allowed a moment 
of consciousness to be aware of his awful state, till he 
was summoned hence to stand before the Almighty Judge, 
whose laws, to the last moment of his earthly probation, 
he had systematically outraged. We buried him just 
outside our fort, at night, that the savages might not 
observe that our number was still further reduced. 

Three or four days passed away. Both night and 
day we were equally on the alert, but the stock of pro- 
visions we had brought with us from the wreck , was 
growing very low, and it was necessary to devise some 
plan for obtaining more. The savages, on the other 


TREACHEROUS ATTACK. 401 

hand, finding that they could not easily surprise us, 
changed their tactics, and once more came towards us 
in friendly guise, bringing fruits and vegetables, and 
pigs and poultry. Had they been aware of our starv- 
ing condition, they could not have hit upon a better 
plan to win our confidence. Still, however, Cousin Sila? 
did not trust to them* “ They may really be friendly/ 
he remarked, “ and let us behave towards them as if 
they were ; but never let us for a moment be off our 
guard.” When, however, the natives began to spread 
out their banquet before the very eyes of the famished 
sailors, and invited them to come down and partake of 
it, very few could resist the temptation. One after 
another went down, till only the doctor and Ben, Jerry 
and I, with Cousin Silas, remained on the hill. Even 
old Surley thought he might as well join the party; 
but after he had gobbled up a good supply of pork 
which some of the sailors gave him, he hurried back to 
us. We watched anxiously what would next happen. 
In a short time Jerry exclaimed that he thought it was 
a pity we should not benefit by the feast ; and before 
Cousin Silas could stop him he had run down the hill 
and was among the savages. At that moment what 
was our horror to see the natives start up, each dealing 
the white man nearest him a terrific blow on the head 
No second one was needed. Every one of our late 
companions lay killed upon the ground. Jerry started 
back, and endeavored to run to us, but a savage caught 
him by the shoulder, and (how my blood ran cold !) I 
thought would brain him on the spot. Jerry looked up 
in his face with an imploring glance. Something he 
said or did, or the way he looked, seemed to arrest the 
6avage’s arm. Perhaps he may have reminded him of 
34 * 


402 SUSPECT THAT WE ARE AMOMG THE FIJIS. 

a son he had lost. He lifted up his club, but this time 
it was to defend his young prisoner from the attack of 
another savage. He then took him by the hand, and 
led him to a distance from the rest. Jerry looked back 
earnestly at us, but he saw that, if he attempted to es- 
cape from his protector, he should probably be killed 
by one of the others ; so he accompanied him without 
resistance. The rest of the savages, collecting the dead 
bodies, fastened ropes to their legs, and dragged them 
away, with loud shouts and songs of triumph. 

To our surprise, they did not molest us. They saw 
that we retained the fire-arms, and probably thought 
that they might take us at an advantage another time 
without risk to themselves. We had still a good supply 
of powder and balls ; so, loading all the muskets, we 
prepared for an attack. Horrified as I had been at the 
slaughter of our late shipmates, my great anxiety was 
about Jerry. I hoped that his life might be safe, but it 
was a sad fate to be kept in captivity by such treacher- 
ous and blood-thirsty savages as these had shown them- 
selves to be. I asked Mr. Brand where he thought we 
were. He replied that he had no doubt, from the appear- 
ance and conduct of the savages, that we had been 
wrecked on one of the outlying Fiji Islands. He told 
me that the inhabitants, a few years back, had all been 
the very worst cannibals in the Pacific, but that of late 
years Protestant missionaries had gone among them, 
and that in some of the islands, of which there were 
eighty or ninety inhabited, the whole population had, he 
understood, become Christians. Still, however, a large 
number, among whom the light of truth had not been 
introduced, retained their old habits and customs ; and 
among some of these we had unfortunately fallen. Of 


DISCOVERY OP PROVISIONS. 


403 


course, also, we could not but be excessively anxious 
about our own fate. How could we hope to hold out 
without food, should the savages attack us ? The night 
passed away, however, in silence. Our enemies were 
evidently abiding their time. > 

It was just daybreak when Ben Yool started up. “ [ 
can’t stand it any longer,” he exclaimed. “ I’ll just go 
and see if those savages left any of their provisions 
behind them.” Without waking Mr. Brand to know 
what he would say, off he went down the hill. How 
anxiously I waited his return ! I was afraid that some 
of the savages might be lying in wait, and might catch 
him. My ear watched for the sound of his footsteps. 
Five — ten minutes — a quarter of an hour passed 
away. At last I thought I heard the breathing of a 
person toiling up a hill. It might be a savage, though. 
I kept my rifle ready, in case it should prove an enemy. 
To my great satisfaction it proved to be Ben. He came 
loaded with bread-fruits and cocoa-nuts, and what was 
undoubtedly the hind quarters of a pig, while a calabash 
full of water hung round his neck. 

“ I was afraid that I should have to come back with- 
out any thing for my trouble,” said he. “Just then, 
under a tree, I stumbled over these provisions. How 
they came there I don’t know, but there they are, and 
let us be thankful.” 

We roused up Mr. Brand and the doctor. They 
carefully examined the provisions, and agreed that they 
were very good of their sort ; so we set to, and made a 
very hearty breakfast. From the place where Ben 
found the food, Mr. Brand was of opinion that it had 
been left there expressly for us, but whether by a friend 
or by our enemies, for the purpose of entrapping us, it 
was difficult to say. 


404 


WRECK OF PIRATE SCHOONER. 


The day, as it advanced, threatened to be very 
stormy. The clouds came driving across the sky, and a 
gale began to blow, such as is rarely seen in those lati- 
tudes. It gave us rest, however; for the natives are 
not fond of venturing out in such weather, and we had 
less fear of being attacked. During the night we were 
aroused by hearing a gun fired. We peered out sea- 
ward through the darkness, — another gun was heard, 
and a flash was seen. It Was evidently from a vessel 
in distress. It was just before day-break. The dawn' 
came and revealed to us a schooner, with all her canvas 
gone, drifting towards the breakers, which rolled in with 
terrific power, a quarter of a mile from the shore. We 
gazed at the vessel ; we all knew her at a glance, even 
through the gloom. She was the pirate schooner. On 
she drove. In another instant she was among the foam- 
ing breakers.. Her time had come at last. We could 
hear the shrieks and despairing cries of the wretched 
men on board. She struck very near the spot where 
the whaler had been lost. Over the reef she drove. 
We could see the people one after the other washed 
overboard, and engulfed by the foaming waters. To 
help them would have been impossible, even had we not 
had to consider our own safety. At last one man ap- 
peared in the clear water inside the breakers. He 
seemed to be swimming, though he advanced but slowly, 
and we saw that he was lashed to a piece of timber. At 
last he drifted on shore. 

“ I cannot see the poor wretch die without help, pi- 
rate though he may be,” exclaimed Cousin Silas, run- 
ning down to the beach. I followed him. The log of 
timber and its freight reached the shore at the moment 
we got down to it.- There was no look of recognition. 


DREADFUL FATE OF THE PIRATE CREW. 405 


We ran into the water, and cast loose the body ; but our 
undertaking had been useless. A corpse lay before us ; 
and though the features were distorted, we recognized 
them as those of Captain Bruno. We had just time to 
hurry back to our fort, when we saw a body of savages 
coming-round a point at a little distance off. 

The schooner had, in the mean time, beaten over the 
reef, and was drifting across the channel, when, as she 
got within a hundred yards of the beach, she went down, 
leaving a dozen or more of her crew floating on the sur- 
face. Most of them struck out boldly for the shore; 
but no sooner did they reach it, believing themselves 
safe, than the clubs of the savages put an end to their 
existence. In a short time not one remained alive of 
the whole pirate crew. It seemed strange that the sav- 
ages had allowed so long a time to elapse without at- 
tacking us, nor could we in any way account for their 
conduct, unless under the supposition that they were 
afraid of our fire-arms. To show them that our wea- 
pons were in good order, and that we were likely to use 
them effectually, we every now and then, when we saw 
any of the natives near, fired a volley in the air. 

When we had gone down on the beach, on the occa- 
sion of the wreck of the schooner, we observed a canoe 
thrown upon the shore. She was evidently one of those 
deserted by the savages when the whaler blew up. We 
agreed that, if we could get her repaired, she might 
prove the means of our escape. The first thing was to 
cut some paddles. This we had no great difficulty in 
doing, from the trees growing around us. Watching 
their opportunity, when no savages were near, Mr. Brand 
and Ben went down to examine her. On their return 
they reported that she was perfectly sound, and required 


406 MYSTERIOUSLY SUPPLIED WITH PROVISIONS. 


little or nothing done to her. It was a question with us, 
however, whether we should commit ourselves to the 
deep at once, and endeavor to reach some more hospi- 
table island, or wait for the possibility of a ship passing 
that way, and going off to her. 

We had scarcely consumed our provisions, when at 
daybreak one morning we observed a basket under the 
very tree where Ben had before discovered what he 
brought us. He again went down, and returned with 
a similar supply. We considered this matter, and could 
not believe that any treachery was intended, but, on the 
contrary, we began to hope that we had some secret 
friend among the savages. Who he was, and how he 
came to take an interest in us was the question. Seve- 
ral days more passed away. Each alternate night pro- 
visions were left for us. At length I resolved to endea- 
vor to discover our friend. My great object was that 
I might be able by his means to gain tidings of Jerry, 
and perhaps to rescue him from the hands of his cap- 
tors, for I continued to hope that he had not been put 
to death. I explained my plan to Mr. Brand. After 
some hesitation, he consented to allow me to adopt it. 
“ I feel with you, Harry, that I could never bring myself 
io leave the island without Jerry,” he answered ; “and 
probably the savages, should they catch you, would be 
tess likely to injure you than any of us.” 

That night, soon after it was dark, I crept down to 
the tree, and concealing myself among some bushes 
which grew near, waited the result. I felt very sleepy, 
ind could at times scarcely keep myself awake. At 
fost I heard footsteps, as if a person were cautiously 
approaching the tree. A man dressed, as far as I could 
distinguish, like a chief, with a turban on his head, de* 


DISCOVER OUR SECRET FRIEND. 


407 


posited a basket in the usual spot. I sprang out and 
seized his hand. At first he seemed much surprised, if 
not alarmed ; but, recognizing me, he patted me on the 
head, and uttered some words in a low voice, which I 
could not understand, but their tone was mild and kind. 
Then he put out his hand, and I distinctly felt him 
make the sign of the cross on my brow, and then he 
made it on his own. I no longer had any doubt that 
he was a Christian. I longed to ask him about Jerry, 
but I found that he did not understand a word of Eng- 
lish. It was so dark, also, that he could scarcely see 
my gestures. I tried every expedient to make him 
comprehend my meaning. I ran on, and then seized 
an imaginary person, and conducted him back to the 
fort. I raised my hands in a supplicating attitude. I 
shook his hands warmly, to show how grateful I should 
be if he granted my request. At last I began to hope 
that he understood me. He shook my hands and nod- 
ded, and then, assisting me to carry the basket close up 
to the fort, hurriedly left me. 

This circumstance considerably raised the spirits of 
all the party, for we felt that we had a friend where we 
least expected to find one. If, however, we could but 
get back Jerry, we resolved to embark. Perhaps the 
Christian chief might help us. Had we been able to 
speak the language, our difficulties would have been 
much lessened. Here, again, we had another example 
of the beneficial results of missionary labors. How the 
chief had been brought to a knowledge of the truth we 
could not tell, but that his savage nature had been 
changed was evident. Perhaps there might be others 
like him on the island. How it was that we had re- 
mained so long unmolested was another puzzle. Per- 


408 


APPEARANCE OF A SHIP. 


haps it was owing to some superstitious custom of the 
natives, Mr. Brand observed. Perhaps we were ta- 
booed ; or, as we had, as they might suppose, existed so 
long without food, they might look upon us as beings of 
u superior order, and be afraid to injure us. Our pa- 
tience meantime was sorely tried. We were afraid also 
l hat the natives might discover our canoe, and carry il 
olf. 

As may be supposed, our eyes took many an anxious 
glance seaward, in hopes of being greeted by the sight 
of a vessel. Nor were they disappointed. A large 
ship was discovered one forenoon standing in for the 
land. How the sight made our hearts beat ! The tjine 
had arrived for us to endeavor to make our escape, — 
but could we go and leave Jerry? 

“ Tes ; we may induce the captain to come and look 
for him,” said Cousin Silas. 

“ But suppose he will not,” observed the doctor. 

“Then I, for one, will come back in the canoe, and 
not rest till I find him,” exclaimed Ben Yool. “They 
can only kill and eat me at the worst, and they’ll find 
I’m a precious tough morsel.” 

“ I’ll keep you company, Ben,” said I, taking his 
hand. 

So it was agreed that we were to embark at once. 
Taking our riiles and muskets, the paddles in our hands, 
and some provisions in our pockets, we hurried down to 
the beach. We had got the canoe in the water, when 
a shout attracted our attention. Old Surley gave a 
bark of delight, and ran off. “ That is Jerry’s voice,” 
I exclaimed, hurrying to meet him. At a distance were 
several men and boys in hot pursuit. Jerry was some- 
what out of breath, so I took his hand and helped him 


jerry’s escape. 


409 


along, without asking questions. He, Surley, and I, 
leaped into the canoe together ; Mr. Brand, Ben, and 
the doctor seized the paddles, and shoving her off into 
deep water, away we steered towards the passage through 
the reef. Scarcely had we got a couple of hundred 
yards off before the savages reached the shore. They 
instantly fitted their arrows to their bows ; but I, seiz- 
ing my rifle, made signs that if they let fly I would fire 
in return. They understood the hint, and ran off along 
the beach to a spot where a number of their canoes 
were hauled up. This made us redouble our efforts to 
escape. We darted through the passage just as a dozen 
canoes or more left the shore. We had a terribly short 
start of them, and they paddled nearly twice as fast as 
we could. 

“ Shall I fire and give notice to the ship ? ” I asked 
Mr. Brand. I was sitting in the bow of the canoe fac- 
ing forward. 

“ Yes, yes, Harry, fire,” he answered. “ They will 
hear us on board by this time.” I took one of the mus- 
kets and fired in the air. Directly after, we saw the 
ship crowding more sail, and standing directly for us. 

“ I thought so all along, and now I’m certain of it,” 
exclaimed Ben, almost jumping up in his seat. “I 
know that starboard top-mast studden-sail, and no mis- 
take. She’s the Triton ! Hurra ! hurra ! ” 

“ You’re right Ben,” said Mr. Brand. “ I felt sure 
also that she was the Triton, but still was afraid my 
hopes might have in some way deceived me. But give 
way, give way, or the savages will be up to us before 
we are alongside her.” The caution was not unneces- 
sary, for the canoes of the savages had already got with- 
in range of our rifles. 

35 


410 


REGAIN THE TRITON. 


t “ Could’nt you bring down a few of the niggers, 
sir ? ” asked Ben. “ It will only serve them right, and 
mayhap will stop their way a little.” 

“ No, no ; never shed blood as long as it can be 
avoided,” answered Cousin Silas. “ These very savages 
who are now seeking our lives may ere long be shown 
the light of truth, and be converted and live. See, I 
believe they have already made us out on board the 
Triton. They are firing to frighten off the savages. 

As he spoke, three guns were fired in quick succes- 
sion from the Triton. The noise and smoke, to which 
the savages were? evidently unaccustomed, made them 
desist paddling. We redoubled our efforts, and shot 
ahead. After a little hesitation, the savages once more 
pressed on after us, but happily at that moment the 
ship again fired. Mr. Brand at the same time seized 
the muskets and discharged them one after the other 
over the heads of our pursuers. Again they wavered, 
some even turned their canoes about, two or three only 
advanced slowly, the rest ceased paddling altogether. 

' This gave us a great advantage, and without waiting to 
let Mr. Brand reload the muskets, we paddled away 
with our hopes of escape much increased. Some 
minutes elapsed, when the courage of the savages re- 
turned, and fearing that we might altogether escape 
them, they all united in the pursuit. The breeze, how- 
ever, freshened, the ship rapidly clove the waters, and 
before the canoes had regained the distance they had 
lost, we were alongside. Loud shouts of welcome broke 
from every quarter of the Triton as we clambered up 
+ her side. 

I will not attempt to describe the meeting of Jerry 
and his father. Captain Frankland, indeed, received us 


STEER FOR JAPAN. 


411 


all most kindly and heartily. For a long time he had 
given us up as lost, but still he had continued the search 
for us. The Dove had been captured by the American 
corvette, and soon afterwards he had fallen in with her. 
From the pirates on board the little schooner he dis- 
covered that we were on board the large one. He had 
pursued her for several months, till at length, passing 
our island, he had observed our flag-staff and our hut 
still standing. This was, fortunately, after our second 
visit, when we had altered the inscriptions on the trees. 
The gale which had wrecked the pirate had driven the 
Triton somewhat to the southward of her course for the 
Bonins, whither she was bound to look for us ; and thus, 
by a wonderful coincidence, she appeared at the very 
moment her coming was of most importance to rescue 
us from slavery, if not, more probably, from a horrible 
death. 

The savages, when they saw that we were safe on 
board the ship, finally ceased from the pursuit. Cap- 
tain Frankland kept the ship steadily on her course, 
ordering five or six guns to be fired without shot over 
their heads, as a sign of the white man’s displeasure. 
After the first gun, the savages turned round their canoes, 
and, in terror and dismay, made the best of their way to 
the shore. The Triton was then steered for the coast 
of Japan. 

It was not till some days afterwards that Jerry gave 
me an account of what had befallen him among the 
savages. “ I was in a horrible fright when the savage 
dragged me off,” he said. “ I thought that he was keep- 
ing me to kill at his leisure, just as a housewife does a 
pig or a turkey, when he wanted to eat me. I cannot 
even now describe the dreadful scenes I witnessed when 


412 


jerry’s adventures. 


the cannibal monsters cooked and devoured the poor 
fellows they had so treacherously slaughtered. What 
was my dismay, also, when a few days afterwards some 
more bodies of white men were brought in ! I thought 
that they had killed you all ; and it was only when I 
found that there were ten instead of five bodies, that I 
hoped I might have been mistaken. 

“ The man who had captured me treated me kindly, 
and fed me well. At first I thought he might have had 
his reasons (and very unsatisfactory they would have 
been to me) for doing the latter; but this idea, I ban- 
ished (as it was not a pleasant one and took away my 
appetite) when I found that he did not partake of the 
horrible banquets with his countrymen. He was con- 
stantly visited also in the evening by a chief, who evi- 
dently looked on them with disgust, and always looked 
at me most kindly, and spoke to me in the kindest 
tones, though I could not understand what he said. 
One evening after he and my master had* been talking 
some time, he got up and made the sign of the cross on 
my brow, and then on his own, and then on that of my 
master. Then I guessed that I must have fallen among 
Christians, and that this was the reason I was treated 
so kindly. I understood also by the signs he made that 
you all were well, and that he would do his best to pro- 
tect you. 

“ One day he came and told me to follow him into 
the woods. My master’s hut was some way from the 
other habitations, so that we could go out without of 
necessity being observed. It was, however, necessary 
to be cautious. What was my delight when he took 
_ me to a height, and showing me a vessel in the dis- 
tance, pointed to the fort, and signed to me to run 


A SINKING JUNK. 


413 


and join you as fast as I could! You know all the 
rest.” 

Jerry at different times afterwards gave me very inter- 
esting accounts of various things he had observed among 
the savages of the Fijis, but I have not now space to 
repeat them. 

How delightful it was to find ourselves once more on 
board the fine steady old ship, with a well-disciplined, 
crew, and kind, considerate officers ! Our sufferings and 
trials had taught us to appreciate these advantages; 
and I believe both Jerry and I were grateful for our 
preservation, and for the blessings we ’now enjoyed. 

We had a very quick and fine run till we were in the 
latitude of Loo-Clioo. A gale then sprung up, — rather 
unusual, I believe, at that season of the year. It lasted 
two days. When the weather cleared, we saw a huge, 
lumbering thing tumbling about at the distance of three 
or four miles from us. It looked, as Fleming the gun- 
ner remarked, “ like a Martello tower adrift.” 

“ If you’d said she was one of those outlandish Chi- 
nese junk affairs, you’d have been nearer the truth,” 
observed Mr. Pincott the carpenter, who, as of old, never 
lost an opportunity of taking up his friend. “ By the 
way she rolls, I don’t think she’ll remain above water 
much longer.” 

Captain Frankland thought the same, and making 
sail we stood towards her. By that time she was evi- 
dently settling down. The ship was hove-to, the boats 
were lowered, and, in spite of a good deal of sea which 
then was on, we ran alongside. A number of strange- 
looking figures, in colored silks and cottons, dressed 
more like women than men, crowded the side. Some 
leaped into the water in their fright ; others we received 
35 * 


414 


RESCUE THE CREW OF THE JUNK. 


into the boats, and conveyed them to the ship. Two 
trips had been made, when Mr. Pincott, who was in the 
boat with me, said he did not think she would float till 
we came back. At that moment a person appeared at 
the stern of the vessel handsomely dressed. He was a 
tine-looking old gentleman. He must have seen his 
danger, and he seemed to be bidding his countrymen 
farewell. I could not bear the thought of leaving him ; 
so I begged Mr. Pincott to pull back, and signing him' 
to descend by one of the rope-ladders hanging over the 
stern, we received him safely into the boat. Scarcely 
had we done so, when the junk gave a heavy lurch. 
“ There she goes, poor thing ! ” exclaimed Pincott. 
“Well, she didn’t look as if she was made to swim. 
But pull away, my lads — pull away. We may be 
back in time to pick up some of the poor fellows.” It 
was heart-rending to see the poor wretches struggling 
in the water, and holding out their hands imploringly 
to us, and yet not be able to help them. Many very 
soon sunk ; others got hold of gratings and bits of 
wreck, and endeavored to keep themselves afloat, but 
some of those monsters of the deep — the sharks — got 
in among them, and very soon committed horrible havoc 
among the survivors. The moment we were able to 
get the people we had in the boat up the ship’s side, we 
returned to the scene of the catastrophe. We pulled 
about as rapidly as we could, hauling in all we could 
get hold of still swimming about, but some were drawn 
down even before our very eyes, and altogether a good 
many must have been lost. 

The old gentleman I had been the means of saving 
proved to be the chief person on board. We made out 
that the junk was from Loo-Choo, but that he himself 


ARRIVAL IN LOO-CHOO. 


416 


belonged t.o some town in Japan. This we discovered 
by showing him a map, and from the very significant 
signs he made. While we were making all sorts of 
pantomimic gestures, Mr. Renshaw suggested that a . lad 
we had on board, supposed to be a Chinese, might per- 
haps be able to talk with him. Chin Chi had been 
picked up from a wreck at sea on a former voyage of 
the Triton , and had now made some progress in his 
knowledge of English. Chin Chi was brought aft with 
some reluctance. What, however, was our astonishment 
to see the old gentleman gaze at him earnestly for some 
minutes ; they exchanged a few words ; then they 
proved that Japanese nature was very like English 
nature, for, rushing forward, they threw themselves 
into each other’s arms — the father had found a long- 
lost son ! 

The son had been seized, like many of his country- 
men, with a desire to see the civilized world, of which, 
in spite of the exclusive system of his government, he 
had heard, and had stolen off, and got on board a ship 
which was afterwards wrecked, he being the only sur- 
vivor. Poor fellow, he had seen but a very rugged 
part of the world during his visit to England, in the 
Liverpool docks and similar localities. He told his 
father, however, how well he had been treated on board 
the Triton ; and the old gentleman, on hearing this, en- 
deavored to express his gratitude by every means in 
his power. 

Two days after this we found ourselves anchored of! 
the harbor of Napha, in Great Loo-Choo. In a short 
time a boat came off from the shore bearing two vener- 
able old gentlemen with long beards and flowing robes 
of blue and yellow, gathered in at the waist with sashes, 


416 


OUR FIRST TRIP ON SHORE. 


and almost hiding their white sandaled feet. On their 
heads they wore yellow caps, something like the Turk- 
ish fez in shape, and fastened under their chins with 
strings, like a baby’s night-cap. Bowing with their 
noses to the planks as they reached the deck, they pre- 
sented red visiting cards, three feet in length, and in- 
quired what circumstance had brought the ship to their 
island. Great was their astonishment when our old 
fr ; end Hatchie Katsie presented himself, and said that 
we had come to land him and his son, who had been 
shipwrecked. He had come to give notice of the loss 
of the junk, but that he purposed proceeding on in the 
ship to Japan. 

His first care was to send on shore for proper clothes 
for Chin Chi, who looked a very different person when 
dressed in bright-colored robes and a gay cap. He 
had got a similar dress for Jerry and me. He told Cap- 
tain Frankland that he could not venture to invite him 
on shore, but that as we were mere boys, he might take 
us under his escort. 

Highly delighted, we accordingly pulled on shore. 
We found conveyances waiting for us, kagos they were 
called. They were the funniest little machines I ever 
saw — a sort of litter ; suppose a box open in front and 
the sides, with a low seat inside, and the lid shut down. 
Even Jerry and I, though not very big, had great diffi- 
culty in coiling ourselves away in ours ; and how our 
portly old friend contrived it, was indeed a puzzle. We 
had to sit cross-legged, with our arms folded and our 
backs bent double, and we were borne jogging along by 
two native porters, our heads every now and then bump- 
ing up against the roof, till we couldn’t help laughing 
and shouting out to each other to ascertain if our skulls 


A LOO-CHOO HOUSE. 


417 


were cracked. I suppose the natives have a mode of 
gluing themselves down to the seats. 

We passed over several well-made bridges, and along 
a paved causeway, having on either side a succession of 
beautiful gardens and fertile rice fields, while before us 
rose a hill covered with trees, out of which peeped a 
number of very pretty-looking villas. When we reached 
the top of the hill we had a fine view over a large por- 
tion of the island — several towns and numerous vil- 
lages were seen, with country houses and farms scat- 
tered about. Altogether, we formed a very favorable 
opinion of the island and the advanced state of civiliza- 
tion among the people of Loo-Choo. 

The house to which our friend took us was built of 
wood, and covered with earthen tiles. It had bamboo 
verandas, and a court-yard in front surrounded by a 
wall of coral. The interior was plain and neat, — the 
rafters appearing overhead were painted red, and the 
floor was covered with matting. The owner of the 
house, an old gentleman very like Hatchie Katsie, re- 
ceived us very courteously, and after we had sat some 
time ordered food to be brought in. Some long-robed 
attendants prepared a table in the chief hall, on which 
they placed a number of dishes, containing red slices of 
eggs and cucumber, boiled fish and mustard, fried ^ef, 
bits of hog’s liver, and a variety of other similar dain- 
ties, at w r liich we picked away without much considera- 
tion, but which might have been bits of dogs, cats, or 
rats, for ought I knew to the contrary. The people of 
Loo-Choo must be very abstemious, if we judge from 
the size of their drinking cups, — no larger than thim- 
bles ! The liquor they drank, called sakee, is distilled 
from rice. 


418 


DRESS OF PEOPLE OF LOO-CHOO. 


We only spent two days on shore, so that I cannot 
pretend to know much of the country. From its eleva- 
tion, and being constantly exposed to the sea breezes, 
it must be very healthy. It is also very fertile. All 
the agricultural instruments we saw were rude. The 
plough was of the old Homan model, with an iron point. 
One of the chief productions of the island is rice, and as 
for it a constant supply of water is required, there is a 
very extensive system of irrigation. To prepare it for 
cultivation, the land is first overflowed, and the laborer 
hoes and ploughs and harrows, while he stands knee 
deep in mud and water. It is first grown in plots, and 
then transplanted. The banyan-tree is very abundant, 
and so is the bamboo, which supplies them with food, 
lodging, and clothing, besides, from its stately growth, 
forming a delightful shade to their villages. The sugar- 
cane is grown, and much sugar is made from it. The 
islands are of coral formation, but, from some mighty 
convulsion of nature, the rock on which the coral was 
placed has been upheaved, and now in many places 
appears above it. 

The people of Loo-Choo are well formed, and the 
men have full black beards, and their hair being well 
oiled is gathered to the back of the head, and fastened 
with a gold, silver, or brass pin, according to the rank 
of -the wearer. Their dress is a loose robe with wide 
sleeves, gathered round the waist with a girdle, in which 
they carry their tobacco pouch and pipe. The upper 
classes wear a white stocking, and when they go out 
they put on a straw sandal secured to the foot by a band 
passing between the great toe and the next to it, as worn 
by the Homans. The peasants go bareheaded and 
barefooted, and wear only a coarse cotton snirt. Their 


READINESS OP NATIVES TO BECOME CHRISTIANS. 419 


cottages also are generally thatched with rice straw, 
and surrounded by a palisade of bamboos. The furni- 
ture is of the simplest description. It consists of a thick 
mat spread on the plank floor, on which the people sit 
cross-legged ; a table, a few stools ; and a teapot, with 
some cups, and a few mugs and saucers. Their food is 
chiefly rice and sweet potatoes, animal food being only 
used by the upper classes. The upper ranks use a vari- 
ety of soups, sweetmeats, and cooked and raw vegetables. 
They are a hard-working people, though they have their 
festivals and days of relaxation, when, in open spaces 
between the trees, they indulge in their favorite foot-ball 
and other athletic sports. 

I think what I have given is about the full amount 
of the information I obtained. One thing I must ob- 
serve, that although they are now sunk in a senseless 
idolatry, from the mildness of their dispositions, and 
their intelligent and inquiring minds, I believe that if 
Christianity were presented to them in its rightfully 
attractive form, they would speedily and gladly embrace 
the truth. 

As our friend Hatchie Katsie was anxious to return 
to Japan, Captain Frankland very gladly undertook to 
convey him there. He and Chin Chi, accordingly, once 
more embarked with us on board the Triton . 


420 


OUR VOYAGE TO JAPAN. 


CHAPTER XX. 

OUR VOYAGE TO JAPAN. 

Our friend Hatchie Katsie belonged to the commer 
cial town of Hakodadi, situated in the Straits of Sauga\ 
on the south end of the Japanese island of Yesso, and 
before it we found ourselves one bright morning brought 
up. The harbor was full of junks of all sizes, coming 
and going, proving that a brisk trade must be carried 
on there. The town seemed of considerable extent, 
stretching along the sea-shore for a mile or more, while 
many of the streets ran up the sides of a lofty promon- 
tory, at the base of which it stands. The mountains 
rise directly behind to an elevation of a thousand feet, 
their bare summits often being covered with snow. The 
slopes are clothed with underwood, while on the plains 
below wide-spreading cypresses, maples, plum and peach 
trees grow in rich profusion. Altogether the scene is a 
very picturesque and beautiful one. From numerous 
stone quarries, the Japanese have supplied themselves 
with an abundance of building materials. The appear- 
ance of the town, with its well-constructed sea walls, 
bridges, and dikes, showed us that the Japanese must 
be a very industrious people, and that they have made 
considerable advance in civilization. 

One of the first things which struck us was a Japanese 
boat which came alongside, both from her model and 


WE LAND IN JAPAN. 


421 


the neat way in which she was put together. Her 
bows were very sharp, she had great beam, and she 
tapered slightly towards the stern. She was built of 
pine wood, and varnished without any paint. Her crew, 
almost naked, stood aft, and sculled her along instead 
of rowing, at a very great rate. The official personages 
she brought off sat in the fore part ; one of them, armed 
with two swords, a mark of rank, stood in the bows, and 
made a very good figure-head. We should probably 
have had to take our departure without holding any 
communication with the shore, so anxious were the Jap- 
anese government to prevent any communication of the 
people with foreigners, when Hatchie Katsie made his 
appearance on deck. The account he gave his country- 
men soon changed the aspect of affairs, and we were 
told that the governor of the place would no doubt make 
an exception in our favor. 

Our friend having procured Japanese clothes for us, 
as he had done at Loo-Choo, told us that he might ven- 
ture to take us on shore and show us something of the 
mode of life among his countrymen. I have no doubt 
that Chin Chi considered it far superior to that of the 
English, as far as he was able to judge of them. The 
Japanese gentlemen were, generally, finer men than 
those of Loo-Choo. Their dress also was different. 
One of the chief people in the place, if he was not the 
governor, wore a gaily-colored robe of rich silk, with 
the back, sleeves, and breast, covered with armorial 
bearings. He wore a very short pair of trousers, with 
black socks and straw slippers. His hat, something like 
a reversed bowl, shone with lacquer and ornaments of 
gold. I must say, however, that Europeans have no 
right to quiz the head-coverings of any nation in the 
36 


422 INDUSTRIOUS HABITS OF JAPANESE. 

world, as ours far surpass all others in ugliness, and in 
the want of adaptation of means to an end. 

Our friend could not take us publicly into the town, 
so he had us conveyed to his country-house in kagos, 
such as were used at Loo-Choo. On every side, as we 
passed along, the people were busily employed ; some 
were lading their pack-horses with bags of meal, others 
with heavy mallets were pounding grain into flour, 
while others were hoeing in the rice grounds up to their 
knees in water. . There was no sign of poverty, and 
even the lowest people were well and comfortably clad 
in coarse garments, shorter than those of the more 
wealthy classes. All wear the hair drawn up and fas- 
tened at the top in a knot. In rainy weather they wear 
cloaks made of straw, so that a person looks like a 
thatched roof. The same sort of garments, I hear, are 
used by the Portuguese peasantry. The upper classes 
cover their robes with a water-proof cloak of oiled paper. 
All, like the Chinese, use the umbrella as a guard from 
the sun and rain. 

The streets are thoroughly drained, for not only are 
there surface gutters, but deep drains which carry all 
the filth into the sea. Here again they are in advance 
of many civilized people. Some of the best houses are 
built of stone, but they are usually constructed of a 
frame-work of bamboo and laths, which is covered with 
plaster painted black and white in diagonal lines. The 
roofs are composed of black and white tiles, the eave.3 
extending low down to protect the interior from the 
sun and the oiled-paper windows from the rain. They 
are, generally, of but one story. Some of the residences 
stand back from the street with a court-yard before them, 
and have gardens behind. The fronts of the shops have 


JAPAN RESIDENCES. 


428 


movable shutters, and behind these are sliding panels 
of oiled paper or lattices of bamboo, to secure privacy 
when required. In the interior of the houses is a frame- 
work raised two feet from the ground, divided by slid- 
ing panels into several compartments, and spread with 
stuffed mats ; it is the guest, dining, and sleeping room 
of private houses, and the usual work-shop of handi- 
craftsmen — a house within a house. When a noble- 
man travelling stops at a lodging-house, his banner is 
conspicuously displayed outside, while the names of in- 
ferior guests are fastened to the door-posts. 

A Japanese has only one wife, consequently women 
stand far higher in the social scale than among other 
Eastern people. They have evening parties, when tea 
is handed round ; and the guests amuse themselves with 
music and cards. Japanese ladies have an ugly custom 
of dyeing their teeth black, by a process which at the 
same time destroys the gums. The more wealthy peo- 
ple have suburban villas, the gardens of which are .sur- 
rounded by a wall, and laid out in the Chinese style, 
with fish-ponds containing gold and silver fish, bridges, 
pagoda-shaped summer houses and chapels, beds of gay 
colored flowers, and dwarf fruit-trees. 

A large portion of the people profess the Buddhist 
religion. We visited a large temple at Hakodadi, full 
sixty feet high. The tiled roof is supported on an ar- 
rangement of girders, posts, and tie-beams, resting upon 
large lacquered pillars. The ornaments in the interior, 
consisting of dragons, phoenixes, cranes, tortoises, all 
connected with the worship of Buddha, are elaborately 
carved and richly gilt. There are three shrines, each 
containing an image, and the raised floor is thickly cov- 
ered with mats. We were shown a curious praying ma- 


424 


RELIGION OF JAPANESE. 


chine covered with inscriptions. At about the height 
easily reached by a person was a wheel with three 
spokes, and on each spoke a ring: turning the wheel 
once round is considered equivalent to saying a prayer, 
and the gingle of the ring is supposed to call the atten- 
tion of the divinity to the presence of the person pay* 
ing his devotions. The Sintoo worship is practised also 
among the Japanese, but its temples are less resorted to 
than those of Buddha. 

"" We saw a number of junks building. In shape they 
were like the Chinese, but none were more than a hun- 
dred tons burden. Canvas instead of bamboo is used 
for sails. 

The Japanese are decidedly a literary people. All 
classes can read and write ; and works of light reading 
appear from their presses almost with the same rapidity 
that they do with us. They print from wooden blocks, 
and have wooden type. They have also long been ac- 
customed to print in colors. The paper they employ is 
manufactured from the bark of the mulberry, but is so 
thin that only one side can be used. They have sorts 
of games, some like our chess, and cards, and loto, and 
we saw the lads in the streets playing ball very much 
as boys do in an English country village. 

As we did not go to the capital, I cannot describe it 
We understood that there are two emperors of Japan, 
— one acts as the civil governor, and the other as the 
head of all ecclesiastical affairs, a sort of pope or patri- 
arch. The laws are very strict, especially with regard 
to all communication with foreigners. If a person of 
rank transgresses them and he is discovered, notice is 
sent to him, and he instantly cuts himself open with his 
sword, and thus prevents the confiscation of his prop* 


MANILLA. 


425 


eriy. The people exhibit an extraordinary mixture of 
civilization and barbarism ; the latter being the result 
of their gross superstitious faith, and their seclusion 
from the rest of the world ; the former shows how acute 
and ingenious must be their minds to triumph over 
such difficulties. 

Our friend Hatchie Katsie accompanied us to the 
shore when we embarked. Chin Chi parted with us 
most unwillingly. He longed to see more of the won- 
ders of the world ; but even had his father been ready 
to let him go, we could not have ventured to carry him 
away publicly in opposition to the laws of the country. 

Once more we were at sea. “ Homeward ! home- 
ward ! ” was the cry ; but we had still a long way to 
sail and many places to visit before we could get there. 
Steering south, we came to an anchor before the city of 
Manilla, the capital of the Philippine Islands, the larg- 
est of which is Lu^on. They belong to Spain, having 
been taken possession of in 1565. They are inhabited 
by a variety of savage tribes, most of whom have been 
converted by their conquerors to the Roman Catholic 
faith. The capital stands on a low plain near a large 
lake, which has numerous branches, now converted into 
canals. Hills rise in the distance, and behind them 
ranges of lofty mountains, clothed to their summits with 
luxuriant vegetation. The number of Europeans is very 
small compared to that of the half-castes and aborigines. 
There are said to be forty thousand of those industrious 
people, the Chinese, who appear now to be finding their 
way into every country on the shores of the Pacific 
where employment can be procured. The largest, manu- 
factory at Manilla is that of cigars. The city appeared 
to be in a somewhat dilapidated condition, the churches 


426 


THE CAYMAN AND THE INDIAN. 


and public buildings, especially, were fast falling into 
decay. 

We, as usual, were fortunate, and got a trip, through 
the kindness of an English merchant, up the lake and a 
good way into the interior, when we could not help 
wondering at the magnificient display of tropical vege- 
tation which we beheld. We also saw three of the 
mosf ferocious animals of the country. Scarcely had 
we landed when, as with our friend and several Indian 
attendants we were proceeding along the banks of a 
stream, our friend wished to send a message to a cot- 
tage on the opposite side to desire the attendance of the 
master as a guide. There was a ford near, but the 
Indian who was told 1o go said he would swim his 
horse across. 

“ Take care of the cayman,” was the warning given 
by all. 

“ Oh, I care not for caymans ; I would fight with a 
dozen of them ! ” was the answer we were told. 

♦ 

The lake and rivers running into it abound with these 
savage monsters, — a species of alligator or crocodile 
The man forced his horse into the stream and swam on 
some way. Suddenly we were startled with the cry of, 
“ A cayman ! a cayman ! Take care, man ! ” The Indian 
threw himself from his horse and swam boldly to the 
bank, leaving his poor steed to become the prey of the 
monster. The cayman made directly for the horse and 
seized him with his huge jaws by the body. The poor 
steed’s shriek of agony sounded in our ears, but fortu- 
nately for him the saddle girth gave way, and he strug- 
gled free, leaving the tough leather alone in the brute’s 
mouth, and swam off to shore. The cayman, not liking 
the morsel, looked about for something more to hit tasto 


THE BOA-CONSTRICTOR AND HIS PREY. 427 


The Indian had reached the bank, but instead of get 
ting out of the water, he stood in a shallow place be- 
hind a tree, and, drawing his sword, declared that h* 
was ready to fight the cayman. The monster, open- 
mouthed, made at him ; but the man in his folly struck 
at its head. He might as well have tried to cut through 
a suit of ancient armor. The next instant, to our horror, 
the cayman had him shrieking in his jaws, and with his 
writhing body disappeared beneath the surface of the 
stream ! 

After this our journey was enlivened by all sorts of 
horrible accounts of adventures with caymans, till we 
neared the spot where we expected to find some buffa- 
loes. As we rode along we heard an extraordinary cry. 
“ It is a wild boar,” exclaimed our friend ; “ but I sus- 
pect a boa has got hold of him, — a great bore for him, 
I suspect.” We rode to the spot whence the sound 
came. There, sure enough, suspended from the low 
branch of a tree, was a huge boa-constrictor, some 
twenty feet long, perhaps, which had just destroyed a 
wild pig in its monstrous folds. While we looked he 
descended, and lubricating the animal with the saliva 
from his mouth, and placing himself before it, took the 
snout in his jaws and began to suck it in. We had not 
time to wait, as our friend told us it would take a 
couple of hours before he got the morsel into his 
stomach. This process is performed by wonderful 
muscular action and power of distension. 

In half an hour we reached a plain bordered by a 
forest. “ Here we shall find buffaloes in abundance," 
exclaimed our friend ; “ but, my lads, be cautious ; keep 
behind me, and watch my movements, or you may 
be seriously injured, or lose your lives. Buffalo-hu***;- 


428 DANGEROUS COMBAT WITH A BUFFALO. 

ing is no child’s-play, remember.” We had with us a 
number of Indians on horseback armed with rifles, and 
a pack of dogs of high and low degree. Our chief 
hunter was a remarkably fine-looking man, a half-caste 
He was dressed in something like a bull-fighter’s cos 
tume. He dismounted and approached the wood, ’rifle 
in hand. Two of the Indians threw off most of their 
clothes, and kept only their swords by their sides. 
Tims lightly clad, they were able to climb the trees to 
get out of harm’s way. The Indians beat the woods, 
and the dogs barked and yelped, till, at length, a huge 
buffalo came out to ascertain what all the noise was 
about. He stood pawing the ground and tossing up 
the grass with his horns, as if working himself into a 
rage, looking round that he might single out an object 
on which to vent his rage. Though we were at some 
distance, we felt the scene excessively trying. His eye 
soon fell on the bold huntsman, who stood rifle in hand, 
ready to hit him on the head as he approached. If his 
hand trembled, if his rifle missed fire, his fate was 
sealed. The excitement as I watched the result was so 
great, that I could scarcely breathe. The huntsman 
stood like a statue, so calm and unmoved, with his eye 
fixed on the monstrous brute. The buffalo got within 
a dozen paces of him. I almost shrieked out, for I ex- 
pected every moment to see the man tossed in the air, 
or trampled and gored to death with those formidable 
horns. On came the buffalo — there was a report — a 
< loud of smoke — and as it cleared away, he was seen 
with his knees bent and his head as it were ploughing 
the ground ; yet another moment, and his huge body 
rolled over a lifeless mass ; and the hunter advancing, 
placed his foot proudly between his horns, as a sign 


PRODUCTIONS OF THE PHILIPPINES. 


429 


that he was the victor. Loud shouts rent the air from 
all the Indians, for the feat their leader had performed 
was no easy one, and which few are capable of accom- 
plishing. In some parts of the island, buffaloes are 
taken with the lasso, as we had seen it employed in 
Mexico. The animal was cut up and transferred to a 
cart, to be carried down to the lake, by which it was to 
be conveyed to Manilla. Tame buffaloes are used for 
agricultural purposes. 

The vegetable productions of the Philippines are very 
numerous. Rice is grown in great quantities. What 
is known as Manilla hemp is an article of much value. 
It is obtained from the fibre of a species of plantain. 
It can only be exported from the port of Manilla. In- 
digo, coffee, sugar, cotton, and tobacco, are grown in 
abundance ; indeed, were the resources of the islands 
fully developed, they would prove some of the richest 
in the world. But it may truly be said, that whe/e 
Spaniards rule there a blight is sure to fall. 

On leaving the Philippines, we sighted the coast of 
Borneo, and looked in at Sarawak, a province which the 
talent, the energy, the perseverance, and the philan- 
thropy of Sir James Brooke, have brought from the 
depths of barbarism and disorder to a high state of civ- 
ilization. Those who are incapable of appreciating his 
noble qualities, seem inclined to allow it to return to 
the same condition in which he found it. I heard Cap- 
tain Frankland speak very strongly on the subject, and 
he said it would be a disgrace to England, and the most 
short-sighted policy, if she withdraws her support from 
the province, and refuses to recompense Sir James for 
the fortune which he has expended on it. 


430 


THE MAURITIUS. 


We next touched at Singapore, which was founded 
by a man of very similar character and talents to Sir 
James Brooke. That man was Sir Stamford Raffles, 
whose life is well worthy of attentive Study. When, in 
1819, the English took possession of the island at the 
end of the Malay peninsula, on which Singapore now 
stands, it contained but a few huts, the remnants of an 
old city, once the capital of the Malayan kingdom, and 
was then the resort of all the pirates who swarmed in 
the neighboring seas. It is now a free port, resorted to 
by ships of all nations. It is the head-quarters, of 
many wealthy mercantile houses, whose managers live 
in handsome houses facing the bay, while its working 
population is made up of Arabs, Malays, Chinese, and, 
indeed, by people from all parts of the East. Singapore 
is another example of what the talent and energy of one 
man can effect. 

The next harbor in which we found ourselves was 
that of Port Louis in the Mauritius. The town stands 
at the head of the bay, and is enclosed on the east, and 
north, and south, by mountains rising but a short dis- 
tance from the shore. The most lofty is the Pouce, 
which towers up 2,800 feet immediately behind the town, 
and is a remarkable and picturesque object. The Mau- 
ritius is one of the most flourishing of England’s depen- 
dencies, and the French inhabitants seem perfectly con- 
tented with her rule, and appreciate the numerous ad- 
vantages they possess from being under it. Since the 
abolition of slavery, coolies have been brought over to 
cultivate sugar, rice, tobacco, and to engage in other la- 
bors, formerly performed by the negro slaves. Port 
Louis is a well-built town, and has a bustling and gay 


MADAGASCAR. 


433 


appearance, from the number of traders from all parts 
of the East, who appear in their various and pictu* 
resque costumes. Our stay here was short. 

We were next bound to the coast of Madagascar, Cap- 
tain Frankland having instructions to endeavor to open 
up a trade with the people, and to gain all the informa- 
tion he could collect regarding them. Madagascar is 
larger than Great Britain and Ireland combined, and 
contains three millions of inhabitants. In 1817, a treaty 
was entered into between the governor of the Mauritius 
and Radama, who was king of part of the country. The 
king consented to the abolition of the slave-trade ; and 
in return, he was supplied with arms and ammunitionj 
and military instructors w r ere sent to drill his army. 
The London Missionary Society also sent over a body 
of highly intelligent men, some to instruct the people in 
Christianity, and others more particularly in a variety 
of useful arts. A considerable number of Malagasy 
youths were sent on board English ships of war to be 
instructed in seamanship, while others w r ere carried to 
England to receive a more finished education. It is a 
remarkable fact, that, although when the missionaries 
arrived in 1818 letters were totally unknown, in ten 
years from 10,000 to 15,000 natives had learned to read, 
many of them to write, and several had made some 
progress in English. This speaks well for the zeal and 
excellence of the system employed by the missionaries, 
and for the talent of the natives. 

King Radama, after considerably extending his do- 
minions, died in 1828, when the policy of his successor 
towards the English considerably changed. The Ma 
lagasy government having resolved to impose their owp 
laws on foreign residents at the port of Tamatave, an 


4o2 


PERSECUTION OF CHRISTIANS. 


English and two French ships of war went there to try 
and settle the questions at issue. Failing to do so, they 
attacked the port, which, however, was so well defended, 
that they were compelled to retire, leaving several of 
their number behind, whose heads were stuck upon poles 
on the shore. In consequence of this untoward event, 
all intercourse with the English ceased for eight years. 
Before that time the government had commenced a 
cruel persecution of the Christian natives, and numbers 
were put to death. The effect, however, was very dif- 
ferent from what was expected. Attention was drawn 
to the subject of Christianity. Many of all ranks began 
to study the Bible and to acknowledge the truth, and 
among them was the queen’s son, then only seventeen 
years old. The queen was greatly averse to the new 
religion ; and this, probably, was one of the causes 
which made her break off all intercourse with strangers, 
while she carried on the persecution against her own 
subjects who had become converts. The patient way 
in which the Christians bore their sufferings induced 
many others to inquire into the truth of their doctrines 
and ultimately to embrace them. At last a reaction 
took place ; the queen began to discover the ill effects 
of the restrictive system she had been endeavoring to 
establish, and once more showed an inclination to renew 
her intercourse with civilized nations. Friendly rela- 
tions with the British had again been established when 
we anchored before Tamatave. 

The roadstead before Tamatave offers a good anchor- 
age, except when the wind is from the north or east. 
Several species of pandanus and some tall cocoa-nut- 
trees gave a tropical character to the scenery. Soon 
after anchoring, a large but rather clumsy canoe came 


A HOUSE IN MADAGASCAR. 


433 


alongside, with an officer who spoke a little English, 
and said he was the harbor-master, and a number of 
attendants. They wore neatly plaited straw hats, white 
shirts bound round the loins with cloths, and large white 
scarfs thrown gracefully over the shoulders like the 
Scotch plaid. The harbor-master entered in a book the 
name of the ship and other particulars, and we then ac- 
companied him to his house on shore, — that is, the cap- 
tain, the doctor, and Jerry and I. It was built of wood, 
nearly fifty feet long and twenty-five high, a veranda 
running all round ; a door in the centre, and windows 
on either side ; the floor of the veranda well planked, 
so as to form an outer apartment. The whole was 
thatched with the leaves of the traveller’s tree. The 
walls were covered with tofia, or native cloth, and the 
floor with a large fine mat. A well-made bedstead 
stood in one corner with sleeping mats on it, and in the 
centre a table covered with a white cloth. In different 
parts of the room were chairs and ottomans covered 
with mats ; cooking utensils, arms, machines for mak- 
ing mats, bags of rice, and other articles for consump- 
tion, were arranged against the sides of the room. It 
was a fair specimen of a native house, and in the essen- 
tials showed a considerable advancement in civilization 
and notions of comfort, as it was admirably adapted to 
the climate. 

Captain Frankland’s object in coming to Madagascar 
was to open up a commercial intercourse with the peo- 
ple, and to advance this object he had resolved to visit 
the capital. He had been supplied with several letters 
of introduction to facilitate this object. This brought 
us in contact with a number of people. One of our 
first visitors was a fine-looking man, an officer of gov- 
37 


434 


PROGRESS OF EDUCATION. 


ernment. He wore a gold lace cloth cap, a shH with 
an elaborately worked collar and culls, and over it a 
lamba,* the native scarf or plaid, the centre of which 
consisted of broad stripes of yellow, pink, scarlet, and 
purple, with the border of open work of yellow and 
scarlet lace. He had, however, neither shoes nor stock- 
ings. He was accompanied by two men bearing swords, 
the badges of his office. One of our visitors took snuff 
(a usual custom), by jerking it from a richly orna- 
mented tube of cane which his servant handed to him, 
on to his tongue, when he swallowed it ! 

Tamatave, where we landed, is a large village, but 
the houses, or rather huts, have generally a dilapidated 
appearance. There are a few good houses, belonging 
to foreigners and to the government officers. We were 
amused by seeing slaves filling thick bamboos six or 
seven feet long with water from a well. The water is 
pulled up in a cow horn instead of a bucket, while the 
bamboo takes the place of a pitcher. We visited the 
market. The venders sat in the centre, or at the side 
of platforms made of sand or mud, on which the arti- 
cles were piled up. We found rice, maize, millet, man- 
dioc, plantains, oranges, pine-apples, and many other 
fruits. All sorts of poultry were to be seen, and the 
butchers had their meat arranged before them cut up 
into pieces on broad plantain leaves. The women were 
dressed very much in articles of European manufac- 
ture ; their hair, which is jet black, was arranged fre 
quently in light curls or knots, which has a far from pic 
turesque effect. 

Nothing is more wonderful in Madagascar than the 
great strides education has made. Thirty years ago 
the language was unwritten. Only one person, who 


HANDSOME DINNER GIVEN BY A CHIEF. 435 


had been educated in the Mauritius, could write, and 
that was in a foreign language. Now, all the govern- 
ment officers can write, and all the business is trans- 
acted by writing, while all classes are greedy for in- 
struction; indeed, we had great reason to believe that 
there are few more intelligent people than the inhabi- 
tants of that magnificent island. 

Before starting on our journey we were invited to a 
dinner by one of the chiefs. Our surprise was great 
when we approached the house, to find two lines of sol- 
diers drawn up, dressed in white kilts with white belts 
across their naked shoulders, with a musket or spear. 
We were ushered into a handsome hall full of officers 
in every variety of European uniform, the chiefs having 
cocked hats, feathers, and gold epaulets. The lady of 
the house and several other ladies were present, dressed 
in English fashion ; and the feast, which was abundant, 
was served much in the English style. Several of the 
officers spoke English, and toasts were drunk and 
speeches made, while a band played very well both 
when w6 entered and after dinner. Some female 
slaves stood behind the ladies, and two afterwards came 
in and made some very excellent coffee. We were very 
much interested as well as surprised to find so much 
civilization among those whom we had supposed barba- 
rians. 

I have spoken of slaves. Although the government 
has abolished the exportation of slaves, slavery is still 
allowed in the country. The slaves are generally peo- 
ple taken in war from among the inhabitants of the 
northern provinces. People are also condemned to 
perpetual slavery for crimes, by the government. The 


436 TRAVELLING IN MADAGASCAR. 

Hovas, the name of the dominant tribe, of whom Radama 
was chief, have made slaves of great numbers of the 
tribes whom they have conquered. We heard, how- 
ever, that they are generally kindly treated. Many of 
the Christians were condemned to slavery during the 
late persecutions ; but the conditions made with those 
who took charge of them was, that they were to be kept 
constantly at hard labor. We heard much of the admi- 
rable conduct of the Christians under all their persecu- 
tions. Their heathen masters declared that they could 
be intrusted with any matter of importance, and were 
scrupulously exact with regard to all property placed 
under their charge, while among themselves they kept 
up the pure and simple doctrines which they had learned 
from the Bible itself. 

We now got ready for our journey. We had a guide 
who had been in England, and some years at the Cape 
of Good Hope, and spoke English perfectly. Our pal- 
anquins were something like cots slung on a long pole, 
with a roof of native cloth, which could be rolled up or 
let down to keep off the rain or sun. The machine was 
borne b/four bearers, two before and two behind, while 
four others walked by the side ready to relieve them. 
No wheeled carriages are used in Madagascar, so that 
the only roads are the paths made by the unshod feet 
of the natives, or by the bullocks’ hoofs ; and there is 
no water carriage, — all goods are conveyed on men’s 
shoulders from one part of the country to the other ; so 
that we had quite an army with us, what with our re- 
ays of bearers, and those who carried our baggage and 
presents. Up and down hills we travelled, through the 
wildest scenery we could imagine. It is difficult to 


THE TRAVELLER S-TREE. 


437 


describe it. Sometimes we bad to wind up and down 
over rugged- heights ; then through forests, frequently 
turning aside to avoid the huge trees which had fallen 
across our path ; then across swamps and plots of slip- 
pery mud ; and often we had to force our way through 
dense jungle, or through miles of primeval forests. 

We saw many interesting trees and plants. One of 
the most beautiful is the bamboo. Some of the canes 
nearly a foot in circumference at the base, rise to the 
height of forty or fifty feet, their slight, feathery-look- 
ing points, like huge plumes, waving with the slightest 
breeze, and assisting to keep up a circulation of the air. 
They are fringed at their joints with short branches of 
long, lance-shaped leaves. We saw bamboos of all 
sizes, some with the cane as delicate as a small quill, 
yet fully ten feet long ; and these were also exceedingly 
graceful. So also were the tree-ferns, which grew in 
great profusion and beauty on the sides of the hills. 
But the most curious and valuable tree we saw was the 
traveller’s-tree. It has a thick succulent stem like the 
plantain. From ten to thirty feet from the ground it 
sends out from the stem, not all round, but on opposite 
sides, like a fan, ten or a dozen huge bright greet 
leaves ; so that facing it, it has the appearance of a vas* 
fan. The stalk of the leaf is six or eight feet long, and 
the leaf itself four or six more. In each head were 
four or five branches of seed-pods, in appearance some- 
thing like the fruit of the plantain. When they burst, 
each pod was found to contain thirty or more seeds, in 
shape like a small bean, covered up with a very fine, 
fibre of a brilliant purple or blue color. The most sin- 
gular arrangement, which gains this tree the name it 
bears, is the pure water which it contains. This is found 


438 LOCUSTS USED AS FOOD. 

in the thick part of the stem of each leaf, at the spot 
where it rises from the stem, where there is a cavity 
formed by nature. The water is evidently collected by 
the broad leaf, and carried down a groove in the stem 
to the bowl, which holds a quart or more, perhaps, at a 
time. The traveller’s-tree is of great use for other 
purposes to the natives. With the leaves they thatch 
their houses ; the stems serve to portion off the rooms ; 
and the hard outside bark is beaten flat and is used for 
flooring. The green leaves are used to envelop pack- 
ages, and sometimes a table is covered with them 
instead of a table-cloth, while they are also folded into 
various shapes, to be employed as plates, bowls, and 
even spoons. 

We had to cross a river said to be infested by croco- 
diles. The natives walked close to us on either side, 
beating the water with long sticks to keep them away. 
The natives look on them with great dread, and attempt 
to propitiate them by charms or sacrifices, instead of 
endeavoring to destroy them. They, however, take 
their eggs in great numbers, and dry them for food. 

Locusts in great numbers infest some of the prov- 
inces ; but the people do not allow them to pass with- 
out paying a heavy tribute, and eat them as one of their 
chief luxuries, dressed in fat. They fly about two or 
three feet from the ground. As soon as they appear, 
men, women, and children rush out, — the men catch 
them in sheets, the women and children pick them from 
the ground, and then shake them in sacks till the wings 
,and legs are knocked off. The lighter parts are then 
winnowed away, and the bodies are dried in the sun 
and sold in the markets. 

The natives seem to have the same dread of serpent* 


VILLAGES IN MADAGASCAR. 


439 


that they have of crocodiles. The doctor found one ten 
feet long, coiled away on the mat where he had slept 
one morning, on going back to look for something he 
had left there ; but it escaped before it could be killed. 

We slept during our journey sometimes at the habi- 
tations of chiefs, sometimes at peasants’ huts, and some- 
times at houses in villages provided for our accommo- 
dation. The chiefs’ houses were small, but compactly 
built. We remarked that the water was kept in large 
earthen jars, — like those used it*, the Holy Land, I 
conclude. The sleeping-places were neatly arranged 
round the rooms, and there was a general air of comfort 
and respectability perceptible in most of them. Very 
different was a peasant’s hut we entered. It was not 
more than twenty feet square, divided into two compart- 
ments. In the outer were calves, lambs, and fowls. In 
the inner, at one end was a bed, and at the foot of it a 
fire-place, over which a man was cooking a pot of rice. 
His wife sat before a loom, consisting of four upright 
sticks fixed in the ground with rods across. At the dis- 
tance of seven feet were two short sticks driven into the 
ground, connected by a bar, over which was stretched 
the woof of silk to be woven. On this simple apparatus 
the most beautiful and rich patterns are worked. Silk 
worms abound in some of the provinces, and a very 
large amount might be produced and form an important 
article of trade. 

As we approached the capital we found the villages 
of the Hovas all strongly fortified on the summits of liilb 
or rocks. They have but one narrow and difficult en 
trance, and are surrounded by one or more deep ditches 
every ridge at the side of the hill being cut through 
Great care, indeed, has been shown in their construe 


440 


CAPITAL OF THE ISLAND. 


tion, showing that they were a warlike and marauding 
people, and found it necessary to guard against reprisals 
from the neighbors they had attacked. 

Antananarivo, the capital, at which we at length ar- 
rived, after a journey of three hundred miles, is a very 
curious place. It is built on an oval hill, nearly two 
miles in length, rising four or five hundred feet above 
the surrounding country, and is seven thousand feet 
higher than the level of the sea. On the highest part 
of the hill, and forming a conspicuous object, is the pal- 
ace of the queen. It is sixty feet high, with a lofty and 
steep roof, with attic windows, and is surrounded by 
balconies, one above the other. The top is surmounted 
by a huge golden eagle, with outspread wings, which 
looks as if able to have a tough fight with the one which 
overshadowed the articles from the United States at the 
Great Exhibition. 

The palace of the prince, which is smaller, is on one 
side, and has also a golden eagle over it. The dwell- 
ings of other members of the royal family and chief no- 
bility are on either side, while the rest of the houses 
which are only of one story, clothe the sides of the 
hill, standing generally on small terraces, wherever the 
ground has allowed their formation. The houses are 
of plain unpainted wood, which gives them a somewnat 
sombre and dilapidated appearance. The interiors are 
however, very comfortable, and admirably suited to the 
climate. 

Captain Frankland had the honor of an audience with 
the queen, who received him very graciously, and seemed 
much pleased with the object of his visit to the country. 
Still more interested were we with the prince royal and 
the princess Rabodo, his wife, who had for some time 


A COUNTRY PALACE. 


441 


oecome consistent Christians. We were much struck 
with the kind and courteous way in which the prince 
invariably treated his wife whenever they appeared in 
public. We always saw him dressed in a handsome 
uniform, and she always appeared in the costume of an 
English lady. All the officers of the court were well 
dressed, either in European uniforms,^ or in full native 
costume, which is very becoming. 

We had a very comfortable house appropriated to us. 
We found the climate at this elevation far pleasanter 
than near the coast, the thermometer, in a morning, not 
being higher than 56° to 58°. A number of the chiefs 
visited Captain Frankland to talk about the productions 
of the country and the best methods for improving its 
resources. Jerry and I meantime made several excur- 
sions into the surrounding country with the doctor, accom- 
panied by a young chief, who spoke English very well. 
We one day passed a body of troops, and he told us that 
there were forty thousand men forming an army, round 
the capital, besides artillery. Among other places we 
visited was the country palace of Radama, called Iso- 
aierana. The top of a hill had been removed to clear 
a space for the edifice. It is a wonderful building, .con- 
sidering the means at the disposal of the architect, but 
it wants height to give it grandeur. It is composed 
entirely of wood, the timber having been brought from 
a forest fifty miles off. Rows of balconies run round it. 
One hall we entered was a hundred feet long and forty 
wide ; but that also wanted height to make it appear to 
advantage. 

From the very slight description I have given of the 
country, it will be seen that considerable advances have 
of late years been made in civilization. The prince 


442 


VOYAGE HOME. 


royal is a most excellently disposed young man, but his 
education is defective. Should his life be spared, there 
can be no doubt that he will exert himself to carry on 
the improvements commenced under the auspices of 
Radama. Unhappily, his mother and most of the chief 
nobility still are heathens, whil4 the severe edicts against 
the Christians yet remain in force. However, all must 
believe that Christianity will ultimately triumph, and a 
happy future be in store for that interesting country. 

We were very sorry when, the captain having con- 
cluded his business, we had once more to get into our 
palanquins, and to commence our return journey to the 
coast. W e met with no adventure worthy of being noted, 
though we saw a number of curious and interesting 
plants and shrubs. At length once more we trod the 
deck of the Triton. The anchor was hove up, the top- 
sails hoisted, and with a fair breeze we stood to the 
southward. We touched at Cape Town, but I will not 
describe it or the Table Mountain, of which every one 
has heard over and over again. One day we were all on 
deck, when the captain and mates and Jerry and I were 
taking our observations. “I thought so,” exclaimed 
Captain Frankland; “We have just put a girdle round 
the world ; and now, lads, you will have spare time 
enough to tie the knot.” In a few weeks after this we 
reached the shores of Old England in safety, and though 
we had heartily enjoyed our voyage, right glad and thank- 
ful too were we to see once more its snow white cliffs. 

I ^pent three days with Captain Frankland’s family, 
and then Jerry and old Surley, who must not be for- 
gotten, accompanied me to my own home. All were 
there for the Christmas holidays, and what between 
my dear father and mother’s embraces, and my sisters 


A HAPPY MEETING. 


443 


pulling me here and there to get another and another 
kiss at my well-browned cheeks, and my brother’s re- 
iterated and hearty thumps on the back, I was almost 
in as much danger of being pulled to pieces as I had 
during any time of the voyage, and had not Jerry been 
there to draw off the attention of some of the party, l 
do not know what would have been the result. Cousin 
Silas soon afterwards joined us, and remained while the 
ship was refitting. We spent a very merry Christmas, 
and no one seemed tired of hearing us recount our ad- 
ventures. Old Surley used to sit at our feet, and he 
nodded his head and winked his eyes, as much as to say, 
“ It is all true, and if I could but speak I would tell you 
the same story.” I hope that my readers will receive 
it *in as favorable a way as did my family. We had 
learned many lessons during our trip. We had been 
taught to respect other people, their manners, and even 
their prejudices, and to reflect what we ourselves should 
have been had we labored under similar disadvantages, 
while at the same time we had seen every reason to 
love Old England more and more, and to be deeply 
grateful for the numberless inestimable blessings she 
enjoys. We had been taught, too, to observe the finger 
of the Almighty in his wondrous works, and to remark 
how he has scattered his precious gifts far and wide over 
the face of the globe for the benefit of his creatures. 
Our midnight w r atches have not been unprofitable. Often 
and often in the calm night we have gazed upward at 
the star-lit sky and thought upon God. We have had 
time for reflection. We have felt our own unworthiness. 
We have asked ourselves the serious question, Do we 
make a good and complete use of the advantages we 
possess — of the instruction afforded us — of the great 


444 


CONCLUSION. 


examples set before us — of the word of God laid freely 
open for us ? But I might go on forever asking simi- 
lar questions. Happy are those who can make satisfac- 
tory answers. I must conclude by expressing a hope 
that those who have gone through these pages will have 
found some of the amusement and instruction which 
Jerry and I obtained in our — 


VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD. 


ENOCH HOUGAN’S SONS’ 



How to Beautify the Complexion. 

All women know that it is beauty, rather than genius, which all generations 
of men have worshipped in the sex. Can it be wondered at, then, that so much 
of woman’s time and attention should he directed to the means of developing 
and preserving that beauty 1 The most important adjunct to beauty is a clear, 
smooth, soft and beautiful skin. With this essential a lady appears handsome, 
even if her features are not perfect. 

Ladies afflicted with Tan, Freckles, Rough or Discolored Skin, should lose 
no time in procuring and applying 

LAIRD’S BLOOM OF YOUTH. 

It will immediately obliterate all such imperfections, and is entirely harm- 
less. It has been chemically analyzed by the Board of Health of New York City, 
and pronounced entirely free from any material injurious to the health or skin. 

Over two million ladies have used this delightful toilet preparation, and in 
every instance it has given entire satisfaction. Ladies, if you desire to be beauti- 
ful, give LAIRD’S BLOOM OF YOUTH a trial, and be convinced of its won- 
derful efficacy. Sold by Fancy Goods Dealers and Druggists everywhere. 


Price, 75c. per Bottle. Depot, S3 John St., N. Y. 


JUST PUBLISHED. 


“BEYOND THE SUNRISE:” 

Observations by Two Travelers. 


1 vol. 12mo, clotli, gilt, - - - - - $1.00 

1 yoI. 12mo, paper, -50 

Also in Lovell’s Library, No. 169, - ■ - - *20 


The subjects treated in this volume, which is the pro- 
motion of two well known American writers, are Psychology, 
Clairvoyance and Theosophy. In the form of sketches they 
outline the philosophy of Psychology, and relate phenomena 
wholly outside of, and apart from Spiritualism, with which it 
is associated in the popular mind in this country. These two 
writers have much to say regarding Occultism and Theosophy; 
and, in a word, discuss the science of the soul in all its bear- 
ings. No more interesting book has ever appeared on these 
subjects. Much personal experience, which is always interest- 
ing, is given in its pages; and the authors who have chosen 
to be anonymous, have had remarkable results in their study 
of Spiritualism and Clairvoyancy, and are adepts in Psycho- 
logical researches. 

Prom all the varied avenues in which they have worked 
so perseveringly, they have brought together a highly grati- 
fying mass of material. The volume is one in which agnostics, 
spiritualists, orthodox and scientific minds generally, will be 
deeply interested ; and it is written in so earnest and frank a 
spirit, and in language so clear and graceful, that “ Beyond 
the Sunrise,” will win a welcome in every household* It will 
give good cheer and inspiration wherever it is read. 

Sent free, by post, on receipt of price. 

JQH2T V7. LOVELL CO., Publishers, 

14 and 16 Vesey Street, New Norte* 


RECENTLY PUBLISHED, 


Attractive new editions of the following celebrated works of Sir Edward 
Bulwer, Lord Lytton, 

ZAHONI. 

By LORD LYTTON. 

1vol., 12-no., large type, good paper, well bound, cloth, gilt, $1.00; also in 
Lovell’s Library, handsome paper cover, 20 cents. 

This work is happily conceived and ably executed. It is flowing and grace, 
fnl in style and both piques and rewards the curiosity of the reader. 


THE COMING RACE; 

Or, THE NEW UTOPIA. 

By LORD LYTTON. 

1 vol., 12mo., large, clear type, good paper, attractive cover, 10 cents. 

Without deciding on the comparative share of imagination and memory in 
the concoction of the work, we may pronounce it one of the most attractive 
books of the many interesting volumes of this popular author. 


A STRANGE STORY. 

By LORD LYTTON. 

lvol., 12mo., cloth, gilt, $1.00; also in Lovell’s Library, handsome cover, 
20 cents. 

The plot shows discrimination of judgment as well as force of expression, 
and its vigor of conception and brilliancy of description makes it one of his 
most readable novels. 


THE HAUNTED HOUSE; 

Or, The House and the Brain, to which is added, Calderon, the 

Courtier. 

By LORD LYTTON. 

1 vol.. 12mo., large type, good paper, handsome cover, 10 cents. 

This is a weird imaginative creation of singular power showing intensity of 
conception aud a knowledge of the remarkable efteets of spiritual influences. 

Full Descriptive Catalogue sent on application. 

JOHN W. LOVELL CO., Publishers, 

14 & 16 Vesey Street, New York. 


LOVELL’S LIBRARY ADVERTISER. 


» T^ESOBKTTIjY IPTJBIjXBXXEID. 

HEART AND SCIENCE. 

By WILKIE COLLINS. 


1 Vol., 12mo., cloth, gilt $1,00 

1 “ “ paper...": 50 

Also in Lovell’s Library, No. 87 ~0 


“Benjulia” is a singularly interesting, and, in a way, fascinating creat'on. 
Mr. Collins can deal strongly with a strong situation, but he has done notb'r.g 
more powerful than his sketch of Benjulia’s last hours. Mr. Gallilee and Zoe 
are capital examples of genuine and unforced humor; and the book, as a 
whole, is thoroughly readable and enthralling from its first page to its last.”— 
Academy. 

“ Mr. Wilkie Collins’ latest novel is certainly one of the ablest he has writ- 
ten. It is quite the equal of ‘The Woman in White’ and of ‘The Moon- 
stone,’ consequently it may truthfully be described as a masterpiece in the 
peculiar line of fiction in which Mr. Collins not only excels but distances every 
rival in the walk of literature he has marked out for himself. ‘Heart and. 
Science ’ is in its way a great novel, certainly the best we have seen from Mr. 
Wilkie Collins sinee ‘ The Woman in White ’ and ‘ Armadale.’ ” — Morning Post. 

“ We doubt whether the author has ever written a cleverer story. . . . An 
eloquent and touching tribute to the blessedness and power of a true and 
loving heart. The book unites in a high degree the attractions of thrilling nar- 
rative and clever portraiture of character, of sound wisdom and real humor.” — 
Congregationalism. 


By OUIDA, 


1 -vol., 12mo., cloth, gilt $1.00 

1 “ “ paper 50 

Also in Lovell's Library, No. 112 , 2 parts, each — , 15 


‘‘‘Wanda’ is the story by which Ouida will probably be judged by the 
literary historian of the future, for it is distinguished by all her high merits; 
and not disfigured by any one of her few defects. In point of construction this 
most recent contribution to the fictional literature of the day is perfect; the 
dialogues are both brilliant and stirring, and the descriptive passages are mas- 
terpieces. Ouida is seen at her brightest and best in ‘Wanda’ the bock thrills 
by its dramatic interest, and delights by its singular freshness and unconven- 
tional style. There are no more attractive characters in English fiction than 
Wanda and her peasant husband, and increased fame must result to the bril- 
liant novelist from this her latest work.”— St. Stephen’s Review. 

“We do not know anything Ouida has done that equals this, her latest 
novel, in power of delineating character and describing scenery. Wanda is a 
fine, high-souled character.” — Citizen. 

“A powerful and fascinating novel, deeply interesting, with excellent 
character portrayal, and written in that sparkling style for which Ouida is 
famous. ‘ Wanda ’ deserves to take rank by the side of the best of her previous 
novels .”— Darlington Post. 

“ ‘ Wanda ’ contains much that is etriking. The central idea is finely 
worked out. We have seen nothing from Ouida’s pen that strikes us as being, 
on the whole, so well conceived and so skilfully wrought out.”— Spectator. 

JOHN W. LOVELL CO., 

14 & 16 Vesey Street, New York. 


LOVELL’S LIBRARY— CATALOGUE. 


i 

- i 

Cyre’s Acquittal 10 

0. 000 Leagues Under 
the Sea, by Verne. . . .20 
Jjnri-Slavery Days... .20 
, Seauty’s Daughters.. .20 
i Seyond the Sunrise.. . .20 
j lard Times, Dickens .20 
i Fom Cringle’s Log. . . .20 

IFanity Fair 30 

Underground Russia. .20 
Yliddlemarch, Eliot.. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

1 lir Tom, Mrs Oliphant .20 
! Pelham, by Lytton. . . .20 

S The Story of Ida 10 

- iladcap Violet, Black .20 

lt.be Little Pilgrim .10 

Si lmeny, by Black ... .20 
Whist or Bumble- 

1. puppy?. 10 

the Beautiful Wretch .20 

Iter Mother’s Sin 20 

been Pastures and 
Piccadilly, Biack ... .20 

• he Mysterious Island .15 

Bo., Part II 15 

Do., PartUI 15 

Pom Brown at Oxford .15 

Do., Part II 15 

Thicker than Water . . .20 
In Silk Attire, Black. .20 
icottish Chiefs, P’t I.. 20 

>o„ Part II 20 

Viily Reilly, Carleton .20 
'he Nautz Family... .20 
heat Expectations. . . .20 
•endennis, Thackeray .20 

io., Part II 20 

Widow Bedott Papers .20 
Daniel Deronda, Eliot. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

AltioraPeto, Oliphant .20 
By the Gate of the Sea .15 
Tales of a Traveller. . .20 
Life and Voyages of 
Columbus . v .. . P’t I. .20 
Do. (Irving), Part II... .20 
The Pilgrim's Progress .20 
Martin Chuzzlewit. . . .20 

Do., Part II 20 

Theophrastus Such ... .10 
Disarmed, M. Edwards .15 
Eugene Aram, Lytton .20 
The Spanish Gypsy 

and Other Poems 20 

Cast Up by the Sea... .20 
Mill on the Floss, P’t I .15 

Do. (Eliot), Part II 15 

Brother Jacob, Eiiot. .10 

The Executor 20 

American Notes 15 

The Newcomes, Parti .20 

Do., Part II 20 

The Privateersman. . . .20 
The Three Feathers. .20 

Phantom Fortune 20 

Red Eric, Ballantyne. .20 
Lady Si lverdale’e 
■Sweetheart, Black. . . .10 


217. 

218. 

219. 

220 . 
221 . 
222 . 

223. 

224. 

225. 

226. 
•227. 

228. 

229. 

230. 

231. 

232 

233. 

234. 

235. 

236. 

237. 

238. 

239. 

240. 

241. 

242. 

243. 

244. 

245. 
346. 

247. 

248. 

249. 

250. 

251. 
252* 

253. 

254. 

255. 

256. 

257. 

258. 

259. 

260. 
261. 

262. 

263. 

264. 

265. 

266. 


The Four Macnicols. *10 
Mr. Pisistratus Brown .10 
Dombey & Son, Part I 20 

Do., Part II 20 

Book of Snobs 10 

Grimm’s Fairy Tales.. .20 
The Disowned, Lytton .20 
Little Dorrit, Dickens. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

Abbotsford and New- 
stead Abbey, Irving. .10 

Oliver Goldsmith. 10 

The Fire Brigade .20 

Rifle and. Hound in 

Ceylon 20 

Our Mutual Friend ... ,2o 

Do. Part II 20 

Paris Sketches 15 

Belinda, Broughton. . . .20 
Nicholas Nickleby — .20 

Do., Part II 20 

Monarch Mincing Lane .20 
Eight Yekrs Wander- 
ing in Ceylon, Baker .20 

Pictures from Italy 15 

Adventures of Philip. .15 

Do., Part II 15 

Knickerbocker His- 
tory of New York ... .20 
The Boy at Mugby .... .10 
The Virginians, P't I. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

Erling the Bold 20 

Kenelm Chillingly 20 

Deep Down . . 20 

Samuel Brohl & Co . . . .20 
Gautran, by Farjeon.. .20 
Bleak House, Part I . . .20 

Do., Part II 20 

What Will He Do WP It .20 

Do., Part II ». ... .20 

Sketches of Young 

Couples .10 

Devereux, Lytton 20 

Life of Webster, 2 pts. .30 
The Crayon Papers... .20 
The Caxtons, Lytton. .15 

Do., Part II 15 

Autobiography of An- 

thony Trollope 20 

Critical Reviews, by 

Thackeray... 10 

Lucretia, Lytton, P’t I .20 

Peter, the Whaler 20 

Last of the Barons.. .15 

Do., Part II 15 

Eastern Sketches 15 

All in a Garden Fair. .20 
File No. 113, Gaborian .20 
The Parisians, Lytton. .20 

Do., Part II 20 

Mrs. Darling’s Letters .20 
Master Humphrey’s 

Clock .10 

Fatal Boots, Thackr’y .10 
The Alhambra, Irving .15 
The Four Georges. .. .10 
Plutarch’s Lives. 5 pts 1.00 
UndeV tae Red Flag. .. *10 


267. 

268. 

269. 

270. 

271. 

272. 

273. 

274. 

275. 

276. 

277. 

278. 

279. 

280. 
281. 
283. 

283. 

284. 

285. 

286. 

287. 

288. 


.10 


.10 

.20 

.10 

.60 

.20 


289. 

290. 

291. 

292. 

293. 

294. 

295. 

296. 

297. 

298. 

299. 

300. 

301. 

302. 

303. 

304. 

305. 

306. 

307. 

308. 

309. 

310. 

311. 

312. 

313. 

314. 

315. 

316. 

317. 

318. 

319. 

320. 

321. 

322. 


The Haunted House. . 
When the Ship Comes 

Home 

One False, both Fair. . 

Mudfog Papers 

My Novel, by Bulwer- 

Lytton. 3 parts 

Conquest of Granada ... 
Sketches by Boz ...... *20 i 

A Christmas Carol .... .15 

lone Stewart, Linton . . .20 
Harold, Lytton, Parti .15 

Do., Part II .15 ! 

Dora Thorne 20 j 

Maid of Athens 20 j 

The Conquest of Spain .10 

Fitzboodle Papers 30 ! 

Bracebridge Hall .20 

The Uncommercial I 

Traveler .20 

Roundabout Papers. . . .20 
Rossmoyne, Duchess. .20 j 
A Legend of the Rhine .10 j 

Cox’s Diary 10 j 

Beyond Pardon, *20 

Somebody’s Luggage, 
and Mrs. Lirriper’s 

Lodgings 10 

Godolphm, Lytton 20 

Salmagundi, Irving 20 

Famous Funny Fel- 
lows, Clemens 20 

Irish Sketches .20 

The Battle of Life 10 

Pilgrims of the Rhine .15 
Random Shots, Adeler .20 

Men’s Wives 10 

Mystery of Edwin 
Brood, by Dickens. . . .30 
Reprinted Pieces from 

C. Dickens .20 

Astoria, by W. Irving. .20 
Novels by Eminent 

Hands *10 

Spanish Voyages 20 

No Thoroughfare 10 

Character Sketches... .10 

Christmas Books 20 

A Tour on the Prairies ,10 
Ballads of Thackeray. . .15 
Yellowplush Papers. . . .10 
Life of Mahomet, P't I .15 

Do., Part II... 15 

Sketches and Travels 
in London, Thack’ ray .10 

Life of Goldsmith 20 

Capt. Bonneville 20 

Golden Girls, Alan Muir .20 
English Humorists... .15 
Moorish Chronicles... .10 

Winifred Power 20 

Great Hoggarty Dia- 
mond J” 

Pausanias, Lytton 15 

The New Abelard .... .20 

A Real Queen .20 

q’he Rose and the Rmg .20 
Wolfert’s Roost, Irving .10 
Mark Seaworth 20 



GRAND, SQUARE AND UPRIGE 

PIANOS. 


» 



Superior to all others in Tone, Durability and Workmanshi 
have the endorsement of the leading Artists. First Medal 
Merit and Diploma of Honor at Centennial Exhibition. 

Musical authorities and critics prefer the SOHMER PIAN 
and they are purchased by those possessing refined musical t: 
and appreciating the richest quality of tone and highest perfectw 
generally in a Piano. 


SOHMER & < 50 ., 


MANUKACTURKKS OF 

Grand, Square and Upright Pianos, 

149 to 155 EAST 14th ST., NEW YORK. 






































































* 


















































































































» ■ 
















































. 



























































































































































































































I 















































ft 


' N v 


* N o v 

V c* A 0 

•' ; 






<\V ^ 

AV ^ 





\ v s * * r ~*U ^ N v * V 

v s ^ * c* v 0 

<?• 

v*-. <o 
tf> S 35 




__ /V 7 ^ 2 — ^ 

vv 

E 





. < k v> ,/> •' -..-> t •*• <V v 

-> * -i 

y^' ^ ’ * * \ ' ° * X 4 V ^ A c 0 N c 

V s "* o j'o 


)> »v> 







♦' o i* * ^W* £ 

/& * jAWA. '■_ ,V. * 

^ V - 


-V ^ * 

o. 




0 * 






,0 


s S * * T . C* <Y y * ft 

' ~^A- if ^ 

o jC^BMIWlie^ ^ yf* C ^ 





<fy)^" °* ■* ‘ oNc ' 




s- 

vf <V 


. s •• , °-t- ' a * 0 s' 

V ^LsJ\,% f % T., i> 

C tA — A - 

> '< 1 , ^ w ^<r^ v i ■*> vr* 

^ o> 







° ^ *»• i «^- • 

,* p,o ^ *r*%w** <x} r> o 

^ * • 11* V* V ^ * 3 V 0 5 

> # ‘ \> v 9 r * Y *° 

a'O r 

<!o c .0 ■* 



,c, </> 

, V ^-V O 

✓ ^ o* ^ ^ 3 ^ 

.« 3 ° . 0 » , %/•. v» A*' oNc <• 











. ' v V 
.*'■ o 




0 . ,/> 
O </ 



^ 0 * X A ^ * W^ s *s V* ^ 

•* °o # C 0 N e «■ '"**, * -<y N* ' 1 * * * 

* j\ * * *Lr 0 ,/VfcZ, ^ 

5V = ■?,;»*%' : 'fA;- V: - 


»•>■'* ,v 


\° x° -t; 


o’ a 0 J ^ 

a -'x r\ r» 

S ^ <x,v 


*o V 

\ : > 0 -^ v>-' 

^ k'^T.’V 9 4 .*? 

V N s S * * / A ; C‘ ’ . 9 V * * * 0 / > 

-Cft 



,<A y <$. -» ^1 pf « ,< 

'V yfr * *, • * v> 

N s°> ^ 

0 N c ^ * * S ^ | 

’iv* ^ „- 

»H °*. 



0 _ AV c u « <£. O k , * 1 

O * l> l> r^Ts^. s -Sfj V 



• V* 




- V? ^ 

<A < r ^ / ^ > ’ , 0 * ^ ' 

A ^ c“ N S '% ** ^ V * v 1 * « r - 


0 # X 


a\ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


